Sorry, your browser does not support JavaScript!
UpasanaYoga.org
योग-सूत्राणि
Yoga Sūtras

English translation and commentary by A.K. Aruna

Last Selected:
⇦ Return Clicking ✅ below updates Last Selected.
(If Browser retains data between sessions)

Prayers Contents Foreword Preface Introduction 1. Samādhi - Contemplation 2. Sādhana - Preparation 3. Vibhūti - Accomplishments 4. Kaivalya - Freedom Prayers Appendixes Index YS-Sources Yoga-Reader

Format and vṛtti (clarifying commentary) by A.K. Aruna, 2018 ver.8.0: UpasanaYoga. English translation and commentary taken from the author's book Patanjali Yoga Sutras: Translation and Commentary in the Light of Vedanta Scriptures available on Amazon and other online outlets. If this text is downloaded, it requires installed Devanāgarī Siddhanta1.ttf font, downloadable from UpasanaYoga. If run from UpasanaYoga website, it alternatively can use online Web Font. Any Devanāgarī in parentheses () is an alternate reading of text in Red. Chanting is from The Sanskrit Channel.
The top button "Collapse all panels" contracts the view in which individual items can be re-expanded, or again the top button "Restore all panels" reloads page to original view. I have converted the links in Red that previously displayed when cursor hovers. Now these links have been converted into buttons with drop down panels – hopefully much more assessable and readable especially on tablets and cell phones. This red button link style has been used for my [AKA Vṛtti] to show its translation. The red button link style is also used for footnotes, which for those with translations of Sanskrit verses now including their Devanagari, instead of those previously placed the end of each sūtra. An "Expand/Collapse all Footnotes" button will open all the footnotes at once, for those who find that useful. They are all shaded so they don't confuse with the commentary text. As of now, Google's Chrome browser works fast and fully. Distant future versions of HTML language or JQuery libraries also may stop supporting some of the features employed here.

by A.K. Aruna
First Print Mar 2012 (ISBN 978-0-9818640-7-5)
First Update to HTML Jan 2018 with Creative Commons International License:
This work is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International License. To view a copy of this license, click the following logo:
Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International License

🔗 

ओं, स॒ ह ना॑व् अवतु। स॒ ह नौ॑ भुनक्तु। स॒ह वी॒र्यं॑ करवावहै। ते॒ज॒स्विना॒व् अधी॑तम् अस्तु॒ मा वि॑द्विषा॒वहै᳚। ओं शान्तिः॒ शान्तिः॒ शान्तिः॑॥
Om; tad, ha, asmad, √av. Tad, ha, asmad, √bhuj. Saha, vīrya, √kṛ. Tejasvin, adhīta, √as, mā, vi-√dviṣ. Om, śānti, śānti, śānti.
सः ह नै अवतु। सः ह नौ भुनक्तु। सह वीर्यं करवावहै। तेजस्विनौ [तेजस्विनोः आवयोः] अधीतं अस्तु [अथवा, नौ अधीतं तेजस्वि अस्तु]। मा विद्विषावहै। ओम् शान्तिः शान्तिः शान्तिः॥


योगेन चित्तस्य पदेन वाचां मलं शरीरस्य च वैद्यकेन।
योऽपाकरोत् तं प्रवरं मुनीनां पतञ्जलिं प्राञ्जलिर् आनतोऽस्मि॥

yoga, citta, pada, vācā, mala, śarīra, ca, vaidyaka;
yad, apa-ā-√kṛ, tad, pravara, munin, patañjali, prāñjali, ānata, √as.

I bow with hands folded to Patañjali, the best of sages who removes the impurity of the mind by his Yoga[-sūtras], of speech by his words [his grammar commentary called Mahā-bhāṣya], and of the body by his science of medicine [called Caraka-pratisaṃskṛta].
[अहं] प्राञ्जलिः [पुरतस्-अञ्जलिः] तं मुनीनां प्रवरं पतञ्जलिं [नाम] आनतः अस्मि [नमस्-करोमि], यः मलं [क्लेशं] अपाकरोत् [अपहरेत्] चित्तस्य [अन्तःकरणस्य] योगेन [योग-सूत्र-शासनेन], वाचां पदेन [महा-भाष्य-व्याकरणेन, शरीरस्य वैद्यकेन [चरक-प्रतिसंस्कृत-चिकित्सया] च॥

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)


Foreword ……

Preface ……

Introduction ……


Chapter 1 On Contemplation ……

Introducing Yoga ……

General Definition of Yoga ……

The Goal of Yoga ……

What is the Essential Nature of Oneself ……

What is the Ego ……

How can Logic Help ……

How do I Know I am Simply the Witness ……

Life and Death ……

The 24/7 Reality ……

What is the Benefit ……

Patañjali Indicates This Witness Reality ……

Identification with Thought ……

The Nature of Thoughts ……

Repetition and Non-attachment ……

Two Forms of Contemplation ……

Contemplation on the Lord ……

The Nature of the Lord ……

Consciousness ……

Distractions of the Mind ……

The Removal of Distractions ……

Clarity of Mind ……

Four Forms of Contemplation With Seed ……

Clarity and Knowledge ……

Contemplation Free of Seed ……


Chapter 2 On Preparation ……

Yoga in Regard to Action ……

The Five Afflictions ……

The Affliction of Ignorance ……

The Affliction of I-notion ……

The Afflictions of Attachment and Aversion ……

The Affliction of Fear of Death ……

Giving Up Afflictions ……

Karma-Storage From the Afflictions ……

Giving Up Sorrow ……

Mutual Identification of Seer and Seen ……

The Nature of the Seen ……

The Nature of the Seer ……

The Seen’s Relation to the Seer ……

Cause and Removal of Mutual Identification ……

The Eight Limbs of Yoga ……

1. The Avoidances ……

2. The Observances ……

Nurturing the Avoidances and Observances ……

The Components of the Avoidances ……

The Components of the Observances ……

3. The Sitting Posture ……

4. Controlling of Breath ……

5. Withdrawal of the Senses ……


Chapter 3 On Accomplishments ……

6. Restraining Thoughts ……

The Contemplation Process ……

7. Retaining Thoughts ……

8. Contemplation ……

Uniting (Saṃyama) of the Last Three Limbs ……

Which are the Internal Limbs of Yoga? ……

Change Regarding Contemplation ……

Change Regarding All Objects ……

Accomplishments and Superpowers – Siddhis ……

Saṃyama on Change ……

Saṃyamas on the Seen and on the Seer ……

The Final Accomplishment is Freedom ……

Liberating Knowledge – Kaivalya ……


Chapter 4 On Freedom ……

Causes of the Accomplishments ……

Action and the Mind ……

The Past and Future and the Present ……

Oneness Determines Entities ……

Contemplations from Science ……

Distinction of Objects from Thoughts ……

Distinction of Thoughts from Self ……

Knowledge as Freedom ……


Appendix: Index of Quotation Sources to Sūtra Citations ……

Appendix: The Nature of the Mind ……

Appendix: Suggested Steps in Contemplation ……

Appendix: Suggested Sutra Selections for Courses ……

Appendix: Alphabet ……


Bibliography ……

Index ……

About the Author ……


SWAMI DAYANANDA SARASWATI
Arsha Vidya Gurukulam, Anaikatti, Coimbatore
<-- Click to see

The Patañjali Yoga Sūtras cannot be looked upon as a book on the philosophy of Seśvara Sāṅkhya. Ādi Śaṅkara, in his Brahmasūtrabhāṣya, had discussed the Yoga School quoting certain sūtras, which are not found in Patañjali’s book. Perhaps the Patañjali Yoga Sūtras formed a part of the syllabus for the people given to traditional Vedanta study. Even today, jijñāsus, who study at Kailash Ashram, study the Patañjali Yoga Sūtras, with various Sanskrit commentaries.

I am very happy that Sri Aruna, one of my senior students, is presenting the Patañjali Yoga Sūtras with a commentary in keeping with the Vedanta tradition. Very good in Sanskrit, Aruna’s word for word translation of the meaning of the sūtras does not leave anything to be desired. With his commentary, the overall vision of Patañjali comes alive.

There are no authentic books in circulation on this important work on Yoga discipline. Aruna’s book meets with the need in admirable measure. I congratulate him for his contribution to the pursuit of spiritual discipline.

Sw. Dayananda
18/8/2013

Yoga has been practiced for thousands of years by Indian spiritual seekers and saints. Yet, let us ask: Is there a single yoga text that specifically points out what those seekers and saints were actually contemplating in their yoga spiritual practice?

Most modern yoga texts, in English, are about āsanas – postures for physical strengthening, relaxation, stretching, and physical therapy. A few also highlight the benefits of these āsanas for relieving stress. Some introduce a little meditation, bringing in some spiritual words, such as love, bliss, and divine. Some present an āsana practice that includes a life of yoga off the mat. They may explain these spiritual ideas and life styles with a few examples. There is often not enough depth unfoldment of these ideas and their expressions into a life style. Sometimes they encourage the readers to imagine their own explanations – as if the seekers already know the answers they are seeking.

These texts do not fluently connect the student to the contemplative spiritual scriptures of India, for which India is so well known. In this way, these yoga texts are unlikely to bring the student to a clear sense of a broad, integrated, in-depth spiritual grounding that a full yoga encompasses.

There is one ancient yoga text, though, that is held to be the philosophical and contemplative basis of yoga. That text is the Yoga Sūtras by Patañjali. Its study has come to be called Rāja Yoga, meaning the Royal Yoga. It is a teaching of yoga appropriate for a king (rājan) learned in scripture yet not a renunciate, such as that taught to King Janaka by Yājña-valkya in the Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Upaniṣad scripture and to Prince Arjuna by Lord Kṛṣṇa in the Bhagavad Gītā. We would think, then, that the commentaries and literature surrounding the Yoga Sūtras would be steeped in the scriptures of India – but that is not the case.

The earliest extant and most influential Sanskrit commentary (bhāṣya) is by a man named Vyāsa. He does not quote any scripture. Instead, he sprinkles in his commentary a few quotes from certain sages, culled mostly from the Mahā-Bhārata epic. The innumerable English translations and commentaries of these sūtras appear to only convey the spirituality, or lack thereof, of their many and varied authors. Even the scriptural leaning versions, such as the one by Bangali Baba (The Yogasutra of Patanjali: With the Commentary of Vyasa) and the one jointly by Swami Prabhavananda and Christopher Isherwood (How to Know God: The Yoga Aphorisms of Patanjali), sparingly connect the sūtras to specific scriptures. The effort here is to rectify this void.

There is also the purpose here to directly connect the many students and teachers of the Indian scriptures to the vast yoga community, and the yoga practitioners and teachers to the spiritual community.

Previously, the gulf between the two has been bridged only by the individual student or teacher on their own. Much of that effort has been through connecting a few of the topics in yoga to anecdotal stories of spiritual saints. Most of these stories revolve around the modern founders or practitioners of the teacher’s lineage. These stories are more of a devotee’s praise than a real grounding in a full yoga tradition dating back thousands of years.

The effort here is to formally bridge these two communities in all their myriad lineages with a common language and understanding. This is done through mapping the terminologies, sūtras (aphorisms), and topics of the Yoga Sūtras directly to the highly revered scriptures of India – namely, the Upaniṣads and the Bhagavad Gītā.

As such, this text is helpful both to spiritual students seeking expanded and specific guidance, and to various teachers researching technical tools to bridge the apparent gap between yoga and the Indian scriptures.

Coming from the United States, a different culture from yoga’s flowering ground, I was carefully and artfully introduced to these scriptures in 1976 by Pujya Swami Dayananda Saraswati (Aug 15, 1930 to Sept 23, 2015). In India, I lived in the teacher’s family (guru-kula) with over sixty other students for two and a half years.

The classes were five a day, six days a week. We studied Sanskrit; chanting; meditation; the Bhagavad Gītā with Śaṅkara’s commentary; several introductory Vedānta texts, such as Tattva-Bodha and Ātma-Bodha; the Upaniṣad scriptures Kena, Praśna, Īśāvāsya, Muṇḍaka, and portions of Chāndogya and Bṛhad-āraṇyaka; plus the three Upaniṣads Kaṭha, Māṇḍūkya with Kārika, and Taittirīya complete with Śaṇkara’s commentaries. Finally, we studied the four initial Vedānta Sūtras with Śaṅkara’s commentary – called the Catur-Śruti. We each have continued to study these and other texts as needed after our course. Many such long and short term courses have been conducted by Swami Dayananda Saraswati and by his students.

For ten years starting at the beginning of 2000, I had created a five volume set of texts called The Aruna Sanskrit Language Series in addition of this work. The series, in a self-teaching format, unfolds the grammar of Sanskrit along with the Bhagavad Gītā. The series includes a grammar book and a lesson book, plus a dictionary, a translation, and a grammatical analysis of all the verses of the Bhagavad Gītā. Since then I have been creating a free browser enabled collection of over forty Vedānta texts (including this text) plus several Sanskrit reference dictionaries in their original Sanskrit, simplified for interested beginning and advanced students.

But it is not these forty plus years that show in these pages. It is the thousands of years of continuous tradition that preserved and elaborated on this deep, scriptural teaching tradition.

Long ago I had first read the Yoga Sūtras translated with Vyāsa’s commentary by Bengali Baba. I did not then see how they could properly fit with Vedānta scripture. Much later I wanted to bring the yoga of Vedānta to a wider audience. I envisioned the Yoga Sūtras as an introductory vehicle.

Pujya Swami Dayananda Saraswati and Swami Tattvavidananda had recently given talks on sections of the Yoga Sūtras. Listening to them, I saw the possibility of a way to link the Yoga Sūtras to the yoga of Vedānta.

Still, there are many sūtras, including the section in chapter three dealing with yoga superpowers, that on first glance appear incompatible with Vedānta scripture. And what about the dualist philosophy so often associated with these sūtras?

Setting aside my doubts, I started from the sūtras’ beginning and, to my surprise I have to admit, found the way to reconcile each sūtra to Vedānta. In the process, I found the available traditional commentaries to be of little use. None of them made an adequate attempt to base the sūtras on scripture. In fact, they took them in a different direction towards a later developing dualist philosophy called Sāṅkhya.

Instead, I took the topics and individual words that Patañjali employed and quite easily found their source and contextual development in Vedānta scripture that preceded these sūtras. I was surprised at the ease of this process, since this had not been thoroughly attempted in print before, to my knowledge.

It is not easy to translate and comment on the Yoga Sūtras, while at the same time introduce and explain Vedānta scripture in one text. The reader has to bear with this apparent juggling process, but should quickly see the benefit. That benefit is not just understanding a traditional yoga text in a new way; it is seeing these Yoga Sūtras in a truly enlightening way as they were intended. It connects yoga back to its true beginning and purpose which the early seekers and saints embraced in their contemplations.

To convey this enlightening teaching to its current students, these sūtras are explained in clear contemporary language. The explanations are in keeping with our current culture and sciences – the same as was done in Patañjali’s time. As it was then, this work is presented as a current spiritual non-fiction meant for enlightenment.

I wish here to give adoration to my teacher, Swami Dayananda Saraswati, who has faithfully passing on this knowledge-tradition, renewing and reinvigorating it into the 21st century. I also wish to thank John Warne for editing the initial draft of this work. John has studied Sanskrit and Vedānta, and has completed one of these long term courses. He corrected and questioned many of my expressions, as well as appropriately replaced or added many paragraphs where needed. Any faults or omissions in this text, though, are due to the rawness of my submitted material.

Yoga is popular in the West as physical exercise, a centering technique, and physical therapy. In India, though, it is much better known as a spiritual discipline that connects the individual with the divine.

As a spiritual discipline, it spans two popular traditions – Yoga and Vedānta.

Vedānta is a non-dualist tradition – the reality basis of everything including oneself is only one, not many. Its authority is the Upaniṣads (abbreviated in this commentary as Up.), Bhagavad Gītā (Bh. Gītā), and the Vedānta Sūtras. Within Vedānta, yoga (in this commentary, yoga without capitalization refers to a characterization of useful practices within Vedānta) is presented as karma-yoga and as jñāna-yoga. Karma-yoga means spiritual discipline related to life’s activities (karma). Jñāna-yoga relates to spiritual knowledge (jñāna) and its specific disciplines, such as the practice of renunciation, sannyāsa.

Yoga (in this commentary, Yoga with capitalization refers to the separate tradition or school of thought called Yoga) is a dualist tradition – there is no one reality basis of everything. Its authority includes these Yoga Sūtras. Yoga is presented as kriyā-yoga and samādhi. Kriyā-yoga is essentially the same as karma-yoga. Samādhi is the disciple of pursuing knowledge (jñāna) through contemplation. Here, samādhi may be pursued for scientific as well as spiritual knowledge. The differences in the world are real, so pursuing knowledge of these differences involves contemplating these subtle differences.

Although it will be argued here that there need be no essential separation between these two traditions, assuming the innate dualist understanding is preliminary to and can mature into a non-dual knowledge, an interesting twist has happened. The Yoga Sūtras, which are amenable to either tradition, have been subsumed by a pervasive early commentary that interprets the sūtras only through Sāṅkhya, a dualist scientific philosophy. This stops the disciplines in Yoga from further questioning the reasons one believes in differences being ultimately real. Limiting samādhi (contemplation) to reaffirming Sāṅkhya’s dualist perspective, this samādhi becomes disconnected from the samādhi championed in the Upaniṣads and the Bhagavad Gītā that pursue knowledge to its ultimate conclusion in the one unifying reality of everything including oneself.

As a result, almost no one, even inside Vedānta, has since seen these Yoga Sūtras as easily being within the Vedānta tradition. These sūtras are taken as Sāṅkhya Yoga, instead of as Vedānta Yoga.

The reason for this is likely that Vedānta already has its own sūtras, the Vedānta Sūtras. Sūtras are typically written early within a tradition to outline and capture the essence of an oral tradition into writing. These succinct outlines are easily memorized and passed down through the various teaching lineages. Those sūtras help maintain the accurate continuity of their teaching traditions through succeeding generations. Each tradition has one set of sūtras to encapsulate its teaching. Vedānta has its Vedānta Sūtras, while Yoga lays claim to these Yoga Sūtras of Patañjali. Therefore, Vedānta does not need the Yoga Sūtras to be complete.

But Yoga needs Vedānta Yoga to really flower for the spiritual seeker. The commentary here will thus show that, when it comes to spiritual knowledge, it is much more meaningful to take the original Yoga Sūtras as Vedānta Yoga. This will be the more fulfilling approach to these sūtras for yoga spiritual seekers, who are the intended audience for this unique commentary.

The sāṅkhya and Sāṅkhya

It should first be noted that there is a difference between the Sanskrit word sāṅkhya and the name Sāṅkhya which applies to a particular philosophical doctrine. The word sāṅkhya (literally, related to reckoning or grouping, related to explaining – saṅkhyā) means enumeration or knowledge.

As knowledge, the term sāṅkhya is used in the epic Mahā-Bhārata and in the Bhagavad Gītā as the sacred knowledge handed down from the scriptures. In the second chapter of the Bhagavad Gītā, where Kṛṣṇa’s teaching starts (verses 2.11 through 38, said therein to be dealing with ‘sāṅkhya’) the quotations, paraphrases, and teachings are directly from the Upaniṣads. Hence, the rest of the mantras in those non-dual Upaniṣads, in particular the
:: Most of Bh. Gītā verses 2.11 through 2.38 are borrowed from or can be easily seen as based upon the Kaṭha Up.:
B.G. 2.11 with K.U. 1.2.22, 2.1.4 & 5;
B.G. 2.12 with K.U. 2.1.13 & 2.2.8;
B.G. 2.13 with K.U. 2.2.7;
B.G. 2.14 with K.U. 2.3.6;
B.G. 2.15 with K.U. 2.3.8;
B.G. 2.16 with K.U. 2.3.13;
B.G. 2.17 with K.U. 2.1.2;
B.G. 2.18 with K.U. 1.2.22;
B.G. 2.19 from K.U. 1.2.19;
B.G. 2.20 from K.U. 1.2.18;
B.G. 2.21–25 with K.U. 1.2.18 & 19;
B.G. 2.28 with K.U. 1.2.5 & 6;
B.G. 2.29 with K.U. 1.2.7;
B.G. 2.30 with K.U. 1.2.22; and
B.G. 2.38 with K.U. 1.2.14 & 2.3.18 ::
, cannot be disconnected from what is called sāṅkhya in the Bhagavad Gītā.

Another use of the word sāṅkhya found in the Mahā-Bhārata epic was for describing a teaching that employs a methodology (prakriyā) of enumerating components or aspects (tattvas) of the universe, including the nascent scientific thinking that was developing.

With regard to Vedānta, there are various teaching methodologies (prakriyās). First, there is the primary prakriyā of imposition-sublation (adhyāropa-apavāda). This prakriyā, meant for unfolding the non-duality unique to Advaita Vedānta, describes the entire universe, including what the individual thinks he or she is, as consisting of two or more categories of everything. It then dismisses these categories as being absolutely real.

This adhyāropa-apavāda prakriyā consists of two components – adhyāropa (imposition) of a duality enumeration of the universe and its apavāda (sublation). By sublation (or subration) is meant its dismissal as being absolutely real and its subordination to a broader, overarching truth.

Each of these two components is presented through one of several other prakriyās.

Adhyāropa (imposition) involves any of the prakriyās of seer-seen (dṛk-dṛśya), effect-cause (kārya-kāraṇa), three states of experience (avasthā-traya), the five embodiments (pañca-kośa), and so on. These prakriyās involve enumerating (sāṅkhya).

Apavāda (sublation) involves the prakriyā of negation (neti-neti), where the authority of the scripture is invoked by asserting, “It (the truth) is not this or that (enumeration).” It also involves the prakriyā of co-presence–co-absence (anvaya-vyatireka), where logic is employed to support the sublation claims.

We thus find the scriptures presenting the entire universe by enumerating the dualities of seer-seen, cause-effect, subtle-gross, and eater-eaten; the trio of the three worlds (heavens, atmosphere, and earth), three guṇas, three states of experiences (waking, dream, and deep sleep), and the three gross elements (red, white, and black, that is, fire, water, and earth in Chāndogya-Upaniṣad 6.4.5); the five elements (space, air, fire, water, and earth); the seven worlds, the seven tattvas or categories (objects, senses, mind, intellect, cosmic mind, unmanifest, and the puruṣa or cosmic person in Kaṭha-Upaniṣad 3.10-11); the fourteen worlds; etcetera. Any one of these presentations can be called a sāṅkhya.

The Yoga Sūtras through Sāṅkhya

With this scriptural background of employing enumerations to encompass the entire universe, many later philosophies and even science itself evolved. Indeed, the atheist philosophy called Sāṅkhya, which elaborated on the gross-subtle, guṇas, elements, and tattvas (principles) to explain the universe, was considered around the start of the first millennium in India to be the science of the universe. Many of the arts, such as medicine, and other traditions, such as Buddhism and Vedānta, adopted in part or whole Sāṅkhya’s explanations of, or at least its approach to, the science of things.

When this Yoga Sūtras text is interpreted from the background of the atheist philosophy of Sāṅkhya, it is taken as Sāṅkhya Yoga, an infusion of the theist tendencies of the majority of the Indian populous with the atheist philosophy and science of Sāṅkhya. This theist version of Sāṅkhya defines a world outlook through duality and the science of Sāṅkhya, while accepting a God as a separate, inactive participant in the world. Contemplation (samādhi) is the method to perfect this outlook in one’s life.

The Yoga Sūtras through sāṅkhya

In this commentary, we will instead take these same sūtras from the background of the theist scriptures – with their nascent science of enumeration (sāṅkhya) and their non-dual vision of everything, and with contemplation as its method to help assimilate this non-dual vision.

Vedānta, Sāṅkhya, and Yoga Sūtras

Vedānta non-dualism says that the basis of all reality is the one brahman (literally, the big and the reality, and often capitalized as if it is a name for reality). This reality is also indicated by the terms: Īśvara (literally, the ruler, and commonly meaning the Lord), puruṣa (literally, the one who pervades, and commonly meaning the Cosmic Person), or ātman (literally, the mover, pervader or devourer, and commonly meaning the self).

I, the ātman, am in fact the reality of the universe, not other than the Lord. The diverse universe, in fact, simply appears to exist within this singular reality. In this perspective all duality – all otherness and separation – is sub-rated as only existing as if and thus is not the absolute truth. This non-dualist perspective is uniquely Eastern.

Sāṅkhya dualism, on the other hand, claims that the basis of all reality is dual – more than one absolutely existing entity. The puruṣa is the reality of oneself, and there are countless puruṣas, with the Lord being one of them. Everything else is prakṛti or pradhāna (Nature). I, the puruṣa, am not any of the objects of the world. None of the objects and none of the other puruṣas are me. Duality – otherness and separation – is real. This dualist perspective is universally common, East and West, spiritual or not.

People in yoga love to read the Bhagavad Gītā for its sweeping non-dualist vision, whereas, they read the Yoga Sūtras, because, as its title suggests, it should be the philosophy of yoga. Some people gloss over the difference of non-duality from duality as not being important to them.

The majority of people, at least in the West, are by nurture dualist. They reconcile the non-dual Bhagavad Gītā to dualism by taking it as poetry, not as a spiritual science. Whereas, the people who wish to pursue non-dualism, consciously or not, reconcile for their spiritual needs the apparently dualist Yoga Sūtras to the Bhagavad Gītā by taking the sūtras to be aiming at an implicit mystical goal of non-duality – a samādhi in which differences temporarily disappear.

This commentary cuts through this felt dilemma – finally bringing yoga back home to its scriptural fountainhead, where the truth to be contemplated within yoga is clearly laid out and well reasoned, not mystical.

The Format

This commentary will connect over two hundred and fifty quotations from the Vedas, Upaniṣads, and the Bhagavad Gītā to these Yoga Sūtras. The student is encouraged to read the footnotes since these are where the quotations are given. The footnotes also serve to interconnect related Yoga Sūtras, so the text can be better understood as a consistent, integrated teaching, and not as a series of disconnected notions. If you do not investigate these footnotes and their quotations, half the purpose of this text will not be fulfilled.

These quotations are not meant to exhaust all the possible connections of these sūtras to the scriptures, but to help start this process for students and teachers. The student and the teacher are encouraged to investigate these quotations in their sources to see their contexts and surrounding teachings. Each quotation is always taken appropriately from its context.

The text is laid out in sūtra order. All the Yoga Sūtras are given. The original sūtra in Devanāgarī script is followed by its transliteration and English translation. Finally, within square brackets, is a word-for-word vocabulary, followed by a Sanskrit and English commentary as required.

The vocabulary is ordered the same as the English in the sūtra translation. This will make it easy to match the vocabulary with the translation. If the same word is repeated in the sūtra, the vocabulary will repeat it too. Except for the pronouns, typically, the uninflected forms of the vocabulary are shown, while the following sūtra translation will additionally show the inbuilt inflected syntax of the prepositions and other parts of speech required to expand the Sanskrit vocabulary into an English sentence. By stripping the inflection from the Sanskrit words of the sūtra, this section will display the words as true vocabulary items. Compound words are either shown together with hyphenation or, more often, separately as individual vocabulary items, depending on the transparency of the relationship between the component words of the compound. The translation of each vocabulary item is contextual within the sūtra and sometimes shows an adjective as a verb. There may be other parts of speech conversions as well, because of this adopted convention of exactly matching the vocabulary to how they are rendered in a flowing English sentence.

The following literal sūtra translation (and the vocabulary) is shown in bold font. Embedded in each sūtra translation (and some of the vocabulary) are additional words in non-bold font that explain or expand the sense of the sūtra, or connect the topic to other sūtras. After reading the entire translation, try reading just the bold words that are the bare words of the sūtra.

The footnotes (shown by hovering over the text with a pointer device, such as a mouse) containing the scriptural quotations are given in English, with their full Sanskrit provided immediately after each sūtra commentary. The Sanskrit of these quotations have most of their words separated (i.e., their sandhis broken) to perhaps help many who are new to Sanskrit Devanagari writing. Each of these quotations has been freshly translated by the author. To help understand these bare quotes within their scriptural context, the author has occasionally added contextual explanations in square brackets.

Following each sūtra is a vṛtti (clarifying commentary in Sanskrit) by A.K. Aruna. After that is the English commentary taken from the same author's book Patanjali Yoga Sutras: Translation and Commentary in the Light of Vedanta Scriptures available on Amazon and other online outlets. At the end of each sūtra are the footnotes in Sanskrit that are referenced in the commentary.

The transliteration of Sanskrit words is here in keeping with the International Alphabet of Sanskrit Transliteration (IAST) scheme (see Appendix: Alphabet), for example, sūtra, instead of sutra. Additionally, individual Sanskrit words are shown in the form one would find them in a Sanskrit dictionary, for example, ātman (आत्मन् for self), yogin (योगिन् for yogi), and draṣṭṛ (द्रष्टृ for seer), instead of their commonly found nominative inflected forms – ātmā, yogī, and draṣṭā, respectively. There is one exception, though. The Sanskrit word karman is shown as karma, because it is more a part of our international vocabulary.

For those teachers who wish to use this version of the Yoga Sūtras to give classes, a suggestion on groups of sūtras for specific topics is available (see Appendix: Courses).

At the end of these sūtras are various appendices:
Appendix - Index of Quotation Sources to Sūtra Citations to find where source texts are cited in these sūtras,
Appendix - Nature of the Mind to describe the nature of the mind in this teaching tradition,
Appendix - Suggested Steps in Contemplation to summarize a typical contemplation session in keeping with Patañjali,
Appendix - Suggested Sūtra Selections for Courses for teachers, and
Appendix - Alphabet to assist with pronunciation of Sanskrit words,

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)

Contemplation

s.01 s.02 s.03 s.04 s.05 s.06 s.07 s.08 s.09 s.10 s.11 s.12 s.13 s.14 s.15 s.16 s.17 s.18 s.19 s.20 s.21 s.22 s.23 s.24 s.25 s.26 s.27 s.28 s.29 s.30 s.31 s.32 s.33 s.34 s.35 s.36 s.37 s.38 s.39 s.40 s.41 s.42 s.43 s.44 s.45 s.46 s.47 s.48 s.49 s.50 s.51

 
Next→
[
:: ‘अथ इति अयम् अधिकार-अर्थः (=आरम्भ-अर्थः)’ “This use of the word ‘atha’ has the sense of the beginning (adhikāra) of a text.” (Vyāsa’s Pātañjali Yoga Sūtrāṇi Bhāṣya 1.1) ::
– now; anuśāsana – traditional teaching; yoga – the means.]

योग-सूत्राणां विषयः मूल-प्रमाणं च उक्ते – अथ आरम्भ-अर्थे, मङ्गल-अर्थे च अथ इति, योग-अनुशासनं योगस्य श्रुति-अनुरूप-आगम-प्रमाण-शासनम् (YS.1.7)॥ –
The subject (viṣaya) and the fundamental authority (pramāṇa) of the Yoga Sutras are stated as follows – 'Atha' is used to signify the beginning and auspiciousness. Yoga is a discipline that is in accordance with the authority of Śruti (scriptures) and Āgama (traditions) (YS.1.7).

In the spiritual literature of India, the ultimate human goal is called
:: ‘अ-विद्या-काम-कर्म-उपादान-हेतु-निवृत्तौ स्व-आत्मनि अवस्थानं मोक्षः इति’ “‘Mokṣa (freedom)’ is remaining in one’s own self, once there is the removal of the cause for the arising of [saṃsāra in the form of] ignorance (a-vidyā) [which is the cause of], desire (kāma) [which is the cause of], action and its results (karma) [in order to placate the felt sense of lack due to ignorance of the self as full and complete].” (Taittirīya Up. Sāṅkara Bhāṣya introduction) ::
or kaivalya. This goal is freedom without any qualification, complete freedom in and of itself – encompassing everything in one’s universe in every way.

Every small goal in life finds its complete fulfillment in the attainment of this freedom
:: ‘सुखम् आत्यन्तिकं यत् तद् बुद्धि-ग्राह्यम् अतीन्द्रियम्। वेत्ति यत्र न च एव अयं स्थितः चलति तत्त्वतः॥’ “When one knows that same limitless sukha (fulfillment that is the nature of the self, of ātman) – which is to be grasped by the intellect, [yet] is not within the scope of the senses – and abiding [there in the sukha], never moving away from this truth [i.e., reality],” ‘यं लब्ध्वा च अपरं लाभं मन्यते न अधिकं ततः। यस्मिन् स्थितः न दुःखेन गुरुणा अपि विचाल्यते॥’ “…having gained that which one knows is not bettered by another gain, and abiding in which [reality] one would not be affected – even by great pain” ‘तं विद्याद् दुःख-संयोग-वियोगं योग-सञ्ज्ञितम्।’ “– one knows that disassociation from association with sorrow to be what is called yoga.” (BhG.6.21–23) ::
. This goal is not tied to any cultural trappings or spiritual beliefs. It is as applicable to any self-conscious creature anywhere in the universe, as it is to everyone on Earth. To recognize this one goal as alone fulfilling all goals takes a certain maturity, but there is no extraordinary qualification to initiate the study of the means which prepares one for this ultimate human pursuit. Yoga is this preparation.

The first word, atha (now), of these sūtras indicates the beginning of the teaching of yoga. ‘Atha’ also traditionally carries with it a sense of auspiciousness by its mere sound, and is used at the beginning of many important undertakings to invoke a grace for completing the undertaking and for the undertaking to be widely beneficial.

Sūtra style texts, such as Patañjali’s, are by design meant to briefly present a summary of a topic that has an already existing body of literature, oral or written, in which the topic is elaborated. To unfold and understand such a condensed text as this we need to rely on a valid means of knowledge (pramāṇa) with regard to this text and this background literature (YS.1.7).

Intuition, a form of imagination (YS.1.9), is not a valid means of knowledge with which to unfold this text. Proper unfoldment instead requires a background in the literature of which this text is a summary and, at the very least, familiarity with the Sanskrit language. Interpretations based on imagination or extrapolations of other translations in languages distanced from the original Sanskrit will be just that – imaginations or even further abstractions from the original text. There are quite a few of these Western clones, with the author’s dash of inventiveness to capture its audience. Being exposed to and keeping in mind the contextual meaning and import of yoga, the student will quickly learn whether or not an author is going to be helpful.

Another approach with a long tradition that has been passed on through the most popular existing Sanskrit commentaries is to interpret these sūtras through a certain literature that came after them. That later literature was primarily the dualist Sāṅkhya work, called the Sāṅkhya-kārika, by Īśvara-kṛṣṇa. This philosophy is basically a mechanical dualism, not unlike the popular philosophies and theologies of today.

When one adopts this dualism as the basic philosophy underlying these sūtras, as was done in the most prominent commentary of this text by an author called Vyāsa (a common name in ancient India, as well as a word that means editor or compiler), then the inherent limitations and divisiveness of that dualist thinking will permeate these sūtras and may lead the student astray.

But what if the dualist thinking one has entertained since a child limits by its nature one’s quest for freedom? If one is still seeking a fully satisfying truth after all these years, why not question these dualist assumptions? If dualism is by its nature divisive and not amenable to a complete freedom, then how could these dualist assumptions allow a text that purports to direct a student to unfettered freedom succeed? What is suggested here is that a dualist approach to this text is unnecessary since there is a better approach which avoids this limited, misleading, and divisive interpretation.

This better approach is more firmly based in tradition and follows an earlier literature that is the authority on the nature of freedom (mokṣa). That earlier literature is also the first to mention
:: The technical term yoga is used in Taittirīya Up., Kaṭha Up., Śvetāśvatara Up., Kaivalya Up., and many others. The activities (tapas), values, and meditations that characterize yoga are indicated in nearly every Upaniṣad from Īśā Up., Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up., Chāndogya Up., onwards ::
and present it as a means for this freedom
:: The technical term yoga is used in Taittirīya Up., Kaṭha Up., Śvetāśvatara Up., Kaivalya Up., and many others. The activities (tapas), values, and meditations that characterize yoga are indicated in nearly every Upaniṣad from Īśā Up., Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up., Chāndogya Up., onwards ::
. That literature is the sacred
:: ‘स्वयं च आत्मा ब्रह्म। तद्-विज्ञानात् अ-विद्या-निवृत्तिः इति, अतः ब्रह्म-विद्या-अर्थ-उपनिषद् आरभ्यते।’ “One’s very self (ātman) is brahman (limitless reality). By clearly knowing that, there is [the mokṣa (freedom) said to be] the removal of [self-] ignorance. The Upaniṣad is undertaken for the sake of this knowledge of brahman (brahma-vidyā).” ‘उपनिषद् इति विद्या उच्यते, तद्-सेविनां गर्भ-जन्म-जरा-आदि-निशातनात्, तद्-अवसादनात् वा, ब्रह्मणः उपनिगमयितृत्वात्; उपनिषण्णं वा अस्यां (विद्यायां) परं श्रेयः॥’ “This knowledge is called ‘Upaniṣad.’ [It is called Upa-ni-ṣad because] for those who are dedicated to that [knowledge], it loosens [the bonds of] entering a womb, birth, old age, etc., [finally] puts an end to that [saṃsāra, the life of unbecoming becoming] by leading [you] back to [yourself as] brahman, and, having done this, is the ultimate goal (śreyas) in this [knowledge].” (Taittirīya Up. Sāṅkara Bhāṣya introduction) ::
that predate these sūtras by many hundreds to perhaps over a thousand years. Though it is more ancient than Sāṅkhya philosophy, it is more sophisticated and is quite new to most people interested in yoga. We will show how this approach to these sūtras, and to everything in your life, can be most enlightening.

The Upaniṣads clearly unfold a vision of a limitless reality, free of division. This vision pierces beyond cultures, environments, and histories. The Upaniṣad scripture is unlike the other scriptures of the world, because it is at once both a scripture and a science – a science of the nature of the spirit and the nature of the universe. It can then apply universally, as a science does, to all humankind – not just to a chosen, converted, or elite group. This science is different from the material sciences, since it is based on scripture (the report from someone who had realized its benefit) and the truth of one’s very nature. Though this spiritual science is not based on the senses, logic from sense perceptions, or doubt based experimentation – nor could it be – it is presented for peer review to the open minded in every society and every generation for the individual to benefit.

This scripture applies to the basic human condition of every individual, whether that person believes it or not, or thinks it otherwise or not. And it allows everyone else to believe or think as they will. The vision of these Upaniṣads, which is assumed here in these sūtras, was transmitted from generation to generation to be available to whoever can approach and assimilate it. No attempt to convert, coerce, or conquer for spreading the word is required. Its own benefit to those individuals who have assimilated it has and will sustain its teaching tradition.

Patañjali himself here indicates that there was this earlier body of literature from which he was summarizing this topic of yoga. The prefix ‘anu-’ in this initial sūtra is often used in the sense of anurūpe, meaning in conformity with. When applied to the term śāsana (teaching), it indicates that this will be the traditional teaching of yoga. This text is then meant to be in conformity with the prior traditional texts that deal with the topic of yoga and the topic of liberation, the goal of yoga.

The prior traditional texts we have available to us today are only the scriptures, in particular the Upaniṣads, that delve deeply into the topic of the nature of reality, as well as the popular literatures that help convey this teaching – called Purāṇas (legends) and Itihāsas (epics) about the lives and teachings of people who were called yogins. By far the most acclaimed teaching on yoga is within the Mahā-bhārata Itihāsa called the Bhagavad Gītā, which deals directly with yoga and its ultimate goal, liberation, as taught by the Lord incarnate, Śrī Kṛṣṇa.

If we keep such texts as the Upaniṣads and the Bhagavad Gītā as our principle reference while unfolding this terse work of Patañjali, then we will know we are understanding Patañjali as he intended – according to the same tradition that was before him, or contemporaneous (perhaps, as imagined by some academics, in the case of the Bhagavad Gītā), but not after him.

When going through these sūtras, please read the commentary and the many imbedded footnotes, since they provide the direct connections of this work with the sacred tradition in which this work is to be reconciled.


 
←PrevNext→
[yoga – means; nirodha – mastery; vṛttis – thoughts; citta – mind.]

अथ योगस्य उपायः अधिकारी च उक्तौ – योगः नाम चित्त-अ-निरोधिनः चित्त-वृत्ति-निरोधः अन्तःकरण-प्रत्यय-रूपाणाम् अ-विद्या-क्लेश-मूल-नाशकः अस्मिता-आदि-क्लेश-कार्य-लयकः चित्त-प्रसाद-साधनेन प्रतिरोधकः च इत्थं-भूत-निरोधः॥ –
“Now, the means (upāya) of Yoga and the qualified practitioner (adhikārī) are stated: Yoga is the cessation of the (unhelpful) thoughts in the mind, the eradication of ignorance and afflictions, the destruction of the root of all suffering (a-vidyā), the removal of the afflictions such as ego (asmitā), and the calming of the mind. The practice leads to the dissolution of obstacles, the pacification of the mind, and the attainment of inner tranquility (prasāda).”

As a general definition of
:: ‘तां योगम् इति मन्यन्ते स्थिराम् इन्द्रिय-धारणाम्’ “They know yoga as that [final goal (parāṃ gatim)] which has a steady control (dhāraṇā) of the organs [of action and knowledge].” (Kaṭha Up. 2.3.11).
‘प्रत्याहारः तथा, ध्यानं, प्राण-आयामः अथ, धारणा, तर्कः च एव समाधिः च षड्-अङ्गः योगः उच्यते’ “The six-fold yoga is said to be withdrawing (pratyāhāra) [the mind and senses], retaining (dhyāna) [the wanted thoughts] in contemplation, controlling the breath (prāṇa-āyāma), restraining (dhāraṇā) [the unwanted thoughts] in contemplation, contemplating with reason (tarka) [in keeping with the scriptures], and contemplation that culminates in assimilation (samādhi).” (Amṛta-nāda Up. 6).
‘(मनसः) समत्वं योग उच्यते’ “Sameness [of attitude (buddhi) towards results – whatever they are] is called yoga.” (Bh. Gītā 2.48).
‘योगः कर्मसु कौशलम् (=कुशल-भावः, यथार्थता)’ “Propriety in actions [i.e., acting within dharma, where the means are as important as the end] is [called] yoga.” (Bh. Gītā 2.50).
‘दुःख-संयोग-वियोगं योग-सञ्ज्ञितम्’ “Disassociation (viyoga) from association with sorrow is what is called yoga.” (Bh. Gītā 6.23) ::
it seems that the word nirodha is best rendered in its most general meaning, as mastery. Later in this text during the discussions on the final stages of yoga in which samādhi (contemplation) is discussed, the term nirodha is employed in a more specific technical sense as the culmination of samādhi. It is then best rendered in that context as assimilation or the dropping of ignorance and its various obstructions to freedom.

The ultimate goal of yoga is to know and be only the unafflicted reality (YS.1.24–25, 2.2–3, 3.49–50 & 54) that is the nature of oneself, the puruṣa (YS.1.3), the person at the core of one’s being (YS.1.29). For this ultimate goal, the immediate goal of yoga is gaining clarity of mind that can eventually assimilate the knowledge of the nature of oneself (YS.1.30–41 & 46–48). This involves sufficient mastery (nirodha) of the thoughts of the mind.

Here, mastery does not mean suppression, rather a cognitive alertness allowing the most appropriate and helpful thinking to arise. This manifests outside the seat of meditation as propriety in action, both mental and physical, based on a clearer ascertainment of what is unconditional freedom. It is the mastery that a mature and informed person would command in a situation, as opposed to that of an immature or uninformed person. And this mastery is not for managing the external situation, but for managing the mind so that it remains a helpful tool, particularly with regard to intelligently seeking one’s ultimate goal in life.

It must clearly be understood that mastery or discipline of the mind is not in any way subjugation or narrow confinement of the mind. That would be confusing physical discipline with mental discipline. The mind is naturally fleeting and fickle, and can jump across the universe in a split
:: ‘चञ्चलं हि मनः कृष्ण प्रमाथि बलवद् दृढम्। तस्य अहं निग्रहं मन्ये वायोः इव सु-दुष्-करम्’ “O Kṛṣṇa, since the mind is very fleeting, distracting, strong and well-rooted, I think that its control is quite as difficult as that of the wind.” (Bh. Gītā 6.34) ::
. The mind cannot be contained like an unruly pet. Mental discipline instead is predominantly conceptual. The only restrictive aspect possible here is in making an informed choice to start and remain in this discipline of knowledge leading to the goal of yoga.

The word nirodha has the dictionary definitions of nāśa (destruction, disappearance), pralaya (resolution of an effect back into its material cause), and/or pratirodha (obstruction – mechanical or otherwise) (Śabda-Stoma-Mahānidhi: A Sanskrit Dictionary by Tārānātha Bhaṭṭāchārya). Hence, in regard to the final goal of yoga, final assimilation would be an appropriate rendering of nirodha, since that final assimilation is a combination of a destruction of an ignorance that binds and a resolution of the effects of that ignorance to their objective cause – both realized through knowledge that frees and its assimilation. However, to reach that goal, the preliminary steps to this assimilation within yoga involve mastery of the mind.

The mastery of the thoughts of the mind here in Patañjali’s yoga is willful direction, via repetition (abhyāsa) (YS.1.12), sitting (āsana) (YS.2.46), and breath control (prāṇāyāma) (YS.2.29). It is cognitive via trust (śraddhā) (YS.1.20), study (svādhyāya) (YS.2.1), contemplation (Īśvara-praṇidhāna) (YS.1.17, 23, 28 & 2.1), assimilation (samādhi) (YS.1.18, 2.3–4), and clear knowledge (prajñā) (YS.1.48, 2.3–4). The last of which, knowledge (prajñā), is the destruction (nāśa) of self-ignorance.

Mastery (nirodha) includes the ability to assimilate and stay on a particular thought or topic that does not hinder (a-kliṣṭa) the goal in yoga as well as the ability to counteract and refrain from a particular thought or topic that hinders (kliṣṭa) (YS.1.5). This includes the ability to resolve (pralaya) cognitively all objects and the mind into the non-dual silence of their reality basis, into oneself. This mastery is a total commitment to a beneficial (śreyas) life of yoga and avoidance of what may be pleasurable (preyas), but not beneficial.

An equally good rendering of the term nirodha in this context is discipline. It involves not just restraint from what is not helpful (by clearly seeing its unhelpfulness from start to finish), but also the pursuit of what is helpful. The ultimate goal of yoga will be further characterized as liberation (kaivalya) (2.23–27), which is also said to be simply self-knowledge (prajñā) (YS.1.48 & 4.26). In this way, the term discipline (anuśāsana) is appropriate to the final goal of yoga, since it indicates the need for the mind to follow a methodology, a means of knowledge (pramāṇa) (YS.1.7), to reach its goal.

As the mind is finally the one that has to discipline itself, then this is self-discipline. No one else can make you study, contemplate, and know. You have to choose to discipline your mind, you have to follow this discipline, and you have to complete this
:: ‘श्रेयः च प्रेयः च मनुष्यम् एतः तौ सम्परीत्य विविनक्ति धीरः। श्रेयः हि धीरः अभि प्रेयसः वृणीते प्रेयः मन्दः योग-क्षेमाद् (शरीर-आदि-उपचय-रक्षणात्) वृणीते’ “The beneficial (śreyas) and the pleasurable (preyas) confront a person. The wise person examines and differentiates the two. The wise person [such as yourself] chooses the beneficial over the pleasurable. The mediocre chooses the pleasurable out of [the desire for] acquiring and protecting [experiences].” (Kaṭha Up. 1.2.2) ::
. This is Patañjali’s yoga.

 
←PrevNext→
[tadā – then; draṣṭṛ
:: ‘न दृष्टेः द्रष्टारं पश्येः।…एषः ते आत्मा सर्व-अन्तरः अतः अन्यद् आर्तं (=विनाशि)’ “You cannot see the witness (draṣṭṛ) of all that is seen. …This which is within all is your self (ātman). What is other than this suffers [destruction].” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 3.4.2).
‘सलिलः (=स्वच्छीभूतः सलिलः इव) एकः द्रष्टा अ-द्वैतः भवति, एषः ब्रह्म-लोकः सम्राट्’ “[Transparent like] water, the witness (draṣṭṛ) is one (eka), without a second (a-dvaita). This is what is viewed as reality (brahman), O King.” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 4.3.32) ::
; avasthāna – remains; sva-rūpa – its own nature.]

अथ योगस्य प्रयोजनम् उक्तं – तदा योग-समाप्तौ, द्रष्टुः दृक्-साक्षि-रूप-परम-पुरुषस्य स्व-रूपे सत्-चित्-आनन्द-स्व-रूपे अवस्थानं कैवल्य-स्थानम् (YS.4.34)॥ –
“Now, the purpose (prayojana) of Yoga is stated: When Yoga is completed, the seer (the one who perceives) resides in the true nature of the Ultimate Puruṣa, who is the witness, and in the state of being (Sat), consciousness (Cit) and bliss (Ānanda), in his own form. This is the state of Kaivalya, the state of absolute liberation (YS.4.34).”

It is critical to note that it is not said that the self goes or returns to some state it does not have now, or had earlier, or might have in the future. This success of yoga is not a becoming, or a return. It is simply remaining as oneself really is and always has been, without the mind’s confusion. We will be told that the mind’s confusion is a self-conception due to ignorance that is imposed upon the nature of the self, which the self does not and cannot have (YS.2.5). You do not have to become something you right now are not.

Clearly the body and the mind can be cleansed, but the belief that there is some cleansing process of the self that yoga achieves is nothing but further confusion about the nature of the self. The self is never sullied, and always is and will be free in every way. The goal of yoga is to eliminate or sublate the false self-conception and enjoy the essential nature of oneself.

What is the Essential Nature of Oneself

The self has the most essential nature of the being that witnesses all thoughts that make up the mind and thereby witnesses all objects of those
:: ‘जाग्रत्-स्वप्न-सुषुप्ति-आदि-प्रपञ्चं यद् प्रकासते। तद् ब्रह्म अहम् इति ज्ञात्वा सर्व-बन्धैः प्रमुच्यते॥’ “The one who lights up this expanse consisting of the waking, dream, and deep sleep, etc. [the heavens, etc.], that reality (brahman) I am. Knowing this, one is free from all binds.”
‘त्रिषु धामसु यद् भोग्यं भोक्ता भोगः च यद् भवेत्। तेभ्यः वि-लक्षणः साक्षी चिन्मात्रः अहं सदा शिवः’ “Different from whatever is the experienced, the experiencer, and the experience, I am the witness, pure awareness, ever calm.” (Kaivalya Up. 1.17,18) ::
. Any other nature the self may appear to have is subsidiary and related to the particular nature or content of these thoughts, or the character of the objects of these thoughts.

One may think one is a doctor or a janitor because of the knowledge and skills one has gained. One may think one is dull or smart because of the nature of one’s intellect. One may think one is sorrowful or happy because of the content of one’s emotive mind. One may think one is a man or a woman because of one’s body. One may think one is a husband or a wife because of the spouse. One may think one is a bachelor or a bachelorette because of the absence of a spouse. One may think one is an employer or an employee because of one’s activity. Whether employed, unemployed, unemployable, or retired, one may think one is rich, poor, or somewhere in-between, because of one’s possessions. One may think one is an American or an Indian, a Westerner or an Easterner, and so on, because of one’s geographic, political, social, or philosophical affiliations.

There is a body of literature that analyses such claims with straight-forward reasoning that reveals a profound vision of the reality of oneself. What that vision is, and how this vision changes one’s understanding of oneself and one’s entire world will be shown in the next few pages. This vision encompasses every way one knows oneself and the world.

In every perception, every experience of the world, one’s self is there as the witness. One does not notice a difference between the witness through the eyes, the witness through the ears, or the witness through any of the other senses. Though the objects being witnessed and the senses differ, one’s self as the witness is not different.

I see. I hear. I taste. In each of these, there am I. I am not two different persons. Each is but me as the witness accommodating every sense perception.

Most times, I am not thinking of myself as a witness. The particular thought of myself as a witness of a perception is itself a thought that comes and goes. Thinking that I am a witness is only occasionally there, such as when I notice myself acting out of character. Whereas, I clearly am there as the witness in every perception, whether I have a thought about that witnessing or not. About this I have no doubt.

As it is for perception, so it is for any thought. For every thought in the mind I am the witness. Without seeing myself as witness, I witness one thought after another. It is not that I witness one thought and someone else witnesses the next thought. Clearly I am the only witness of my thoughts. Even if I am not thinking of myself as the witness of my thoughts, I have no doubt I am there as the witness of every thought.

What is the Ego

Thoughts about myself as a perceiver or as a thinker are occasional. They come and go. When such thoughts come they take the form of defining me as the one who is witnessing the current perception (of objects or emotions) or the current thought. This defining myself limits me in time with respect to such and such perception or thought. These thoughts are what this teaching calls the ego. The ego is not some entity haunting within me. It is simply any thought I have about myself. The ego (ahaṃ-kāra), in other words, is only a type of thought that occurs in the mind. When it is not there, I am not consciously defining, not limiting, myself to what is happening at any particular time.

This understanding of the ego is unique in that every other teaching presents the ego as some entity that is either the hero or villain in life. This is simply not the case. The ego is only a thought that occurs in the mind, like any other thought. When it occurs, I am its witness. When it does not occur, I am still the witness – the witness of the absence of an ego thought, whether as a non-ego thought or as the absence of any thought whatsoever.

Just as I witness each thought, I also witness their absence. At the time of their absence I am not, nor could I be, thinking of myself as the witness of the absence of thought. This would be an obvious contradiction. Nevertheless, I witness the absence of thought. This clearly must happen between every thought this mind entertains. This absence of thought may be for a micro second or hours. When for just a micro second, like the space between movie picture frames, the gaps go mainly unnoticed, yet, like the movie, they are still part of and characterize the experienced, the witnessed.

Extended periods of absence of thought happen each night I enjoy a good sleep. There is no ego thought occurring during this time, defining myself as being asleep, yet upon awakening I know I was asleep. When I am asked if I slept well, I do not need to consult anyone; I myself know if I did or did not. I was the witness of being asleep, even though no thought occurred during that time.

Myself as the witness is not something that comes and goes, whereas perceptions and thoughts do. My notions of myself as a doctor, janitor, smart, sorrowful, happy, married or not – these are thoughts that come and go and are ego thoughts that define me as one thing or another. These defining thoughts seem to limit myself to one status or condition, or another. But the truth is that no perception or thought can define or limit the very witness of them.

Ego thoughts could only truly define a witness if the objects of these thoughts were that witness. Objects of thought are limited to the form of the thought. They are within time and place, from a limited perspective, and couched in the language of the mind expressing as this particular thought.

But the real witness is not the object of an ego thought. It is the witness itself of an ego thought. It transcends, as it were, the ego thought, since it is ever the subject, while all types of thoughts and their absence come and go. As an object in the form of an ego thought, such an object can never be itself the witness I am. Any ego thought then can never truly define, never limit, me who is the witness of all perceptions, all thoughts, and all objects of thought.

The self-assessment that I need to get rid of the ego is itself another ego thought that defines the ego-me as a failure who has to improve, or whose ego thoughts have to go away. This makes little sense, since we need ego thoughts to survive in life. How would I know to feed this body unless I recognize I am the one who is hungry? If, without needing to change my language, I simply understand the expression “I am hungry” as meaning, in truth, “this body is hungry,” then what problem could such a thought be? We need these thoughts to transact in the world.

These ego thoughts, objectively understood, do not need to go away, nor would we want them to all go away. They do not limit me if they are objectively understood as meaning this body is such and such, or this thought is such and such. They do not really limit me if I, in fact, clearly know myself as not these perceptions or thoughts – I am not these objects, but instead am their witness.

How Can Logic Help

Now, how do I know that I am essentially the witness of everything and am not this particular body and mind being witnessed? If I am the latter then I am indeed limited. If I am both the witness and the latter, both this witness and this witnessed entity, then also I am indeed still limited in time and place. I would be the witness conditioned, and thus limited, by the witnessed. So, while it is clear from my perceptions and thinking that the witness is always there, what reason do I have to understand myself as only the witness and not the witnessed?

For this we need to apply correct logic toward our experiences to get at the essential nature of myself. We all have reasons for establishing what is real and what is not real. Those reasons may vary, but the actual establishing of reality itself finally amounts to simply attributing one thing as real and another as not real.

The initial criterion for reality may be stated as: We say one thing is not real and another is when we give up on the prior claim to reality and re-place that reality onto the other. This is essentially the same we do for truth also. That is why this teaching holds that truth and reality are essentially one and the same. Hence its word for reality, ‘satyam,’ is also its word for
:: ‘सत्यं वद। धर्मं चर‘ “Speak satya (truth). Follow dharma (universal justice and local customs).” (Taittirīya Up. 1.11.1).
‘सत्यं च अन्-ऋतं च सत्यम् अभवत्। यद् इदं किञ्च। तत् सत्यम् इति आचक्षते’ “Satya (reality) is [all pairs of opposites and adjectives, such as] satya (real) and an-ṛta (unreal). They say that whatever there is is [only] that satya (reality).” (Taittirīya Up. 2.6.1) ::
. Though the reasons for attributing the truth/reality of a thing may vary, the essential criterion for truth/reality is our attribution of truth/reality upon one thing or another. In other words, it is we who impute truth/reality to things, not that things intrinsically gain or lose some attribute called reality.

An example of this attribution of truth/reality is this teaching literature’s classic example of snake and rope. In twilight, with enough light to see something but not enough to see clearly, one sees what he or she thinks is a snake. Upon closer examination with trust in the help of another who sees clearly, this person discovers it was only a rope. Here, the snake’s claim to reality (notice that it is the person who gave this claim, not the snake) lasted until the person re-placed that reality upon the rope (neither did the rope make this claim). When the rope gained that claim to reality, it did not in fact do anything or intrinsically gain anything. The rope had not lost and then regained its own nature (sva-rūpa). This sva-rūpa (its own nature) always was there – relatively speaking, of course, since the rope was created in time and will decay into something else. Nevertheless, the person now knows that what is there is a rope and it always was a rope, but initially or temporarily the person thought it was a snake.

Another example of this attribution of truth/reality is how for millenniums people in the West thought the Earth was flat, until a thinker and scientist gave good reason to think that the Earth was round. Over time this new understanding became the truth, the reality, of the shape of the Earth for nearly all of us. It is not that the Earth became round; it always was round.

Like with the snake and rope, the facts did not change. Rather it was our cognitive understanding of the facts that changed. The effect is that the roundness of the Earth, which we now know existed before, exists now and will exist for some time in the future, outlasted the flatness of the Earth, which only existed before and was limited to only our thinking it to be so. Notice that the reality of a thing is only as good as the next good questioning of its claim to reality. If it survives that, then it lasts until the next, and so on. This has become the accepted position of our modern sciences in their careful referencing of claims of reality or truth in their theories.

But these two are either-or examples of claims to truth and reality. Much of life, though, is shades of gray, especially when categorizing the overall reality or truth of a situation or a thing. An extension, then, of this criterion of reality that provides for these shades of gray is: What outlasts or survives another, in terms of time or valuation of that time, is more real than the other. For example, a momentary spell of feeling satisfied is reduced in its overall truth or reality relative to the more pervasive spell of feeling unsatisfied. Therefore, thinking I am essentially unsatisfied is more likely than thinking I am essentially satisfied. That one is sometimes satisfied is true/real, but more often one seems to be unsatisfied. Both are equally real as experiences, but the more frequent one will prevail in one’s understanding of his or her overall life.

This is an example of one thing being more true/real in our thinking than another, though the other cannot be totally dismissed as not real in our thinking. In this author’s life, I am more a student of Vedānta (of the Upaniṣads and their analysis) than a janitor, which I was for a few years of my life. Because of this my life choices now are weighted, are valued, much more towards the perspective of a student of Vedānta than to that of a janitor. Of course one can be both, since they do not exclude each other, and indeed for a time I was both – meaning my livelihood involved both.

If we want to examine the final reality basis of things, though, rather than just the temporary forms of their reality, then we can adapt a corollary of the above criterion of reality. That corollary is: What a thing cannot give up is its essential reality, and what it can give up is not its essential reality. This corollary employs the well-known anvaya-vyatireka (co-presence–co-absence) logic. The anvaya (co-presence) is in whose – the reason’s (the hetu’s) – presence something – the fact to be discerned (the sādhya) – invariably occurs; vyatireka (co-absence) is in whose absence that something invariably does not occur. This logic for getting at the essential nature of something is commonly used by all of us and is the basis of experimentation.

For example, in trying to discern what is the problem with a computer, we proceed by removing a feature we previously installed and seeing if an unwanted, new symptom stops – this is the vyatireka (co-absence). Then we add back in that feature and see if the symptom returns – this is the anvaya (co-presence). This process informs us of what exactly is the nature of the problem with the computer, or at least which feature holds the problem. This logic is transparently used throughout the scripture, often through
:: ‘भगवन्, कति एव देवाः प्रजां विधारयन्ते, कतरे एतत् प्रकाशयन्ते, कः पुनः एषां वरिष्ठः इति॥’ “‘Sir, how many deities sustain a creature? Which of them boast this [greatness]? And who is superior [in this] to those [deities]?’”
‘तस्मै सः ह उवाच। आकाशः ह वै एषः देवः वायुः अग्निः आपः पृथिवी वाक् मनः चक्षुः श्रोत्रं च। ते प्रकाश्य अभिवदन्ति वयम् एतद् बाणम् अवष्टभ्य विधारयामः॥’ “To them he said, ‘This deity is Space, [as well as] Air, Fire, Water, Earth, and Speech, Mind, Eye, and Ear. Boasting, they say, ‘By supporting this reed [of a body], we sustain [the creature].’”
‘तान् वरिष्ठः प्राणः उवाच। मा मोहम् आपद्यथ, अहम् एव एतत् पञ्चधा आत्मानं प्रविभज्य एतद् बाणम् अवष्टभ्य विधारयामि इति, ते अ-श्रद्दधानाः बभूवुः॥’ “Prāṇa (Life-force), who is superior, said to them, ‘Do not fall to this delusion. I alone, dividing myself five ways [as prāṇa (outward exhalation), apāna (downward inhalation and energy), vyāna (dispersing circulation), udāna (upward ejecting energy including the ejecting of the subtle body upon death), and samāna (uniting digestion)] to support this reed [of a body] and sustain [the creature].’ They did not trust [this truth].”
‘सः अभिमानात् ऊर्ध्वम् उत्क्रामते इव, तस्मिन् उत्क्रामति अथ इतरे सर्वे एव उत्क्रामन्ते, तस्मिन् च प्रतिष्ठमाने सर्वे एव प्रातिष्ठन्ते।’ “Confidently he (Prāṇa) starts rising out [of the body]. When he arises, then [helplessly] all the others rise; when he settles back, every one of them settles back.”
‘तद् यथा मक्षिकाः मधुकर-राजानम् उत्क्रामन्तं सर्वाः एव उत्क्रामन्ते, तस्मिन् च प्रतिष्ठमाने सर्वाः एव प्रातिष्ठन्ते, एवं वाक् मनः चक्षुः श्रोत्रं च ते प्रीताः प्राणं स्तुन्वन्ति’ “In the same way all bees [praise] the royal bee, who arises [from the nest], [by] their rising and sit when [s]he sits, so too Speech, Mind, Eye, and Ear, being satisfied, praise Prāṇa.’” (Praśna Up. 2.1 through 4) ::
, to discover the more subtle, that is, the most pervasive and hence basic, truth or reality of what looks like just a composite. The logic ferrets out the hierarchy of dependencies between seemingly equal composites.

It is this final corollary that we will use to analyse the above claims as to who or what is the essential truth of the self. This corollary handles not only black or white, real or not real, but also shades of being more or less real/true. That is, it allows the dismissal of the more and more subtle natures of a thing, until one reaches the intrinsic nature of a thing which cannot ever be given up without the thing itself being lost. This corollary is applied to get at the essential reality, the essential truth, of a thing.

Whatever can, in terms of out-lasting, be dismissed or devalued as not, or less, real/true cannot ever be a thing’s essential reality. What cannot ever be dismissed or devalued is, has been, and will be its essential reality. In other words, what is unreal can never be real (non-dismissible), nor can the real ever be unreal (
:: ‘(अ-सतः) आगम-अपायिनः अनित्याः॥…न अ-सतः विद्यते भावः न अ-भावः विद्यते सतः’ “[The unreal] have a beginning and an end, [therefore] are time bound. …The un-real (a-sat) has no being (bhāva) [of its own], and the real (sat) has no non-being (a-bhāva).” (Bh. Gītā 2.14 & 16) ::
).

How do I Know I am Simply the Witness

Now, the earlier question was: How do I know that I am essentially the witness of everything and am not this particular body, mind, and their activities being witnessed?

The claim that I am a doctor or janitor is only as true as the knowledge and skill that I have. This knowledge and skill set was acquired in time – before I did not have it, now I have it, and later when I retire and do not keep up with the knowledge and skills required I will lose it. Yet I am very much there before and after these acquirements and losses. I am more real than this knowledge and skill set. I can cease to be a doctor or janitor and I survive, but the doctor-me or janitor-me does not survive. The doctor-me or janitor-me are simply ego thoughts that come and go in life. The doctor-me, for example, disappears when I give attention to my wife. Then the husband-me occurs. The same process occurs for every other ego thought.

If I think I am dull or smart, then this claim is based on a relative scale that I adopt. In comparison to a child I may be smart; in comparison to a genius I may be dull. So if I am both these opposite claims at the same time, then I am absolutely neither of them. If I study, I will be smarter and less dull. If my mind is not used or degenerates in sickness, then I will be more dull and less smart. These claims wax and wane through out my life and my day, and depend upon with whom I am comparing myself. Dropping these claims of being more or less dull or smart, I remain. It’s the same for sorrowful and happy. These wax and wane, yet I survive either of them.

Nor am I the child, the young adult, or the geriatric. The child may be me. The young adult may be me. The geriatric may be me. But since they each were, are or will be me, then I cannot be any one of them. I exist before and after each of these metamorphoses. These metamorphoses of the body, like the metamorphoses of the mind, come and go. Again, I am simply their witness.

Life and Death

The gain of this body and its loss are also considered in this inquiry as something that comes and goes for the individual who precedes and survives these
:: ‘वासांसि जीर्णानि यथा विहाय नवानि गृह्णाति नरः अपराणि। तथा शरीराणि विहाय जीर्णानि अन्यानि संयाति नवानि देही’ “Just as a person discarding worn-out clothes takes on other new ones; similarly, the embodied one (dehin), discarding worn-out bodies, takes on other new ones.” (Bh. Gītā 2.22) ::
.

An individual has his or her peculiar nature because of what that individual did before to earn this particular embodiment – this form, condition, or situation. What I do in this life will determine what I get later, after the loss of this body.

This before-life and after-life existence of the individual is a belief (a truth claim), but so are many of the claims, such as I am this body, which we are dismissing here as not being the real I. Much of what we think we know is simply beliefs. Most of the information we have is personally untested, unverified by us, and simply believed to be so. We base many of our beliefs upon having read or heard about them from family and friends, from teachers in school, from a science journal, a novel, a self-help book, a newspaper, television, the Internet, or water-cooler gossip.

Some people attempt to dismiss others’ beliefs to prop up their own. They resort to a generalization that the simpler explanation is more likely the truth. This is appealing to what is called Ockham’s razor, a principle of economy of explanation. I can simply dismiss someone else’s beliefs, such as a before-life and an after-life, as unreal if those beliefs look too complicated for me. In a self-defining system such as mathematics, this is effectively applied. It is rarely applicable, though, outside such artificial systems. It is not that the principle of simplicity is necessarily wrong; rather the application of the principle in regard to beliefs is often too simple-minded, if not prejudiced. Many times, and you can contemplate this yourself, a person appealing to this principle is not, in fact, taking into account the complexity or insufficiency of explanation of their assumptions behind their own beliefs.

If, for example, one thinks that only what can scientifically be proved is real, then their world of the real is so tiny that it becomes nearly meaningless. When have they ever scientifically proved, or even scientifically established that it is provable, what is love, friendship, happiness, the identity of their parents and their relations, most of history, all of their imagined future, and on and on. Their world of the real quickly shrinks to a few sense perceptions they have had that they also know could be interpreted in an unknowable amount of ways – yet they think they are explaining the real world, the world of science, the supposed world we all live in.

This is why simply labeling other beliefs as unreal and clinging to one’s own beliefs as real is not an ultimately satisfying criterion for determining what is real and what is unreal.

Rather than simply preaching opposing beliefs or resorting to generalizations, we should instead appeal to reason and inquiry to show that a particular belief is more or less realistic. However, with regard to the belief in the existence of an individual’s prior or future embodiment, it turns out that science or logic based on this life’s experience has no scope to prove or dismiss prior or future lives. Science cannot design an experiment to test the truth or untruth of the existence of prior and future lives. Such beliefs are about a subject matter that is outside of the stated scope of either science or reasoning to prove or disprove. Dismissing, in one’s own mind, one or more instances of a claim of a past life as a hoax is not equivalent to dismissing the possibility of past lives.

However, reasoning can dismiss the claim that I am the sum of or am any one of these embodiments – whether as a male or female, husband or wife, employer or employee, American or Indian, and so on – whether in the past, present, or future. The logic is that I survive these embodiments and take on other different embodiments. Before any one of these I was there, during I was there, and after I will be there, whether in this life, or any past or future life. And this logic applies whether one believes in a prior and after life, or not.

So if I am not any of these, then am I nothing? – No, I always was and am the witness of these adventitious acquirements, qualities, metamorphoses, and embodiments. If there are future embodiments I will be the witness of them too.

The 24/7 Reality

Even in detailed analysis, I am always the
:: ‘अस्तम् इते आदित्ये याज्ञवल्क्य, चन्द्रमसि अस्तम् इते, शान्ते अग्नौ, शान्तायां वाचि किं ज्योतिः एव अयं पुरुषः इति’ “‘O Yājña-valkya, when the sun has set, the moon has set, the fire has gone out, and speech has stopped, a person has what alone as a light?’”
‘– आत्मा एव अस्य ज्योतिः भवति इति, आत्मना एव इयं ज्योतिषा आस्ते पल्ययते (=परि-अयते) कर्म कुरुते विपल्येति (=विपरि-एति)’ “– ‘The self (ātman) alone is his light. By the light that is the self alone, he sits, departs, does work, and returns.’” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 4.3.6) ::
. When I look at just a twenty-four hour period in this life, I am continually the witness. I witness all I experience while awake. In dream also nothing escapes my witnessing, since that alone can be what my dream is. In deep sleep when the conscious mind stops functioning, I experience the absence of any thing and can later clearly proclaim that I was sound
:: ‘यद् द्वै तद् न पश्यति पश्यन् वै तद् न पश्यति, न हि द्रष्टुः दृष्टेः विपरिलोपः विद्यते अ-विनाशित्वात्। न तु तद् द्वितीयम् अस्ति ततः अन्यद् विभक्तं यद् पश्येत्’ “[In deep sleep] it indeed does not see, [because though] indeed seeing it does not see, for there is no loss of vision for the witness (draṣṭṛ), since it is imperishable. Rather, there is no second thing other than it, which it could see as separate.” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 4.3.23) ::
. How else would I know that? So, deep sleep is also witnessed by me. This same witnessing of the absence of thought happens in moments of thoughtlessness, whether deliberate or not. In every moment of time I am the witness.

I witness their coming and going, so I cannot be these moment to moment thoughts and objects I witness. They dismiss themselves in dream and deep sleep every night. I need not do anything to get rid of them, since they give themselves up as possibly being my real nature every night, every moment. Even if I philosophize that I do not even exist, I am still there witnessing these philosophical, or religious, thoughts as they come and go. The same me, with and without these thoughts, is there before, during, and after every thought.

There is never a time I was not, nor will not be. This is the statement made by Lord Kṛṣṇa in the beginning of the Bhagavad Gītā. This was not a claim made because He is a special person, a reincarnation of the Lord. This was given as a teaching to Arjuna, his student, that this is the truth of Arjuna himself, the truth of the self – never was the self not,
:: ‘न तु एव अहं जातु न आसं न त्वं न इमे जन-अधिपाः। न च एव न भविष्यामः सर्वे वयम् अतः परम्’ “Never [was there a time that] I was not, nor you, nor these kings. Nor will any of us cease to exist hereafter.” (Bh. Gītā 2.12) ::
.

However, my self consciously being the witness is itself a relative claim as it is always in relation to what I am witnessing. When there is nothing to witness, such as during sleep, I am not claiming this existence as a witness. It is only later, upon re-awaking, that I can re-claim that existence as the witness of thought or of thoughtlessness. If there is, in fact, no second existent thing to witness, there can then be no witnesser-witnessing-witnessed relationship. So while being the witness is more true/real than any other claim, it is itself not the
:: ‘यत्र हि द्वैतम् इव भवति तद् इतर: इतरं जिघ्रति, तद् इतरः इतरं पश्यति, तद् इतर: इतरं शृणोति, तद् इतर: इतरम् अभिवदति, तद् इतर: इतरं मनुते, तद् इतरः इतरं विजानाति।’ “Because where there is as if duality, there something smells something. There something sees something. There something hears something. There something speaks something.”
‘यत्र वा अस्य सर्वम् आत्मा एव अभूत् तत् केन कं जिघ्रेत्, तत् केन कं पश्येत्, तत् केन कं शृणुयात्, तत् केन कम् अभिवदेत्, तत् केन कं मन्वीत, तत् केन कं विजानीयात्।’ “But where [upon the dissolution of the universe] everything is one’s self (ātman), there, how would one smell what? There, how would one see what? There, how would one hear what? There, how would one speak what? There, how would one think what? There, how would one know what?”
‘येन इदं सर्वं विजानाति तं केन विजानीयात्। विज्ञातारम् अरे केन विजानीयात्’ “How would one know that by which one knows all this? How, my dear, would one know the knower?” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 2.4.14) ::
.

If one were to make the better claim, then it would be that I am the reality that allows me to ever be the witnesser. ‘Being’ is not relational, whereas ‘witness’ is. I am the existence that witnesses all that can be witnessed. I am essentially
:: ‘मयि एव सकलं जातं मयि सर्वं प्रतिष्ठितम्। मयि सर्वं लयं याति तद् ब्रह्म अ-द्वयम् अस्मि अहम्’ “In me alone is born everything. In me everything remains. In me everything resolves. That without-a-second reality (brahman) am I.” (Kaivalya Up. 1.19) ::
that expresses as the witness of all.

We will see later that the claim of the existence of any thing is itself based on the fact of it being witnessed. I am the source of the attribution of existence to all I witness, in the same way as I am the source of the attribution of reality to the various claims I had of my relative existence as a doctor, janitor, and etcetera. I am the being, the witness, who attributes all of reality to my universe of experience. None of this universe of experience lies outside of the reality I attribute to them, I lend to them, so that they may shine within my awareness of them. Being the witness of these experiences, they fall within my awareness. Yet they, independently, cannot be my nature as they are but the witnessed, the seen (YS.2.21). Essentially, they are only the reality I lend to them.

Acknowledging the fact that all things shine within the existence I am is a non-erroneous lending of my existence to these objects of experience. But if I attribute to them a degree or level of reality, such as imaginary, practical, or absolute, that they do not merit, then this is an erroneous attribution of the object’s existence. Simply making such an error, though, does not necessarily afflict me. It will afflict me, however, if this erroneous attribution of reality makes me erroneously take myself to be inadequate, unworthy, and insecure as a consequence. This is because, as this teaching, that is, the scripture that forms the basis of this teaching, will unfold, I alone cannot but be all of this existence, this reality.

What is the Benefit

So what? What is the useful result of this inquiry? The benefit is knowing that all limitation, all that I do not want, everything that afflicts me, is something that is witnessed by me. Being more real than the limitations, I am not them. Any identification I have with these is sub-rated, (dismissed as less real) by this incontrovertible, unshakable knowledge that I am their witness. Any limitation is not me. What I do not want is not me. Any affliction I appear to have is not me. Any notion I have about myself is not me.

I am not even limited by other conscious beings, since these so-called other beings are just the bodies I see and the minds I encounter. I cannot and do not witness the
:: ‘एषः सर्वेषु भूतेषु गूढः आत्मा न प्रकाशते’ “This self (ātman) hidden [by unreal ignorance] in all beings does not appear.” (Kaṭha Up. 1.3.12) ::
. The witness is the one reality that cannot admit a second. For every witnessed thing there are innumerable other witnessed things to limit it. For the witness alone that possibility of being limited is not there. In this way the literature that guides this inquiry unfolds this witness reality as the only reality, the one without a second that has always been just this only
:: ‘सद् एव सोम्य इदम् अग्रे आसीत् एकम् एव अ-द्वितीयम्’ “Existence (sat) alone, my dear, was this in the beginning, one only without a second.” (Chāndogya Up. 6.2.1) ::
. This witness is reality itself without limit. It is not inside you – it is the essential you, you are this reality, and this reality cannot be without you. It is all that is real, because it is reality itself. All beings, all of time and space, are within the scope of this witness, this reality. This limitless reality, even if taken as the Lord, is not other than you. How could it be otherwise and still be limitless?

Once the knowledge of my real self as unlimited reality itself is fully assimilated, a freedom from limitation, from all afflictions is
:: ‘अ-विनाशि तु तद् विद्धि येन सर्वम् इदं ततम्। विनाशम् अव्ययस्य अस्य न कश्चित् कर्तुम् अर्हति’ “By which [reality] all this [the time-bound unreal, including this mind-body complex] is pervaded, know that [timeless and real] to be indestructible. Nothing is able to bring about the destruction of this that does not change.” (Bh. Gītā 2.17) ::
. And that freedom is more real than the bondage I thought I was subject to, since I always was, am, and will be free from these limitations and afflictions as ever being their witness, whereas the sense of bondage comes to an end. Freedom is another expression of the truth, the reality of myself.

So when someone wonders why you are trying to figure out who you are, thinking that this is something obvious and that you are wasting your time, then this small discussion may help you understand what this inquiry is.

Not that you need to convince others, though. If you think you need to convince others that you are right (or at least okay), then you have not fully understood this teaching. Nor could you, or can you, convince others if they have not started to question their own erroneous assumptions about themselves.

By the way, this is one of the reasons this teaching has been called the most secret of secrets. There can be no conversion of the multitudes. The truth is already everywhere available, 24/7, but few see it. That makes it the most secret of secrets. Seekers of this complete freedom have to come to discover this truth by correcting their vision, correcting their thinking. None can help the seeker, unless the seeker sincerely asks for help. But such seekers are few; most people simply struggle to survive in their short lifetime, clinging to a myriad of beliefs to console and comfort them in the struggle. That is what life is.

Until one does this inquiry, one only has a vague, unverifiable belief in who one thinks one is. This belief lasts only until the next good question, but most people avoid these questions and avoid those who bring up these questions. It is unsettling to be reminded that you do not really know who you really are.

Patañjali Indicates This Witness Reality

Patañjali only touches here on the nature of this reality – with just the one telling word draṣṭṛ (witness). Later he will also present this self as untouched by the afflictions of ignorance, the I-notion, attachment, aversion, and the fear of death (YS.1.24, 2.3, 10 & 4.30); pure perception or consciousness (YS.2.20 & 4.34); the one reality in which all else is the very same, as not other (YS.3.53 & 55); then again as time-less, pure and satisfied (YS.2.5); the presiding presence in and the witness of everything (YS.3.49–50); and finally as the immutable and the self-revealing (YS.4.18–19). This is the significant minimum to point out the exact nature of oneself and all of reality according to the vision of the Upaniṣads and the Bhagavad Gītā. Patañjali assumes that one has been exposed to this teaching of the nature of reality, since that exposure (self-study, svādhyāya, YS.2.1) is the initial and essential step in yoga, and that one is now ready to contemplate upon it to help assimilate this knowledge in one’s life.

What Patañjali writes in these sūtras will then clearly follow from this background. Without this background, we end up with the less helpful translations and interpretations, replete with vague terminologies and mystical claims that fill yoga bookshelves. But now, with this understanding of what the inquiry is and what the topic of the contemplation should be, we can proceed as, we assume, Patañjali would have wanted us to proceed.


 
←PrevNext→
[itaratra – on the other hand; sā-rūpya – has the same form; vṛttis – thoughts (of the
:: ‘चित्तम् एव हि संसारः तद् प्रयत्नेन शोधतेत्। यद्-चित्तः तद्-मयः भवति गुह्यम् एतद् सनातनम्’ “The mind (citta) alone indeed is one’s transient existence (saṃsāra). One should make effort to clean it up. In whatever way one thinks, that one becomes. This is an eternal mystery!” (Maitrāyaṇī Up. 1.9) ::
).]

अथ योगस्य प्रतिबन्धक-मूलम् उक्तं – द्रष्टुः वृत्ति-सा-रूप्यम् अन्तःकरण-धर्म-सम-रूपता इति पुरुष-स्व-रूप-अ-ज्ञानी कल्पते (YS.2.5) इतरत्र आ तस्मात् स्व-रूपे अवस्थानात्॥ –
“Now, the root of the obstacles (pratibandhakas) in Yoga is stated: The seer (draṣṭṛ) mistakenly identifies with the modifications (vṛttis), the thoughts, of the mind (citta), leading to a confusion of the nature of the mind with the true nature of the Self. The individual, due to ignorance (a-jñāna), believes that the mind’s attributes and the Self’s true nature are one and the same (YS.2.5). Hence, through establishing oneself in the true nature of the Self, this confusion is overcome.”

This, which we will see in the second chapter, is the fundamental ignorance in the form of a mutual imposing of natures between the seer and the seen, the witness and the witnessed. This is a clear statement of the fundamental problem.

It is not the problem that thoughts (vṛttis) appear, but that one assumes the same form (sā-rūpya) of these thoughts: “I am a doctor,” “I am upset,” “I am not satisfied,” and so on. This mis-identification means the thoughts control and define the person, instead of the other way around.

It will be shown later that simply mechanically stopping thoughts will not keep them from coming back (YS.1.18). So the goal of yoga is not stopping thoughts, as many think it is. If simply stopping thought is yoga, then a sleep, drugs, or coma is instant yoga. This is why Patañjali next goes on to describe the nature and quality of thoughts, and which to pursue and which to avoid, since it is not that you think, which we all – whether a great yogin or not – obviously do in our own ways, but how you think that is the problem addressed by yoga.

Another meaning for itaratra is at other times. But this would convey the sense that the yogin resides in the seer sometimes and is identified with thoughts at other times. This sense of the word only weakens the earlier sūtra to merely indicating an intermediate stage of on again off again experience of meditative peace in the self. This mediocre expression of the goal of yoga would not have been the intent of Patañjali at the defining start of this text.


 
←PrevNext→
[vṛttis – thoughts; pañcatayī – of five types; kliṣṭa – hinder; a-kliṣṭa – do not hinder.]

योगस्य प्रधान-साधन-क्षेत्रम् उक्तं – मनसः पञ्चतय्यः वृत्तयः सामान्यतः अन्तःकरण-धी-रूपाणि (YS.1.6) योगस्य क्लिष्ट-अक्लिष्टाः अपकारिणः उपकारिणः वा योग-साधन-योग्यतः॥ –
“The principal field of practice (sādhana-kṣetra) of Yoga has been stated – The five types of thoughts (vṛttis) are generally forms of the inner organ (antaḥ-karaṇa) or intellect (dhī) (YS.1.6). These thoughts may be classified as either afflicting (kliṣṭa) or non-afflicting (a-kliṣṭa), harmful (apakāriṇa) or beneficial (upakāriṇa), and suitable for the practice of Yoga (yoga-sādhana-yogya).”

The word kliṣṭa, as well as its negative a-kliṣṭa, is an adjectival form of the noun kleśa (affliction).
:: ‘क्लेश-हेतु- (क्लेश-निमित)’ “What occasions the afflictions)” (Vyāsa’s Pātañjali Yoga Sūtrāṇi Bhāṣya 1.5, and Śaṅkara’s Pātañjali Yoga Sūtrāṇi Bhāṣya Vivaraṇa 1.5) ::
refers to those thoughts that sustain the kleśas, while a-kliṣṭa refers to those thoughts that counter-act the kleśas. And to be free of the kleśas, the final goal of yoga, is to be the perfect puruṣa (person, self), the very nature of the Lord (YS.1.24–25, 2.2–3, 3.49–50 & 54, and 4.30).

In this context, with reference to the goal of yoga, we are defining kliṣṭa as what hinders one’s progress in yoga, rather than the dictionary meanings as afflicted or painful. Those definitions miss the intent of this section which is to present thoughts as either helpful or not towards the goal of yoga. It is a mistake to say that some thoughts may be painful (kliṣṭa) and thus they should all be removed. That interpretation is based on duality and a fear of thoughts, of thinking. Mind is not your enemy in yoga; it is your tool and friend.

A-kliṣṭa, in its fullest understanding, thus means what is other than what hinders one’s progress in yoga. However, it may also mean what is neutral – neither hindering nor helpful. Much of how we live life is neutral to our conscious goals in life, and this can be part of our aimless getting along in life without making any progress. But here, it will be shown that karma-yoga is very much a part of yoga (YS.2.1). Thus, how one understands the entire world, how one understands oneself, and how one bases all choices in life become centered on one’s understanding of realities, which is the crux of this teaching. In that all-embracing world view including everything in everyway (YS.3.54), neutrality – ineffective action and thought – becomes less and less. A-kliṣṭa then becomes a matter of living entirely the understanding born of this teaching, and therefore means that which is always helpful in one’s progress in yoga.

This distinction, then, between kliṣṭa and a-kliṣṭa is central to citta-vṛtti-nirodha (mastery or discipline in thinking). And this is more to the point of nirodha than is nir-vikalpa-samādhi which will be discussed later, and which is simply an unavoidable result of this discipline. This sūtra is often glossed over by the commentators and translators of these sūtras, and not clearly connected as it should be to the preceding sūtras (where the goal and the problem are stated) and following sūtras (where the means are stated).


 
←PrevNext→
[pramāṇa – knowledge; viparyaya – error; vikalpa – imagination; nidrā – sleep; smṛti – memory.]

वृत्तयः प्रमाण-विपर्यय-विकल्प-निद्रा-स्मृतयः॥ –
“The thoughts (vṛttis) are: correct perception (pramāṇa), misperception (viparyaya), imagination (vikalpa), deep sleep (nidrā), and memory (smṛti).”

These five can be taken as just five categories of thought that Patañjali wants to highlight, while not covering all possible types of thought. Alternatively, as we will take them here, they may be taken broadly so that they do cover all possible thoughts.

As broad categories of all thought, then, any thought that is factually connected to and is about a stimulus would be knowledge. For example, an emotion, which is a perception of a mental state (the stimulus), would be included in knowledge (pramāṇa). If a thought has no connection to a stimulus, it would be an imagination. But if that imagination is then taken as factually connecting to some stimulus, then that imagination would instead be an error. If there was no conscious thought of any stimulus at a given time, then a non-conscious experiential thought that this factually occurred would be later consciously recalled as having been sleep. If none of the above strictly applies, then it would be a thought about one of those first four types of thought. This would be what we call a memory. We do not directly remember stimuli. Instead, we only recollect right now a past experience (thought) – whether the experience is about a stimulus factually, imaginatively, or falsely, or it is about the lack of a stimulus.


 
←PrevNext→
[pramāṇa – knowledge; pratyakṣa – direct knowledge; anumāna – indirect knowledge; āgama – scripture.]

प्रत्यक्ष-अनुमान-आगमाः ‘अयं घटः’ इति-आदि-स्थूल-विषयस्य इन्द्रिय-जन्य-प्रत्यक्षं ‘मनः सुखि’ इति-आदि-चित्त-धर्म-सूक्ष्म-विषयस्य साक्षि-प्रत्यक्षं च प्रथम-प्रमाणं, परस्-अक्ष-लौकिक-विषयानाम् ‘अयं धूमवान्’ इति-प्रत्यक्ष-जनक-लिङ्गेन ‘अयं पर्वतः वह्णिमान्’ इति-अनुमानम् उपमान-अर्थ-आपत्ति-अन्-उपलब्धि-सहितं च द्वितीय-प्रमाणं, ब्रह्म-आत्म-ऐक्य-देव-स्वर्ग-पुण्य-आदि-प्रत्यक्ष-अनुमान-अ-विषयाणां श्रुति-शब्दः श्रुति-अनुवादः च तृतीय-प्रमाणं प्रमाणानि त्रि-प्रकार-प्रमा-करण-वृत्तयः नाम॥ –
“Direct perception (pratyakṣa), inference (anumāna), and testimony (āgama) are the three kinds of valid means of knowledge (pramāṇa).
• The first pramāṇa is as follows: Direct perception through the senses (pratyakṣa) for gross objects, such as ‘This is a pot’ (a statement about an object of sensory perception).
• The second pramāṇa involves inference, like ‘This is a smoke,’ which leads to an inference that ‘This mountain has fire’ (inference based on a sign or marker). This includes analogy (upamāna), postulation (arthāpatti), and non-cognition (an-upalabdhi).
• The third pramāṇa is testimony (āgama), which refers to the statements in scriptures, such as those concerning the unity of brahman and ātman, or teachings about the divine, heaven, or merit, which are not directly perceived or inferred but are understood through the authoritative words of scripture (śruti-śabda).
Thus, the three types of pramāṇa correspond to the three types of mental activities through which knowledge is obtained.”

Pramāṇa means knowledge or, more literally, a means of knowledge. Direct perception by way of any of the five sense organs (hearing, seeing, touching, tasting, or smelling) and valid inference, by themselves, do not hinder one’s progress. Scripture understood in its full context, as well as direct perception and inference in support of the scripture, help one’s progress in yoga.

Later philosophers, including some philosophically minded Vedāntins, technically distinguish from this broad term of anumāna (inference) three more means of knowledge: upamāna (comparison), for example, upon seeing a wild ox in the forest, there arises the knowledge, “this is like a cow”; arthāpatti (presumption), for example, this person remains hefty but is not seen to eat during the day, so there arises the knowledge, “this person must eat at night”; and anupalabdhi (non-perception), for example, on a well lit ground, because of not seeing a pot, there arises the knowledge, “a pot is not there.” These extra technical distinctions in logic are simply included here in Patañjali’s use of the word anumāna (inference). Śaṅkara in his authoritative commentaries on the major Upaniṣads routinely lists just the three means of knowledge, as found here in this sūtra.

In regard to the final means of knowledge, latter day philosophers of India have stretched āgama beyond the scriptures to mean any knowledge that comes from verbal testimony. This is an unreliable extrapolation of this essential means of knowledge. The classic definition of an independent means of knowledge is that it is both not contradicted (a-bādhita) by another means of knowledge and not gained (an-adhigata) by another means of knowledge. With these two criteria,
:: ‘…वै, सम्राट्, पश्यन्तम् आहुः – अद्राक्षीः त्वं हस्तिनम् इति, सः चेत् अद्राक्षम् इति आह, तत् सत्यम् एव भवति; यः तु अन्यः ब्रूयात् – अहम् अश्रौषम् इति, तद् व्यभिचरति; यत् तु चक्षुषा दृष्टं तत् अव्यभिचारित्वात् सत्यम् एव भवति’ “If a person, O Emperor, says to one who has seen with the eyes, ‘Have you seen the elephant?’ and he answers, ‘Yes, I have,’ then it is considered true; while if another says, ‘I have heard of it,’ it may not correspond with fact.
But what is seen with the eyes is always true, as it corresponds with fact.” (Bṛhad-Āraṇyaka Up. 4.1.4 Bhāṣyam, also BrhUEng.5.14.4 Mūlam) ::
from a person does not stand up as a means of knowledge.

First, what someone tells you is often contradicted later. Also what someone tells you can be just as well known to you directly either by perception or by your own inference of the object this person is talking about. Then again, what was the source of that person’s knowledge they are relaying to you? That source was likely either their perceptions or their inferences, but perhaps it was also imagination or error. So the truth of their words is only the truth of those other two means of knowledge, nothing more. If the person is knowledgeably relaying the scripture to you, then that is the passing along of the āgama (scripture, tradition).

When you hear someone say something, you directly gain knowledge of that person’s words. This is a direct perception through hearing. As with seeing, our knowledge through hearing is in the thought-form of words, for example, “this person is saying this…”. From that perceptual knowledge you may have anywhere from a strong belief to a strong disbelief in regard to what you think those words are referring. The result is this verbal testimony has the added aspect of inference. That is, since this person has always relayed true statements to me before, I accept what I believe this person is saying now. If the person had lied to me before, I may not take what I believe this person is saying as true. The person is giving verbal testimony to me in either case, so the only difference is my assumptions and inferences about that person. In other words, inference plays too crucial a role here to accept simple verbal testimony as an independent means of valid knowledge.

If Patañjali really meant simple verbal testimony here, then he could have used the much more generic term śabda, or śabda-jñāna, (words or verbal-knowledge). Instead, he uses the term āgama which literally means what comes, and in practical usage usually means tradition or scripture – what has been handed down from beginningless time and is not considered authored, not created new by a specific human being. Knowledge from scripture is neither contradicted nor gained by any other source.

The other scriptures of the world are admittedly written by men and deal mainly with specific events, dreams, or visions that were perceptual or could be as well inferred. They have a history and a date of creation, even though they may be considered inspired by God. They can easily be seen as borrowing inspiration and expressions from each other and from other indigenous traditions that have not survived intact. Many of these scriptures are stories that include moral guidance. Whereas, the scriptures this text relates to are metaphysical teachings, not otherwise knowable.

The āgamas are these scriptures, the Vedas including their Upaniṣads, but also are the later Purāṇas (legends) and Iti-hāsas (epics) that relay the scriptural teachings in a popular format for all the people of India. But those later texts’ (which are also called Smṛti, because they are ‘remembered’ and passed down) authority is only so much as they do not contradict the
:: ‘प्रत्यक्षं श्रुतिः, प्रामाण्यं प्रत्यनपेक्षत्वात्; अनुमानं स्मृतिः, प्रामाण्यं प्रति सापेक्षत्वात्’ “Pratyakṣa means the Scriptures (Śruti), which are independent of means of proof, and Anumāna means the Smṛti which is dependent (on some Scriptural origin of it) for its own authoritativeness.” (Śaṅkara’s Brahma-Sūtra-Bhāṣyam 1.3.28) ::
, especially concerning the topics of these Yoga Sūtras, namely, the nature of the self (ātman, draṣṭṛ), the Lord (Īśvara), and the teaching (jñāna) including yoga. To represent the Purāṇas and Iti-hāsas, the Bhagavad Gītā has been chosen because it is specifically held in the highest esteem regarding the teaching of the Lord and of yoga. The many quotations in this book are from the Upaniṣads and the Bhagavad Gītā.

The glossing over of āgama pramāṇa (means of knowledge) to mean simple verbal testimony may imply or assert that whatever any yoga teacher says is to be taken as the gospel – because they said it. This is just uncritical thinking and can steal your life away. Always be careful of those who say, “Just trust me.”

We instead believe that Patañjali wished to explicitly establish from the start of these sūtras the prāmāṇya (validity) of the scripture, which is the critical authority with regard to kaivalya (liberation), the knowledge of the self, and what is its helpful means (yoga).

What in the scripture is a means of knowledge then? When the scripture in this tradition talks about heaven, the existence and nature of heaven cannot be contradicted (in this life) by direct perception and thus by inference, nor gained by those other two means of knowledge. Yoga perception of subtle things, such as heaven, is, for others, the yogin’s verbal testimony, or, in any case, is not a common means of knowledge. If it is believed, it would fall under direct perception of the yogin. If it clearly contradicts scripture, it would be taken in this tradition as mistaken. If it is in keeping with the scripture, it is a restatement of the scripture.

When this scripture talks about dharma (universal order) it does not present it as a set of moral mandates writ large in stone or divine dreams. The scripture unfolds dharma as a universal law and a psychological principle operating in the universe by way of a mechanism, called karma. Karma connects causes, such as a past action, to their effects, though a passage of time may intervene. This is a teaching of realities, not a thou shalt. We perceive the effects of karma, but only a scripture can authoritatively present the subtle reality behind the perception. In this way, this scripture is uniquely presented as a means of knowledge for gaining understanding of subtle truths essential for human maturity, not something to be blindly, unquestioningly believed or followed.

This scripture is viewed as a manual of knowledge that
:: ‘प्रजा-पतिः लोकान् अभ्यतपत् तेषां तप्यमानानां रसान् प्रावृहद् अग्निं पृथिव्याः वायुम् अन्तरिक्षाद् आदित्यं दिवः॥’ “The Lord of creatures (Prajā-pati) contemplated (abhi-atapat) the worlds. While they were being contemplated, He extracted their essences – Fire from the earth, Wind from the sky, the Sun from the heavens.”
‘सः एताः तिस्रो देवताः अभ्यतपत् तासां तप्यमानानां रसान् प्रावृहद् अग्नेः ऋचो वायोः यजूंषि सामानि आदित्यात्’ “He contemplated these three deities. While they were being contemplated, He extracted Their essences [the three Veda hymn forms] – the Ṛg [i.e., chanted] verses from Fire, Yajur prose from Wind, Soman [i.e., sung] verses from the Sun.” (Chāndogya Up. 4.17.1 & 2) ::
in every cycle of manifestation of the
:: ‘एक-एकं जालं बहुधा विकुर्वन् अस्मिन् क्षेत्रे संहरति एषः देवः। भूयः सृष्ट्वा पतयः (=प्रजा-पतयः) तथा ईशः सर्व-आधि-पत्यं कुरुते महा-आत्मा’ “Repeatedly spreading out the net (jāla) [i.e., the Indra-jāla, the blinding net of appearances] one after another, this Lord (deva) withdraws it into this ground (kṣetra) [i.e., into itself]. Repeatedly manifesting (sṛṣṭvā) [the manifestations of creation] via the Lords of creatures (Prajā-patis) [in each cycle], the Lord (Īśa) as the limitless self (mahā-ātman) continues the over-lordship (ādhipatyaṃ kurute) of all [through these appearances].” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 5.3) ::
. It comes with the universe and is thus not originally authored by any human, but is only naturally re-revealed in each creation cycle through sages, whose teachings were orally preserved until written down in recent times. Being viewed as not coming from a particular person or persons, but rather from the Lord, then trust can be more easily given. This scripture could not be for the profit of some person or institution. Nor would it only be from some person’s perspective and information, where it could become irrelevant or outdated. Being directly from the timeless Lord, these preserved teachings are not taken as simple verbal testimony.

When the scripture talks about rivers, cities, plants, flying machines, math techniques, and other types of topics, it has no exclusive prāmāṇya (validity), since these may as well be ascertained through perception and inference by those people in those times, and in our generation through perception and inference via geology, archeology, paleontology, or the other sciences. These are not what are being pointed out as the knowledge being conveyed by the scripture. But being a part of the scripture, these types of statement are simply taken as true, and beneficial in some way to someone.

If the scripture said “fire is cold,” that statement would, on the face of it, be wrong because it contradicts our perception. In taking the scripture as true (otherwise called śraddhā, trust), then one would look for another meaning for such statements within their context that would not contradict perception and logic.

The āgama (scripture) thus only has validity in those statements about what would not be contradicted by another means of knowledge and not be otherwise gained by direct perception or by inference. That is why it stands on its own as a separate, independent means of knowledge, and why it forms the third pramāṇa. It remains a valid means of knowledge, no matter the expanse of the frontiers of mankind’s sciences. It can never become ill-relevant or replaced.

One comes to look at scripture intelligently – not blindly. This is well laid out in the ancient science of scriptural analysis, called mīmāṃsā. The mīmāṃsā of the Upaniṣads (Uttara-mīmāṃsā), the science of the Upaniṣad scriptures, is otherwise known as Vedānta, and yoga is the preparation for assimilating this Vedānta, according to the
:: ‘न कर्मणा न प्रजया धनेन त्यागेन एके अ-मृतत्वम् आनशुः। परेण नाकं निहितं गुहायां विभ्राजते यद् यतयः विशन्ति॥’ “Not by action, progeny, or wealth, but by renunciation they attain immortality – beyond heaven and hidden in the cave [of the heart/intellect]. Into this which shines there enter those who apply [appropriate] effort.”
‘वेदान्त-विज्ञान-सुनिश्चित-अर्थाः सन्न्यास-योगात् यतयः शुद्ध-सत्त्वाः। ते ब्रह्म-लोकेषु परान्त-काले परामृताः परिमुच्यन्ति सर्वे’ “Having clearly ascertained the meaning of the science (vijñāna) of Vedānta and who have clarity of mind (śuddha-sattva) through the yoga of renunciation (sannyāsa), at the time of death they all are free and beyond mortality in the world(s) of brahman.” (Kaivalya Up. 1.3 & 4) ::
.

The ultimate knowledge taught in the scripture is the one that finally frees the individual from saṃsāra (the unbecoming life of becoming). The preparation of the mind so that it can quickly assimilate this freeing knowledge is called
:: ‘न हि ज्ञानेन स-दृशं पवित्रम् इह विद्यते। तत् स्वयं योग-संसिद्धः कालेन आत्मनि विन्दति’ “In this world, indeed, there is no purifier equal to knowledge. In time, the one who is prepared by yoga [and has a proper teacher] gains that [knowledge] easily in [one’s prepared] mind.” (Bh. Gītā 4.38) ::
.


 
←PrevNext→
[viparyaya – error; mithyā-jñāna – false conclusion; a-tad-rūpa-pratiṣṭha – not based on the actual form of its object.]

:: ‘दूरम् एते विपरीते विषूची अ-विद्या या च विद्या इति ज्ञाता’ “These two, known as ignorance (a-vidyā) and knowledge (vidyā), are widely opposed (viparīta) and diverging [leading to bondage and to freedom, respectively].” (Kaṭha Up. 1.2.4) ::
नाम मिथ्या-ज्ञानम् अन्यथा अवगमनं, स्व-रूप-अ-विवेकतः शुक्तिकायां रजत-प्रातिभासिक-ज्ञानवत्, मृदि घटत्व-व्यावहारिक-ज्ञानवत् वा अ-तद्-रूप-प्रतिष्ठं यद्-वर्तमान-रूपं, तद्-रूपे न आश्रितं ज्ञानं च॥ –
Viparyaya refers to false knowledge or misapprehension, where one perceives something incorrectly due to lack of discernment between its true form and appearance. For example, in the case of an oyster, one perceives silver (rajata) instead of the actual substance (the oyster’s shell), or in the case of clay, one perceives the functional (vyāvahārika) knowledge of a pot (ghaṭa) without recognizing the underlying material’s true nature. In such cases, the knowledge is not dependent on the true nature of the object but instead is based on its erroneous form or the mere appearance it presents.”

Mithyā-jñāna literally means falsely-knowing. For example, an error in perception would be thinking a rope in bad light is a snake. An error in assumption or inference would be one that does not amount to valid indirect knowledge. An error regarding what is not available for perception and thus inference would be, for example, thinking that one’s self is just this body-mind complex. Error is not knowing the actual nature of whatever is the subject matter of the cognition and then imposing one’s imagination upon it, thinking that this is its real nature.

Error hinders progress in yoga, so it is kliṣṭa, though we may learn from our mistakes. If that learning takes place, then that learning would be due to one of the pramāṇas. It would be about what is learned, not the mistake. If the mistake is learned, then that would just be repeating it.


 
←PrevNext→
[vikalpa – imagination; anupātin – based; śabda-jñāna – verbal knowledge; śūnya – lacks; vastu – object.]

शब्द-ज्ञान-अनुपाती वचन-ज्ञान-अनुरूपी वचन-ज्ञान-आलम्बनः वा केवलं वस्तु-शून्यः अ-वर्तमान-विषयी विकल्पः नाम॥ –
“Word-knowledge (śabda-jñāna) is based on the knowledge of speech; speech-knowledge is dependent on speech. It is merely an imagination related to an objectless, non-present subject.”

Imagination is any belief or statement that amounts to only the meanings of the words it is couched in and does not actually attain its intended object. For example, “The self (has a measure which) is infinite” is an imagination, instead of the correct, “The self has no measure,” because the mind cannot attain an actual conception of an infinite measure.

We use imagination to educate as well as entertain, such as in mythical or fictional stories, and imagination can be a part of scriptural upāsanas (meditations). As long as one understands the intended purport of these statements and does not blindly assume the validity of the literal details, these do not hinder progress in yoga and can even help.

Imagination is also technically present in much of what we believe (YS.1.42), especially regarding what is subtle. But, regarding subtle matters that must be understood instead of believed, imagination hinders progress in
:: ‘प्राण-आदिभिः अनन्तैः तु भावैः एतैः विकल्पितः। माया एषा तस्य देवस्य (=जीव-आत्मनः) यया अयं मोहितः स्वयम्’ “[The self] is imagined (vikalpita) as these countless things such as the life-force (prāṇa), etc. This is the apparition (māyā) of that shining one (deva) [the self], by which that very one itself is deluded.” (Māṇḍūkya Up. Kārikā 2.19) ::
. It is also why in this study we have to go beyond the words, which can as well add imaginations about oneself based on their literal meanings, instead of enlighten us, instead of resolving their meaning in the truth of oneself as their implied meaning.

In the above example, “The self is infinite” only amounts to a mere concept in my mind about infinity, simply a thought, that I then equate with myself. This only expresses that I am some thought in my mind, which itself misses its target by an infinite measure. Whereas, “The self has no measure” is a negation of any limit that my mind can think of as being applicable to myself. This removes erroneous concepts I have about myself, such as I am just this body or this thought in my mind.

Similarly, statements such as “I am all knowledge” make sense when taken to mean I am the reality that is the effortless witnessing that lights up all thoughts in this and every mind. Whereas, an imagination of this would be thinking that I (this mind) should know in detail everything in the universe. Such imaginations are frequently seen in current yoga literature. Our self-conceptions should be in line with reality.

Imagination (vikalpa), when given a status of reality, becomes error (viparyaya). Hence error (viparyaya) is sometimes called imagination (vikalpa), because error has both ignorance and imagination as its basis. It is a covering of the fact (the ignorance) and then projecting, superimposing, something else in its place (the imagination). Imagination with ignorance is hindering, since it limits one’s progress in clear understanding of realities. Imagination with knowledge is at worst non-hindering, like the enjoyment of reading a book of fiction.

Imagination is what is being pointed out in the daring and significant āgama (scripture) statements that everything of the universe, of course including this mind and body complex, is no more than hanging on the
:: ‘यथा सोम्य एकेन मृत्-पिण्डेन सर्वं मृन्मयं विज्ञातं स्याद् वाचा-आरम्भणं विकारो नामधेयं मृत्तिका इति एव सत्यम्॥’ “Just as, my dear, everything made of clay [e.g., a clay pot] is known through this one lump of clay, being a modification (vikāra) in name only (nāmadheya), based on words (vācā-ārambhaṇa), the ‘clay’ alone is their reality (satya).”
‘यथा सोम्य एकेन लोह-मणिना सर्वं लोहमयं विज्ञातं स्याद् वाचा-आरम्भणं विकारो नामधेयं लोहितम् इति एव सत्यम्’ “Just as, my dear, everything made of metal (loha – often referring to either iron, copper, or gold) is known through this one lump of metal, being a modification in name only, based on words, the ‘metal’ alone is their reality.” (Chāndogya Up. 6.1.4–5) ::
.

It is language itself, the vehicle of the mind, that forms the divisions of everything known and unknown in the entire universe by naming and categorizing. The expression of everything being only a name (nāmadheya) is the basis of the later expression of everything being only names and forms (nāma-rūpa). Here, the forms (rūpas) are simply the phenomenal sense perceptions, not separate from their word-names that occur in the mind, because of the way the senses and mind are made. This same expression, nāma-rūpa, can as well be taken as “whose form/nature (rūpa) is but a name (nāman).”

Because of our human ability of naming by way of our many languages by different humans, in different circumstances, in varying perspectives with different sense acuities and language associations, the various forms of the universe are conceived quite different from each other. What to speak of how different these forms are from the perspective of the countless other creatures (from dolphins to insects) whose minds and thus languages, so to speak, are incomparably different. Being subject to countless, changing perspectives in time and place, and so without a single definitive form to be found anywhere – otherwise called being indefinable (a-nirvacanīya), not categorically and absolutely definable – then this universe is understood in this teaching as more a fiction, a mere appearance (māyā),
:: ‘रूपं रुपं प्रतिरुपः बभूव तद् अस्य रूपं प्रतिचक्षणाय। इद्रः मायाभिः पुरु-रूपः ईयते युक्ताः हि अस्य हरयः शताः दश’ “‘Lord (Indra) was the reflection in every form, for revealing that form of His. By appearances (māyās) [in the senses of individuals] the Lord (Indra) is taken as multi-formed, because of His harnessed hundreds of ten horses (haris) [i.e., the ten organs of action and knowledge]’ (Ṛg Veda 6.47.18).
‘इति अयं वै हरयोऽयं वै दश च सहस्राणि बहूनि च अन्-अन्तानि च’ “He indeed is the horses [the organs], He indeed is the ten and the thousands [of creatures], many and countless.” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 2.5.19).
‘स्वप्न-जागरिते स्थाने हि एकम् आहुः मनीषिणः। भेदानां हि समत्वेन प्रसिद्धेन एव हेतुना॥’ “The wise say the dream and waking worlds are the same, because there is a well-known, logical similarity of their different objects.”
‘आदौ अन्ते च यन न अस्ति वर्तमानेऽपि तत् तथा। वितथैः सदृशाः सन्तः अ-वितथाः इव लक्षिताः॥’ “[Namely] what is not there before and after is in that same way [i.e., not there] in the present also. Those [objects in the waking world] are regarded [by the unwise] as not false, [even] while being similar [in nature] to the false [mirages, etc.] [which are also unreal even during their appearance].”
‘स-प्रयोजनता तेषां स्वप्ने विप्रतिपद्यते। तस्माद् आदि-अन्तवत्त्वेन मिथ्या एव खलु ते स्मृताः’ “[Additionally] their having a [real, i.e., lasting] utility is contradicted in dream [e.g., despite a supposedly real evening meal that satisfies hunger, one can then dream one is starving]. Therefore, by having a beginning and an end, they are taught (smṛta) to indeed exist falsely (mithyā).” (Māṇḍūkya Up. Kārikā 2.5 through 7).”
‘कल्पयति आत्मना आत्मानम् आत्मा देवः स्व-मायया। सः एव बुध्यते भेदान् इति वेदान्त-निश्चयः’ “The shining self imagines (kalpayati) itself by itself via its own māyā. It alone knows the different objects. This is the determination of the Vedāntas (i.e., Upaniṣads).” (Māṇḍūkya Up. Kārikā 2.12) ::
. Because we can change our perspective about anything and everything, then no one perspective about any object or any thought can define or limit what is truly reality.

Language and imagination can imprison, by way of error, one who is ignorant of realities, but has no power to imprison one who no longer is ignorant of realities. So, though language and imagination do not in fact hinder a person, are a-kliṣṭa, finally, it is only ignorance, and what sustains ignorance, that hinders a person.


 
←PrevNext→
[nidrā – sleep; vṛtti – mental state; ālambana – based; pratyaya – cognition; a-bhāva – absence.]

अ-भाव-प्रत्यय-आलम्बना स्व-काले विशेष-भाव-प्रत्यय-रहिता अ-विद्या-कारण-शरीर-अ-व्यक्त-रूपा वृत्तिः निद्रा नाम॥ –
“Sleep (or Deep Sleep) is a state that relies on the absence of cognition, devoid of specific cognitive impressions at a particular time, and is the manifestation of ignorance in the form of one’s unmanifest-form (kāraṇa-śarīra) caused by ignorance.”

Sleep in moderation does not hinder progress, but excessive sleep and certainly absent-mindedness in one’s activities may hinder progress in
:: ‘योगः अस्ति…न च अति-स्वप्न-शीलस्य’ “Yoga is not there for one who sleeps too much.” (Bh. Gītā 6.16) ::
. But sleep here should not be understood as the physiological condition of resting; it is rather the cognitive state of the mind that occurs during dreamless sleep, when the mind does not manifest any thought. Later we will see that a clear understanding of sleep, of the reality therein, helps one’s progress in
:: ‘यत्र सुप्तः न कञ्चन कामं कामयते न कञ्चन स्वप्नं पश्यति तत् सुषुप्तम्। सुषुप्त-स्थानः एकी-भूतः प्रज्ञान-घनः एव आनन्दमयः हि आनन्द-भुक् चेतो-मुखः प्राज्ञः तृतीयः पादः’ “Where the one who is asleep neither desires any object nor sees any dream, that is deep sleep. Whose world is the deep sleep, who has [therein] become one as pure cognition alone [without an object], who is peaceful as an enjoyer of the peace [of oneself] [via the absence of disturbance], who is the portal to the experience [of the other two worlds: dream and waking] – this one is [called] prājña and is the third quarter [of Om and of ātman].” (Māṇḍūkya Up. 5) ::
.


 
←PrevNext→
[smṛti – memory; a-saṃpramoṣa – not losing; viṣaya – object; anubhūta – experienced before.]

अनुभूत-विषय-अ-संप्रमोषः अन्य-वृत्ति-विषय-अनुरूप-प्रत्यादानं संस्कार-द्वारेण वृत्तिः स्मृतिः नाम॥ –
“Memory is the mental state that involves the retention of experienced subjects without forgetting, and the retrieval of impressions in accordance with other mental activities, through the influence of past impressions (saṃskāras).”

Memory is not a form of new knowledge, but is just the bringing up of the subject matter of a prior knowledge or prior experience, imagined or otherwise, stored in the mind (see Appendix - Nature of the Mind). Memory is required to progress in yoga since it is what keeps the teaching at the forefront of one’s understanding of everything in one’s universe. Remembered erroneous conclusions and falsified imaginations need to be re-evaluated and dropped in the light of new knowledge.

Simply remembering the teaching, though useful, is not the goal of yoga. The teaching has to be converted to knowledge (pramāṇa), not to just a parroting, out loud or to oneself, of the mere words of the teaching. This is why memory is here listed as different from pramāṇa.

Later it will be shown that memory is the nature of the past, while imagination is the nature of the future. The present is the realm of knowledge, error and sleep. That knowledge and the essence (the reality) of the present are one and the same (see comm. on YS.4.12 & 19). This is the nature of the teaching – it keeps getting deeper into the nature of reality around and within us, until clarity within the one reality that encompasses and includes all is one’s presence.


 
←PrevNext→
[tad-nirodha – discipline of these; abhyāsa
:: ‘स्व-देहम् अरणि कृत्वा प्रणवं च उत्तर-अरणिम्। ध्यान-निर्मथन-अभ्यासाद् देवं पश्येत् निगूढवत्’ “Making one’s mind the fire-making block of wood and praṇava (i.e., Om) the upper churning stick, by the repetition (abhyāsa) of churning which is contemplation (dhyāna), the shining self (deva) becomes evident, as though [previously] hidden within.” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 1.14).
‘आत्मानम् अरणिं कृत्वा प्रणवं च उत्तर-अरणिम्। ज्ञान-निर्मथन-अभ्यासात् पापं दहति पण्डितः’ “Making one’s mind the fire-making block of wood and praṇava the upper churning stick, by the repetition (abhyāsa) of churning which is knowledge (jñāna), the wise burn their karma demerit.” (Kaivalya Up. 1.11).
‘मनो दुर्-निग्रहं चलम्। अभ्यासेन तु कौन्तेय वैराग्येण च गृह्यते’ “The mind is fleeting and difficult to master. But, O Arjuna, with repetition (abhyāsa) and with non-attachment (vairāgya), it is mastered.” (Bh. Gītā 6.35) ::
; vai-rāgya
:: ‘अ-विद्यायां बहुधा वर्तमानाः वयं कृत-अर्थाः इति अभिमन्यन्ति बालाः। यत् (=यस्मात् एवं) कर्मिणः न (तत्त्वं) प्रवेदयन्ति रागात् तेन आतुराः क्षीण-लोकाः च्यवन्ते’ “Continuing variously in ignorance, the immature boast ‘we have attained the goal.’ Since engaged in activities, they do not try to gain knowledge due to attachment (rāga). Suffering afflictions because of that, they fall back when [what it took to gain] their world (loka) [i.e., their human embodiment, heaven, etc.] is exhausted.” (Muṇḍaka Up. 1.2.9) ::
.]

अभ्यास-वैराग्याभ्याम् अभ्यासस्य वैराग्यस्य च द्वारेण तद्-निरोधः चित्त-वृत्ति-निरोधः (YS.3.50)॥ –
“Through practice (abhyāsa) and detachment (vairāgya), the mastery of the (unhelpful) thoughts in the mind occurs (YS.3.50).”

Both abhyāsa (repetition) and vairāgya (non-attachment) will be defined in the following sūtras. What is to be repeated and how, plus the nature and importance of non-attachment will be fully dealt with in the rest of the sūtras.

Initially, these two are repetition of what helps (a-kliṣṭa) one’s progress in yoga, and non-attachment to what hinders (kliṣṭa). Ultimately, it requires non-attachment to even what previously helped one’s progress, but later stands in the way. This discipline, which is yoga, brought about by repetition and non-attachment, becomes the contemplation described shortly.

The goal of this discipline, of yoga, is oneself free of errors in thinking due to ignorance of one’s essential nature. But, unless yoga is taken as the end, as knowledge itself, what is only a means is just that – a means. It should not be taken as the end in itself. This is why people can get stuck in doing yoga and remain unfulfilled thinking there is nothing more. What is more is the ultimate goal of yoga, for which yoga is just a means that should be used until the goal is reached. Finally, one needs to be non-attached to yoga in order to arrive at one’s ultimate goal of freedom (YS.3.50).


 
←PrevNext→
[abhyāsa – repetition; yatna – effort; sthiti – remaining; tatra – in that.]

तत्र निरोधे, स्थितौ दृक्-स्व-रूप-अवस्थान-अर्थ-साधने यत्नः मानसः उत्साहः अभ्यासः नाम॥ –
“In that state of mastery (of unhelpful thoughts), the effort of the mind, enthusiasm, and practice (abhyāsa) are directed towards staying in the true form of the seer, in the purpose of realizing the truth of one’s existence.”

 
←PrevNext→
[tu – but; saḥ – it; āsevita – thoroughly attended to; sat-kāra – utmost respect; nais-antarya – no interruption; dīrgha-kāla – long time; dṛḍha-bhūmi – firm success.]

सः अभ्यासः तु दीर्घ-काल-नैरन्तर्य-सत्-कार-आसेवितः यावत् पर्याप्तं निर्-अन्तरं योग-साधन-श्रद्धया आसेवितव्यः, तावत् दृढ-भूमिः अवस्थान-समाप्तिः, प्रज्ञा अ-विप्लवा इत्यर्थः (YS.2.26)॥ –
“That practice (abhyāsa), when done with continuity and dedication over a long enough period of time, should be pursued with unwavering faith in the method until it becomes sufficiently firm and unbroken. Then, the stable foundation is established, the practice is completed, and wisdom becomes unshakable (YS.2.26).”

Sat-kāra (utmost respect) refers to śraddhā (trust in the words of the teaching and the teacher) (YS.1.20), rather than just politeness or reverence. It is taking the teaching, the discipline, as sat (true, fact). The teaching is not some unapproachable, divine mystery at which one can only bow. It being true or in keeping with the truth, one just undertakes this discipline, and it will provide its benefit in keeping with one’s karma. It is this approach to yoga that distinguishes yogins from academicians, the merely curious, or those who like to exercise in groups, or to have some quiet time.


 
←PrevNext→
[vai-rāgya – non-attachment; saṃjñā – known; vaśī-kāra – mastery; vitṛṣṇa – desire; viṣaya – objects; dṛṣṭa
:: ‘ध्यायतः विषयान् पुंसः सङ्गः तेषु उपजायते। सङ्गात् सञ्जायते कामः कामात् क्रोधः अभिजायते॥’ “For a person who mentally dwells on objects, attachment to them arises; from attachment arises desire [i.e., requirements in order to be happy and anticipations of their fruition]; from [thwarted] anticipations arises anger;”
‘क्रोधाद् भवति सम्मोहः सम्मोहात् स्मृति-विभ्रमः। स्मृति-भ्रंशाद् बुद्धि-नाशः बुद्धि-नाशात् (पुमान्) प्रणश्यति’ “…from anger is delusion [i.e., error in judgment]; from delusion is lapse of memory; from lapse of memory is lapse of intellect; from lapse of intellect [what distinguishes the human condition] the person is destroyed [i.e., the unique human opportunity to attain what is truly beneficial is completely wasted, and the person remains in saṃsāra (the life of unbecoming becoming)].” (Bh. Gītā 2.62–63) ::
; ānuśravika – repeatedly heard from
:: ‘याम् इमां पुष्पितां वाचं प्रवदन्त्य् अ-विपश्चितः। वेद-वाद-रताः पार्थ न अन्यद् अस्ति इति वादिनः॥’ “O Arjuna, the unwise – who remain engrossed in [the bulk of] the words of the Vedas [dealing with heaven-going, and gaining power, wealth, and progeny], arguing that there is nothing more,”
‘काम-आत्मानः स्वर्ग-परा जन्म-कर्म-फल-प्रदाम्। क्रिया-विशेष-बहुलां भोग-ऐश्वर्य-गतिं प्रति’ “…who are full of desires [i.e., requirements/anticipations] and who hold heaven as primary – they spout flowery discourse full of special rituals [directed] toward gaining power and objects of consumption, [but] yield [further] birth as a result of their actions.” (Bh. Gītā 2.42–43) ::
.]

दृष्ट-अनुश्रविक-विषय-वितृष्णस्य लौकिक-अ-लौकिक-विषय-रागस्य वशी-कार-संज्ञा स्वा-तन्त्र्य-आख्या वैराग्यं नाम॥ –
Vairāgya (detachment) is the renunciation of attachment to both worldly and otherworldly objects, caused by the dispassion for objects experienced through direct perception and scriptural hearing. It is the control (the reins) over the passions, and is also known as self-sufficiency or independence.”

The scripture (āgama or śruti) talks not only about complete freedom, but also, while one is still within the throws of duality, how to make the best of it in a way that does not hinder your progress, your maturity, in the long run. The scripture’s view of the long run is over innumerable lifetimes. Just to finally come to the teaching found in this tradition is said to take a cosmically long time. Once you get to the teaching, though, final maturity can come quickly enough. This will be discussed shortly. Along the way, relatively short term rewards are mentioned for living a life that is in keeping with this maturing process. This maturing process is living a life of universal values (dharma), gaining a cosmic perspective on life and the universe, and engaging in certain prayers and acts that have special efficacy, not otherwise known than through scripture.

These are not rewards given by the scripture or overseen by the sages who revealed the scripture. These are rewards inherent in the intelligent cosmic order of the universe, the manifestation of the Lord. They are seen to be as natural and objective as are the laws of science. These rewards, such as heaven, are all temporary, though a stay there may last for ages. If there is a going up, there will be a return, and around the cycle one goes.

How could it make sense that one gets an everlasting heaven or an everlasting hell based on the actions or beliefs in the few years of one’s life? In this tradition, you only get what you have earned, no more and no less – the amount and type of earned karma you cashed in determines the length and quality of your vacations in hell or heaven, like the mental quality of your days mostly determines the quality of your nightly dreams. These scriptures are objective and reasonable even in their spirituality.

The student addressed here, as well as the student addressed in the Bhagavad Gītā, is the one who has been on that up and down track for eons, and now chooses to get off. Consumerism, even on the spiritual side, can ensnare the human heart only so long. Eventually one discovers that it is complete freedom that one really wants, and will finally satisfy. This discovery takes vairāgya (non-attachment).

Vairāgya (non-attachment) is not absence of desire or lack of passion, as often translated. This sūtra clearly states that vairāgya is a mastery over desires, not their absence. When at peace by not being overpowered by desire (rāga) and aversion (dveśa), two of the kleśas (afflictions) (YS.2.7–8), the mind naturally has clarity (prasāda). When agitated and overpowered by desire and aversion, it is said to have color (rāga) – the mind is as though stormy red or foreboding black. The mastery over this coloring is vairāgya (literally, the state of not being colored/affected).

The discipline is not avoiding agitation, desires, or aversions. This will surely fail, since the circumstances that can trigger these kleśas are situations and objects outside of one’s control. One has to cultivate a discipline of mind which will render stressful, desirable, or adverse situations and objects impotent. With eyes open, come what may – what comes being what naturally comes according to one’s karma – one remains at peace.

Another word for vairāgya is non-affectment, not allowing external situations and objects to control, to affect, your mind without your permission. So you, that is, your understanding of yourself and the world, have charge (vaśī-kāra) of your mind, not the other way around. The understanding of the nature of objects, the mind, and the true nature of oneself which this teaching unfolds, when held in a clear mind with the aid of the practices in these pages, will provide this mastery.


 
←PrevNext→
[tat-para – ultimate of that;
:: ‘यः (देवः) च स्व-भावं (=प्रकृति-भावं) पचति विश्व-योनिः पाच्यान् च सर्वान् परिणामयेत् यः। सर्वम् एतद् विश्वम् अधितिष्ठति एकः गुणान् च सर्वान् विनियोजयेत् यः॥’ “[The Lord, the deva] who is the source of the universe, who ripens itself [i.e., the prakṛti within it] [into manifestation], who matures all those fit to be matured [according to their karma], and who provides all the guṇas (constituents and their characteristics) – this one presides in this entire universe.”
‘गुण-अन्वयः (तु) यः (जीवः) फल-कर्म-कर्ता कृतस्य तस्य सः च उपभोक्ता। सः विश्व-रूपः त्रि-गुणः त्रि-वर्त्मा प्राण-अधिपः (एव) सञ्चरति स्व-कर्मभिः’ “…[Whereas] the [individual] who identifies with the guṇas, who takes oneself alone [instead of the Lord] as the creator and enjoyer of the results of that action, wanders [in saṃsāra] as every form [thus identified with] consisting of the three guṇas within the three paths [up to heavens, across to human births, or down to lower births], according to one’s own actions, ruling [only] one’s own life.” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 5.5 and 7) ::
– non-attachment to the three constituents of all of nature; khyāti – discernment;
:: ‘सः ह उवाच गार्ग्यः, यः एव असौ आदित्ये पुरुषः एतम् एव अहं ब्रह्म उपासे इति, सः ह उवाच अजात-शत्रुः मा मा एतस्मिन् संवदिष्ठाः…’ “Gārgya said, ‘That puruṣa who is in the sun [as its being] I worship as reality (brahman).’ Ajāta-satru replied, ‘No, do not talk about this [which I already know]’…” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 2.1.2 …to end of the Chapter in 2.1.20).
‘सः वै अयं पुरुषः सर्वासु पूर्षु पुरिशयः न एनेन किञ्चन अनावृतं न एनेन किञ्चन अ-संवृतम्’ “That indeed is puruṣa, who resides in the body (puri-śaya) in all compounds (purs) [i.e., in all bodies as their ruler and being]. There is nothing that is not covered by [i.e., included in] this [puruṣa].” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 2.5.18) ::
– self.]

तद्-परं वैराग्य-प्रकृष्टं पुरुष-ख्यातेः गुण-पुरुष-विवेक-ज्ञानात् गुण-वैतृष्ण्यम् (YS.2.21)॥ –
“The ultimate detachment (vairāgya) arises from the knowledge of the distinction between the Guṇas (modes of nature) and the Puruṣa (the self), and the dispassion (i.e. objectivity) for the Guṇas. This is attained through the realization of the true nature of the self (YS.2.21).”

Non-attachment culminates within the knowledge that I am this limitless reality which is one without a second. Its culmination is also the same knowledge that what appears is but the reality that I am. In the wake of this knowledge, all objects – here indicated by the term guṇas – are known to be nothing more than their appearance to my five senses within my awareness (YS.2.21). The objects come and go, and I remain the same reality, not in need of them for my existence (though this temporary body and mind complex has basic needs), or for my fulfillment. With them I am complete; without them I am complete. This is a fully assimilated non-attachment towards all.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃprajñāta – deliberative; anugama – appropriately following;
:: This word, rūpa (a form), is missing in some manuscripts ::
; vitarka
:: ‘आगमस्य अ-विरोधेन ऊहनं तर्कः उच्यते’ “Reasoning not in opposition to scripture (āgama) is called tarka.” (Amṛta-nāda Up. 17) ::
; vicāra – inquiry; ānanda
:: ‘विज्ञानम् आनन्दं ब्रह्म, रातिः-दातुः पर-अयणम्, तिष्ठमानस्य तद्-विदः इति’ “Reality (brahman) is knowledge (vijñāna) and fullness (ānanda), the ultimate goal of the one who gives oblation and of the one who abiding [therein] knows that [reality].” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 3.9.28.7).
‘एषः अस्य परमः आनन्दः…एतस्य एव आनन्दस्य अन्यानि भूतानि मात्राम् उपजीवन्ति॥’ “…‘This is its limitless fullness (ānanda). The beings who [take themselves] as other (anya) survive upon a limited measure (mātra) of this fullness (ānanda).”
‘सः एकः ब्रह्म-लोके आनन्दः यः च श्रोत्रियः अ-वृजिनः अ-काम-हतः, अथ एषः एव परमः आनन्दः, एषः ब्रह्म-लोकः, सम्राट् इति ह उवाच याज्ञवल्क्यः’ “…That is the one complete (eka) fullness (ānanda) in the world of brahman, [which is the same fullness of] the one who is steeped in this teaching (śrotriya), who is without fault and untouched by desire (a-kāma-hata). Now this is the ultimate fullness (ānanda). This [fullness] is the world which is brahman, O king,’ said Yājña-valkya.” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 4.3.32–33).
‘सत्यं ज्ञानम् अन्-अन्तं ब्रह्म’ “Brahman is limitless[ness] (an-anta) reality (satya), knowledge (jñāna).” (Taittirīya Up. 2.1.1).
‘रसः वै सः। रसं हि एव अयं लब्ध्वा आनन्दी भवति’ “That indeed is the essence (rasa) [of everything, of names and forms], because having attained this essence (rasa) one is complete (ānandin).” (Taittirīya Up. 2.7.1).
‘स एकः ब्रह्मणः आनन्दः। श्रोत्रियस्य च अ-काम-हतस्य’ “This is the one complete (eka) fullness (ānanda) of Lord Brahman, and of the one who is steeped in this teaching (śrotriya) and untouched by desire (a-kāma-hata).” (Taittirīya Up. 2.8.1).
‘आनन्दं ब्रह्मणः विद्वान्। न बिभेति कुतश्चन इति’ “The one who knows the fullness of [i.e., who is] brahman does not fear of anything.” (Taittirīya Up. 2.9.1) ::
; asmitā – the sense of “I am.”]

वितर्क-विचार-आनन्द-अस्मिता-रूप-अनुगमात् आनन्द-सत्-स्व-रूप-द्वि-विषयोः अनुश्रुति-वितर्केन श्रुति-विचारेन च द्वि-रूपाभ्याम् अनु-प्रत्यय-अभ्यासात् संप्रज्ञातः स-वितर्क-स-विचार-प्रज्ञातः नाम समाधिः॥ –
Samādhi with reasoning (sa-vitarka), via scriptural deliberation (vicāra) on bliss (ānanda) and on self-identity (asmitā), is called Samprajñāta where both the knowledge of bliss and the knowledge of one’s true nature are pursued. This is attained through listening to the teaching, reasoning, and reflecting on the two (bliss and one’s self).”

The terms vitarka (reasoning) and vicāra (inquiry) connect to the second and third means of knowledge available in contemplation, namely, anumāna (indirect knowledge, inference) and āgama (scripture), respectively. The first means of knowledge, pratyakṣa (sense perception and perception of mental states) is not employed in contemplation, though some modern instructors bring in pratyakṣa, such as incense fragrance, Indian music, invoking emotions, etc. The preparation within the seat of contemplation here will instead involve the withdrawal of the senses, called pratyāhāra (YS.2.54). If pratyakṣa is continued in contemplation, then pratyāhāra has not been completed.

One is not gathering information or figuring out what is true or not in contemplation. Instead, one is re-viewing what one already understands so it is more fully appreciated and assimilated with certitude.

The type of samādhi in this sūtra is what we normally understand as contemplation. It involves reasoning and instruction from the scripture. It is not the initial questioning, reasoning, and instruction themselves, though, since these would have already been attended to in first exposing oneself to the teaching and then thinking over how it applies in clearing all possible doubts, called śravaṇa (listening) and manana (understanding), respectively.

In the contemplation here, it involves just a few words to bring to mind what one knows from these words to help get past some mental obstacle to one’s assimilation of this teaching (2.33–34). It involves the two essential aspects of oneself – sat (existence) and ānanda (fullness). I exist without limit, and I am completely satisfied. These two go straight to the fruit of this knowledge, namely, my existence is without limit, is without loss or destruction, and my fulfillment is without limit and always available. This appreciation starts with seeing the logical fallacy in the notions I have about myself as being this or that thought in my mind. It then moves on to what the teaching says about the essential me. It culminates in the subsequent form of samādhi – “I am the witness that is limitless existence-fullness.”

The forms of this contemplation are to be appropriately followed, in that they should be in keeping with the teaching, with the appropriate means of knowledge. The teaching is the āgama (scripture) with reasoning based on the scripture and which supports the scripture. These forms of contemplation are thus grounded in a proven teaching tradition and in reality.

The word samādhi means that in which (everything) resolves (samādhīyate yasmin iti samādhiḥ). Samādhi is not in any sense a stopping of the mind, since there is no real resolution in temporarily stopping something. It is instead resolving (pralaya) everything including the mind as non-limitations into the limitless reality of oneself. Preceded by inquiry into the goal of yoga that is the unafflicted puruṣa as the nature of oneself, contemplation is the employment of the reasoning and deliberation therein to bring this inquiry into focus, and then remaining there to appreciate and assimilate the truth of oneself. The only resolution that can happen in contemplation is the resolving of the doubts and other forms of obstacles that has kept one from appreciating the fruit of this inquiry. The inquiry results in clarity in the knowledge of oneself, the witness, as limitless, fulfilling existence. One’s psychological baggage that seems to stand in the way of appreciating this truth is then laid bare to be dismissed (sub-rated) in the light of this clear knowledge.

This is the samādhi presented here. The mental obstacles to freedom are what are destroyed here. There is no imagined destruction of karma linkage that then prevents the mind from restarting again after samādhi. This latter, popular interpretation of a mechanical destruction of the mind within samādhi is a result of being hand-cuffed by a limited philosophy of duality. Duality is where the mind is believed to be as real as the self, therefore is a real problem that has to be overcome, and so must be mechanically destroyed in order for the self to surface and be free.

But, since here the overcoming is by prajñā (knowledge), there can be no mechanical destruction. The only destruction that knowledge can do is the destruction of ignorance. Knowledge cannot destroy what is a fact; it is simply for revealing what is the fact. This discerning of the difference between the results of action and the results of knowledge is essential in gaining clarity on the proper means in this endeavor.


 
←PrevNext→
[anya – other; pūrva – preceded; abhyāsa – repetition; virāma – quietude; pratyayas – cognitions; saṃskāras – latent tendencies; śeṣa – remain.]

विराम-प्रत्यय-अभ्यास-पूर्वः संप्रज्ञात-समाधि-प्रत्यय-अभ्यास-पूर्वः सन् तद्-प्रत्यय-प्रतिरोधे संप्रज्ञात-जन्य-शमे सति अपि च संस्कार-शेषः पश्चात् अ-विद्या-बीज-जन्य-तनु-विच्छिन्न-आदि-व्यक्त-संस्कारवान् (YS.2.3–4) अन्यः अ-संप्रज्ञातः नाम समाधिः इत्यर्थः, तस्मात् अयं समाधिः अपि क्षणिकः एव न तु निर्-बीज-समाधिः (YS.1.51)॥ –
“Before the practice of quietude of thought, there is the practice of the initial stages of samādhi, where there is still some resistance to the realization of that state. Even after the mental peace generated by the practice of samādhi, the impressions (saṃskāras) remain, and the root of ignorance continues, causing subtle impressions related to the body, mind, and the external world. This is called the a-samprajñāta samādhi, or the free of deliberation samādhi, which is different from the later seedless (nir-bīja) samadhi, which is a permanent state and free from all (self-ignorant) impressions (YS.2.3–4). Thus, this samādhi is temporary, not the seedless samādhi (YS.1.51).”

This samādhi is really just the result of the prior when the words within the prior samādhi drop and only their implied meaning abides. Their implied meaning is only oneself free of limiting identifications (sārūpya) with thoughts (1.3–4). So, here, there is only oneself. This dropping of words and quiet appreciation of being this limitless reality can happen without all doubts being cleared. Doubts, as manifestations of latent tendencies, may not arise at that time and so one gets a quiet – but temporary – resolution. Later, these doubts and their repercussions re-surface and again one will want to continue one’s contemplation.


 
←PrevNext→
[pratyaya – follows; bhava – birth; vi-dehas – subtle beings; prakṛti-layas – beings who have been absorbed in unmanifest nature.]

भव-प्रत्ययः संसार-चक्रे किम्-चिद्-जन्म-अनुगः अ-संप्रज्ञातः समाधिः वर्तते वि-देह-प्रकृति-लयानां किम्-चिद्-स्वर्गे देह-पतन-पश्चात् संप्रज्ञात-अभ्यासिकानां च प्रकृति-लये अ-वश्यं सर्व-जीवानां च॥ –
“Taking on a (re)birth (bhava-pratyaya) persists in the cycle of saṃsāra (the cycle of birth and death), leading to a certain birth in a form. The formless (a-samprajñāta) samādhi exists among those who are absorbed in the dissolution of bodiless nature (prakṛti) in some kind of heaven. After the fall from that state, the practitioners of samādhi who are absorbed in nature, must, without choice, return to the cycle of existence (saṃsāra) belonging to all beings.”

When the preceding contemplations end, if one continues to limit oneself and one’s reality to what one witnesses, this is because of the latent tendencies to assume that limiting ego thoughts are true. These tendencies are there because the fundamental ignorance, from which those tendencies are a manifestation, remains. A temporary samādhi is just another witnessed experience from which to grow.

Similarly, one may have this temporary samādhi while experiencing certain embodiments other than this current human embodiment. In some heavenly, subtle embodiments these pre-earned rewards are experienced. And, of course, during each period of universal dissolution, everyone’s mind is naturally absorbed.

This sūtra is simply to explain the traditional stories in the Indian epics and legends about certain individuals, yogis who, after their earthly bodies die, continue in the subtle realms of saṃsāra. These would include the ethereal siddhas (accomplished beings) mentioned in sūtra 3.32, though not all of these siddhas would necessarily be śrotriyas (exposed to and able to teach the methodology of this tradition). They may have been natural shamans who could easily go into a trance that could simulate an a-saṃprajñāta samādhi.


 
←PrevNext→
[itaras – the rest of us; pūrvaka – follows; śraddhā
:: ‘यदा वै श्रद्दधाति अथ मनुते, न अ-श्रद्दधन् मनुते, श्रद्दधद् एव मनुते, श्रद्धा तु एव विजिज्ञासितव्या इति, श्रद्धां भगवः विजिज्ञासे इति॥’ “‘When indeed one trusts (śraddadhāti), in this way one thinks. Not trusting, one does not [so] think. Trusting alone one thinks. So trust (śraddhā) itself is to be understood.’ – ‘Sir, I desire to know śraddhā.’“
‘यदा वै निस्तिष्ठति अथ श्रद्दधाति, न अ-निस्तिष्ठन् श्रद्दधाति, निस्तिष्ठन् एव श्रद्दधाति, निष्ठा (=तत्परत्वं) तु एव विजिज्ञासितव्या–’ “‘When indeed one is dedicated (nistiṣṭhati), in this way one trusts. Not dedicating [oneself], one does no trust. Dedicating alone one trusts. So dedication (niṣṭhā) itself is to be understood.’” (Chāndogya Up. 7.19.1 & 20.1) ::
; vīrya – tenacity; smṛti – memory; samādhi – contemplation; prajñā – assimilated knowledge.]

श्रद्धा-वीर्य-स्मृति-समाधि-प्रज्ञा-पूर्वकः अनुशासने श्रद्धा संवेगः मेधा च तद्-प्रत्यय-अभ्यास-जन्य-संप्रज्ञात-समाधिः च संप्रज्ञात-जन्य-अ-संप्रज्ञात-समाधिः च प्रज्ञायाः निर्-बीज-समाधिः च तैः योग-सिद्धिः इतरेषां इह एव मनुष्य-देहवताम्॥ –
“For the rest of us (itareṣām) here itself, with trust in the teaching, tenacity, memory of the teaching, contemplation, and assimilated knowledge as the discipline foundation there is success in yoga (yoga-siddhi) leading to nir-bīja samādhi.”

Notice here that the temporary form of samādhi, the a-saṃprajñāta samādhi, is not the final step for the path of the yogin. Prajñā (knowledge) is the final goal of yoga according to the progression indicated by Patañjali’s sequential ordering of these steps in the compound word śraddhā-vīrya-smṛti-samādhi-prajñā-pūrvaka.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃvega
:: ‘ब्रह्म-चर्यम् अ-हिंसां च अ-परिग्रहं च सत्यं च यत्नेन हे रक्षतः हे रक्षतः हे रक्षतः’ “Commitment to study (brahma-cārya), non-violence, renunciation, and truthfulness – O may you always observe (rakṣataḥ) [these] with effort.” (Āruṇeya Up. 3) ::
; tīvra – acute; āsanna – quickly succeeds.]

चित्त-वृत्ति-निरोध-अर्थः समाधिः तीव्र-संवेगानाम् आसन्नः प्रतिष्ठितः॥ –
Samādhi, which is the mastery of the thoughts in the mind, succeeds when there is acute tenacity in this pursuit.”


 
←PrevNext→
[tataḥ api – and thus; viśeṣa – distinction; mṛdu – weak; madhya – middling; adhi-mātratvas
:: ‘युक्तः कर्म-फलं त्यक्त्वा शान्तिम् आप्नोति नैष्ठिकीम्। अ-युक्तः काम-कारेण फले सक्तः निबध्यते’ “Giving up [the notion of control over] the result of action, the yogin attains a peace born of [the degree of] commitment; [whereas] not [committed to] yoga, attached to result(s) by the pressure of requirements, that one is bound.” (Bh. Gītā 5.12) ::
.]

तीव्रस्य मृदु-मध्य-अधि-मात्रत्वात्, ततः तारतम्यात् अपि विशेषः यत्न-भेदः॥ –
“Due to varying intensity, from intense to moderate and weak, there is a difference in one’s effort.”


 
←PrevNext→
[
:: The Sanskrit particle ‘’ expresses one of two meanings – the exclusive ‘or’ (vikalpa-artha) or the inclusive ‘and/or’ (samuccaya-artha). Its primary sense is the exclusive ‘or,’ the latter is secondary. The word ‘or’ in English is nearly always exclusive, whereas the English words ‘and,’ ‘also,’ and ‘besides’ are inclusive, meaning one may pick one or the other or both of what they conjunct. Quite often the difference between exclusive ‘or’ and inclusive ‘also’ in these sūtras is very important to understand.
Therefore, where in the following sūtras the word ‘’ contextually has only an exclusive sense, then we will deliberatively render the word as the exclusive ‘or,’ otherwise we will use the inclusive ‘also’ or ‘and’ ::
; Īśvara-praṇidhāna – contemplation on the
:: ‘वीत-राग-भय-क्रोधाः मन्मयाः माम् उपाश्रिताः। बहवः ज्ञान-तपसा पूताः मद्-भावम् आगताः’ “Freed from longing, fear, and anger, having taken refuge in Me [by] being Me alone, and purified by the discipline that is knowledge – many have attained My nature [i.e., complete freedom].” (Bh. Gītā 4.10) ::
.]

चित्त-वृत्ति-निरोधः अभ्यास-वैराग्याभ्यां प्रतिष्ठितः ईश्वर-प्रणिधानात् परम-पुरुष-ध्यानात् वा अपि॥ –
The mastery of (unhelpful) thoughts (citta-vṛtti-nirodha) is established through practice (abhyāsa) and detachment (vairāgya), or through surrender to the Lord (Īśvara-praṇidhāna) and meditation on the Ultimate Self (parama-puruṣa-dhyāna).”

The general principles within yoga practice have been given, namely, repetition (abhyāsa) of the practices presented in this text derived from scripture and non-attachment (vairāgya) to what hinders progress in yoga. What seems to hinder progress needs to be objectively reexamined and either reintegrated or dropped. Tenacity in these practices was indicated to impress upon the seeker their importance in succeeding quickly in yoga. Also stated were the initial and deeper levels within contemplation that lies at the core of yoga. These levels in contemplation will be further discussed in this chapter (sūtras 1.42 through 51). The source of the topics to contemplate (namely, scripture) as well as what to avoid (namely, error) were also indicated.

Now, specifically, which scriptural topics to contemplate upon are presented. The first and primary topic is the Lord, the eka-tattva (the one reality), since the Lord is the clearest and most inclusive way to understand the real nature of the puruṣa, oneself. We naturally think ourselves to be limited and identified with the body and mind. Therefore, to contemplate the limitless puruṣa, which is the reality one is, Patañjali suggests that we contemplate the Lord – in the way this tradition presents the Lord. This will be given in the next nine sūtras.


 
←PrevNext→
[Īśvara
:: ‘समं सर्वेषु भूतेषु तिष्ठन्तं परमेश्वरम्। विनश्यत्सु अ-विनश्यन्तं यः पश्यति सः पश्यति॥’ “The one who sees the Lord [Me] as remaining the same in all beings, and as not being destroyed among those [bodies] being destroyed – that one [alone] sees.”
‘समं पश्यन् हि सर्वत्र समवस्थितम् ईश्वरम्। न हिनस्ति आत्मना आत्मानं (=स्वेन एव स्वम्) ततः याति परां गतिम्’ “Because, seeing [Me] the Lord as remaining the same (sama) everywhere [as the self of all], one does not by oneself [i.e., through the mind] destroy [i.e., lose sight of] the self [since that self is the all-pervasive Me] and, hence, attains the ultimate end [i.e., the end of saṃsāra].” (Bh. Gītā 13.27–28) ::
; viśeṣa – characterized; puruṣa – self; a-parāmṛṣṭa – untouched; kleśas – afflictions; karma – action; vipāka – fruition; āśaya – store-house.]

क्लेश-कर्म-विपाक-आशयैः पञ्च-क्लेशैः कर्मभिः कर्म-विपाक-फलैः कर्म-फल-बीज-आशयेन च अ-परामृष्टः अ-संस्पृष्टः पुरुष-विशेषः पुरुष-निर्देशः उत्तम-पुरुषः वा, न तु पुरुष-भेदः ‘न इह नाना अस्ति किञ्चन,’ ‘येन आवृतं नित्यम् इदं हि सर्वं, ज्ञः काल-कालः गुणी सर्व-विद् यः’ इति-आदि-बहु-श्रुतेः (BrhU.4.4.19, SvetU.6.2) ईश्वरः कैवल्य-स्व-रूप-पुरुषः॥ –
“The Lord (Īśvara) – or the Ultimate Person (puruṣa-viśeṣa) – is characterized (viśeṣa) as untouched (a-parāmṛṣṭa) by the five afflictions (kleśas), and by action (karma) with its result (vipāka) and store-house (āśaya). This is the Ultimate Puruṣa – not just another or a special (viśeṣa) person – who is beyond all these. He is the one described in many scriptures as ‘There is no difference (separateness or diversity) whatsoever in It’ and ‘The one by whom all this is always enveloped, who is knowing (jña, the all) and knows everything (sarva-vid in detail), who is that which makes time time (kāla-kāla, the Lord of time), and who wields the guṇas (wields prakṛti)’ (BrhU.4.4.19, SvetU.6.2). Īśvara is the Puruṣa who is the very nature of freedom (Kaivalya).”

This is why the Lord is the puruṣa in its completely free nature and fullest understanding. Gaining knowledge of this puruṣa as one’s self is the goal of yoga. This is not the attainment of a God-like state or status, and this is not an imagination or wishful thinking that I will be similar or near to God. It is no less than the knowledge that I am exactly that limitless puruṣa.

The compound word puruṣa-viśeṣa can also mean the excellent puruṣa, the perfect puruṣa. This is exactly who the Lord is – the puruṣa understood in its perfect limitless nature. The Lord, then, is not a means for attaining one’s perfect nature; the Lord is one’s perfect nature. This bold truth reverberates across the scriptures, and should not be missed by any student of yoga.

The qualities we attribute to the Lord as the source, sustenance, and resolution of the cycles of the universe, of course, are applicable only in relationship to the Lord’s manifestation as the total, and not to our individual body-mind complexes. The essential nature of this Lord – not the Lord’s nature as we think of it through those cosmic attributes – is the limitless puruṣa, and that also is the essential nature of oneself as limitless reality.

The word viśeṣa often also means an adjective, a word to describe. Here, Īśvara (the Lord) when understood in its full implication is descriptive of the puruṣa. The term ‘Lord’ is the least limiting term, at least in this tradition, that one can give to reality, to the puruṣa. The Lord is the most accurately expansive description of inherently indescribable reality – reality that cannot be circumscribed in words, in notions.

When the compound puruṣa-viśeṣa, here, is rendered instead as the special puruṣa by a commentator or translator, then you know you are reading a dualist rendering of these sūtras. This dualist vision amounts to a notion about God as a separate being, better than you, of course. With this perspective, you could never be the completely free puruṣa that is the goal of yoga.

The dualist vision is naturally there for everyone, including those in the Abrahamic religions, the dualist sects within theist Hinduism, and even many neo-Vedāntins. By ‘neo-Vedāntins’ we mean those who filter and fit the scripture to seem more amenable to a secular or a Western spiritual seeking audience. They are often the ones who claim that all religions are the same, and represent Vedānta as another belief system with nothing too foreign, too threatening to other belief systems. For them, the Upaniṣads are not a unique means of knowledge, but are just an additional set of scriptures, perhaps as believable as others.

A motivated student, however, will discover the keys to the scripture and to him or herself through Vedānta and Patañjali’s vision as presented herein. One of the keys is relating the totality of the Lord in its essence to the essence that is the reality of the individual. Westerners would need to learn how to expand their understanding of a Lord to this fullest of extent, to encompass everything including oneself. The following sūtras and their commentary will help.

This fuller understanding of the Lord is also a means to a sense of universal community, social and ecological responsibility, and emotional health. These benefits will in turn help further mature the students so that their understanding of the Lord can finally expand to the identity of self and Lord. That identity is the resolution of the misconception of duality and isolation.


 
←PrevNext→
[tatra – in that; bīja – seed; sarva-jña
:: ‘एषः सर्व-ईश्वरः एषः सर्वज्ञः एषः अन्तर्-यामी एषः योनिः सर्वस्य प्रभव-अप्ययौ हि भूतानाम्’ “This is the Lord of all. This is the knower of all (sarva-jña). This is the ruler within (antar-yāmin). This is the womb (yoni), the source, and resolution of all beings.” (Māṇḍūkya Up. 6) ::
; nir-atiśaya – unsurpassed.]

तत्र ईश्वरे निर्-अतिशयं सर्व-ज्ञ-बीजं सर्व-ज्ञ-शक्तिः (MunU.1.1.9), सर्व-ज्ञातृत्वं (YS.3.49) चिति-शक्तिः (YS.4.34)॥ –
“There, in Īśvara (the Ultimate Puruṣa), is the ultimate seed of all knowledge, the power of all-knowing (MunU.1.1.9), the nature of being all-knowing (YS.3.49), and the power of pure consciousness (YS.4.34).”

In the scripture (āgama), the Lord is understood as the material and efficient cause of the universe, pervading the cycles of manifestation. By material cause is meant that the Lord is the very reality, the existence, (sat) of everything that manifests. No separate material is necessary for creation. There is no prakṛti or pradhāna (unmanifest and manifest Mother Nature) apart from this reality (sat). In this understanding, there is not even a creation, a separation of the created from a creator. There is only a manifestation of a universe to the senses from the perspective of each individual totally within the only reality which we call the Lord.

By efficient cause is meant that the Lord is the intelligence according to which this well-ordered manifestation occurs. The common example given for a material and efficient cause is the making of a clay pot. There, the clay itself is the material cause, and the intelligent potter is the efficient cause. In this example, the material and efficient causes are separate. The example where they are not separate is dreaming. You are the material of your dream world. Your dream world material does not exist apart from you, the dreamer. And you, as the intelligent dreamer, are the efficient cause of the dream.

The material (upādāna) and efficient (nimitta) cause (kāraṇa) of the universe is none other than that which the scriptures call the limitless Lord. All the intelligence (jñāna) expressed as the amazing order (dharma) of this particular universe, from the quantum to the celestial, is only an aspect, just one manifestation, of the intelligence (jñapti-svarūpa, the nature of the source of knowing, that expresses as intelligence) that is the Lord. It is this same jñapti-svarūpa that is the nature of one’s self, the nature of the witness-puruṣa, the sarva-jñātṛtva (the very nature of the knower of all, YS.3.49).

This may at first be an unexpected understanding of the Lord and the universe. The Lord and the universe and the self are not inherently separate things. Atheists and materialist scientists are accommodated in this sophisticated model. Here, the universe is but a reoccurring manifestation of the Lord. There is no separation between the universe and the Lord, any more than there can be separation between a clay pot and clay. There is one intelligence that accounts for both the manifestation of the pot and the manifestation of the universe. A Lord is not needed to explain the world; the manifestation of the world is nothing but what could be called a Lord. The ‘Lord’ is just a respectful name we give to the singular reality of everything and of oneself. You can call it the quantum soup of everything, if you include yourself as that soup and understand that all time and space is that soup, that reality. And within that soup, that reality, there can be no distinctions.

To a human being operating totally within the science of this one current manifestation, the appearance of the re-manifested universe from the unmanifest would naturally and scientifically look as if it were spontaneous. Within the model of our present science of multi-dimensional space and multiverses, it would not be necessary to postulate an external Lord. Nor does this scriptural tradition here in its purest form envision an external Lord.

The expression of the Lord in our spiritual lives, though, is not limited to explaining our scientific life. Our total human life includes science, community, empathy, and love. One can construct a scientific universe model that is without an external Lord, but one can also construct a scientific universe model that includes an intrinsic Lord as the only material and order of this universe, a highly unifying and satisfying principle. The Indian tradition says that science and Lord need not and cannot exclude one another.


 
←PrevNext→
[api – also; guru
:: ‘इमं विवस्वते योगं प्रोक्तवान् अहम् अव्ययम्’ “I [Kṛṣṇa, as the Lord] taught [in the beginning] this unchanging yoga to Vivasvat (the sun deity).” (Bh. Gītā 4.1) ::
; pūrvas
:: ‘(तद् परं ब्रह्म) ज्ञानं ज्ञेयं ज्ञान-गम्यं हृदि सर्वस्य विष्ठितम्’ “[This limitless reality (brahman)] is knowledge (jñāna), what is to be known, and the result to be attained by knowledge. It abides in the center (hṛd) of everything [and is to be known in this intellect].” (Bh. Gītā 13.17) ::
before; an-avaccheda – not limited; kāla
:: ‘पुरुषः एव इदं सर्वम्। यद् भूतम् यद् च भव्यम्। उत अ-मृतत्वस्य ईषानः’ “All this is puruṣa alone – whatever was and will be. It is the Lord of immortality.” (Puruṣa Sūkta, Ṛg Veda 10.90.2).
‘तद् एतद् ब्रह्म अ-पूर्वम् अन्-अपरम् अन्-अन्तरम् अ-बाह्यम्, अयम् आत्मा ब्रह्म सर्व-अनुभूः इति अनुशासनम्’ “That very reality (brahman) is without a prior and without a posterior, without an inside and without an outside. This reality (brahman) is the self (ātman) who experiences all (sarva-anubhū) [i.e., who according to their form exists as all]. This is the traditional teaching (anuśāsana).” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 2.5.19) ::
.]

सः ईश्वरः पूर्वेषां गुरूणाम् अपि प्राणिनाम् अपि गुरुः चिति-शक्ति-रूपेण ‘अन्तर्-यामी’ सन् (ManU.6) कालेन अन्-अवच्छेदात् ‘काल-कालः’ इति काल-स्व-रूपतया (SvetU.6.2)॥ –
“He, Īśvara, is also the Guru of all the previous teachers and living beings. As the embodiment of pure consciousness (citi-śakti), He is the ‘inner controller’ (antar-yāmī) (ManU.6). Being beyond time, He is referred to as ‘the time of time’ (Kāla-Kāla), representing the very nature of time itself (SvetU.6.2).”

That which is not limited by time, must also be free from space (ākāśa), since time and space (including the objects that change within space) are inseparable and mutually dependent aspects making up the
:: ‘सः ह उवाच यद् ऊर्ध्वं गार्गि दिवः यद् अवाक् पृथिव्याः यद् अन्तरा द्यावा-पृथिवी इमे यद् भूतं च भवच् च भविष्यच् च इति आचक्षते आकाशे तद् ओतं च प्रोतं च’ “He [Yājña-valkya] replied, ‘In space (ākāśa) [alone] is woven warp (ota) and woof (prota) [i.e., lengthwise and crosswise] [all] this, O Gārgī, which is above the heavens, below the earth, between the heavens and earth, and which they call the past, the present, and the future.’” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 3.8.4) ::
of the limiting adjunct (upādhi) we call the universe. The Lord is thus time-free and space-free. Whether time or space is there or not, the Lord, the unconditional existence itself, is there. The Lord is free from, yet sustains, the universe. Sustains here is the sense that the Lord alone is the reality and is the truth of the limited reality this universe enjoys. The Lord alone lends this universe its limited reality. Nothing can exist apart from reality, from the Lord, whereas reality is not dependent on or limited by any thing. Things have no reality apart from the reality the Lord lends them, but that loaned reality does not in turn limit the Lord, since the Lord alone is that
:: ‘मद्-स्थानि सर्व-भूतानि न च अहं तेषु अवस्थितः॥ न च मद्-स्थानि भूतानि…भूत-भृत् न च भूत-स्थः मम आत्मा भूत-भावनः’ “All beings exist in [i.e., are because of] Me, but I am not in [i.e., because of] them. [Yet] [as separate] beings they do not exist in Me. My self (ātman) produces [all] things [all names and forms], sustains [all] things, but does not exist in [i.e., is not dependent upon] these things.” (Bh. Gītā 9.4–5) ::
.

The dream is a very helpful example for loaned reality. We assign reality to the objects in our dream, but we are not circumscribed and made smaller by those dream objects. You think of them, and in that way alone they exist in dream. You think of them differently, and they change. No man-eating creature or horrendous catastrophe has ever succeeded in harming or destroying you, the dreamer and the waker. Only the dream changes or ends. The reality of these dream objects and experiences, including the role you play as an actor in the dream, resolves back into you the waker or deep sleeper, unscratched.

Dream appearances shine in the borrowed light of you the dreamer, and do not exist independent from you the dreamer, nor limit you the dreamer. You pervade and survive the dream, pervade and survive the deep sleep, and pervade and survive the waking world. You supersede all these. You outlast them as the reality that witnesses all states of experience, and are thus free from all sense of limitations. The ability to objectify sleep, dream, and waking in the light of the unchanging presence of the self underlying the three states is enough to support your understanding of your limit-less nature. No more or other experience, including thought-less samādhi, is required to assimilate this teaching.


 
←PrevNext→
[vācaka – expressive name; tasya – of that; praṇava – syllable
:: ‘प्रणवं हि ईश्वरं विद्यात् सर्वस्य हृदये स्थितम्। सर्व-व्यापिनम् ओंकारं मत्वा धीरः न शोचति’ “Know praṇava (i.e., Om) to be the Lord (Īśvara), present in the intellect of all. Knowing Om as the all-pervasive (Lord), the wise person does not grieve.” (Māṇḍūkya Up. Kārikā 1.28) ::
.]

तस्य ईश्वरस्य वाचकः प्रणवः ओम्-कारः॥ –
“The name of Īśvara is the primordial sound ‘Om’ (A-U-M).”

Om is presented and unfolded in the Upaniṣad scriptures as the limitless reality called brahman (literally, the big, from the Sanskrit verbal root bṛh,) and as the reality which is one’s self (ātman). Through its three component sounds a–u–m (a and u equaling o), on Om are super-imposed the three apparent states of oneself and all experience: waking-consciousness (a), dream-consciousness (u), and sleep-consciousness (m). A so-called “
:: ‘न अन्तः-प्रज्ञं न बहिः-प्रज्ञं न उभयतः-प्रज्ञं न प्रज्ञान-घनं न प्रज्ञं न अ-प्रज्ञम्।’ “They know the [so called] fourth (caturtha) [quarter of Om and of ātman] to be neither conscious of the internal [i.e., mind and the dream world], the external [i.e., external objects and the waking world] nor in between, nor a pure cognition alone (prajñāna-ghana) [without an object in deep sleep], neither conscious nor non-conscious,”
‘अ-दृश्यम् अ-व्यवहार्यम् अ-ग्राह्यम् अ-लक्षणम् अ-चिन्त्यम् अ-व्यपदेश्यम् एक-आत्म-प्रत्यय-सारं प्रपञ्च-उपशमं शान्तं शिवम् अ-द्वैतं चतुर्थं मन्यन्ते सः आत्मा सः विज्ञेयः’ “…neither seen, acted upon nor graspable, neither inferred, thought about nor describable [since] it is the essence of the cognition of the one self [in all three experiences of waking, dream, and deep sleep], in whom the universe resolves, peaceful and pleasing (śāntam śivam) [because it is] without a second. That is the self (ātman). That is what is to be known.” (Māṇḍūkya Up. 1.7) ::
” state of oneself is reality as consciousness itself, the silent basis before, during, and after those three – from which they are produced, in which they are sustained, and back into which (without having left) they resolve.

The student can keep in mind that the Upaniṣad tradition is the basis for Patañjali. Om is the name for brahman (limitless reality) in the Upaniṣads. Patañjali’s use of this name for the Lord clearly indicates that Patañjali is referring to the Lord in its limitless reality as brahman, not as the role of creator, sustainer, and resolver of the manifestations of the universe, nor simply as a God to be prayed to.

Consciousness

In the West, particularly within philosophy and psychology, the English word ‘consciousness’ is often used synonymously with (human) thought, self-conscious thought, mindfulness, or mind. Sometimes it is expressed as knowing that one knows. This is not how this commentary is using the word ‘consciousness’. Here, we are using it in the same way we find it in the reliable Vedānta texts, especially scripture translations. This is because the Vedānta scriptures present a unique understanding of the mind and knowledge that is not readily found in the West.

Here, initially, the word ‘consciousness’ should be understood in its natural grammatical sense (and this is why Vedāntins choose to use this word) so it better fits the Vedānta scriptures’ meaning of its terms – cit and caitanya. That grammatical sense is the -ness, both the essence and reality, of being conscious of. Multiple thoughts, experiences, or minds cannot be called ‘multiple consciousnesses’ – a word having a suffix that does not easily allow a plural form. So ‘consciousness’ is not an ideal word for what we all understand to be a thought or a mind. At best the word ‘consciousness’ could indicate a particular type of thought, such as thoughts about oneself in relationship to others. But this is nowhere near what Vedānta means by cit and caitanya. The Sanskrit term citta (literally, what is witnessed), which Patañjali uses throughout these sūtras and which certain Western scholars translate as consciousness, is rendered everywhere else in Sanskrit literature by native speakers as thought or mind, as it is here.

Caitanya (consciousness) is not the conscious or witnessed thoughts themselves, rather the witnessing-being of conscious thoughts. It is the conscious-ness; the witness of, or witnessing capacity for, thoughts. With this initial understanding, this commentary will expand the meaning of the word ‘consciousness’ to bring out its full meaning that indicates brahman, the unchanging reality revealed in the teaching on Om. With the same meaning, an alternate rendering of the terms cit and caitanya is the word ‘awareness.’ These two words – consciousness and awareness – will be used interchangeably.

Om is presented in this tradition as the entirety of language, hence of all knowledge and, in the final analysis, of everything, of everything distinguished and known to us through language and mind. The initial sound a is the simplest linguistic sound that can be made by opening and letting out breath from the back of the mouth without any other modification of the effort within the mouth. The linguistic sound u is that same sound modified by the rounding constriction of the last part of the mouth, the lips, as the breath is being expelled. The linguistic sound m is produced with the lips closed and the breath expelled out the nose. I am using the term ‘linguistic’ sound to indicate the sounds we use for language, not the other sounds we can make with the breath, such as expelling breath out of the mouth or nose while simply breathing.

The entirety of linguistic sounds the vocal apparatus can make is represented then by the range of modifications of the vibration sounds of the vocal cords from the back of the mouth to the front, from a to u. The only other linguistic sounds are those made with the nose, namely n and m. The linguistic sound m is the simplest of the nasals, requiring no effort in the mouth. The n sound with its variations requires the opening of the lips with some shaping of the mouth, though the breath is only out the nose.

In order for there to be language, there have to be separable words. By extension, the silence before and after words is represented by the silence between repetitions of Om. We will see in the following commentary that the entire diversity of the universe can be appreciated as the names we give to distinguish phenomenal appearances from each other.

In this way Om indicates the Lord, the entirety of experiences, the ultimate reality (brahman), all of language, all of knowledge, and the whole of the universe. Repeating this sound Om and contemplating upon it, upon its many meanings and on its meaning as oneself, addresses the central topic within the spiritual teaching tradition.

Care must be taken, though, because it may have gathered a power by its utterance through billions of repetitions over thousands of years. As a single word mantra it is traditionally recommended only to renunciates, sannyāsins, because its essential meaning resolves everything of language, knowledge, and the universe to their silent basis, their final resolution – the ultimate renunciation. For those of us who live a more active life in society, the sound Om is combined with other sacred words, such as the mantra, Om īśāya namaḥ meaning – Om, I surrender [the body, mind, and actions] to the universal Lord – which supports our most helpful actions and thoughts.


 
←PrevNext→
[japa – oral or mental repetition; tad – that; bhāvana – contemplation; tad-artha – its meaning.]

तद्-जपः ओम्-कार-जपः तद्-अर्थ-भावनम् ओम्-कार-अर्थ-श्रुति-व्याख्यान-ध्यानं च॥ –
“That practice (japa) involves the repetition of ‘Om’ (Om-kāra japa), the meditation on its meaning (artha-bhāvana), the listening to and contemplation of the meaning of ‘Om’ as explained in the scriptures.”

Your neighbour, unless he or she has studied the scripture, is probably not going to give you verbal testimony yielding knowledge about the meaning of Om. Only the scripture and its commentaries talk meaningfully and with authority about Om. This is why āgama pramāṇa, as scripture, is important to be correctly understood. It is not reasonable to think you can read a contemporary yoga book, close your eyes, repeat Om, and attain the ultimate non-dual goal of yoga.

The vast majority of the translations of and commentaries on these sūtras avoid the scriptures either because they do not understand them and their intimate connection with these sūtras, or the authors think the scriptures render yoga less marketable in secular societies.

The teachings about praṇava, about Om, are important enough to be given in many
:: Amṛta-bindu, Atharva-śikhā, Atharva-śira, Brahma, Chāndogya, Dhyāna-bindu, Kaivalya, Kāṭha, Maitrāyaṇa, Māṇḍūkya, Nāda-bindu, Nṛsiṃha-Pūrva-Tāpanīya, Nṛsiṃha-Uttara-Tāpanīya, Praṇava, Praśna, Rāma-Uttara-Tāpanīya, Śaunaka, Taittirīya, and Yoga-Tattva Upaniṣads ::
. This sūtra directs the student to them.


 
←PrevNext→
[tataḥ – from that; api – indeed; adhigama – comes to
:: ‘चतुर्-विधा भजन्ते मां जनाः सु-कृतिनः अर्जुन। आर्तः जिज्ञासुः अर्थ-अर्थी ज्ञानी च भरत-ऋषभ॥’ “Fourfold are the people who do adaptive action and who seek Me, O Arjuna. [These four kinds of bhaktas (devotees) are] the one who is seized by trouble, the one who requires security, the one who wants to know [Me], and the jñānin (one who knows) [Me], O Arjuna.
‘तेषां ज्ञानी नित्य-युक्तः एक-भक्तिः विशिष्यते। प्रियः हि ज्ञानिनः अत्यर्थम् (=अतिशयेन) अहं सः च मम प्रियः॥’ “Among them, the jñānin – who is always united [in Me] and whose worship (bhakti) is of the one [Lord as everything] – is distinguished, because I [the self of all] am totally beloved to that jñānin and that one is [totally] beloved to Me.”
‘उदाराः सर्वे एव एते ज्ञानी तु आत्मा एव मे मतम्। आस्थितः सः हि युक्त-आत्मा माम् एव अन्-उत्तमां गतिम्॥’ “All [four] indeed are exalted, but the jñānin is ātman (Myself) alone. That is My vision. Because that one, whose mind is absorbed [in Me], has attained the goal that is but Me, beyond which there is none.” (Bh. Gītā 7.16–18) ::
; cetana – conscious being; pratyak
:: ‘कश्चिद् धीरः प्रत्यग्-आत्मानम् ऐक्षद् आवृत्त-चक्षुः (=न हि बाह्य-विषय-आलोचन-परत्वम्) अ-मृतत्वम् इच्छन्’ “The one discriminating person, seeking freedom from death, who had directed the attention within [i.e., sought in terms of knowledge instead of possessions] came to know [as clear as seeing] (aikṣat) the self within (pratyak-ātman).” (Kaṭha Up. 2.1.1) ::
; ca – and; antarāyas – obstacles; a-bhāva – disappear.]

ततः ओम्-कार-ध्यानस्य प्रत्यक्-चेतन-अधिगमः आत्म-स्व-रूप-ज्ञानम् अपि अन्तराय-अ-भावः ज्ञान-प्रतिबन्ध-रूप-अन्तराय-नाशः ॥ –
“From that repetition of Om-kāra and its contemplation, one comes to know the true nature of the conscious being at the center of oneself, and there is removal of the obstacles to knowledge, in the form of mental impurities (jñāna-pratibandhas).”

By contemplation on the essential nature of the
:: ‘प्रशान्त-आत्मा (=प्रशान्त-मनाः) विगत-भीः ब्रह्म-चारि-व्रते स्थितः। मनः संयम्य मद्-चित्तः युक्तः आसीत मद्-परः’ “Being of clear mind, without fear, and firm in one’s vow of seeking brahman [i.e., brahma-cārya], mastering the mind – may the yogin sit, thinking of Me [through My teaching], having Me as the ultimate.” (Bh. Gītā 6.14) ::
, one comes to know the conscious being at the center of oneself, which is the
:: ‘ब्रह्म-विद् आप्नोति परम्।…सत्यं ज्ञानम् अन्-अन्तं ब्रह्म। यः वेद निहितं गुहायां परमे व्योमन् (=परमे व्योम्नि)। सः अश्नुते सर्वान् कामान् सह’ “The knower of brahman obtains the ultimate. …Brahman is limitless reality-consciousness. The one who knows the one existing [as though] hidden (nihita) in the intellect (guhā), in this limitless space [i.e., in this limitless expanse that lights up all thought therein], satisfies at once all desires.” (Taittirīya Up. 2.1.1).
‘तत् (सत्-ब्रह्म) त्वम् असि’ “That [brahman] you are.” (Chāndogya Up. 6.8.7…).
‘तद् इदम् अपि एतर्हि यः एवं वेद अहं ब्रह्म अस्मि इति सः इदं सर्वं भवति’ “So even now the one who knows ‘I am brahman,’ that one is all this [universe].” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 1.4.10) ::
. Grace is said to be attained by chanting the name of and by contemplating the nature of the Lord. That grace can be seen as the opportunity and motivation to come to terms with the facts of one’s spiritual and emotional growth. It may play a part in removing psychological and other obstacles to gaining this knowledge. The obstacles are the limitations we impose upon ourselves because we think we are limited. The Lord is the limitless presence that we are saying is our true nature and we are contemplating as already being in fact our own true nature. How could those obstacles not be attenuated by this practice (abhyāsa)? The obstacles are our well-ingrained imaginations about ourselves that we believe are true; they manifest as distractions of the mind and self-defeating thoughts that hinder our progress in yoga.

 
←PrevNext→
[te – those; antarāyas – obstacles; vikṣepas – distractions; citta – mind; vyādhi – dis-ease; styāna – lack of mental acumen; saṃśaya – doubt; pramāda – inattention; ālasya – laziness; a-virati – intemperance; bhrānti-darśana – erroneous understanding; a-labdha-bhūmikatva – not attaining success at the stages; an-avasthitatva – lack of stability.]

व्याधि-स्त्यान-संशय-प्रमाद-आलस्य-अ-विरति-भ्रान्ति-दर्शन-अ-लब्ध-भूमिकत्व-अन्-अवस्थितत्वानि व्याधिः स्त्यानं संशयः प्रमादः आलस्यम् अ-विरतिः भ्रान्ति-दर्शनम् अ-लब्ध-योग-भूमिकत्वं तद्-भूमिकत्व-अन्-अवस्थितत्वं च नव चित्त-विक्षेपाः ते अन्तरायाः प्रतिबन्धाः नाम॥ –
“Disease, dullness, doubt, inattention, laziness, lack of dispassion, erroneous understanding, inability to attain success of yoga, and not attaining success at the stages in one’s progress in yoga, and lack of stability at various stages of progress one has made in yoga – these are the distractions of the mind, known as antarāyas (obstacles or hindrances).”

 
←PrevNext→
[saha-bhū – arising together with; vikṣepa – distraction; duḥkha – sorrow; daurmanasya – despair; śvāsa – inhalation; praśvāsa – exhalation; aṅgam-ejayatva – causing agitation to the body.]

दुःख-दौर्-मनस्य-अङ्गम्-एजयत्व-श्वास-प्रश्वासाः चित्त-दुःखं च चित्त-दुस्-स्थ-भावं च देह-अङ्ग-वेपथुः च यस्मात् चञ्चल-अपानाः चञ्चल-प्राणाः च ते विक्षेप-सह-भुवः चित्त-विक्षेपैः सह प्रवर्तमानाः॥ –
“Arising together with these mental distractions are sorrow, despair, and unsteady inhalation and exhalation causing agitation to the body.

These two sūtras list twelve factors that distract the mind in this discipline. They are another expression of the five afflictions (kleśas). The scriptural literature has a number of ways of expressing the obstacles to gaining freedom in life. These two sūtras list many of them, however, the other sūtras tend to use the more succinct expression as the five kleśas – ignorance (a-vidyā), a possessive I-notion (asmitā), binding desire for (rāga) and against (dveṣa) objects and situations, and fear of death (abhiniveśa) (YS.2.3).

The detailed listing of the distractions here initiates a process in aspirants for addressing what they find most distracting from their goals, starting with health onwards. More importantly, these two sūtras connect those distractions that affect the body to the fact that they in turn affect the mind. This is where they become obstructions to yoga. One only needs adequate health to embark on this path. This is sometimes mistaken by those who believe that the body has to be perfected before meditation can even be taught or attempted.

Considering that traditionally one takes to the spiritual path fulltime in one’s later years as the final stage in life upon retirement – as a vāna-prastha (moving out of the family house to a private or public hermitage in the woods) or as a sannyāsin (a secluded or wandering renunciate) – imperfect health (flexibility, energy level, and so on) is not likely to have been seen as an unmanageable obstacle in yoga.


 
←PrevNext→
[tad-pratiṣedha-artha – for removing these; abhyāsa – repetition; eka-tattva – one reality.]

तद्-प्रतिषेध-अर्थम् अन्तराय-क्षय-अर्थम् एक-तत्त्व-अभ्यासः ईश्वर-एक-परम-तत्त्व-अर्थ-साधन-यत्नः॥ –
“For the purpose of preventing those disturbances and removing obstacles, the practice of keeping the mind on the one reality (eka-tattva) is the effort to understand the meaning of the ultimate, singular reality, which is Īśvara.”

Some commentaries and most translations weaken this eka-tattva by taking it to mean only one object of contemplation. But this will be completely addressed in Yoga Sūtras 1.35 & 39. On the other hand, the ultimate tattva (reality) – the Lord understood as the completely free puruṣa that is oneself – has already been introduced and said to be appreciated as the remover of obstacles in the preceding sūtra 1.29. That tattva, the completely free puruṣa, and not some one object of desire is the goal of kaivalya (liberation). Therefore, its importance here as the key to removing distractions, to removing unsteadiness of the mind and objective self-acceptance of all that occurs in the mind, which is the goal of samādhi and hence of yoga itself, has to be and is included here.

Yoga is a method for attaining a goal that is already possessed, for attaining the perfect nature of oneself. This already attained goal is not appreciated due to ignorance of that nature resulting in misidentifying oneself with the various beliefs and opinions in the mind. This method begins and ends with contemplating the already, always present ultimate nature of the self. At first it may be helpful to appreciate this as the Lord. Finally, it is appreciated as the real nature of oneself.

It is like finding out that you are a twin by having your long lost twin come to your door and first simply tell you and then explain how you are twins. Initially, since the person looks a lot like you, you can understand how that person might be your twin, but finally you end up appreciating that you are the twin to this person. You were a twin before you knew you were a twin. You become the twin by appreciating the very fact itself, nothing else.

Only listening to the knowledge, listening to the teaching, not any change to the self, is required on your part. Contemplation on the ultimate person, at first, as the Lord – the person that you in fact are, and ultimately as the limitless reality within oneself – is the principle technique of Patañjali’s yoga. If you do not get it when you listen to the teaching, then there are a number of steps in yoga you can take to explain and clear any doubts.

Many of the commentators and most of the translators assume that Patañjali advocates a version of dualist Sāṅkhya philosophy. Their aversion to appreciating the Lord as the pure puruṣa that is oneself is understandable. Understandable, because that identity is not acceptable to Sāṅkhya philosophy, which holds that there is no Lord. Moreover Sāṅkhya says the puruṣas are many and separate, without being able to give a satisfactory explanation of how these puruṣas can be both nir-guṇa (attributeless) and yet somehow many and separate from each other. Many and separate, themselves, are attributes.

The so-called Sāṅkhya-Yoga philosophy also cannot accept the identity of the Lord and the self. They talk about a Lord as a separate, special puruṣa that one can pretend is in one’s heart, but who is not really there. That Lord sits somewhere staring, a unique non-action contact (saṃyoga) of the witnessing Lord, upon the witnessed pradhāna (unmanifest nature in non-evolving equilibrium) and somehow agitates the components (guṇas) within it into manifestation in the form of this evolving universe, with the purpose of being of service to the many puruṣas.

Sāṅkhya and Sāṅkhya-Yoga both accept this agitation into manifestation of an insentient entity. Both are very odd in that they rely on this literally impossible phenomenon to prop up their thesis of the distinction between the self (puruṣa) and an insentient nature that can evolve. Even if they hold that the unmanifest nature (pradhāna) is kind-of sentient by the presence of a sentient-like component (sattva), still their philosophy also holds that the puruṣa is nir-guṇa (attributeless) and so could not be something that stares itself in contact with anything else!

Their philosophy, for this reason, seems quaint and is logically inconsistent. This may be why so many yogins spend more of their time practising yoga than thinking about the philosophy behind those practices. Patañjali does not propose or argue for any dualist philosophy in any of these sūtras. Patañjali never uses the term sāṅkhya in any of these sūtras. The dualist views are all Īśvara-kṛṣṇa’s contributions that have been assumed to be behind Patañjali’s yoga by later commentators. Īśvara-kṛṣṇa was a later philosopher who formulated a version of dualist philosophy called Sāṅkhya.

In regard to the Lord, Patañjali himself has no such reservation in offering many sūtras on this eka-tattva – eight so far and many more to follow. This can be taken as an indication that Patañjali was not an advocate of Sāṅkhya philosophy or a Sāṅkhya-Yoga philosophy. Patañjali, just as many Indian writers and commentators, did borrow common terminologies from the scriptures and also from each other. But borrowing some terminology does not necessarily entail accepting any of the philosophies that share these common terms.

Rather, Patañjali appears here as simply an advocate of yoga that includes samādhi (contemplation) and an appreciation of an intelligent Lord as a means for equipping the mind to attain kaivalya (liberation). The vast majority of seekers in India accept that kaivalya means a Lord that really is in one’s heart. They grow up with a shrine in their homes, parents who understand that Lord in the heart, and a habit of going to temple to affirm that Lord’s presence. The iconography of these temples clearly adheres to this concept. The seeker enters from the external world into the religious environs of the temple. At the center of the temple is a dark enclosure (the mind in ignorance of the Lord) wherein the Lord’s presence is illumined by the lamp (of knowledge).

Patañjali clearly takes an approach that accepts the same tenants as the Bhagavad Gītā, the other great and earlier, or perhaps contemporary, text on yoga. Patañjali expounds on the nuances of samādhi, which was only lightly touched upon in the sixth chapter of the Bhagavad Gītā.

The Bhagavad Gītā is clearly based on Upaniṣad teachings and uses some of the same terminology as the original Upaniṣads. Sāṅkhya philosophy also borrowed from and elaborated upon the terminologies of the Upaniṣads. The Bhagavad Gītā clearly teaches a real, not a pretend, identity of the limitless Lord and the limitless self. Please see this author’s works on the Bhagavad Gītā for more on this topic.


 
←PrevNext→
[prasādana – clarity; citta – mind; bhāvanātas – through cultivating; maitrī – goodwill; sukha-viṣaya – the joyful; karuṇā – compassion; duḥkha[-viṣaya] – the sorrowful; muditā – approval; puṇya[-viṣaya] – the meritorious; upekṣā – allowance; a-puṇya[-viṣaya] – the non-meritorious.]

मैत्री-करुणा-मुदित-उपेक्षाणां सुख-दुःख-पुण्य-अ-पुण्य-विषयाणां सुखि-मैत्री दुःखि-करुणा पुण्यवत्-मुदिता अ-पुण्यवत्-उपेक्षा च तेषां भावनातः ध्यानात्, मैत्री-आदिं भावयेत् इति तस्मात् चित्त-प्रसादनम् अन्तःकरण-शुद्धिः॥ –
“Through the meditation on and cultivation of goodwill (maitrī) towards the joyful, compassion (karuṇā) towards the sorrowful, approval (muditā) towards the meritorious, and allowance (upekṣā) towards the non-meritorious – one achieves mental clarity, which is steadiness of the mind.”

These attitudes – based on the universal value structure called dharma (universal justice) in the scripture – uphold an objective, non-distracting, and supportive relationship with oneself, other people, other living beings, and all situations around us. The student’s objective is to assimilate this teaching in all thinking, attitudes, and behavior. It is a way of life, not a philosophy. These and other values that support a more open and contemplative mind are fully developed in the Bhagavad Gītā.

The values noted in this sūtra are the student’s tools in addressing and assessing his or her attitudes toward him or herself as well as toward the world. Goodwill toward oneself is not self-indulgence. It is personal honesty and a commitment to integrate the various aspects of the psyche. It is a commitment to emotional maturity and inner growth. We envy another’s joy when we place unwarranted value on another’s possession or achievement. So neither the joy nor the envy is justified. Therefore to bear goodwill to oneself is to always have the highest value in mind, or easily available.

Compassion, actually empathy, is a natural and honest human connection to all living things. Compassion toward oneself is easily overdone; we tend to be extremely forgiving of our mistakes, even more so than we are of others. It takes a sensitive, uncompromising objectivity to evaluate our underlying motivations. Often our sorrows toward ourselves, our feelings of self-pity, voice our childish sense of entitlement and a more basic sense of worthlessness and unlovability. Feeling unworthy can influence our attitudes expressing judgment.

There is no healthy mind incapable of entertaining the full range of human behavior, from abject depravity to saintly beatitude. What makes a difference is a life of allowance, objectivity, and unconditional understanding. Again this works both in relationship to our self and to the world. The clarity, the steadiness of mind this sūtra suggests, is gained by the development and nurturing of buddhi, of the intellect, the higher mind which is non-reactive, non-judgmental, understanding, bright, enthusiastic, and cheerful. This teaching that addresses the self, the Lord, and the world in terms of the benevolent whole is a proven, teachable sharing of spiritual truth.


 
←PrevNext→
[ – also; pracchardana – exhalation; vidhāraṇa – retention; prāṇa
:: ‘प्राणान् प्रपीड्य इह संयुक्त-चेष्टः क्षीणे प्राणे नासिकया उच्छ्वसीत। दुष्ट-अश्व-युक्तम् इव वाहम् एनं विद्वान् मनः धारयेत अ-प्रमत्तः’ “Restraining the organs of acting and sensing (the prāṇas), [thus] whose activities are disciplined, one should [sit and gently] breathe through the nostrils when one’s activity has diminished. Without indifference, the informed one should hold this mind, like it was the reins attached to unruly horses [i.e., the organs].” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 2.9) ::
.]

चित्त-स्थैर्यं प्रच्छर्दन-विधारणाभ्यां बाह्य-अभन्तर-स्तम्भैः वा अपि प्राणस्य (YS.2.50)। –
“Steadiness of the mind is also through controlling the movement and the outward and inward retention of the breath (prāṇa) (YS.2.50).”

More details and the purpose of this, as it relates to the other steps towards contemplation within the eight limbs (aṣṭāṅga) of yoga, will be presented in Yoga Sutras 2.49–52. This is the second time breath has been mentioned in this chapter (YS.1.31). In the second chapter the topic of breath will be covered, and in the third it is again taken up with reference to the gain of calm (YS.3.31). Breath control is important and should be considered and practiced in order to promote a composed, meditative mind. This is not an attempt to raise kuṇḍalinī (the coiled energy at the base of the spine) here. We are simply making an honest effort to own up to our already perfect self, free of ignorance, sorrow, and fear.


 
←PrevNext→
[ – also; utpanna – developing; pravṛtti – concerted mental pursuit; viṣayavatin – having but one object; nibandhanin – brings about; sthiti – steadiness; manas – mind.]

यतः श्रुति-आचार्य-उपदेश-विषयवती (YS.1.39 अपेक्ष्य) वा अपि ध्यान-प्रवृत्तिः उत्पन्ना, ततः मनसः स्थिति-निबन्धनी चित्त-स्थैर्यम्॥ –
“Also from following the mental pursuit of contemplation having but one object (viṣayavatin) based on the teachings of the scriptures or the guidance of a teacher leads to steadiness of the mind.”

 
←PrevNext→
[ – also; jyotiṣmatin – having the
:: ‘अथ यद् अतः परः दिवः ज्योतिः दीप्यते विश्वतः पृष्ठेषु सर्वतः पृष्ठेषु अन्-उत्तमेषु उत्तमेषु लोकेषु इदं वाव तद् यद् इदम् अस्मिम् अन्तः पुरुषे ज्योतिः’ “Now, the light (jyotis) which shines above this heaven, in the highest and unsurpassed regions above the universe, above all, is indeed this very same light within the person.” (Chāndogya Up. 3.13.7).
‘ज्योतिषाम् अपि तद् ज्योतिः तमसः परम् उच्यते’ “It is the light of lights [i.e., the solely self-revealing conscious being by which even the sun is revealed] said to be beyond darkness [or ignorance, as it reveals both].” (Bh. Gītā 13.17) ::
; vi-śokā
:: ‘न अस्य (देहस्य) जरया एतद् (अन्तर्-आकाशः ब्रह्म) जीर्यति, न वधेन अस्य हन्यते। एतत् सत्यं ब्रह्म-पुरम्, अस्मिन् कामाः समाहिताः॥’ “By the aging of that [body], this [‘space within the heart,’ brahman] does not age. By the destruction of that, this is not destroyed. This is the true city of brahman [i.e., the true body not other than brahman]. In this are placed [all] desires.”
‘एषः आत्मा अपहत-पाप्मा वि-जरः वि-मृत्युः वि-शोकः वि-जिघत्सः अ-पिपासः सत्य-कामः सत्य-सङ्कल्पः॥’ “This is ātman not affected by painful results, free of aging, free of death, free of sorrow (vi-śoka), free of hunger and thirst, [in which reality] desire and choice are realized.” (Chāndogya Up. 8.1.5).
‘हृद्-पुण्डरीकं वि-रजं वि-शुद्धं विचिन्त्य, मध्ये (च) वि-शोदं वि-शोकं (परम-ईश्वरं विचिन्त्य)’ “Contemplating [until] the lotus like heart (hṛd-puṇḍarīka) (i.e., the open, mature mind arisen from the mundane mire) is free of agitation and pure, [then] madhye (within that) upon the bright one (vi-śada), free of sorrow (vi-śoka) [the Lord (Parameśvara)].” (Kaivalya Up. 1.6) ::
.]

यतः वि-शोका शोक-रहितं चैतन्य-ज्योतिः अस्याः सा वा अपि ज्योतिष्मती हृद्-पुण्डरीके बुद्धौ चैतन्य-ज्योतिः अस्याः सा तद्-ध्यान-प्रवृत्तिः उत्पन्ना, ततः चित्त-स्थैर्यम्॥ –
“Also from the pursuit of contemplation based upon the light (jyotiṣmatī) of consciousness which is free from sorrow (vi-śokā) that shines in the heart-lotus, the intellect, arises steadiness of the mind.”

This is contemplating the very nature of the awareful being that is oneself. This needs the person to understand that the shining being within is none other than the perfect puruṣa, the Lord. So instead of the contemplation upon the Lord as the perfect person in sūtra 1.23, this is upon the being within as the perfect person. Of course, they are the same, but this takes the understanding of the scripture. This is well taught in the scriptures, such as in the footnote quotations to this sūtra. Patañjali has already directed the seeker to the scripture (āgama) and he specifically indicates which scriptures by the terminology he uses – jyotis and viśoka. The commentator Vyāsa using the term hṛdaya-puṇḍarīka indicates the mantra from Kaivalya Upaniṣad which uses the equivalent term hṛd-puṇḍarīka.

Imagine the person who knows not the scripture behind these sūtras trying to contemplate some painless light inside his or her head. It is irresponsible to not indicate to seekers what this viśoka jyotis really is.


 
←PrevNext→
[citta – mind; – also; vīta-rāga
:: ‘सम्प्राप्य एनम् ऋषयः ज्ञान-तृप्ताः कृत-आत्मानः वीत-रागाः प्रशान्ताः। ते सर्व-गं सर्वतः प्राप्य धीराः युक्त-आत्मानः सर्वम् एव आविशन्ति’ “Having completely attained this [brahman], the sages were satisfied in knowledge. Their mind being prepared, they were free of attachments (vīta-rāga) and naturally cheerful. Having gained everywhere the all-pervasive and [always] united in [contemplation of the limitless] ātman, those wise ones become everything!” (Muṇḍaka Up. 3.2.5) ::
; viṣayas – objects.]

यावत् वीत-राग-विषयं सर्व-विषयेषु रागाः विगताः अस्य वा अपि चित्तं, तावत् चित्त-स्थैर्यम्॥ –
“To the extent the mind loses its attachment (identity) to any and all objects, to that extent the mind remains steady.”

Objects are manifestations of the tattvas (evolutes) of the world, in Sāṅkhya terminology. Thus attachment to objects, such as contemplating on the tattvas just to gain specific objects or powers, would be kliṣṭa (what hinders one’s progress in yoga, YS.3.37). These objects should instead be contemplated in order to see their limitations. These limitations, no matter how grand, are not one’s self, nor can they make a difference in or improve one’s self in any way, shape, or form.


 
←PrevNext→
[ – also; ālambana – basis; jñāna – knowledge; svapna – dream; nidrā – sleep.]

यतः चित्तं स्वप्न-निद्रा-ज्ञान-आलम्बनम् ओम्-कार-ध्याने त्रि-आवस्था-श्रुति-ज्ञान-आश्रयं वा अपि, ततः चित्त-स्थैर्यम्॥ –
“From which, when the mind, through the scriptural teaching on the three states of experience particularly of dreams and sleep, gains that knowledge while contemplating ‘Om’-kāra – from that the mind attains steadiness.”

Like the Lord in reference to this entire waking world, I, the dreamer, can see myself as the Lord of the dream world, as its source and substance. Then in deep sleep, which is also just me, this dream world as well as the waking world resolves, like the universe resolves into an unmanifest state in the reality we call the Lord, until the next big-bang – in our case, the clang of the alarm clock. In this way one can come to assimilate how one can be that same reality from which the universe appears and into which it resolves. All this, as taught by the
:: Brahma, Bṛhad-āraṇyaka, Chāndogya, Kaivalya, Māṇḍūkya, Nṛsiṃha-Pūrva-Tāpanīya, Nṛsiṃha-Uttara-Tāpanīya, Praśna, Rāma-Uttara-Tāpanīya, and Sarva-ūpaniṣat-sāra Upaniṣads ::
, can be meditated upon with the help of Om, also called the
:: ‘सर्वे वेदाः यत् पदम् आमनन्ति तपांसि सर्वाणि च यद् वदन्ति। यद् इच्छन्तः ब्रह्म-चर्यं चरन्ति तत् ते पदं संग्रहेण ब्रवीमि ओम् इति एतत्॥’ “The abode (pada) which all the Vedas proclaim, which all prayerful disciplines speak, and desiring which they take to a life of seeking brahman, that abode I tell to you in brief is this Om [i.e., what has Om as its indicating symbol].”
‘…एतद् आ॒लम्बनं श्रेष्ठम् एतद् आलम्बनं परम्। एतद् आलम्बनं ज्ञात्वा ब्रह्म-लोके महीयते’ “this basis is the ultimate. Knowing this basis [and thus being brahman] one becomes exalted [absolutely] in the world that is brahman (brahma-loka) [or, relatively, in the highest heaven called brahma-loka].” (Kaṭha Up. 1.2.15 & 17) ::
(basis).

The Māṇḍūkya Upaniṣad, especially, presents the nature of the self, of reality, via the three states of experience, waking-dreaming-sleeping. It says the conscious being that in-forms all three states, that is always there, unaffected before, during, and after each of the appearances of these three states, is the reality of oneself, the reality of brahman (the infinite). So these experiences within waking life that we cling to as if they make or break us are, in comparison to the reality of oneself, no more real than dreams. These experiences are simply movements of the mind that come and go in its restlessness. This understanding is what is to be contemplated during recitation of Om in meditation. Every thought, every experience, is the same as this Om arising in awareness, remaining for a moment in awareness, then resolving back within the awareful being, within oneself. It is temporary; oneself alone is permanent and untainted by the appearances of thoughts.

These are not poetic statements that life is like a dream, but statements of fact about all our experiences, namely that all of life has a nature not essentially different from a dream – as simply the movement of the mind. This is reality based teaching. This and similar analyses of dream and deep sleep in the Upaniṣads is what Patañjali is referring to here in this sūtra, and again why scripture (āgama) is to be studied with the help of a skilled
:: ‘न नरेण अ-वरेण प्रोक्तः एषः सु-विज्ञेयः बहुधा चिन्त्यमानः। अन्-अन्य-प्रोक्ते गतिः अत्र न अस्ति’ “(Though) contemplating (cintyamāna) a lot, one finds this ātman explained by an inferior teacher difficult to know. When taught by one who knows it as himself (an-anya), there is no going wrong (gati).” (Kaṭha Up. 1.2.8) ::
.

The superficial commentary of Vyāsa on these last several sūtras led to a lack of independent analysis by the following commentators and translators. They completely miss the connection of these very important topics to their clear development in the scriptures. This allows a few translators to imagine that the ancient yogins were into psychotherapeutic dream analysis. This imagination cannot be laid at the feet of Vyāsa, though, as it is perhaps more a wish by those translators to make their medieval Sāṅkhya based interpretations sound current.

The teaching analyses
:: ‘तस्य वै एतस्य पुरुषस्य द्वे एव स्थाने भवतः, इदं (भवत्-जन्म) च पर-लोक-स्थानं (शरीरादि-भूत-जन्मानि) च, सन्ध्यं तृतीयं स्वप्न-स्थानं, तस्मिन् सन्ध्ये स्थाने तिष्ठन् एते उभे स्थाने पश्यति इदं च पर-लोक-स्थानं च।’ “[Yājña-valkya replied to King Janaka:] Indeed that person (puruṣa) has only two abodes, this [life] and the other world [all other past and future lives]. Dream, a third, is their junction. Residing in that junction abode he sees both those abodes, this and the other life.”
‘अथ यथा-आक्रमः अयं पर-लोक-स्थाने भवति तम् (कर्म) आक्रमम् आक्रम्य उभयान् पाप्मनः आनन्दान् च पश्यति,’ “Now, whatever brings one into the other life he takes that [karma] and experiences sorrows and joys.”
‘सः यत्र प्रस्वपिति, अस्य लोकस्य सर्व-अवतः मात्राम् अपादाय स्वयं (स्थूल-शरीरं) विहत्य, स्वयं (स्वप्न-शरीरं) निर्माय, स्वेन भासा (वासना-आत्मक-अन्तःकरण-वृत्ति-प्रकाशेन) स्वेन ज्योतिषा प्रस्वपिति, अत्र अयं पुरुषः (आत्मा) स्वयं ज्योतिः भवति’ “When he dreams, he takes a little of this supportive world, abandons his own [physical body], creates himself [a dream body], and dreams as his own luster [dream] by his own light (jyotis). Here, the person is his own light.” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 4.3.9) ::
not for therapeutic experiences but for its lesson in understanding what is the reality of this world, the dream, and oneself – the waker and dreamer. The Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Upaniṣad with its commentary especially details this critical understanding of the mind and oneself as its independent witness through waking, dream, and deep sleep (BrhU. 4.3.9 & 10 with commentary).

 
←PrevNext→
[ – also; dhyāna – retaining a single pointed inquiry in contemplation; yathā-abhimata – any object one likes.]

यथा-अभिमत-ध्यानात् यथा-स्व-इष्टे अ-क्लिष्ट-विषये ध्यानात् वा अपि चित्त-स्थैर्यम्॥ –
“Also from contemplation on what one likes, as long as it can be helpful, the mind attains stability.”

One has to start somewhere. If only objects you desire attract you, then contemplate upon them in order to eventually appreciate their limitations also through the teaching. This also bring mental steadiness


 
←PrevNext→
[vaśī-kāra – mastery; asya – of this; anta – extends; parama-aṇu – most minute; parama-mahattva – most pervasive.]

तद्-अभ्यासानां फलम् आह – परम-अणु-परम-महत्त्व-अन्तः अति-सूक्ष्म-विषय-आदिः आ लिङ्गमात्र-नाम-महत्त्व-विषयात् (YS.2.19) अस्य चित्तस्य वशी-कारः सर्व-दृश्येषु वैराग्य-रूपः (YS.1.15)॥ –
“The result of such practices is described as follows: from contemplation on the extent of experience from the most subtle (aṇu) to the most vast (mahattva), from their essence to their fullest manifestation – this mastery of the mind leads to detachment (objectivity) in all experiences, which manifests as vairāgya (dispassion) in all perceptions (YS.1.15, YS.2.19).”

Mastery or control is not to be understood as power over individual things. Such a power and its craving, imagined to be a part of yoga or not, can only be based on the erroneous belief that objects, including this body and mind, can provide the satisfaction-full freedom which is the real goal of yoga and is the natural goal of everyone, whether they fully recognize it or not. Mastery, as had already been explained in Yoga Sūtra 1.15, here concerns the ability to pursue what is conducive and avoid what is not conducive to yoga. It is the nirodha (discipline) of the thoughts of the mind indicated in Yoga Sūtra 1.2 as the definition of yoga.

The power this individual body and mind can have over even a tiny portion of the universe is a pittance. The real mastery is freeing oneself from the notions that these things of the universe are an addition to or subtraction from me, are to be pursued and possessed, or feared and avoided. It is complete independence, a lack of dependence
:: ‘यः तु आत्म-रतिः एव स्याद् आत्म-तृप्तः च मानवः। आत्मनि एव च सन्तुष्टः तस्य कार्यं न विद्यते॥’ “Whereas, the person who would find pleasure within the self alone, be satisfied with the self, and be contented in the self alone – that one has nothing [yet] to be done.
‘न एव तस्य कृतेन अर्थः न अ-कृतेन इह कश्चन। न च अस्य सर्व-भूतेषु कश्चिद् अर्थ-व्यपाश्रयः’ “For that [person] in this world, there is, indeed, no goal by doing, nor by not doing. Nor for that one is there any dependence for [any] thing towards any being.” (Bh. Gītā 3.17–18) ::
. This complete mastery entails the appreciation that all this is not other than the reality that is oneself.

 
←PrevNext→
[samāpatti – contemplation; vṛttis – thoughts; kṣīṇa – have waned; tat-añjanatā – what makes clearly evident that; tat-stha – which it rests upon; grahītṛ – knower; grahaṇa – knowing; grāhya – known; iva – like; abhijāta maṇi – quality crystal ball.]

क्षीण-वृत्तेः रजस्-तमस्-जनित-क्लेश-वृत्ति-क्षयः अस्य योगिनः, अभिजातस्य नित्य-निर्-दोष-स्व-रूपस्य इव मणेः स्फटिकस्य, ग्रहीतृ-ग्रहण-ग्राह्येषु विषयेषु तद्-स्थ-तद्-अञ्जनता ग्रहीतृ-आदि-स्थ-यद्-यद्-रूपस्य स्व-रूप-अ-परित्यागेन अपि तद्-रूपस्य दर्शनता समापत्तिः संप्रज्ञात-समाधिः इत्यर्थः॥ –
“The reduction of the afflictive tendencies caused by the predominance of rajas (agitation) or tamas (ignorance) is attained by this yogī, just as a crystal, which is inherently pure and flawless, reveals or reflects the form of the objects it is in contact with, without altering its own true nature. In this way, the yogī, through the renunciation of his or her attachment to the objects of perception, attains the perception of those objects without being influenced by them, leading to samprajñāta samādhi (a form of samādhi with clear teaching).”

This is the immediate goal of yoga – a sufficiently clean and clear mind that can easily assimilate, can easily take on the truth of, any truth it rests upon, like a clear crystal takes on the exact color of any object it rests upon.


 
←PrevNext→
[tatra – there; samāpatti – contemplation; saṅkīrṇa – mixed up; vikalpa – imagination; śabda – word; arthaperceptual or logical object; jñāna – idea; sa-vitarka – with reasoning.]

तत्र चतुर्-विध-समापत्तौ प्रत्यक्ष-अनुमान-प्रमाण-विषयेषु शब्द-अर्थ-ज्ञान-विकल्पैः (YS.3.17) सङ्कीर्णा नाम च वस्तु (अस्मिता इत्यर्थः YS.1.17, 3.14 & 4.14) च तद्-रूप-वृत्तिः च, यथा ‘इदं घटः अस्ति’ इति तत्र ‘घटः’ इति नाम च ‘अस्ति’ इति वस्तु एव अर्थः च ‘इदम्’ इति तद्-रूप-वृत्तिः च, तेषां विकल्पित-भेद-स्मृतेः स-सन्निधिः इत्यर्थः स-वितर्का नाम प्रथमा समापत्तिः॥ –
“In the four types of samāpatti (meditative absorption with reasoning), the first stage is called sa-vitarkā samādhi which concerns the objects of the two means of knowledge – direct perception and logic (pratyakṣa-anumāna-pramāṇa) mixed up with one’s imagination (vikalpa) on their names and ideas (YS.3.17), such as, contemplation on ‘I-ness’ (asmitā), etc. (YS.1.17, 3.14 & 4.14). The thought reflects the nature of its object itself, as in the example ‘This is a pot,’ where the word ‘pot’ and the idea of existence (‘is’) are joined along with the form of the present object (‘this’). But in such a process, the memory of different imaginations on them can be juxtaposed.”


 
←PrevNext→
[pariśuddhi – purified; smṛti – memory; nirbhāsa – illumination; artha-mātra – only the perceptual or logical object; iva – as if; śūnya – had no; sva-rūpa – form of its own; nis-vitarka – free of reasoning.]

प्रत्यक्ष-अनुमान-प्रमाण-विषयेषु स्मृति-परिशुद्धौ विकल्पित-भेद-स्मृति-परिशुद्धौ सतां स्व-रूप-शून्या इव यदि अपि भेद-वासना-बुद्धिः तिष्ठति, भेद-कल्पना-स्मृतिः सु-अल्प-कालं गलिता अस्याः सा इत्यर्थः अर्थमात्र-निर्भासा अस्मितामात्र-दर्शनता निर्-वितर्का नाम द्वितीया समापत्तिः॥ –
“The second samāpatti is called nir-vitarkā samādhi (meditative absorption, without reasoning) which concerns the objects of direct perception, inference and proof (pratyakṣa-anumāna-pramāṇa), freed of one’s memory with their different imaginations, as though empty of its own form (like a clear crystal). Even if the idea still has some subtle tendency towards differentiation, the perception of distinction fades away after a short time. This is where only the essence or meaning remains, only the perception of ‘I’, of ‘Is-ness’.”

All objects of the universe, including the senses and mind with all its various ideas and notions, are but name and form, as the scripture never tires in pointing out. This getting past the name and form in the mind to their reality, their is-ness (YS.1.17), that is not separate from oneself is this being purified of memory of word and idea. The terms word and idea in these sūtras are the equivalent of the scripture’s terms name and form, respectively. The term memory is used because memory alone can be the vehicle to introduce into the current moment a name connected to a particular form learned in the past. Language, the matching of word with a form, is a skill learned in a culture over time that is retained in memory and applied to the current moment at hand. This language is the tool to distinguish objects through these different names and forms. If these distinguished objects are then given (are hypothesized to have) a reality beyond the reality of the applied names and forms from memory, then one is making a mistake of creating a reality for objects that is not there.

An example of such a mistake is hearing a noise in my room at night and bringing to mind the thought of a monster as actually existing in my room. When I know the thought as simply a thought, then it can be objectively investigated appropriately. When I believe, however, that there is an existing monster simply based on that thought, then this is a mistake.

A more subtle and devastating example is thinking of my body and becoming worried that I am ageing, thus I am subject to death, to disappear.

When I correctly know this body is simply a perceptual notion I have in the current moment, and when I correctly know that this notion is bound up with memories of a past body and with imaginations of an uncertain future body, and when I correctly know that the notion that I am this body is a mistake, then I can objectively see that this body is now something that may be called old but it is not me. This body is intrinsically only existing right now. There is no age for this current appearance other than the present moment. The reality of time and the flow of time will be analysed in the later chapters to reveal this understanding (see comm. on YS.3.16, 52, 4.12–14 & 33). Though the momentary appearance of this body may be given the name old, still I do not then become old.

However, if I believe that this body now is the same as the body in the past memories of it and is the same as the body in the imagined uncertain future notions of it, and therefore it is a single continuous entity that is continually ageing till death, and this ageing till death is myself ageing, then this is a devastating, death-dealing mistake.

Believing that the current appearance of this body is a single continuous entity, external to and completely independent from thought and its content, is a mistake that does not necessarily cause a problem. This is just misidentifying a factual object (the current appearance of this body) with an imaginary object fading to its death. Thinking that what happens to this external entity is happening to me, to the notion I have of myself as the knower of these thoughts and entities, however, is a mistake that causes a problem. This latter mistake makes myself appear to be unduly limited and necessarily subjects this mind to baseless anxiety and fear – all because of shallow, loose thinking that mixes up entities and realities. This is misidentifying oneself with a factual or imaginary object – limiting oneself to whatever problem that object appears to have.

The moment, which is pure cognition, is the reality of oneself that is timeless (time-free) and limitless, whereas memory is of the past and imagination is of the future. These latter two are limited since they are simply thoughts in time that will go away in time. When contemplating the nature of the objects of the world, such as this body or the mind, in keeping with the teaching, one is objectively seeing their inherent limitations as simply names and forms. One sees their limitations as not belonging to or affecting the single reality in which they temporarily manifest as names and forms. This is the preliminary sa-vicāra contemplation.

Then, in nir-vicāra, one finally comes to appreciate the pure is-ness of the object as the same “I am,” the same is-ness of oneself, sat-cit (reality-consciousness), the reality in which these objects manifest. At the moment of appreciating this single reality basis of objects, one is not imagining separate, real existences for the contents of thoughts beyond their mere appearances in the moment, whether those contents be the memories of the names and forms that constitute the objects, or that content be another thought with the name and form of “I am now contemplating.” At that timeless moment, in other words, there is no notion distinguishing the thinker, thinking, and thought. The thought here is only of the nature of the object as is-ness. Hence, the normal activity of the mind employing its distinguishing names to various forms is missing, and is here said to be as though not there. Of course, it is there as the non-reflexive, non-distinguishing, non-dual thought of is-ness.

Many commentators and translators imagine that contemplating an object free of word and idea, free of name and form, is some special yoga vision that yields some kind of supernormal knowledge about that object. But think about that claim. Isn’t it that, when you remove word and idea, the object in fact can only disappear? How could it appear in contemplation without any form whatsoever? It cannot. Thus, how could there then be any special super vision that yields supernormal knowledge about the object by such contemplation? If there is no form, there can be no supernormal information about the object. That supernormal information also would have to be without name and form too, if it were, in fact, part of this contemplation. How could that be information at all?

Does the author claim that he or she has this super vision? Or, are they claiming that some yogins are said to have these super power? Can you attain complete freedom in your life which is the goal of yoga simply by believing anecdotal stories about some yogins somewhere else or in the past? Do you really believe you also have the stuff to attain those rare powers yourself?

Please think about such claims. Isn’t the scripture’s explanation given above the obvious way to understand these sūtras? Contemplating anything free of name and form can only be the scripture’s vision of non-dual reality, pure is-ness. This alone is a teaching grounded in reality and clarity that can actually help you, not something grounded in mysticism – if there is such an oxymoron.


 
←PrevNext→
[etayā eva – in that same way alone; sūkṣma-viṣayas – subtle objects; vyākhyāta – is explained; sa-vicāra – with inquiry; ca – and; nis-vicāra – free of inquiry.]

एतया एव यथा प्रत्यक्ष-अनुमान-प्रमाण-विषया समापत्तिः स-वितर्का निर्-वितर्का च, तथा स-विचारा निर्-विचारा च नाम सूक्ष्म-विषया विचार्य-श्रुति-प्रमाण-विषया व्याख्याता तृतीया चतुर्था च समापत्तिः॥ –
“Just as sa-vitarkā (with reasoning) samāpatti and nir-vitarkā (without reasoning) samāpatti are related to the objects of the two means of knowledge – direct perception and logic, in the same way, sa-vicārā samāpatti (with inquiry) and nir-vicārā (without inquiry) samāpatti (meditative absorption no longer needing inquiry) are related to subtle objects, based on reasoning and scriptural knowledge. These then are the third and fourth types of samāpatti.”

Inquiry (vicāra) is a term used for scriptural analysis of subtle objects not otherwise known through the senses, and thus not knowable by any logic (vitarka) based on sense perceptions.

Scriptural or divine objects, such as heaven or a particular form of a deity, though subtle in nature, are still objects. They are just not objects of the senses. They are either completely or mostly objects of the mind.
:: ‘अर्जुन: उवाच। पश्यामि देवान् तव देव देहे सर्वान् तथा भूत-विशेष-सङ्घान्। ब्रह्माणम् ईशं कमल-आसन-स्थम् ऋषीन् च सर्वान् उर-गान् च दिव्यान्॥’ “Arjuna said: ‘O Lord, I see in Your body all the deities and hosts of different types of beings, Lord Brahmā seated in the lotus [i.e., in Brahma-loka within the lotus-like universe], [and] all the sages and celestial serpents.”
‘अन्-एक-बाहु-उदर-वक्त्र-नेत्रं पश्यामि त्वां सर्वतः अन्-अन्त-रूपम्। न अन्तं न मध्यं न पुनः तव आदिं पश्यामि विश्व-ईश्वर विश्व-रूप॥’ “I see You as having countless [bodies with] arms, bellies, mouths and eyes – whose forms are endless in all directions. And I see not Your end, nor middle, nor beginning, O Lord of the Universe whose form is the universe.’” (Bh. Gītā 11.15-16) ::
, such as when one dies and gets into heaven, are possible at that time by a provided subtle eye sight. Such subtle sights, sounds, etcetera would not be unlike the perceptions we have here within our dreams. These divine subtle objects, though, have no more intrinsic reality than the so-called mundane subtle objects, such as everyday thoughts, dreams, and so on. They both have the same subtle nature.

Even scriptural objects are but name and form alone. This getting past the name and form to their reality, their is-ness, that is not separate from oneself is this being purified of memory of word and idea. When contemplating the limited nature of the subtle objects presented in the scripture – which perception and logic cannot reach, such as the heavens or the subtlest nature of common objects (such as all objects being only a manifestation of the Lord), and, in keeping with the teaching, dismissing those limitations as not constituting separate real entities – one starts to appreciate the objective reality of the subtle object, freed of one’s mistaken or incomplete perspectives.

Seeing artha-mātra, an object purely free of erroneous mental projections, is not some mystical capacity hidden from others. Anything like an x-ray vision is still well within names and forms. All names and forms are projections, whether from x-ray vision, dream, or through the senses. A real vision, free of names and forms, can only be a non-sensory appreciation, understanding, of the is-ness of the object. That vision, then, only frees when it is clearly known that this is-ness is but the same is-ness of all objects, and is but the same is-ness of oneself (asmitā), and that is oneself.

Included in scriptural objects or topics are, of course, Īśvara (the Lord), ātman (oneself), and brahman (limitless reality). They are also, initially, only the notions we have about them, and, as such, have no more intrinsic reality than their subtle nature as thoughts. Inquiry into their real nature, though, through the scripture supported by reasoning, reveals their true nature through an expanded meaning of the words, free from erroneous notions that appeared to limit them. They are all nothing but limitless is-ness. They are the puruṣa, the being which alone is kaivalya (freedom).


 
←PrevNext→
[ca – and; sūkṣma-viṣayatva – nature of being a subtle object; paryavasāna – reaches up to; a-liṅga – unmanifest.]

सूक्ष्म-विषयत्वम् अति-इन्द्रिय-श्रुति-प्रमाण-विषयत्वं च अ-लिङ्ग-पर्यवसानम् अति-सूक्ष्म-विषय-आदि आ लिङ्गमात्र-विषयात्, न तु आ अ-लिङ्गात् अ-लिङ्ग-प्रकृतेः विषय-अ-योग्यत्वात्॥ –
“The subtle nature of objects, the objects of perception beyond the senses reaches up to that which lacks any sign (the a-liṅga) (YS.2.19), but not the a-liṅga, the unmanifest, itself, because thought has no capability (yogyatva) there.”

One can contemplate on one single object, such as an annoying habit one may have, particularly if it blocks doubt-free knowledge and one needs to get past that single sticking point to gain clarity in knowledge. This sūtra, however, indicates that, in general, one should move from contemplating innumerable single manifest objects to contemplating their subtle, uniting totality as presented in the scripture. Since this mind cannot comprehend much more than one object at a time, then this contemplation would be on the subtle nature that unites these objects (see YS.4.14).

All these contemplations based on the understanding of reality in the scripture, based on reasoning in keeping with the scripture (vitarka) and inquiry into the scripture (vicāra), are a subtle progression, leading to more subtle clarity of mind (YS.1.47–48). These contemplations connect the individual to the cosmos, and like the meditations in the Upaniṣads, called upāsanas, are meant to make the mind more subtle (pervasive) and amenable to the truth of all of reality.

The puruṣa is subtle but is never an object. In the scripture (āgama), which Patañjali accepts as a means of knowledge, it is called the subtlest (
:: ‘बृहत् च तद् दिव्यम् अ-चिन्त्य-रूपं सूक्ष्मात् च॑ तत् सू॒क्ष्मतरं विभाति। दूरात् सु-दूरे तद् इह अन्तिके च पश्यत्सु इह एव निहितं गुहायाम्’ “That limitless (bṛhat) [i.e., brahman] is the shining one [that lights up everything], not available as a form of thought, [yet] variously reveals [itself] as the subtlest (sūkṣmatara) of the subtle [in each and every thought]. Existing very far from what is remote [in terms of distance or time] and close to [i.e., closer than] here [i.e., than every thought right now], it exists [as though] hidden (nihita) here itself in the conscious intellect.” (Muṇḍaka Up. 3.1.7) ::
) and is the reality basis (satya) of even
:: ‘मायां तु प्रकृतिं विद्यात् मायिनं च मह-ईश्वरम्’ “Whereas one should know māyā as mother nature (prakṛti), and the limitless Lord as having māyā within.” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 4.10).
‘दैवी हि एषा गुणमयी मम माया दुर्-अत्यया। माम् एव ये प्रपद्यन्ते मायाम् एतां तरन्ति ते’ “Because, this My (devī) māyā – in the form of the [three] guṇas and coming from [Me] the Lord – is difficult to cross. [Therefore, giving up all else in māyā,] those who seek only Me [as themselves] cross over this māyā.” (Bh. Gītā 7.14) ::
. Prakṛti, being a-liṅga (unmanifest) and not oneself, is what naturally cannot be an object of contemplation. The term paryavasāna (meaning reaching culmination at) is thus here used exclusively, not inclusively. Subtle objects for meditation include everything subtle up to but not including prakṛti.

The puruṣa, however, though the subtlest but not an object, is one’s self and so not totally unknown. Hence, it can be appreciated
:: ‘यद् एव साक्षाद् अ-परोक्षाद् ब्रह्म…एषः ते आत्मा सर्व-अन्तरः।’ “The brahman which is immediate (sākṣāt) [as the witness] and not remote (a-parokṣāt) [as the one non-dual reality] …is this your self (ātman) that is within all.”
‘…न दृष्टेः द्रष्टारं पश्येः, न श्रुतेः श्रोतारं शृणुयाः, न मतेः मन्तारं मन्वीथाः, न विज्ञातेः विज्ञातारं विजानीयाः’ …You cannot see the witness (draṣṭṛ) of all that is seen, cannot hear the hearer of all that is heard, cannot think of the thinker of all that is thought, nor can you know the knower of all that is known.” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 3.4.2) ::
, but as oneself free of limiting concepts and thus always clearly available, including in quiet contemplation, in a-saṃprajñāta samādhi (YS.1.18).


 
←PrevNext→
[tāḥ – these; eva – indeed; samādhi – contemplation; sa-bīja – that retains the seed.]

ताः चतुर्-विध-समापत्तयः एव स-बीजः स-अ-विद्या-कल्पित-भिन्न-विषय-आलम्बनः समाधिः (cf. YS.1.51)॥ –
“These four types of samāpatti are all sa-bīja (with seed) samādhi, as they are based on different objects imagined through ignorance (a-vidyā) (cf. YS.1.51).”

The four sa-bīja samāpattis, in order of subtlety, were contemplation on common objects with reasoning (sa-vitarka) culminating in contemplation free of reasoning (nir-vitarka), and contemplation on subtle scriptural objects with inquiry (sa-vicāra) culminating in contemplation free of inquiry (nir-vicāra).

These reasonings and inquires, though helping (a-kliṣṭa) one’s progress in yoga, are nevertheless within the realm of the fundamental ignorance (a-vidyā) that is there from birth. Until the fundamental ignorance goes, every thought one entertains, even if it is scriptural, will be within the skewed perspective of this original ignorance.

How can a
:: ‘ये तु एतद् अभ्यसूयन्तः न अनुतिष्ठन्ति मे मतं (=अनुशासनम्)। सर्व-ज्ञान-विमूढान् तान् विद्धि नष्टान् अ-चेतसः’ “Whereas, those who are cynical, who do not follow this, My teaching, know them – who are [thus] variously confused in all [other areas of] knowledge [because they do not know who the ‘I’ is] and lacking discernment – as lost.” (Bh. Gītā 3.32) ::
l thoughts and their content. This fundamental ignorance takes what is unreal as real and the real as no better than the unreal (YS.2.5).

This is why one can listen to this teaching over and over and gain more clarity and more maturity, but there is yet no complete solution, no appreciation of complete freedom in one’s life, no acknowledgement of fearlessness as one’s being. The fundamental ignorance has to completely go. It cannot be kind of gone (YS.3.54).

This fundamental ignorance (including
:: ‘द्वे विद्ये वेदितव्ये इति ह स्म यद् ब्रह्म-विदः वदन्ति परा च एव अ-परा च॥’ “There are two types of knowledge (vidyā) to be known, say those who know scripture – unlimited (para) and limited (a-para).”
‘तत्र अ-परा ऋग्-वेदः यजुर्-वेदः साम-वेदः अथर्व-वेदः शिक्षा कल्पः व्याकरणं निरुक्तं छन्दो ज्योतिषम् इति।’ “Concerning these two, the limited is the Ṛg Veda, Yajur Veda, Sāma Veda, and Atharva Veda; and the sciences of pronunciation, rituals, grammar, etymology, prosody, and astrology [for understanding the scriptural texts and performing their rituals at the proper time].”
‘अथ परा यया तद् अक्षरं (ब्रह्म) अधिगम्यते’ “Then, the unlimited is by which [brahma-vidyā (knowledge of limitless reality)] one attains that imperishable [brahman].” (Muṇḍaka Up. 1.1.4–5) ::
to get out of ignorance) and its resulting afflictions are the seeds (bījas, see YS.1.24, 50–51 & 2.3–4) that need to be rendered totally impotent for this teaching to finally bless. The teaching in all the Vedas, including their Upaniṣads, are just so many words, until their meaning is assimilated as clear knowledge – that knowledge alone is para-vidyā (knowledge of the
:: ‘यावान् अर्थः उद-पाने सर्वतः सम्प्लुत-उदके। तावान् सर्वेषु वेदेषु ब्राह्मणस्य (परम-अर्थ-तत्त्वं) विजानतः’ “For a contemplative person who knows [sat (reality)], there is as much usefulness in all the Vedas as [there is] in a small watering hole [in a once-dry river bed, when the river is] in a flood everywhere [i.e., seeing the truth everywhere, one is no longer dependent on the Vedas.]” (Bh. Gītā 2.46) ::
. Even in quiet contemplation (a-saṃprajñāta samādhi) one’s ignorance remains as latent tendencies to raise doubts and confusion upon coming out of these temporary samādhis. Nevertheless, these samādhis are included in the limbs of yoga (see YS.3.1–8), and they serve their purpose in bringing discipline and clarity to the mind and thus making it contemplative.

Being contemplative allows this vision of truth to take hold in one’s life. Being ever contemplative – never outside of clear, valid thinking – is a spontaneous expression of, or conducive to, the complete assimilation of this teaching.


 
←PrevNext→
[vaiśāradya – mastery; nis-vicāra – free of inquiry; prasāda
:: ‘राग-द्वेष-वियुक्तैः तु विषयान् इन्द्रियैः चरन्। आत्म-वश्यैः विधेय-आत्मा (=विधेय-चित्तः) प्रसादम् अधिगच्छति॥’ “Whereas, moving among the objects with the senses under authority of the intellect and freed from [being overpowered by] attraction and repulsion (rāga-dveṣa), the one whose mind is disciplined attains clarity (prasāda).”
‘प्रसादे सर्व-दुःखानां हानिः अस्य उपजायते। प्रसन्न-चेतसः हि आशु बुद्धिः पर्यवतिष्ठते’ “When there is clarity (prasāda), there comes the destruction of all one’s sorrows [in the form of guilt and hurt] because, for the one whose mind is clear (prasanna), the [self-] knowledge [which destroys the sorrow] quickly becomes firm.” (Bh. Gītā 2.64–65) ::
; adhi-ātman – mind.]

निर्-विचार-वैशारद्ये निर्-विचार-नाम-चतुर्थ-समाधि-परिपाकत्वे सति अधि-आत्म-प्रसादः अन्तःकरण-शुद्धिः, चित्ते यद्-किम्-चिद्-अल्प-मलस्य त्यागः अन्-आत्मतया इत्यर्थः (YS.3.53)॥ –
When there is mastery in the fourth samādhi, the nir-vicāra, there is clarity of mind, which results in the letting go (tyāga) of even the slightest impurities in the mind as anātmatā – which can be analysed initially as ‘anātma-tā’ being not-self, and ultimately as ‘an-ātmatā – ‘anya-ātmatā’ being the self of ‘anya’ all other (YS.3.53).”

Here is pointed out the immediate goal of nir-vicāra samādhi. It is clarity of mind. And this clarity can ultimately culminate in knowledge as nir-bīja samādhi (see comm. on YS.1.51 & 3.9).


 
←PrevNext→
[tatra – when that takes place; prajñā – knowledge; ṛtaṃ-bhara – bears the truth.]

या ऋतं-भरा सत्यं बिभर्त्ति, आत्म-सत्यं विवारयते इत्यर्थः तत्र चित्त-प्रसादे सति, सा प्रज्ञा श्रुति-प्रमाण-जनित-स्व-पुरुष-परिपक्व-ज्ञानं नाम॥ –
“That which bears the truth (ṛtam-bharā), bears the reality (satyam), by revealing the truth of oneself in this state of mental clarity, is called prajñā (knowledge). It is the mature knowledge that arises from the scriptures (śruti) and other valid sources of knowledge (pramāṇas), regarding one’s very self (sva-puruṣa).”

Here, it is not exactly explicit what the source of this prajñā (knowledge) is. Some say that samādhi is a source of knowledge, but that is not said by Patañjali. He has given three sources of knowledge (pramāṇas): pratyakṣa (direct perception), anumāna (indirect knowledge), and āgama (scripture) (YS.1.7). Samādhi has been exhaustively presented here as a method of clarifying and steadying the mind, which is an instrument in all three pramāṇas. In particular, samādhi has here been clearly presented as a means of gaining clarity with the two means of knowledge one is employing in these contemplations, namely the last two, reasoning (vitarka) and inquiry into the scripture (vicāra). Just as it has been indicated that the a-liṅga (unmanifest) cannot be an object of samāpatti or samādhi, so also the puruṣa (self), which is the witness of everything, cannot itself be an object of samādhi.

The grahītṛ (knower see YS.1.41) as an object of contemplation that is talked about in each of the preceding samāpattis has been carefully limited as just a notion about oneself (“I am…”) as a grahītṛ (knower), not the actual self that witnesses this mind’s notions. Thus, samādhi cannot be a unique means of knowledge of the puruṣa. And it is knowledge of the puruṣa that will be said to be kaivalya (freedom).

In this sūtra, when Patañjali uses the word prajñā (knowledge), one should understand it is a kind of knowledge, or rather an understanding drawn from āgama (scripture) in keeping with reason. It is an understanding that lacks full clarity that one will expand upon. It is an understanding one brings to the samādhi that can be and eventually is made clear by this method of clarifying the mind in regard to whatever is the object of the contemplation.

To know certain things we either do or we do not have to also contemplate them. For example, we do not have to contemplate on one plus one equals two, since, once clearly explained, there is nothing more to clarify. But contemplation is helpful to clearly understand subtle topics as to how they should be incorporated in one’s world view. In particular, this samādhi taught here is helpful in owning up to the subtlest nature of the universe as one’s very self.

The purpose of samādhi is indicated here by joining the prefix pra-, meaning thoroughly, with the Sanskrit verbal root jñā, meaning to know. Thus this sūtra indicates that the knowledge of subtle things does not bear its fruit of truth until it becomes thoroughly clear. This is the purpose of samādhi – to gain that clarity if it is not already there.

When it comes to knowing the self, the process is one of dropping concepts about the self that necessarily limit the self. I have knowledge of myself, namely, that I exist, but it is not clear due to being mixed up with innumerable limiting notions about myself.

This is not a blind dropping of any and all concepts; it is one of clearly understanding the inadequacies in these concepts as applying to the self. The way of approaching self-knowledge is given in the scripture as
:: ‘अथ अतः आदेशः नेति नेति (=न इति न इति)’ “Now therefore the teaching [of brahman] – ‘Not this, not that (neti neti).’” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 2.3.6).”
‘सः एषः नेति नेति आत्मा, अ-गृह्यः न हि गृह्यते (मनसा)…’ “This very ātman is not this, not that (neti neti). [That is] what is not able to be grasped [as an object and by words] is not grasped [by the mind], …” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 3.9.26, 4.2.4, 4.4.22, and 4.5.15) ::
(not this, not that) – I am not the things I think I love, not the body, not the mind, nor the ego which is just one aspect of the mind. But the end of this neti-neti is not nothingness or thoughtlessness. Neti-neti is directed at oneself, and the self can never be unknown, never be denied, and thus never dropped. The culmination of neti-neti is just being oneself, without limiting concepts of oneself.

This is described in the scriptures as knowledge. In the case of self-knowledge, the self is its own pramāṇa (means of knowledge), called svataḥ prāmāṇya (self-revealing – see comm. on YS.4.19–20), like any source of light does not require another source of light to physically illumine it. In other words, the self, which illumines everything including the concepts in the mind, also illumines itself, or more precisely, does not require another source to illumine it. This is the most direct knowledge – sākṣāt a-parokṣāt (immediate and not remote) – requiring no other instrument to reveal itself. But this self-revealing is not what one may think must come in an imagined white heat of meditation. It is not a unique meditative experience which makes the meditator somehow transformed or super-sensitive. The self-revealing reality, is-ness, is always present in every thought and between every thought – in “Pot is,” “Body is,” “I am,” everything is the is-ness I am. “Pot,” “Body,” “I” are just adjectives (upādhis, YS.3.14) that make no division, no limitation in is-ness. Any more added to that knowledge will limit oneself. And until this is assimilated, even “I am infinite” is a limiting imagination (see YS.1.9).

Here, samādhi becomes an upāya (means) to this end, through gaining clarity on the inapplicability of one’s own life-long and unexamined concepts of oneself through the words of the scripture that point out what the self is not.

And that is also why ultimate non-attachment (para-vairāgya) towards these near and dear concepts wrapped up with one’s ego is involved in this process so that they can be dropped once falsified. Knowing oneself is unlike other applications of seeking knowledge, such as learning one plus one equals two, where non-attachment plays no role. This is how and why ultimate non-attachment (para-vairāgya) is required (YS.1.12–16) to assimilate self-knowledge.


 
←PrevNext→
[arthatva – object; viśeṣa – unique; viṣaya – object; anya – other; prajñā – knowledge; śrutas – words of the scripture heard; anumānas – inferences.]

इयं प्रज्ञा श्रुत-अनुमान-प्रज्ञाभ्यां श्रुति-शब्दस्य अनुमानस्य वा प्रज्ञाभ्याम् अन्य-विषया, विशेष-अर्थत्वात् यस्मात् अस्याः पुरुष-प्रज्ञायाः विषयः केवलः, दृक् एव सन् न तु दृश्यं (YS.1.3), सः दृक् स्व-प्रकाशकः इत्यर्थः (YS.4.18–22)॥ –
“This prajñā (knowledge) has an object that is other than knowledge from simply hearing the words of the scripture (śruti) or inferring from them, because its object is unique (viśeṣa), being knowledge of the puruṣa itself. As the seer (Dṛk), the puruṣa cannot be the seen (the different objects or thoughts). This seer reveals itself (sva-prakāśaka) (YS.4.18–22).”

Words of the scripture and the supporting logic, the two means of knowledge brought into contemplation, cannot directly reveal the self. The self is instead self-revealing as I. Nevertheless, it takes words, takes teaching, to remove mistakes we have imposed on the
:: ‘न अयम् आत्मा प्रवचनेन लभ्यः न मेधया न बहना श्रुतेन। यम् एव एषः वृणुते तेन लभ्यः तस्य एषः आत्मा विवृणुते तनूं स्वाम्’ “This ātman is not attained by reciting [scripture], nor by memory [i.e., memorization] [of the scripture], nor by many [texts including the scripture] being heard. What one [i.e., the a-kāma – the one who has no other desire] chooses [i.e., appropriately commits completely to], by that [ātman so chosen] is it attained, [since] this ātman [self-] reveals its [true] form [as the limitless witness] to that one [alone].” (Kaṭha Up. 1.2.23, Muṇḍaka Up. 3.2.3) ::
.

This process of listening to the words of the scripture with their supporting logic, which together remove mistakes, can also be expressed as a going
:: ‘अन्-एजद् एकं मनसः जवीयः न एनद् देवाः आप्नुवन् पूर्वम् अर्षत्’ “This one, [though] not moving, is faster than the mind. The deities [in the body] [i.e., the senses] do not reach it, who [being all-pervasive] has already reached [everywhere].” (Īśā Up. 4).
‘यतः वाचः निवर्तन्ते। अ-प्राप्य मनसा सह। आनन्दं ब्रह्मणः विद्वान्। न बिभेति कुतश्चन’ “From which, words along with thought return having not grasped, that fullness (ānanda) of brahman the wise person [knows as one’s self]. This person has no fear from anything [as there is no second thing to fear].” (Taittirīya Up. 2.9.1).
‘न चक्षुषा गृह्यते न अपि वाचा न अन्यैः देवैः (इतर-इन्द्रियैः) तपसा कर्मणा वा’ “It is not attained by the eye, nor by speech, nor by the other deities [i.e., the other senses], nor by prayerful discipline or ritual.” (Muṇḍaka Up. 3.1.8).
‘न तत्र चक्षुः गच्छति न वाग् गच्छति न उ मनः॥…यद् वाचा अन्-अभ्युदितं येन वाग् अभ्युद्यते॥…यन् मनसा न मनुते येन आहुः मनः मतम्। तद् एव ब्रह्म त्वं विद्धि न इदं यद् इदम् उपासते’ “The eye does not go there, nor speech, nor the mind. …What does not appear by speech, [but] by which speech appears, that alone may you know is brahman, not a ‘this’ [known or unknown thing] which people meditate (upāsate).” (Kena Up. 1.3–5).
‘श्रवणाय अपि बहुभिः यः न लभ्यः शृण्वन्तः अपि बहवः यं न विद्युः’ “Who is not available to many even for hearing, and which many, even having heard, do not know.” (Kaṭha Up. 1.2.7).
‘न एषा तर्केण मतिः आपनेया’ “This knowledge (mati) [gained with the help of a teacher who identifies with brahman] is not to be attained [āpaneya = āpanīya] [or, to be taught, i.e., āpaneya meaning āpayitavya] by reason (tarka) [alone].” (Kaṭha Up. 1.2.9).
‘श्रुत्वा अपि एनं (आत्मानं) वेद न च एव कश्चित्’ “Even after listening, another still does not know this [which is oneself].” (Bh. Gītā 2.29) ::
to get to their implicit meaning, which points to the reality of oneself.

It is not a pursuit of learning how to discuss the topic of yoga, not a PhD course, nor a training to be a lecturer. It is rather a pursuit to be a yogin and attain the goal of yoga, which is liberation as the limitless self. If one is unclear on the nature of the self that one has been taught through words and with reasoning, then the clarity of mind that contemplation brings to these words and logic allows this teaching to be assimilated and brings the truth of this teaching into one’s life, in the first-person, not as a third-person topic.

It is possibly this distinction that Vyāsa in his commentary was alluding to by saying that the scope (viṣaya) of the words of the scripture and the supporting logic is general (sāmānya) (in my terms, is in the 3rd person), whereas, the scope of this assimilated knowledge (prajñā) is unique (viśeṣa) (in my terms, is in the 1st person).

This is the limitation of words, even the words of the scripture and logic. They both are in the realm of the 3rd person. They are about the topic. They, themselves, are not here the topic, the object talked about. Here that topic, that object, is I, oneself alone. This self is doubly viśeṣa (unique). First, the self is not the words or the logic, nor their object. Second, the self, the only thing that always remains the subject (I) and never an object (he, she, it, you), is unlike anything else in the universe. Everything else in the universe, including thoughts and even notions one has about oneself, are objects known. The ātman (self) alone is the only subject in the universe and can never be an object by its very nature.

This is why there is a need to assimilate this teaching and its supporting logic. The direct object of this teaching and supporting logic has the nature of being a 3rd person account about the self. What frees, though, is their 1st person assimilation that is the self free of the 3rd person erroneous notions imposed on the self, counteracted by an integrated understanding of the teaching and its supporting logic. It is a change from “The teaching says this or that about the limitless self,” to “I am the limitless self.”

This is, and has always been, the critical sticking point for every generation of all students. The student hears the teaching (called śravaṇa) and has been trying to understand the teaching (called manana), but seems to get stuck at not yet assimilating the teaching (called
:: ‘आत्मा वै अरे द्रष्टव्यः – श्रोतव्यः मन्तव्यः निदिध्यासितव्यः, मैत्रेयि’ “My dear, this ātman (limitless self) is to be seen [i.e., known through śruti pramāṇa (scripture as a means of knowledge) from a competent teacher, as clear as one sees by pratyakṣa pramāṇa (sight as a means of knowledge)]. [How?] It [the teaching pramāṇa regarding ātman] is to be [repeatedly] listened to (śrotavya) and understood (mantavya) and is to be [repeatedly] contemplated (nididhyāsitavya), O Maitreyī [since, unlike seeing an apple and being told, ‘this is an apple,’ there can be obstacles to this knowledge about oneself that listening and understanding alone, simple exposure to the pramāṇa, cannot resolve].” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 2.4.5, also 4.5.6) ::
).

In nididhyāsana, instead of being simply a repeated mental activity, it is a repeated operation of a means of knowledge. It is similar to opening the eyes to see a visual object. No effort is required other than to operate the means of knowledge, for example, by simply opening the eyes sight takes place. In nididhyāsana, one is simply bringing to a contemplative mind the teaching and
:: ‘बहु-जन्म-दृढ-अभ्यासात् देह-आदिषु आत्म-धीः क्षणात्। पुनः पुनः उदेति एवं जगत्-सत्यत्व-धीः अपि॥’ “By force of habit during many births, the notion that the self exists as these bodies [and minds] immediately arises again and again. In this way also [arises] the notion that the world is absolutely real (satya).”
‘विपरीता भावना इयं ऐक-अग्र्यात् सा निवर्तते। तत्त्व-उपदेशात् प्राक् एव भवति एतद् उपासनात्॥’ “By the contemplation (aikāgraya) that this notion is opposed [to the scripture and its logic] that notion goes away. This [ability to contemplate] arises [in yoga] through upāsana (contemplative worship) [of the Lord], even before [one may finally come to] the teaching on reality.”
‘उपास्तयः अतः एव अत्र ब्रह्म-शास्त्रे अपि चिन्तिताः। प्राक् अन्-अभ्यासिनः पश्चात् ब्रह्म-अभ्यासेन तद् भवेत्’ “Indeed because of this, upāsanas (contemplations, upāsti = upāsana) are observed even here within the teaching on reality [within the Upaniṣads, such as in many of the chapters of Chāndogya Upaniṣad]. For one who has not repeatedly performed [upāsana] before, may it be there [now] [regarding elements of the teaching methodology, as an upāsana] [and with this contemplative mind] [may contemplation be] in the form of repetition [of continual acknowledgment] regarding reality (brahman) [i.e., in the form of nididhyāsana].” (Pañca-Daśī 7.103 through 105) ::
.

A term related to nididhyāsana is upāsana (meditation). Upāsana is a practice prescribed in the ritual parts of the Vedas that is a mental ritual of visualizing in an object the Lord. It is a mental worship of the Lord. In the Vedas, it is primarily for gaining puṇya (karma merit) through this mental activity. The upāsanas in the Upaniṣads, the last part of the Vedas, on the other hand, pertain more to topics within the teaching methodology than to rituals, such as meditating on space as the source and resolution of the universe, as sa-guṇa-brahman (reality in reference to the attributes of nature).

These upāsanas develop a contemplative mind (cittasya naiścalya, steadiness of mind), and they have a special karma benefit (puṇya a-dṛṣṭa phala) later in life or in the after-life, such as getting to a better heaven. These Veda upāsanas have the same detailed prescriptions in their performances as Veda rituals. As such, by performing them wrongly, they can yield unwanted benefits (pāpa a-dṛṣṭa phala) also.

When these upāsanas, especially the ones from the Upaniṣads that relate to topics of the teaching methodology, are performed as a karma-yoga, as simply an offering to the Lord (Īśvara-praṇidhāna), they do not yield any special karma benefit (puṇya a-dṛṣṭa phala), nor unwanted benefit if performed wrongly. They instead always yield an immediate benefit of a more contemplative mind, in keeping with how well they are performed. If the upāsanas are a seeing of the truth of these teachings, these become contemplations.

A contemplative mind is integral to assimilating this teaching. There are students who, because of a mind sufficiently groomed over prior lives, quickly mature spiritually in this life and are able to assimilate the teaching upon first hearing it (śravaṇa). We see this in the Upaniṣad descriptions of certain students with their teacher. Others take longer to understand what they heard and longer to assimilate it – until they know with certitude, “I am what this teaching is about.”

Because of the universality of this vision, encompassing all of one’s understanding of the universe and oneself, the teaching cannot be fully assimilated until it is thoroughly understood. Not understanding the teaching correctly keeps the student from being able to assimilate it. When it is crystal clear, one can whole-heartedly jump into it, and just be it.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃskāra – latent tendency; tad-ja – born of that; pratibandhin – counter-acts; anya – other; saṃskāras – latent tendencies.]

तद्-जः प्रज्ञा-जः श्रुति-प्रमाण-रूप-संस्कारः अन्य-संस्कार-प्रतिबन्धी अ-विद्या-जनित-संस्कार-प्रतिरोधकः॥ –
“Born of the clarified sa-bīja knowledge (from the earlier contemplations) upon the scripture and supporting logic is a latent tendency (saṃskāra) which prevents (pratibandhī) the other saṃskāras born of ignorance (a-vidyā) (i.e. this teaching works on the subtlest resesses of the mind, from which our thoughts arise and are shaped).”

Clarity of knowledge through the preceding sa-bīja samādhi brings to maturity the saṃskāra, (latent impression) of the teaching of the limitless self. The teaching saṃskāra nullifies the ingrained but erroneous orientation that we each have had from beginningless time. Of course, this assumes that one is contemplating on the nature of the self and not on some object of desire or power. Contemplating worldly attachments, one remains in saṃsāra (rounds of unbecoming becoming and its attendant rebirths and deaths), chasing after phantoms with an enlarged ego. According to the Bhagavad Gītā chapter 16, such a lifestyle is trying to perfect the path of an asura, an unworthy person bent on consumption.

There are two sets of saṃskāras. One set is the inherent tendencies that manifest as the continuing ignorant notions and their effects in the mind and thus in one’s actions. Those saṃskāras are formed over lifetimes of erroneous thinking. The other set is the inherent tendencies that manifest as the recall of the teaching and its supporting logic. The second set counteracts, blocks, the first set of saṃskāras. The second set of saṃskāras also were formed over lifetimes, and have now brought you to listen to the teaching right here and now. It is this latter set of saṃskāras that pratibandhin (counter-acts) the other.

Note here that we are talking about saṃskāras, not actual thoughts themselves (again, please see Appendix - Nature of the Mind for a description of the mind within this tradition). Yoga is about getting at the source of the problem. The problem may appear to be the negative thinking one has about oneself, but here the deeper problem is the root inherent tendency to manifest these erroneous notions. These tendencies are within the unconscious and may involve psychological issues, as well as the normal but blocking orientation of an individual against a world out there.

That is why thoughtless samādhi is useless in yoga. Samādhi is all about bringing in the teaching from previous lifetimes (in the form of one’s accumulated beneficial saṃskāras) and from this life into the mind and assimilating it from 3rd person to 1st person in nature.

Properly, this samādhi occurs while one is walking around, as well as while sitting. It is the awareful, continuous attempt (YS.1.13–14) to assimilate the teaching. This alone strengthens the beneficial saṃskāras that effectively counteract any limiting notions about oneself before, during, or after they arise – during the samādhi and for the rest of one’s life.


 
←PrevNext→
[nirodha – dropping; tasya api – of even that;
:: ‘यत्र (=यस्मिन् काले) उपरमते चित्तं निरुद्धं योग-सेवया। यत्र च एव आत्मना (=मनसा) आत्मानं पश्यन् आत्मनि (=स्वे) तुष्यति’ “When the mind – mastered (niruddha) by following yoga [i.e., contemplation] – abides [in ātman], and when one sees the ātman by the ātman (mind), [then] one is satisfied in oneself alone.” (Bh. Gītā 6.20) ::
– dropping; sarva – everything; nir-bīja samādhi – contemplation free of seed.]

तस्य ध्यान-योगेन ज्ञान-योगेन, श्रुति-शब्द-रूप-संस्कारस्य अपि निरोधे त्यागे अन्-आत्मतया सर्व-निरोधात् सर्व-दृश्य-त्यागात् अन्-आत्मतया सति, निर्-बीजः अ-विद्या-बीज-रहितः नाम समाधिः समाधीयते यस्मिन् इति समाधिः, सः स्व-रूप-अवस्थानं न तु ध्यान-चित्त-क्रिया, नित्य-समाधिः परम-आत्म-स्व-रूप-ज्ञानतया इत्यर्थः (YS.3.8)॥ –
“There is also the dropping (nirodha) of even that counter-acting saṃskāra which was in the subtle form of the words of the scripture due to the practice of contemplation and one’s seeking knowledge. This dropping is its renunciation as not other than one’s self, along with renunciation of everything else, all objects seen and known (dṛśya). When this occurs, one attains nir-bīja (seedless) samādhi, free from the seeds of ignorance. This samādhi is that in which everything is resolved (samādhīyate). It is the abode of one’s very self, not a result of the mental action of meditating. It is a timeless samādhi as the very knowledge-nature of the ultimate self (parama-ātmā) (YS.3.8).”

This nir-bīja samādhi is the natural, inevitable result of sa-bīja samādhi when one sees past the name and form of the object of contemplation to its reality basis, past the words of the contemplation to their meaning. That meaning is the limitless reality that is oneself. It is the fulfillment of the change from saṃprajñāta to a-saṃprajñāta samādhi, from 3rd person understanding to 1st person assimilated knowledge. After that, the teaching need not be repeatedly brought back to memory for the knowledge to remain clear and unshakable. There is no need for further activation of the teaching saṃskāras.

The latent tendencies needed to regenerate these memories of the teaching have done their job in sa-bīja samādhi. Now they are not needed to correct any erroneous thinking. They too are dropped; though they are not destroyed. Latent tendencies are not destroyed as several translators suppose. They are just not activated into memories of the teaching in the quiet stillness of nir-bīja samādhi. This is their nirodha, in much the same way as the erroneous saṃskāras were not destroyed in sa-bīja samādhi, only deactivated, rendered powerless for a period of time (YS.1.18) by the teaching’s saṃskāras. This quietude in nir-bīja samādhi, as we will see in sūtra 3.9, is in fact silently maintained by the saṃskāras of the teaching. They just do not manifest a thought in the form of a memory of the teaching during this nir-bīja samādhi.

This is one way of understanding what goes on in samādhi. It is a very mechanical way of understanding samādhi and the purpose of yoga. However, there is a much deeper way of understanding nir-bīja samādhi.

Instead of looking at this mechanically, paying far too much attention to what happens to the mind, the more fruitful vision is to look at the knowledge of the realities of nature including the mind and of the puruṣa, which alone is the real concern of Patañjali in these sūtras.

Actually, Vyāsa had a much better grasp of this than most of the current translators. In his commentary he says that the saṃskāras born of the teaching did not destroy the other saṃskāras, they instead cause the stopping (avasādayanti) of the other saṃskāras from manifesting the afflictions (kleśas) in the mind. He goes on to say that in nir-bīja samādhi the mind along with both sets of its latent tendencies remains merged in its own nature (saha saṃskārāiḥ cittaṃ svasyāṃ prakṛtau avasthitāyāṃ pravilīyate). For Vyāsa there is no destruction of saṃskāras, they only remain merged in their own nature, in the guṇas.

Even in a mechanical way, this is a much better expression of what is going on. It provides the basis for a discussion of what is meant by the resolution into its own nature. If the resolution of the mind is understood within a dualist philosophy, then the mind having been resolved in this way cannot reappear in any way, shape, or form. This mind, once capable of sublime thought on the nature of the universe and the puruṣa, is now disintegrated into its unthinking components, not to reform again. Is this outcome desirable by anyone?

If, however, the resolution of the mind is understood in the non-dual āgama tradition, then the mind – being clearly known as always being in its own insentient nature before, during, and after nir-bīja samādhi – cannot erroneously reappear confused as the sentient being that the puruṣa is, that I am. In that case, come what may in the mind, I remain in my own nature, free of identification with the thoughts in the mind.

This deeper understanding is recognition of the nature of the prajñā (knowledge) itself that allows nir-bīja samādhi. The knowledge is that the only reality is the reality that is oneself, and that reality is limitless, without a second. This means that as long as this knowledge is deeply assimilated in the 1st person, then even outside the seat of meditation this knowledge will remain. That knowledge is oneself – how could it not remain? Even while thoughts and their objects, the entire universe, parade in the mind, they are definitely known as not oneself, not the permanent reality, and hence unreal, less than real, dependent.

Their unreality is not that they do not appear in the mind. Many unreal (imaginary) things appear in our minds and we are not confused into thinking them real. In this case, every thought (imaginary or relatively real) is now known as unreal, as not absolutely real, not as real as oneself. This means that, being unreal by their nature, one is in nir-bīja samādhi without thoughts as being real, in and out of the seat of meditation. That is why we can have teachers who know (śrotriya) and have assimilated (brahma-niṣṭha) this reality (see comm. on YS.2.25), who can pass on this teaching to the next generation. Without this deeper understanding, no such teachers could exist. If resolution of the mind into its own nature is taken to be destruction of mind, great teachers would have to remain in the seat of nir-bīja samādhi, thoughtless and silent. This is not a helpful appreciation of kaivalya (freedom).

Why bother studying Patañjali’s text if you think he either did not yet have the knowledge he talked about, or he did, became a zombie, and that zombie wrote this? Now, if the mechanical resolution of the mind is only during meditation, but not afterward (which was not what Patañjali said), and thus if this freedom from the mind is just temporary in a-saṃprajñāta samādhi, then do either the ignorant saṃskāras activate again later, or not? If the ignorant saṃskāras return to being active, then the knowledge that brought a-saṃprajñāta samādhi was clearly not complete and fully assimilated. If you know one plus one is two, but forget it later, then did you in fact know it, or did you just memorize the answer for a while? If it was just memorizing an answer, then there never was knowledge (see comm. on YS.3.54).

The freedom that is kaivalya is knowledge, and that kaivalya, that knowledge, is the very nature of the puruṣa (YS.1.48, 2.25, 4.26 & 34). It was from the knowledge itself that nir-bīja samādhi effortlessly resulted. Nir-bīja samādhi, understood mechanically as simply quietude of the mind, would be just a state of the mind. The mind is not the puruṣa – at least Patañjali was clear about that! Any state of the mind, quietude or not, therefore, cannot be the kaivalya here.

In real kaivalya, which is the very nature of the self without identifying with any state of the mind, there is only the subject, oneself, as the only reality. Even when thoughts and their objects come and go, they are nothing but oneself, like all the bodies and all the thoughts in a dream, including my own body and thoughts therein, are nothing but me the dreamer. This was why Patañjali suggested contemplation on Om, and on the dream and sleep state.

Otherwise, if samādhi is without this discernment, without the teaching, then it is only a temporary dropping of problems, to be picked up again when thinking and the old latent tendencies kick back in (YS.1.18). This is why thought-less samādhi without the teaching has no efficacy here. Only clear knowledge (prajñā) has efficacy, since the problem is only one of
:: ‘वेद अहम् एतं पुरुषं महान्तम् आदित्य-वर्णं तमसः परस्तात्। तम् एव विदित्वा अति मृत्युम् एति न अन्यः पन्था विद्यते अयनाय’ “I know this limitless puruṣa, whose brilliance is [like] the sun, beyond darkness (ignorance). Having known that alone, one goes beyond death (ignorance). There is no other means for reaching [beyond death] [than knowing this puruṣa].” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 3.8) ::
.

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)

Preparation

s.01 s.02 s.03 s.04 s.05 s.06 s.07 s.08 s.09 s.10 s.11 s.12 s.13 s.14 s.15 s.16 s.17 s.18 s.19 s.20 s.21 s.22 s.23 s.24 s.25 s.26 s.27 s.28 s.29 s.30 s.31 s.32 s.33 s.34 s.35 s.36 s.37 s.38 s.39 s.40 s.41 s.42 s.43 s.44 s.45 s.46 s.47 s.48 s.49 s.50 s.51 s.52 s.53 s.54 s.55


 
←PrevNext→
[kriyā-yoga – means in regard to activity; tapas
:: ‘देव-द्विज-गुरु-प्राज्ञ-पूजनं शौचम् आर्जवम्। ब्रह्म-चर्यम् अहिंसा च शारीरं तपः उच्यते॥’ “Tapas pertaining to the body (śārīra) is said to be the honoring of deities, of those initiated into scriptural study, [and] of teachers and of scholars; cleanliness; straightforwardness [of thought, word, and deed]; a life of studentship in the Vedas [for the unwed, it also implies chastity]; and harmlessness.”
‘अनुद्वेग-करं वाक्यं सत्यं प्रिय-हितं च यत्। स्व-अध्याय-अभ्यसनं च एव वाङ्मयं तपः उच्यते॥’ “Tapas in the form of speech is said to be speech that is not agitating, is truthful, and both pleasant [now] and beneficial [later] [for the person spoken of or to], as well as reciting to oneself the Veda texts [daily, in the prescribed manner].”
‘मनः-प्रसादः सौम्यत्वं मौनम् आत्म-विनिग्रहः। भाव-संशुद्धिः इति एतत् तपः मानसम् उच्यते॥’ “Tapas pertaining to the mind is said to be this: mental clarity, cheerfulness, discipline over [inner] speech [i.e., the non-arising of – or the restraint from expressing – unhelpful thoughts], mastery [in general] over the mind, and clean intentions.”
‘श्रद्धया परया तप्तं तपः तत् त्रि-विधं नरैः। अ-फल-आकाङ्क्षिभिः युक्तैः सात्त्विकं परिचक्षते॥’ “That threefold tapas – performed with complete śraddhā (trust in the teaching) by disciplined people who do not require/anticipate [limited] results [like wealth and puṇya, but instead only seek clarity of mind for knowledge] – they say is predominately sattva.” (Bh. Gītā 17.14–17) ::
; svādhyāya
:: ‘आचार्य-कुलाद् वेदम् अधीत्य यथा-विधानं, गुरोः कर्म अतिशेषेण, अभिसमावृत्य कुटुम्बे (=गार्हस्थ्ये) शुचौ देशे स्वाध्यायम् अधीयानः…’ “Having studied the Veda according to the prescribed rule(s) and completed one’s duty to the teacher, returning to one’s household from the teacher’s family, in a clean [i.e., tidy and sanctified] place [sitting and] studying one’s scripture (svādhyāya) [as it was taught, so that it is retained, and as much more as one can study beyond what was taught by the teacher] …” (Chāndogya Up. 8.15.1) ::
of the family’s Veda scripture; Īśvara-praṇidhāna
:: ‘स-ततं कीर्तयन्तः मां यतन्तः च दृढ-व्रताः। नमस्यन्तः च मां भक्त्या नित्य-युक्ताः उपासते’ “Always acknowledging Me and making [proper] effort [to gain Me], [those] whose commitment is firm, surrendering to Me, always united [to Me] with devotion – they [the karma-yogins] seek [Me].” (Bh. Gītā 9.14) ::
.]

अथ योग-प्रतिबन्ध-क्षय-उपायस्य भूयः विस्तारः – तपस्-स्व-अध्याय-ईश्वर-प्रणिधानानि (YS.2.43–45) देह-वाक्-मनसः शम-दम-उपरम-तितिक्षाः तपस्-साधनानि, विवेक-आत्मकः श्रवण-मनन-स्व-अध्यायः, अभ्यास-वैराग्य-आत्मकं परम-पुरुष-चिन्तनं च तानि क्रिया-योगः। आ-प्रत्याहार-यमादि-क्रीया:, प्रज्ञा-अर्थ-क्रिया-रूप-साधनं योगः इति क्रिया-योगः नाम॥ –
“Now, the further elaboration on the means (upāya) of removing obstacles to yoga: The practices of prayerful discipline (tapas), self-study (svādhyāya), and surrender to Īśvara (Īśvara-praṇidhāna) (YS.2.43–45). The tools for controlling the body, speech, and mind include mental tranquility (śama), restraint of the senses (dama), observance of one’s duty (uparama), perseverance (titikṣā) – are the means of prayerful discipline. The practice of discernment (viveka), including listening (śravaṇa), reflection (manana), and self-study (svādhyāya), leads to contemplation (cintana) on the Ultimate Person. These practices, along with detachment (vairāgya) and continued effort (abhyāsa), form kriyā-yoga (yoga of action). Practices like pratyāhāra (withdrawal of the senses), yama (restraints), and other actions are the means to reach the goal of yoga. Kriyā-yoga is the yoga of action, the method of practical discipline for the mind and body.”

Prayerful discipline (tapas) is total commitment to one’s goal. The following words in the sūtra give the context of this commitment. Here it is commitment towards the scripture as a means of knowledge in order to gain the ultimate freedom that is the Lord. This naturally entails the physical and mental disciplines of a dedicated student. Again Patañjali emphasizes study of the scripture. That is where the reality teaching is given. It is through the scripture that one understands what it to be contemplated.

Īśvara-pra-ṇi-dhāna culminates, as was pointed out in the first pāda (chapter), in contemplation of the Lord, but it also means aligning (dhāna) oneself completely (pra-, prakarṣeṇa) with understanding (ni-, niścayena) towards the Lord, who is the whole order that expresses as this universe, and as this body and mind. In this, how one lives one’s life becomes an expression of a spontaneous sense of duty and care of all that is in-keeping with this order – respect for everyone and all of nature, with the proper values in support of this
:: ‘त्रयः धर्म-स्कन्धाः’ “Three are the paths of sacred duty (dharma).”
‘यज्ञः अध्ययनं दानम् इति प्रथमः,’ “The first is ritual (yajña), [continued] study (adhyayana) [after learning from a teacher], and charity (dāna) [as a householder].”
‘तपः एव द्वितीयः,’ “The second is prayerful discipline (tapas) [as a wandering mendicant].”
‘ब्रह्म-चार्यी आचार्य-कुल-वासी तृतीयः अत्यन्तम् आत्मानम् आचार्य-कुले अवसादयन्’ “The third is pursuing the scripture (brahma-cārin) while living with the family of the teacher and then staying one’s entire life in that teacher’s family [i.e., in a guru-kula].”
‘सर्वे एते पुण्य-लोकाः भवन्ति,’ “[As sacred lifestyles] they all gain a virtuous abode (puṇya-loka).”
‘ब्रह्म-संस्थः (=ब्रह्मणि सम्यक्-स्थितः तु) (आत्यन्तिकम्) अ-मृतत्वम्’ “[But] the one who completely lives only in brahman (brahma-saṃstha) [in whatever lifestyle] gains immortality.” (Chāndogya Up. 2.23.1) ::
.

As part of kriyā-yoga, application of Īśvara-praṇidhāna in one’s life is emphasized here. This kriyā-yoga is the equivalent of karma-yoga in the Bhagavad Gītā, where this topic is more completely unfolded. Knowing that, Patañjali does not here develop this topic. Contemplation within yoga is the special topic of these sūtras. Here, when Īśvara-praṇidhāna is understood in its fullest extent, it includes all the limbs of yoga up to and including samādhi (YS.2.29), the contemplation of the perfect person (puruṣa) in the form of the Lord as oneself (YS.1.23–32).

The traditional teaching’s focus on the identity of self and the Lord helps develop one’s understanding of everything as interconnected. Seeing deeply into any one thing reveals the truth of everything. We will develop this more fully in the commentary on the many contemplations given in chapter three, sūtras 3.16–53. Here it is seen that the three components of kriyā-yoga are included in the niyamas, the second of the eight limbs of yoga (YS.2.32). In the Yoga Sūtras, the three components of kriyā-yoga in their full sense, and particularly Īśvara-praṇidhāna incorporate all eight limbs of yoga. Indeed, thinking through any universal value, or any of the limbs of yoga, or any object – in full measure – will reveal the uninterrupted correspondence of microcosm and macrocosm. This is seeing the macrocosm in the microcosm. This follows the principle that what is true here is true everywhere. Whether in samādhi or enjoying one’s mind and life, truly knowing oneself is knowing everything.


 
←PrevNext→
[artha – for; bhāvana – bringing about; samādhi – contemplation of the proper means of knowledge resulting in assimilation; ca – and; artha – for; tanū-karaṇa
:: ‘सिद्धिं प्राप्तः यथा ब्रह्म तथा आप्नोति निबोध मे। समासेन एव कौन्तेय निष्ठा ज्ञानस्य या परा॥’ “O Arjuna, in which way one who has attained the success [of karma-yoga] attains brahman, which is the final conclusion of knowledge [i.e., unlike knowledge of everything else, which can have no final conclusion] – in that way, in brief, pay heed to Me.”
‘बुद्ध्या विशुद्धया युक्तः धृत्या आत्मानं नियम्य च। शब्द-आदीन् विषयान् त्यक्त्वा राग-द्वेषौ व्युदस्य च॥’ “[That one] endowed with a clear mind and, by resolve, gaining mastery over the body-mind complex [so it is not wasted chasing fancies]; giving up the [requiring of] sense objects beginning with sound, etc., and giving up [i.e., being free from the hold of] attraction and repulsion (rāga-dveṣa);”
‘विविक्त-सेवी लघु-आशी यत-वाक्-काय-मानसः। ध्यान-योग-परः नित्यं वैराग्यं समुपाश्रितः॥’ “having the disposition to repair to a quiet place; having the habit of eating lightly [to stay bright in this quiet lifestyle]; whose speech, body, and mind are mastered; [who is] always keeping contemplation and dedication [i.e., focuses only on oneself] as the ultimate; [who is] completely committed to objectivity;”
‘अहङ्कारं बलं दर्पं कामं क्रोधं परिग्रहम्। विमुच्य निर्-ममः शान्तः ब्रह्म-भूयाय कल्पते॥’ “[who is] free from a notional ‘I’ (ahaṅkāra), power, arrogance, desire, anger, and possession(s); [who is] free from the judgment “[this] is mine” and is clear – that one is fit for being brahman (reality) [i.e., for simply being oneself, without mistaken notions of reality].”
‘ब्रह्म-भूतः प्रसन्न-आत्मा (लब्ध-अध्यात्म-प्रसाद-स्व-भावः) न शोचति न काङ्क्षति। समः सर्वेषु भूतेषु मद्-भक्तिं लभते पराम्॥’ “Attaining brahman [by the knowledge that the limitless brahman is – i.e., I am – all this, including oneself] [and thus] with a cheerful mind, one neither grieves nor requires [anything]. [Thus] being the same toward all beings, [one] attains the ultimate bhakti (devotion) to Me.”
‘भक्त्या माम् अभिजानाति यावान् यः च अस्मि तत्त्वतः। ततः मां तत्त्वतः ज्ञात्वा विशते तद्-अन्-अन्तरम्’ “By that bhakti, one knows Me – who I am in extent [as everything] and in reality [as the only thing, the only reality]. Therefore, knowing Me in reality, that one [as though] enters [Me] immediately after that [i.e., by knowledge alone one attains Me even while living].” (Bh. Gītā 18.50–55) ::
; kleśas – afflictions.]

क्रिया-योगः समाधि-भावन-अर्थः समाधि-उपचय-अर्थः (YS.1.3, 24–25, 3.49, 55 & 4.34) क्लेश-तनू-करण-अर्थः क्लेश-अपचय-अर्थः ॥ –
Kriyā-yoga is for the cultivation of samādhi (meditative absorption) (YS.1.3, 24–25, 3.49, 55 & 4.34) and for the process of diminishing the afflictions (kleśas).”

Kriyā-yoga, which is the equivalent of karma-yoga, is a core aspect of the life of a yogin. The saints and sages of India underwent and were exposed to and influenced by this teaching discipline. If some saint appears to not have been formally initiated into this teaching tradition, then by his or her past karma, the person was naturally (see MānKa.4.86 Bhāṣya) disciplined and had an appropriate attitude toward life and the universe. That person needed very little exposure to the teaching, which is inescapably heard in the cultural songs and literature of India, to be a saintly person. If you dream you are another exception, then a dream enlightenment may surely be yours. It would be better, though, to take advantage of this proven, detailed, and well maintained yoga tradition.

Karma-yoga is not, after all, an activity one does. It is instead an attitude based on understanding the reality of the world and of God. If one has this matured attitude, there is nothing more needed to be done to gain a mind that can assimilate this teaching. If one does not have this matured attitude, one may engage in activities that help bring about the necessary understanding to mature this attitude.

Karma-yoga brings about the two goals of yoga: samādhi culminating in an assimilated knowledge and freedom from the kleśas. These two goals are really just two ways of stating the same goal – being the perfect puruṣa (person, self). Put positively, this one goal is the freedom in the assimilation of self-knowledge with the help of samādhi (contemplation); put negatively it is the freedom from the kleśas.


 
←PrevNext→
[
:: The number (pañca-=5) is missing in other manuscripts ::
kleśas – five afflictions; a-vidyā – ignorance; asmitā – I-notion; rāga – attachment; dveṣa – aversion; abhiniveśa – fear of death.]

अ-विद्या-अस्मिता-राग-द्वेष-अभिनिवेशाः वक्ष्यमाणाः पञ्च-क्लेशाः नाम॥ –
“Ignorance (a-vidyā), I-notion (asmitā), attachment (rāga), aversion (dveṣa), and fear of death (abhiniveśa) are the five afflictions (kleśas), which will be described.”

These five afflictions and their interrelationships will be unfolded in the next eight sūtras.


 
←PrevNext→
[a-vidyā – ignorance; kṣetra – soil; uttaras – others; prasupta – dormant; tanu – sprouting; vicchinna – variously breaking out; udāra – fully grown.]

अ-विद्या क्षेत्रं प्रसव-भूमिः, क्षेत्रम् इव क्षेत्रम् उत्तरेषां चतुर्-क्लेशानां प्रसुप्त-तनु-विच्छिन्न-उदाराणाम् ओषधिवत् बीज-उद्भव-स्फुटित-वृद्ध-रूपाणाम्॥ –
“Ignorance (a-vidyā) is the field of births (of becomings), like the soil in which the seeds of the four afflictions (kleśas) lie dormant, sprouting, or variously breaking out. These afflictions originate, manifest, and mature like seeds.”

For those who have lived a full life of yoga, the first two, the dormant and the sprouting (like seeds), are subtle and can be taken care of by contemplation and self-inquiry, respectively. In this way the kleśas (afflictions) in these two states remain or are reduced to being dormant (prasupta). The later two, the variously breaking out and the fully grown, are where the kleśa has broken out of its obstructions or is unobstructed, respectively. Kriyā-yoga addresses these kleśas by bringing not only the mind but one’s activities to bear at reducing or neutralizing these afflictions.


 
←PrevNext→
[a-vidyā – ignorance; khyāti – determining; nitya – timeless; śuci – pure; sukha – satisfied; ātman – self; an-ātman – what is not the self; a-nitya – within time; a-śuci – impure; duḥkha – unsatisfied.]

अ-नित्य-अ-शुचि-दुःख-अन्-आत्मसु नित्य-शुचि-सुख-आत्म-ख्यातिः अ-नित्य-आत्मकेषु नित्य-आत्म-बुद्धिः अ-शुचि-आत्मकेषु शुचि-आत्म-बुद्धिः दुःख-आत्मकेषु आनन्द-आत्म-बुद्धिः, अ-तस्मिन् तद्-बुद्धिः परस्-पर-विरुद्ध-धर्म-अध्यासः इत्यर्थः आत्म-अन्-आत्म-अ-विवेक-रूपा अ-विद्या नाम॥ –
“Ignorance (a-vidyā) here is the lack of discernment (a-viveka) between the not-self (an-ātmā) and the self (ātma): the time-bound and the timeless, the impure and the pure, the unsatisfied and the satisfied. It is the mistaken belief that the time-bound is eternal, the impure is pure, and the unsatisfied is satisfied. This misidentification (a-tasmin tad-buddhi) is a mutual imposing of contradictory natures. This is the nature of the lack of discernment between the self and not-self.”

Ignorance is the erroneous transference of the natures of the mind, body, and their possessions and relationships upon the pure witness self; and the transference of the timeless reality nature of the witness self to the mind and body, and their possessions and relationships. The mutual transference is thinking, “I am time-bound, limited, and incomplete (like this body and mind)” and “the mind, body, possessions, and relationships should somehow last forever, be unlimited, and fully satisfying (like the pure witness self).” This is the fundamental mistake from which all other afflictions arise. It is not a simple cognitive mistake; it is a fundamental perspective with which all humans are born. This mistaken orientation requires an encompassing life of yoga to re-orient oneself in keeping with objectivity and with ultimate reality. Patañjali tells us that kriyā-yoga and vairāgya (non-attachment) are proven disciplines for reorientation.


 
←PrevNext→
[asmitā – I-notion; iva – apparent; eka-ātmatā – identity; śaktis – natures; dṛk – seer; darśana – instrument for seeing.]

अ-विद्या-गोचरे दृक्-दर्शन-शक्त्योः दृक्-आत्म-रूपस्य दृश्य-चित्त-रूपस्य च एक-आत्मता एक-रूपता ताद्-आत्म्यम् इव अस्मिता नाम अहम्-कारः अभिमानः इत्यर्थः, न तु समाधि-विषय-अस्मिता सत्यता॥ –
“In the field of Ignorance (a-vidyā), there is identification of the natures of seer (dṛk) and the seeing (darśana, dṛśya), where the seer, which is the true self (ātmā), is mistaken as being the same as the mind or the object being perceived. This identification is known as asmitā (I-notion), the sense of ‘I’ or ‘mine’ (ahaṅ-kāra). However, this possessive asmitā is not the same as the sense of self (asmitā, I-ness) in meditation (samādhi), which is the seeking of the source of I.”

This mutual identity of oneself with the thoughts of the mind is called vṛtti-sārūpya (having the same form as the thoughts) in Yoga Sūtra 1.4. It includes the mind, in these cases manifesting as ego, thinking it is the witness self that should last forever, be unlimited, and fully satisfied. These are not possible for the mind, hence the resulting afflictions the ego, which is just one type of thought in this mind, suffers out of its own ignorance. The conflicts and defenses the ego suffers are rebuilt from childhood onwards – nurtured and possibly inflamed by parents who suffer their own problematic ego.

The mutual identification of the ego and the limitless I is the natural condition of every human being. We are not born with knowledge of the whole and of its identity with the self. Enlightened parents and qualified teachers can bring the light of knowledge to the darkness of self-ignorance. The specifics of the individual complexities of ego, of the kleśas, of anger and covetousness and self-criticism, are the field, the arena, for Patañjali’s kriyā-yoga and vairāgya. These are the ways to come to terms with the mind and its habitual misidentifications as the self. The unexamined and unresolved misidentification, the human mistake, perpetuates through the subtle processes identified in the traditional Indian understanding of the human condition.

This entity, the self identified with the mind, is the individual person called the jīva. The subtle mind, senses, and powers of the bodily functions, collectively called the subtle body, inhabit a physical body, and then move on when that physical body can no longer hold them. This is recognition of the continuance of energy, which is what this subtle body is. The subtle body is not an effect of the physical body. Rather, in this tradition, it is just the opposite. The physical is always an effect or a phenomenal manifestation of the subtle. The subtle body is independent – existing before, during, and after the physical body. In its presence, this physical body is animated; in its absence this body lies motionless and decaying. Whatever it is that makes that difference between a live and a dead body is called the subtle body. The witness self that is attribute free and therefore timeless lends reality, lends consciousness, to this composite subtle body. Again, the identification of that which has no attributes is taken to be the self in an apparent individual relationship with this subtle body. That self-identified subtle body is the transmigrating jīva, the individual.

The Sāṅkhya philosophers call the jīvas separate puruṣas. They mistakenly say the puruṣas are equivalent to the ātman taught in the Upaniṣads. There is an abrupt and irreconcilable discord in the Sāṅkhya explanation.

Īśvara-kṛṣṇa was the author responsible for formalizing many of the Sāṅkhya inconsistencies. The term sāṅkhya was a Sanskrit word meaning a well thought out reckoning, and was so used in the early literature of the Upaniṣads, the Purāṇas, and the Bhagavad-gītā as a term indicating the scriptural teaching relating to the self, the world, and God. The teaching tradition that takes the time and care to go through all the statements of the Upaniṣads and the Bhagavad-gītā holds that there is only one reality, variously referred to by the terms brahman, ātman, or Īśvara, depending on whether the term is in reference, respectively, to itself, to oneself, or to the universe. It is this truly complete teaching that we present here and that brings understanding and relevant skills to the student.

Little is gained by philosophies which seek to confirm our innate sense of ultimate separation between individuals. Patañjali does not suggest a multiplicity of puruṣas. It is the one reality (the eka-tattva), the identification of the self and the Lord through knowledge, that provides meaningful contemplation and a fully integrated emotional and physical life. This is the original sāṅkhya taught in the scriptures. It is the clear teaching in the Upaniṣads and the Bhagavad-gītā. Patañjali makes no claims that would force these sūtras outside of this tradition.


 
←PrevNext→
[rāga – attachment; anuśayin – being in-keeping; sukhas – pleasurable objects.]

अ-विद्या-अस्मिता-वशात् सुख-अनुशयी सुख-दृश्यैः अनुरूपवान् रागः नाम॥ –
“Under the spell of ignorance and I-notion, attachment (rāga) is the alignment with objects that are associated with pleasure.”

 
←PrevNext→
[dveṣa – aversion; anuśayin – being in-keeping; duḥkhas – painful objects.]

दुःख-अनुशयी दुःख-दृश्यैः अनुरूपवान् द्वेषः नाम च॥ –
“(Under the spell of ignorance and I-notion) aversion (dveṣa) is the alignment with objects that are associated with pain.”

Both attachment (rāga, bandana-kāma binding desire) and aversion are impositions on objects of a capacity to be consistent sources of pleasure or sorrow. Seen as sources of pleasure and pain, we act upon those judgments, those beliefs, accordingly. Our judgments are based on subtle impressions (saṃskāras) formed during previous contact with similar objects and on our incessant desire to be fulfilled and satisfied.

However, when objectively seen, objects, animate or inanimate, do not intrinsically have that nature of being a source of pleasure or pain. Pleasure and pain are subjective judgments related to the mind and senses. The objects are what they are. The same object will stimulate pleasure or pain at one time and not at another; it will stimulate one person but not another, one creature but not another. Objects remain what they are irrespective of the imposition of emotional or sensed qualities upon them. Again, it is the individual’s unexamined and persistent need to find a sense of wholeness and satisfaction that drives him or her to attribute the potential for fulfillment to objects. It is the unexamined and wanting notion one has of oneself that drives an individual to seek remedy, or control, or approval, or attention, or safety, from the people with whom he or she is emotionally involved.

What Patañjali and the Yoga Sutras teach is that the only source of happiness and fulfillment is the fully realized self. When the student relieves objects, including other people, of the burden of providing satisfaction, when the value structure is appropriate, objects can serve their purpose and the student can enjoy or appreciate them and himself, or herself, without the confusion.

It is a human tendency to become emotionally attached to objects of desire and to distance from or reject what seems to bring pain. Contemplation is an effective tool for freeing oneself from emotional reactivity. Īśvara-praṇidhāna (acknowledgement of the Lord as the universal order) helps here, because the Lord manifests not only as the physical order, but also as the psychological order. This acknowledgement and appreciation is relating one’s individual mind and body objectively within the total. This interconnected universe is a given, mostly outside one’s own two hands. One learns to accept this order graciously.

Each person has a psychological background, and so too another person has his or her own background. If, in-keeping with the order, these two do not mesh together, then with this objective understanding one may stay away from another. One can draw a boundary – physically, emotionally, or intellectually (that is, make decisions that maintain a boundary). To hate another person is not objective, nor helpful, nor even natural, since one typically has to work oneself into that emotion. Hatred stems from an unwarranted imagination of this person as a source of pain (perhaps due to one’s own inability to maintain adequate boundaries) and an unwarranted expectation of this person as being a source of pleasure, when all there is objectively is a potential clash of personalities or activities, which can be managed more wisely.

To have a desire for or against something or someone is not the problem. These are privileges and necessities in order to enjoy the variety in nature. Otherwise, one would be an insensitive automaton. The problem is when one identifies with and becomes that obsession or hatred. This is being in-keeping with objects mixed up with one’s imagination upon them. One imposes the nature of being a source of pleasure or pain on the object, then oneself becomes different towards that object in keeping with one’s imagination upon it. This is another form of mutual imposing of natures, another expression of the basic ignorance.


 
←PrevNext→
[abhiniveśa – fear of death; vāhin – passed on; sva-rasa – one’s subtle essence; tathā – in that way; rūḍha (or ārūḍha) – well rooted; api – even; vidvas – scholar.]

स्व-रस-वाही स्व-रसतः प्रवाह-शीलः सन् विदुषः पर-लोक-आस्तिका-पण्डितस्य इत्यर्थः अपि तथा रूढः (आरूढः) मूलितः, दुर्-उन्मूलितः इत्यर्थः अभिनिवेशः नाशे अ-नित्यत्वे संसारे निमज्जन-रूप-भयं नाम पञ्चमः क्लेशः॥ –
“Fear of death (abhiniveśa), literally ‘clinging or sinking (nimajjana), which is rooted in one’s subtle, inherent essence, is the fifth affliction (kleśa). It is deep-seated, difficult to eradicate, and manifests as fear of dissolution and fear of impermanence in the cycle of existence (saṃsāra). Even a learned person (vidvān), who believes in the afterlife (para-loka), remains attached to this clinging fear, which is difficult to uproot.”

Ni-veśa, and thus abhi-ni-veśa, normally means entering into or clinging to in classical Sanskrit, where here it can mean clinging to life or self-preservation. However, yoga has a particular meaning for the word. The word can as well be taken from the old
:: from A Sanskrit English Dictionary by Monier Williams ::
for the Sanskrit prefix ni with the verbal root viś, from which come the words ni-veśa and abhi-ni-veśa. That old meaning is to sink down, to vanish, to cease, hence the meaning death, and, as an affliction, the fear of death – the fear that one will not be there after the body dies. The misidentification of the time-free self with the body’s changes causes us to assume that the body should last forever and causes us to see our selves as mortal. We seem shocked and find it difficult to accept that this decay is happening to oneself.

Even scriptural scholars who believe in life after death of the body still show fear and non-acceptance of death. What the āgamas (scriptures) reveal is beyond scholarly information; it is knowledge that affords a reorientation in understanding of oneself and the world. Yoga is the means to assimilation of that knowledge.

The reality here is that it is the body that we see dying. The consciousness, the is-ness that is my self, which is manifest as my mind, is the witness of this change in the body. To assume that the one who is witnessing it is dying, is the same kind of misidentification we can experience watching a 3-D movie, ducking every now and then because of that misidentification. It is another expression of the fundamental ignorance. If that is resolved, then so are all these afflictions, because these afflictions are not based in objective reality. It is a clear case of knowledge alone being the solution. But it is a knowledge that requires thorough assimilation for its benefit to manifest in one’s life. The saṃskāras (subtle impressions in the mind) and the scars of an unexamined emotional life do not yield readily. They have ways of coming back that require vigilance and patience until knowledge is free of doubt and spontaneous.

Fear of death is the mother of all fears, and that is why it is included here as one of the afflictions. It is also taken up in the Bhagavad Gītā, when fear of inflicting death on members of his own family and clan impels Arjuna to seek from Kṛṣṇa the teaching that frees one from unwanted fear of death. Every living being shares the survival instinct. Perhaps we retain some memory of prior deaths and loss that conditions the present life. Perhaps there was pain involved that informs us now. Otherwise, it is difficult to account for this natural fear and behavior towards something we had not experienced before.

It is not a fear of the unknown, though that also may be there. Can one really believe that a mosquito avoids its death because of fear of the unknown? This tradition’s explanation is that the subtle body and mind carry forth from birth to birth the impressions (saṃskāras) related to fundamental self-ignorance which result in, among other things, a fear of death. In modern science, we may attribute it to instinctual mechanisms passed on through DNA. Either way, this fear results from subtle sources that come with birth. The various forms of the fear are lodged in the subtle recesses of the mind, and may be neutralized, according to this tradition, by better assimilation of this teaching. But fear itself is only eliminated by a fully ascertained knowledge that I am limitless in terms of time and the notion of duality is erroneous.

Fear is not because of a second thing. There is, in fact, no second thing in reality. Nevertheless, we seem to have fear. Fear is thinking something else limits me. A wise person has the whole world all around, but fears not. The world is a secondary reality that makes no difference in the wise person.

The subtle world is a part of the order in the universe we call the manifestation of the Lord. Science is also part of the manifestation of the order which is the Lord, and without that order there would be no mathematics or science.

Some may have issue with a Lord. The issue is really with their concept of a Lord. This teaching tries to invoke the most open and broad sense for the term Lord. Any concept that cannot stand inquiry, including inappropriate or inadequate concepts of a Lord, need to drop in the light of a fuller understanding.

There is an intelligent order that pervades the entire universe, which enforces e=mc², as well as allows that formulation’s understanding. So, one logically needs an all-pervasive term to capture that fact. This is what is attempted here with the term Lord. It is a term used in the context of a very important understanding of a universe that is both sentient and insentient, but in both cases is completely intelligent. This universe manifest to our senses and understanding has its complete being in this Lord alone. The proof of such a Lord is, then, everywhere around. Open your eyes and you are seeing the Lord. Close your eyes and there is the Lord. You yourself are this Lord, and the Lord is you. If your concept of the Lord is smaller than this, then this teaching is here to expand it.

These scriptures are there because of the human mind. These minds do not differ in their issues and problems. If generations after generations contribute their understanding of these issues, such as in a scripture that grew and was gathered over millenniums like the Vedas, and faithfully commented upon for millenniums afterwards, then, when you look into that, you will see the basic truths of your own mind. They all had to deal with death for millenniums. They have something to teach on this subject, and it could be more profound than one can imagine.


 
←PrevNext→
[te – those; sūkṣma – subtle; heya – to be given up; prati-prasava – by resolving.]

ते अ-विद्या-कार्य-चतुर्-क्लेशाः प्रतिप्रसव-हेयाः शमेन हेयाः, अ-विद्या-आश्रय-प्रदर्शनेन त्यज्याः इत्यर्थः एवं-भूत-हेयाः काः रूपाः? – सूक्ष्माः प्रसुप्त-तनु-रूपाः क्लेषाः, विच्छिन्न-उदार-रूपाः तु शम-दम-हेयाः क्रिया-योगेन हेयाः इत्यर्थः, अथवा सूक्ष्माः प्रसुप्ताः एव, अ-क्लिष्ट-रूपाः सन्तः तेषां हानं गुण-प्रतिप्रसवः कैवल्यं (YS.4.34)॥ –
“These four afflictions (kleśas), which arise from ignorance (a-vidyā), are to be resolved (prati-prasava) through tranquillity (śama), and dropped (tyajya) by seeing they are based in ignorance (a-vidyā). What are the forms of these afflictions that can be removed in this manner? They are subtle, i.e. dormant (prasupta) or just now sprouting (tanu). Whereas the afflictions that are variously broken out (vicchinna-udāra) are lessened through practices like tranquillity and restraint (śama and dama), i.e. by kriya-yoga. When they thus become subtle or dormant, their destruction and return to their original nature (guṇa-pratiprasava) is freedom (kaivalya) (YS.4.34).”

The kleśas (afflictions) arise from ignorance of reality, ignorance of the truth. Ignorance alone is their ground of being. When these afflictions are still just subtle thoughts, not broken out or in full bloom in one’s behavior, one only needs to see them as their source, as ignorance alone. By this, they easily resolve or dissolve themselves. No further counter action is required. This seeing their falsity can be employed anywhere and anytime, including in the seat of meditation. Basically, it is the application of objective, common sense to one’s afflictions. If their source in ignorance, in untruth, is not clearly seen continue your studies of this teaching with a competent teacher.


 
←PrevNext→
[tad-vṛttis – their expressions; heya – to be given up; dhyāna – retaining a single pointed inquiry in contemplation.]

ध्यान-हेयाः ध्यानेन हेयाः (e.g., YS.2.33–34) तद्-वृत्तयः ते सूक्ष्म-क्लेश-आकाराः तनूनां वर्तमान-आकाराः पूर्व-प्रसुप्तानां भविष्य-आकाराः च, अथवा तद्-वृत्तयाः प्रसुप्त-अन्य-वृत्तयाः तनु-विच्छिन्न-उदार-आकाराः, क्लिष्ट-रूपाः सन्तः क्रिया-योग-ध्यान-अन्तेन साधनेन हेयाः॥ –
“The expressions of the afflictions that can be to be reduced or removed through meditation (dhyāna-heya) (e.g., YS.2.33–34) are the subtly present that could sprout, or possibly sprout in the future. Whereas the afflictions that are other than that – the sprouting or variously breaking out – are to be reduced or removed through the practices of kriyā-yoga and meditation.”

In contemplation, when these afflictions arise out of new and old saṃskāras, they are observed objectively, without identifying them as being associated with myself, and then let go without pursuing them, without being in-keeping with them, anuśayin (YS.2.7–8). Contemplation is a quiet, mental pursuit that allows these sub-conscious afflictions to bubble up and be clearly seen. But in contemplation one exercises the capacity to choose to not react to them by not identifying with them. This deliberate, contemplative attitude of objectivity carries over into one’s entire life, where it continues to counteract the afflictions. Contemplation requires prior inquiry (vicāra); this inquiry is brought into the contemplation in an abbreviated form. Inquiry into these afflictions exposes their erroneous nature. Seeing them as simply forms of ignorance, the afflictions are neutralized as being real impediments in life, so that one naturally can mature out of them.


 
←PrevNext→
[kleśas – afflictions; mūla – source; karma-āśayakarma-storage; vedanīya – to be experienced; janmas – births; dṛṣṭa – seen; a-dṛṣṭa – unseen.]

क्लेश-मूलः क्लेश-मूलवान् कर्म-आशयः एक-जीवस्य कर्म-निधानं सूक्ष्म-कारण-शरीर-गतं नाम दृष्ट-अ-दृष्ट-जन्म-वेदनीयः इह-जन्मनि अमुत्र-जन्मनि च अनुभाव्यः॥ –
“Having the afflictions as its source (kleśa-mūla) is the karma storehouse (karma-āśaya), which separately belongs to each individual jīva. This karma storehouse is within the individual’s subtle body (sūkṣma-śarīra). It is to be experienced as the seen (current) and unseen (future) lives.”

It is said that only humans (or the equivalents to humans on other planets) can give rise to karma since it requires a faculty of choice, an intellect (buddhi). If a creature has no faculty of choice to guide its actions, as is the case with plants, insects, and other animals, then that creature has no resulting responsibility for those actions performed in that embodiment. These creatures have a mind (manas) that is controlled by instincts, and its own likes and dislikes which come with or are acquired in that birth. It is also said that subtle beings born into pleasant or unpleasant, purely subtle realms, such as a heaven, cannot accumulate new karma, since those embodiments, like other non-human physical embodiments, are only meant to exhaust certain karmas from an already existing karma-āśaya. The individual’s karma-āśaya is not somewhere in a heavenly vault; it is part of the individual’s subtle body (karaṇa-śarīra) that is with you right now in an unmanifest, potential form.

Only humans, or beings that are the equivalent to human in terms of having an intellect capable of making choices based on free-will and on the certitude of the judgment, “I am the doer,” “I am the experiencer,” and “I will reap the expected results of my actions,” can cause further births. Moreover, they alone can end their string of births through gaining knowledge of reality. That is also why the universe-manifestation cycles are beginningless. There always has to be the equivalent, or better, of humans for there to be the karmas for rebirths now and in the past. These universes are manifested in order to provide the variety of beings and variety of situations for exhaustion of these innumerable karmas.

This whole scheme of how the universe and its cycles are put together is, of course, a reflection of, and a discourse directed at the human mind, and itself is thus a reflection of the fundamental ignorance by which the human is born. The description of karma and rebirth is not of absolute reality. Instead, it is a means to understand the nature of conditional, dependent reality and of one’s experiences so that one can more easily understand and appreciate the teaching of the limitless reality that brings a mature freedom in one’s life.


 
←PrevNext→
[mūla – source; sati – is there; tad-vipāka – fruition of those; jātis – births; āyuses – life-spans; bhogas – life-experiences.]

सति क्लेश-कर्म-रूपे मूले, तद्-विपाकः तद्-कर्मणः फलं जाति-आयुर्-भोगाः प्रति-जन्म च आयुः च अनुभवः च॥ –
“When that source in the form of these karmas and their afflictions is there, their fruition results in births, life-spans, and experiences.”

 
←PrevNext→
[te – these; phalas – results; hlādas – pleasures; paritāpas – pains; hetutva – they are caused; puṇya – merit; a-puṇya – demerit.]

ते जाति-आयुर्-भोगाः ह्लाद-परिताप-फलाः सुख-दुःख-फलवन्तः पुण्य-अ-पुण्य-हेतुत्वात्॥ –
“These births, lifespans, and experiences lead to pleasures and pains, since they are caused by merit (puṇya) and demerit (a-puṇya) karma, respectively.”

 
←PrevNext→
[vivekins – discerning; sarva – all; duḥkha
:: ‘इह एव सन्तः अथ विद्मः तद् (ब्रह्म) वयम्, न चेद् अ-वेदिः महती विनष्टिः। ये तद् विदुः अ-मृताः ते भवन्ति, अथ इतरे दुःखम् एव आपियन्ति’ “Being [born] in here itself [in this body], in this way we have come to know that brahman. If not, [then] not knowing [this] is a great loss. Those who know that [brahman] are free from what is dead, whereas the others remain in sorrow (duḥkha) alone [being bound to what is dead or dying].” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 4.4.14) ::
; eva – alone; duḥkhas – pains; pariṇāma – change; tāpa – worry; saṃskāras – latent tendencies; ca – and; virodha – opposition; vṛtti – play; guṇas – components of nature.]

परिणाम-ताप-संस्कार-दुःखैः विकार-दुःखैः क्लेश-दुःखैः दुःख-बीज-संस्कारैः च गुण-वृत्ति-विरोधात् च, दुःखम् अ-दुःख-रहितम् एव सर्वं जगत् सुख-दुःख-मिश्रं सत् विवेकिनः तेषां सर्व-संसारः अन्-इष्टः जगत्-स्व-रूप-परम-आत्मा एव इष्टः च इत्यर्थः॥ –
“Due to the pains of change (pariṇāma), worry (tāpa), and the latent tendencies (saṃskāras) from which they arise, and because of the continual opposition of the play the guṇas (the ingredients of nature), then all this world remains a mixture of both pleasure and pain. For the discerning person, the entire cycle of existence is indeed painful, never without pain. For them, the entire saṃsāra is undesirable and not chosen (an-iṣṭa), whereas its true nature is one’s very self and is what is to be chosen (iṣṭa).”

Why is keeping these births going unpleasant when pleasures are also mixed in? Change always involves loss. All pleasures, as experiences, come at a loss in the form of what it took to get each pleasure, what else one missed in getting that, and the wear and tear on the body and mind in entertaining and holding on to that pleasure.

The word tāpa means heat or fever. In the context of these sūtras, tāpa means worry, the overactive mind anticipating pleasure, its intensity and duration, concerned about securing the pleasurable object from competitors, and finally apprehensive over when that possessed object and oneself will decline and parish. Pleasures intensify the attachment to objects and strengthen tendencies (saṃskāras) to pursue more pleasures. These new and strengthened desires lead to actions whose future results necessitate more births, along with their additional mixtures of pains in the process.

Objects of pleasure and the instruments we use to enjoy pleasure – the body, senses, and mind – are composed of the three guṇas. All objects exhibit all three guṇas. These three guṇas continually
:: ‘रजः तमः च च अभिभूय सत्त्वं भवति भारत। रजः सत्त्वं तमः च एव तमः सत्त्वं रजः तथा’ “O Arjuna, sattva [throughout the day and one’s life] arises [by] overwhelming rajas and tamas, rajas arises [by overwhelming] sattva and tamas. Similarly, tamas arises [by overwhelming] sattva and rajas.” (Bh. Gītā 14.10) ::
throughout the day and one’s life. Candy creates cavities; ice-cream consumed too quickly creates headaches. Good food spoils. The tamas of old-age overpowers the agility (rajas) of youth. Pleasure (sattva) leads to exhaustion (tamas) which interferes with one’s activities (rajas). The urge to get busy (rajas) overcomes the sleepiness (tamas), and causes one to be distracted from the experience of pleasure (sattva). The fluctuation is endless. No one expression of a guṇa can remain in isolation, holding off other expressions.

Moreover, every thing is painful alone, since the only source of pleasure is one’s self. In fact, the self is not even the source; it is the pleasure. Everything else is a pale reflection of that pleasure, which, if we miss the satisfaction in one’s self, entices us to chase after that shadow, always leading us away from the real satisfaction. Hence they always tend towards dissatisfaction. Therefore, the discerning have an objective view towards all things. They see that all limitations are inextricably bound with pain, whereas the limitless self is free of all pain, and thus there is no reason for sorrow. When one’s self is not accepted as being in pain, then the pain belonging to the body can be
:: ‘अ-शोच्यान् अन्वशोचः त्वं प्रज्ञा-वादान् च भाषसे। गत-असून् अ-गत-असून् च न अनुशोचन्ति पण्डिताः’ “You have grieved for those not to be grieved, yet proclaim words of wisdom. The wise do not grieve for those whose life’s breath is gone or not [yet] gone.” (Bh. Gītā 2.11)
‘मात्रा-स्पर्शाः तु कौन्तेय शीत-उष्ण-सुख-दुःख-दाः। आगम-अपायिनः अ-नित्याः तान् तितिक्षस्व भारत’ “O Arjuna, the contacts of the senses, which give cold/hot and pleasure/pain [the natural pairs of opposites], have a beginning and an end and [therefore] are time bound. Endure them [i.e., accept them objectively as they are], O Arjuna.” (Bh. Gītā 2.14) ::
without causing sorrow.

Those who discern are not more unhappy than the non-discerning, although some commentaries explain this sūtra in that way. But ignorance is not bliss. If it was then would you rather redo your choices in life knowing what you know now, or not?

It is not the case that this pursuit of freedom increases the experience of sorrow. Objectivity, matured by this teaching and its contemplation, is the avoidance of bondage towards irrational elation, and of bondage from irrational sorrow. Non-attachment (vairāgya) is not a pursuit to become passionless or to become more sad. In fact, there is a great passion for gaining the knowledge that frees. Non-attachment is to be more objective and factual towards the world, to see that the real passion and real pleasure in life has one’s self as its basis, its reality. This pleasure, this reality, does not wax and wane, cannot have a more or a less. One discovers this limitless reality as oneself that no longer requires attachment to situations that fit the mind’s subjective and flirtatious perspectives in order to become happy. This is what is being pointed out here.

We all live lives confused with regard to the ability of objects to give happiness until we are taught by those who actually discern the confusion and its cause. This discernment (viveka) is the essence of the yoga of Patañjali and of the Upaniṣads and the Bhagavad Gītā where the discernment is explored and emphasized. It is taught that one’s self alone is the source of happiness never to be missed, and anything else is a shadow of this happiness. In fact, unhappiness, grief, is said there to be
:: ‘अथ च एनं नित्य-जातं नित्यं वा मन्यसे मृतम्। तथा अपि त्वं महा-बाहो न एवं शोचितुम् अर्हसि॥’ “O Arjuna, now if you consider this [the self – as the body or as an individual soul] to continually be born and die – even in that way, you should not grieve.”
‘जातस्य हि ध्रुवः मृत्युः ध्रुवं जन्म मृतस्य च। तस्माद् अ-परिहार्ये अर्थे न त्वं शोचितुम् अर्हसि॥‘ “Because, for what is born, death is certain, and for what is dead, birth [in another form] is certain. Then you should not grieve over a situation that cannot be avoided.”
‘अ-व्यक्त-आदीनि भूतानि व्यक्त-मध्यानि भारत। अ-व्यक्त-निधनानि एव तत्र का परिदेवना’ “O Arjuna, [all] beings are unseen [before] their beginning [i.e., unknown as to who or what they were before their birth], [are] seen in between, and [are] unseen [after] their end [i.e., unknown as to their lot after death]. Regarding that, [even relatively] why grieve?” (Bh. Gītā 2.26–28) ::
, simply by clear reasoning, even without knowing oneself as independent from the body or the soul.

The yogin who is objectively rational and who knows himself or herself as completely independent from the objects of the world is the one with real śānti, real satisfaction and happiness in life, not otherwise. Turning away from once pleasurable things is indeed only possible, and real, to the extent that one has already discovered the pleasure that is one’s self. The Bhagavad Gītā clearly
:: ‘विषयाः विनिवर्तन्ते निर्-आहारस्य देहिनः। रस-वर्जं रसः अपि अस्य परं दृष्ट्वा निवर्तते’ “For the embodied one who does not feed [i.e., indulge the senses], the objects turn back [i.e., are not pursued], but the longing remains. Knowing the para [i.e., brahman (reality)], even one’s longing ceases.” (Bh. Gītā 2.59)
‘कर्म-इन्द्रियाणि संयम्य यः आस्ते मनसा स्मरन्। इन्द्रिय-अर्थान् विमूढ-आत्मा मिथ्या-आचारः सः उच्यते’ “The one who sits, restraining the organs of action, [yet] contemplating the sense objects with the mind – that one is called one whose mind is deluded and whose conduct is useless.” (Bh. Gītā 3.6) ::
.

Even the very next sūtra tells us that sorrow, unhappiness, is no longer to be entertained in the yogin’s life.


 
←PrevNext→
[duḥkha – sorrow; an-āgata – not yet come; heya – to be given up.]

हेयं दुःखम् अन्-आगतं (YS.1.30–32) भविष्यं, भूत-दुःखं भूत-स्मृतितया स्वी-कर्तव्यं भवत्-दुःखं च तितिक्षितव्यं (BhG.2.14)॥ –
“Suffering yet to come can be avoided (heya) (YS.1.30–32) as well as past suffering, as it is only a remembrance which is within one’s control, whereas present suffering needs to be endured (titikṣitavya) (BhG.2.14)

Future sorrow alone is what can be avoided. Obsession with past pain or sorrow, because it is past, is to be objectively dropped, and current pain is to be objectively endured. Saying future sorrows are to be given up (heya) can mean either they do not arise or, if and when they arise out of inattention (pramāda, YS.1.30), they can be dropped once the teaching is brought back in to bear on the painful situation.

Duḥkha can mean either pain or sorrow. Pain is different from sorrow. Physical pains are natural to the body. Mental preferences for avoidance of physical pains are likewise natural to the mind. What is unnatural, because it is due to ignorance that can be removed, is sorrow towards pains. To get to sorrow from pain requires a series of mistakes, a process of ignorance, which this teaching addresses. Pain and pleasure need not be removed; the mind’s habit of coveting and blaming objects for its own condition is where objectivity is advised.

Sorrow can be seen as understandable, but unnecessary, to an objective outsider. However, that objective outsider is anything but, when it comes to one’s own experiences. Having a scholarly understanding is not enough. The knowledge here is the knowledge of one’s very identity. This knowledge is thus completely transformative of one’s vision of one’s self and the world. By removing ignorance through this knowledge based on objectively and thoroughly understanding realities, one can avoid sorrow in the heart, but not pain. If the pain is acute, an environment that is more therapeutic may be needed to better address re-emerging pain, guilt, shame, and trauma.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃyoga
:: ‘यावत् सञ्जायते किञ्चित् सत्त्वं स्थावर-जङ्गमम्। क्षेत्र-क्षेत्रज्ञ-संयोगात् तद् विद्धि भरत-र्षभ’ “As long as any being [i.e., a jīva] [continues to] be [re-] born as immobile or mobile – know that [continuance in saṃsāra (life of unbecoming becoming)] to be due to the saṃyoga (association) [due to a lack of viveka (knowing the difference)] between the kṣetra (the field of objects) and the kṣetra-jña (the knower of that field), O Arjuna.” (Bh. Gītā 13.26) ::
; draṣṭṛ – seer; dṛśya – seen; hetu – cause; heya – to be given up.]

द्रष्टृ-दृश्ययोः दृक्-पुरुष-दृश्य-विषययोः संयोगः अ-विवेक-ख्याति (YS.2.5) संयोगः इव संयोगः मिथ्या न तु सत्यं हेय-हेतुः हेय-दुःख-हेतुः, तस्मात् विवेक-ख्यातिः दुःख-हान-हेतुः, ‘दुःख-संयोग-वियोगं योग-संज्ञितम्’ इति (BhG.6.23)॥ –
“The mutual identification of the seer (draṣṭā) self and the seen (dṛśya) objects is due to a non-discerning ignorance (a-viveka-jñāna). It is a false identification, not the truth. It is the root cause of suffering to be given up. Therefore, discerning knowledge (viveka-jñāna) is the cause of the cessation of suffering. ‘Know that disassociation (vi-yoga) from association (saṃ-yoga) with sorrow to be what is called yoga’ (BhG.6.23).”


 
←PrevNext→
[dṛśya – seen; sīla – nature; prakāśa-kriyā-sthiti – light-action-inertia; ātmaka – nature; bhūtas – elements; indriyas – organs; artha – for; bhoga – enjoyment; apavarga
:: ‘(तत् ज्ञेयं ब्रह्म) सर्व-इन्द्रिय-गुण-आभासं सर्व-इन्द्रिय-विवर्जितम्। अ-सक्तं सर्व-भृत् च एव निर्-गुणं गुण-भोक्तृ च’ “[Since that brahman to be known] [merely] appears as the attributes [i.e., the functioning – seeing, etc.] of all the organs [in these bodies], [yet] is free from all the organs; is unattached [yet] sustains all; and is free from the guṇas [yet] is the experiencer of the guṇas.” (Bh. Gītā 13.14)
‘प्रकाशं च प्रवृत्तिं च मोहम् एव च पाण्डव। न द्वेष्टि सम्प्रवृत्तानि न निवृत्तानि काङ्क्षति॥’ “O Arjuna, brightness, [attachment-based] activity [i.e., rajas], and, indeed, delusion (tamas) – the one who is not displeased [when they] wax, nor longs for [them when they] wane [throughout the day and one’s life];”
‘उदासीनवद् आसीनः गुणैः यः न विचाल्यते। गुणाः वर्तन्ते इति एव यः अवतिष्ठति न इङ्गते॥’ “who, remaining seemingly indifferent, is not disturbed by the guṇas; who abides – [knowing] indeed that the guṇas act – and does not waiver [from this knowledge];”
‘सम-दुःख-सुखः स्व-स्थः सम-लोष्ट-अश्म-काञ्चनः। तुल्य-प्रिय-अ-प्रियः धीरः तुल्य-निन्दा-आत्म-संस्तुतिः॥’ “who is the same in pleasure and pain [and] abides in the self; for whom a lump of clay, a stone, and gold are [transcended as] the same; for whom the pleasant and the unpleasant are [objectively viewed] the same [way]; who is wise; for whom censure and praise of the self are alike [addressing only the mind or body – as the ātman cannot be flattered nor damaged by any misconception of it];”
‘मान-अपमानयोः तुल्यः तुल्यः मित्र-अरि-पक्षयोः। सर्व-आरम्भ-परित्यागी गुण-अतीतः सः उच्यते’ “who is the same in respect and disrespect [which express only the others’ understanding and value structure, unrelated to the self], the same regarding the side of a friend or an enemy [seeing neither as friend nor enemy]; and who has completely renounced [doership in] all activities – that one is called guṇātīta (beyond the guṇas).” (Bh. Gītā 14.22–25) ::
.]

प्रकाश-क्रिया-स्थिति-शीलं सत्त्व-रजस्-तमस्-गुण-रूपं भूत-इन्द्रिय-आत्मकं पञ्च-भूत-पञ्च-इन्द्रिय-रूपं, दृश्य-दर्शन-रूपं भोग-अपवर्ग-अर्थं भोगस्य कैवल्यस्य च निमित्तं दृश्यम्॥ –
“The seen (dṛśya) is that which has the nature of light, action, and inertia – i.e. the qualities (guṇas) of sattva, rajas, and tamas – and manifests as the elements (bhūtas) and senses (indriyas), the seen and the seeing (dṛśya-darśana). It serves the purpose for experience (bhoga) as well as freedom (apavarga) from it (in the form of this teaching).”

The objects of the world are both hindering and helpful. They can keep you in bondage or help you out of bondage (YS.1.5). The attachment to the presence or absence of sense objects is what makes you feel as though you are bound. Believing that one is less or more whole as a result of the absence or presence of objects, associations, position, or influence is bondage and is ignorance. This teaching is also an object in the world, but it shows you how to convert what could bind, into what will liberate.


 
←PrevNext→
[parvans
:: ‘(स्थूल-)इन्द्रियेभ्यः पराः हि (सूक्ष-स्थूल-)अर्थाः अर्थेभ्यः च परं (अर्थ-ग्रहक-)मनः। मनसः तु परा (निश्चय-आत्मिक-)बुद्धिः बुद्धेः आत्मा महान् (=हैरण्य-गर्भं तत्त्वं) परः॥’ “Than the sense organs, the objects [of the mind] are more subtle (para). Than the objects [of the mind], the mind is more subtle. Than the mind, the intellect is more subtle. Than the intellect, the mahān ātmā [i.e., the universal intelligence, mahat – the entire subtle body of the universe] is more subtle.”
‘महतः परम् अ-व्यक्तम् (=त्रि-गुण-आत्मिक-प्रकृतिः) अ-व्यक्तात् (निर्-गुण-)पु॒रुषः परः। पुरुषात् न परं किंचित् सा काष्ठा सा परा गतिः॥’ “Than mahat, the unmanifest is more subtle. Than the unmanifest, the puruṣa [i.e., the limitless self] is more subtle. Than the puruṣa, there is nothing more subtle. That maximum limit (kāṣṭhā), that goal (gati), is the ultimate.” (Kaṭha Up. 1.3.10–11) ::
; guṇas – components of nature; viśeṣa – particularized; a-viśeṣa – non-particularized; liṅga-mātra – merely indicated; a-liṅga – non-indicated.]

विशेष-अ-विशेष-लिङ्ग-मात्र-अ-लिङ्गानि स्थूल-मिश्र-भूतानि सूक्ष्म-तन्मात्र-भूतानि ईश्वर-नियतृ-महत्-बुद्धिः अ-व्यक्त-प्रकृतिः च तानि गुण-पर्वाणि गुण-क्रम-अवस्थाः॥ –
“The particular (mixed) and non-particular (unmixed) – the gross and the subtle elements – are all composed of the three guṇas (sattva, rajas, tamas). These are governed by the great intelligence (Mahat), which is the unmanifested nature of Īśvara (the Lord), and are part of the phases of the (manifestation of) the guṇas, which occur in a specific order.”

In each cycle of manifestation of the universe, the unmanifest prakṛti (nature), consisting of the undifferentiated guṇas, first manifests as intellect, the mind of God, so to speak, which is then said to contain the divisions cognized as the subtle and gross elements, each being five-fold in this human-authored description that is based on our five senses.

The universe is said to be entirely formed according to the evolution of prakṛti through the subtle and gross elements in keeping with the universal order (buddhi). The evolution is not one level of nature changing into another; it is the later levels manifesting due to the continuing presence of the earlier more basic levels of reality. The manifest does not replace the unmanifest; it manifests because of the presence of the unmanifest, because of the order in the universe, because of the Lord.

The elements have no independent reality. They and their manifestations are all nāma-rūpa (names and forms alone). They are all of the nature of names flowing from intellect. At the end of each cycle of manifestation they flow back into their unmanifest nature (prakṛti). All this happens in the unlimited being-awareness (sat-cit) that is the Lord and that is oneself.

The analogy at the individual level is that of one’s universe springing out from and returning back into the ignorance of deep sleep. It is the intellect that awakens. As the intellect thinks so one’s universe seems and so one’s conditional sense of reality is. And then the intellect resolves into unmanifest in sleep. Even at the universal level, this teaching’s presentation of the cycles of manifestation of the universe is itself only more names employed in the teaching to help reveal that, just as in waking and sleep, this cycle of manifestation and dissolution of the universe is still no more than the cyclic flow of names and forms.

When the intellect has the abiding knowledge that there is only one reality, and from this one reality, which is oneself, nothing else separate from reality can possibly come into or go out of being, then there is no cycle. The cycle of creation simply falls, as a name (nāmadheya), from the tip of the tongue. The universe is spun from the mind in the form of words, lit up by the witness-being which alone is their reality.

This is the only sūtra dealing with the evolution of the universe. The sūtra is in keeping with the scripture and thus with Vedānta and its analysis of the Upaniṣads.


 
←PrevNext→
[draṣṭṛ – seer; dṛśi-mātra – pure perception; api – though; śuddha – pure; anupaśya – sees; pratyayas – thoughts.]

द्रष्टा दृक्-साक्षि-पुरुषः दृशि-मात्रः ज्ञप्ति-स्व-रूपः शुद्धः केवलः दृश्य-अ-संयुक्तः अपि प्रत्यय-अनुपश्यः चित्त-वृत्ति-अनुभव-शक्यः इव, अथवा चित्त-वृत्ति-अनुरूप-कल्पितः॥ –
“The seer (draṣṭā), the witness-consciousness (dṛk-sākṣi-puruṣa), is pure, singular, and the knower of its own true nature. Though it is untouched by the seen (dṛśya), it perceives and experiences through the mental modifications (vṛtti) and is sometimes imagined (kalpita) according to the nature of those modifications.”

The nature of the seer has been presented and discussed in the context of earlier sūtras, where it had to be introduced to fully comprehend the sūtras up to this point. This sūtra clearly states Patañjali’s adherence to the scriptures as we have been unfolding them in the context of these sūtras. This sūtra emphasizes the undifferentiated nature of the seer. The seer, unlike the universe and all the entities within it, is partless. In fact, the seer is the very partless reality of the universe and all within it, including the individual, yourself.

Later, Patañjali and this commentary will discuss in detail the nature of thought, the seer, and knowledge in sūtras 4.18–24.


 
←PrevNext→
[ātman – nature; dṛśya – seen; eva – simply; tad-artha – its object.]

तद्-अर्थः द्रष्टृ-अर्थः यथा, दृक्-पुरुष-विषयतया जीवस्य धर्म-अर्थ-काम-मोक्ष-पुरुष-अर्थः इत्यर्थः एव दृश्यस्य आत्मा स्व-रूपः सत्ता व्यावहारिकं स-अपेक्षा-सत्ता-वत् एव दृश्यं, न तु पारम-अर्थिकम् इत्यर्थः (YS.3.44)॥ –
“The nature or purpose (artha) of the seen (dṛśya) is but the nature or purpose of the seer (draṣṭā). Being the objects (viṣayas) of the puruṣa, the seer, they become the goals (arthas) of righteousness (dharma), survival (artha), pleasure (kāma), and liberation (mokṣa). The self, the essence, of the seen (dṛśya) is their true nature. In practical terms they are ‘the seen’, dependent on specific contexts, but not in an ultimate sense (pārama-arthika) (YS.3.44).”

The seen has no more reality than its phenomenological experience, which is why it is always temporary. The example of dream and deep sleep comprehensively illustrates this point. Just because we see something does not determine the seen’s independent existence. We see in dream, yet the dream objects have no independent existence. When we move from dream back into deep sleep those supposedly independent dream objects lose all their independent reality. They disappear. The same can be said for the waking world objects. They too are temporary within the time they appear. The only existence any seen object has is just its nature of being seen. That nature of being seen is no more than being within awareness, the nature of the seer.

A seen object is then nothing more than its nature of being a seen object. It does not in fact exist as an equal reality independent of the seer (draṣṭṛ). It is nothing more than a form (rūpa) perceived and a corresponding name (nāma) ascribed. Objects, including thoughts, have this transient, relative (vyāvahārika) existence. Their reality is attributed to them only in as much as they become, or can become, known. These objects do not exist in and of themselves. This understanding is consistent with the principles of quantum physics which say that the scientific manner in which you examine and measure an object determines what you will find to be that object.

An example of an object seen is a table. Now, there is no such absolute thing as a table that the eyes see. The eyes see something, but only the human mind has the form and gives the name ‘table’ or the various equivalents in other languages. A bug’s eyes certainly do not see a table; they may see something to fly around or something to climb upon to find food. At the atomic-scale, in what way would an electron experience, so to speak, this so-called table? Would not what it encounters be really an atomic field, not at all resembling a table?

If one inquires into the table, then its absoluteness disappears. The absoluteness as a table object disappears when it is known that it is but wood. The absoluteness as a wood object disappears when resolved into cellulose fibers. Cellulose fibers resolve into molecules. Molecules resolve, when they are better known, into atoms, then into particles, and those into packets of variously vibrating energy in dimensions of space. These appreciations of various energies within dimensions of space are all notions within the awareness of the scientist. Where did the table go? It is still there as a name ascribed to a phenomenological experience.

This more complete understanding of objects seen is incorporated in the process of sub-ration (see comm. on YS.3.44) of very temporal and contingent realities to their more permanent and universal reality.

In fact, none of these so-called objects need disappear to appreciate the partless, universal reality. At the same time I am seeing table, I also see wood, know fibers, molecules, atoms, and etcetera. While seeing table, I can transcend table and see wood. While seeing wood, I can transcend wood and see fibers, and so on. What one sees is not really an independently existing object, but rather one sees (with the mind) only the name which we have attributed to the experience. What disappears is my assumption that any of the object/name is absolutely real. What is absolute is reality itself. The names and forms – as the objects, the senses, and the mind – are relative perspectives of reality itself. These names and forms exist only as appearances within the awareness of the witness, in oneself alone.

Prakṛti, unmanifest nature, which is the source of the perceived objects, can enjoy no greater degree of reality than the observed objects. Sāṅkhya claims prakṛti to be as equally real as puruṣa, the reality that is oneself. But Patañjali has not given equal status to prakṛti. Prakṛti is a concept and a reality only so far as one ascribes to the Sāṅkhya philosophy. Whereas, puruṣa (oneself) is universally never unknown or unknowable, and is independent of any seen object or collection of objects or their unmanifest aspect.

Again the clear illustration is deep sleep, where all objects along with their supposed absoluteness disappear, yet I must be there in order for me to later recall the absence of any separate experience during that time. The puruṣa alone is the timeless reality to be discovered, and it alone is the goal of Patañjali’s yoga. It is reached, so to speak, by a knowledge (the knowledge alone is the reaching) that is free of erroneous thinking and incomplete philosophies. There is no new, special thing to know; there is only acknowledgement that the seen has not, nor ever had, the reality one had believed.


 
←PrevNext→
[api – though; naṣṭa – lost; prati – in regard to; kṛta-artha – one who has
:: ‘यथा एव बिम्बं मृदया उपलिप्तं तेजोमयं भ्राजते तत् सुधान्तम् (=सुधौतम्)। तद् वै आत्म-तत्त्वं प्रसमीक्ष्य देही एकः कृत-अर्थः भवते वीत-शोकः’ “Just as a reflecting surface covered by dirt, [when] it is clean, shines brilliantly, similarly the embodied one, clearly seeing the reality that is ātman (oneself) [with a transparently clear mind], is [thus] one (eka) [with that shining reality], has achieved the goal (kṛta-artha), and is free from sorrow.” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 2.14).”
‘इति गुह्यतमं शास्त्रम् इदम् उक्तं मया अन्-अघ। एतद् बुद्ध्वा बुद्धिमान् स्यात् कृत-कृत्यः च भारत’ “Thus, I have told this most secret [i.e., in terms of sanctity, value, and by appearing to be difficult to understand] teaching, O Sinless One. Knowing this, one becomes one who has [made best use of one’s] intellect and who has done what is to be done (kṛta-kṛtya), O Arjuna.” (Bh. Gītā 15.20) ::
; tad – it; a-naṣṭa – not lost; sa-ādhāraṇatva – it has commonality; anyas – others.]

कृत-अर्थं प्रति परम-अर्थ-कैवल्य-सम्पन्न-योगिनं नष्टं दृश्यं पारम-अर्थिक-सत्तया नष्टम् अपि, अ-नष्टं वर्तमानं तद् दृश्यं जगत् अन्य-साधारणत्वात् (YS.4.14–15, 2.5 & 1.8–9) यस्मात् अन्य-अ-कृत-अर्थ-जीवानां दृश्य-पारम-अर्थिक-सत्ता-कल्पना-दृष्टिनां ‘परिछिन्न-दृशिवत् दृश्यानि नाना-विध-सत्यानि’ इति-अ-विद्या (YS.2.24)॥ –
“For a yogī who has attained the ultimate goal, the ultimate kaivalya (liberation), the seen world is considered to be dissolved in its ultimate (pārama-arthika) reality. Although it is said to be ‘destroyed’ in a conventional sense, it is not truly destroyed, as it continues to exist in its ultimate form. The world appears as different and varied in nature to those who are not yet liberated, due to the ignorance (a-vidyā) that causes them to perceive the world as fragmented and divided, as seen through the limited view (dṛṣṭi) of the ego, seeing many separate (believed) ‘truths’ (YS.4.14–15, 2.5 & 1.8–9) – this is ignorance (YS.2.24).”

The seen’s status as an objective (vyāvahārika) reality is based on its commonality to multiple seers (grahītṛs). When it does not have that commonality and there is only one person seeing it, then it could be an imaginary (prātibhāsika) reality.

Though objects are known to exist when they are seen by a person and not known to exist when they are not seen by a person, this status of objects does not lead to pure subjectivism – that objects are only their independent perceptions. Since a commonality (YS.4.14–15) of an object is also something that can be known.

This teaching accepts that a name and form can have commonality for multiple seers. Now, one seer’s version of the form of an object is not exactly the same as another seer’s, and no form is the same the next time you see it. But the fact that there are certain commonalities of these names and forms determines their objective (vyāvahārika) reality, as opposed to an imaginary (prātibhāsika) reality. That commonality itself is a name and form having an objective reality. Commonality is, like any other object, not absolutely real. Only existence-consciousness, the truth of the universe and you, is absolutely real.

The word ‘others’ (anyas) here does not mean that there absolutely are multiple puruṣas. An individual seer (grahītṛ), which itself is a product of ignorance in the form of a mutual identification of the subject and an object (the act of seeing), enjoys the same non-absolute reality as the seen (grāhya). An individual seer is just another concept in the mind. This concept comes and goes; it is relative and impermanent, not absolute.

Nor can the reality of a quality of many-ness for the puruṣa, as the pure witness, be established (siddha) by a conjunction of seer-seen which is a product of ignorance, as will be told in the next two sūtras. In other words, one cannot establish a truth by reason of a fabrication. When witnessing, as an attribute of the attribute-less puruṣa, is only as if, then any opinion based on this as if assumption, namely, since there are many witnessings then there must be many puruṣas – is also as if.

Moreover, this sūtra points out an even more profound fact. Namely, the same object can exist for certain people and not exist for others. And this not existing for others is not due to them not looking, but rather to them knowing a fact about the object that makes that object lose its supposed reality. To the others, to the unwise, the object is taken as absolutely (pāramārthika) real. Whereas, for one who has achieved the knowledge (prajñā) that is kaivalya (complete freedom), the same object is taken as only objectively (vyāvahārika) real – as transient and relative. Once one distinguishes pāramārthika (absolute) reality from vyāvahārika (transactional) reality, then this less-real world of phenomenon becomes what is meant by vyāvahārika, the transactional reality that is now understood as being only apparently-real (mithyā), not as real as oneself who is pāramārthika.

Before knowledge, we confuse the relatively real (the ego, mind, body, and objects) with the absolute (the being-consciousness that is oneself and all of reality). We falsely believe that all that we desire should last forever and what we do not want should never be. We falsely believe we are born and die, when it is but the objects including this body that come and go within the unchanging awareness that is oneself, that is reality. Only the wise see in general the relative reality as it really is. The otherwise see a confusing reality that they think is absolute – which goes against reason and ultimate knowledge.

In the snake-rope example, two people are looking at the same object. The one with knowledge sees a rope and has no fear; the other without knowledge sees a snake and has fear. This means that in error one does not see what is there and can project out of the fears in one’s mind what one believes is there. The one who has knowledge, upon first glance at the rope, originally also thought it was a snake, but after careful analysis with the light of a proper means of knowledge discovered it was really a rope. For that person, the snake is lost (naṣṭa), but, more importantly to that person, the basis for the fear vanishes. One can still see how the mistaken rope could appear as a snake, but that correction nevertheless frees one from the fear of a snake there. This is freedom (kaivalya) from one’s baseless fears. The snake is apparently-real (mithyā), and so now the basis for the fear is mithyā.

The same relationship that exists between imaginary (prātibhāsika) reality and objective (vyāvahārika) reality, for example, the snake and the rope, also exists between objective (vyāvahārika) reality and absolute (pāramārthika) reality – the world and I (ātman), respectively. Both the imaginary (prātibhāsika) world and the phenomenal (vyāvahārika) world seem absolutely real only when they are believed to be so. In the wake of more complete knowledge, both are only mithyā (apparently-real). The unwise and the wise see the same object, but their understanding of realities is vastly different. The unwise is limited and thus bound by the seen; the other is not. As a result, for the unwise, the objects as possessions become necessities they are bound to; for the wise, they are simply luxuries – life is seen as a luxury.

The term mithyā when translated as false or imaginary or illusion has confused many. The word mithyā is a later form of the Veda word mithunā, meaning conflictingly, wrongly, falsely. Properly used, mithyā is an adverb describing how we take an object, how we know it. When we take an object falsely, that is mithyā.

The statement, “The world is mithyā (jagan mithyā),” does not mean the world is false, imaginary, or useless. It means the world is taken, is understood, falsely. In this tradition, the world – or anything in the world – cannot be an object distinct from the absolute reality that is oneself, distinct from ātman, from sat (reality). There is already fundamental ignorance that keeps one from the factual, absolute reality nature of objects, in which case there would be mithyā, the taking of it as otherwise than what it is, along with that confusion reoccurring and cascading variously about everything throughout one’s life.

Even what we call knowledge about the world, such as, “Today is hot,” is only relatively true from a limited perspective – hot for a human compared to that same person’s memories of the past or expectations of the future temperatures at this location. That kind of knowledge has a practicality and usefulness; it is not absolutely and universally true. From the essential truth of everything and of oneself, even that knowledge is mithyā. Mithyā is an inevitable expression of one’s fundamental ignorance.

The verbal root of the words mithyā and mithunā is mith, meaning to associate, to mix. Mithyā is mixing up one thing for another, which is what Patañjali has described as ignorance (YS.2.5 & 1.18).

The wise who say “the world is mithyā” do not mean they are mixed up about the world. For them the world is none other than themselves – the one, indivisible, and sacred reality. The wise mean the world once was mithyā for them and is mithyā for the majority who take objects as other and as absolutely real, and who take themselves to thus be limited or bound by those objects.

Patañjali points out that all objects (dṛśyas) are to be seen in terms of mithyā (falsely taken as being absolutely real). Every thing that has conditional, dependent reality is not of the same order of reality as absolute reality, as oneself. The status of absolute (pāramārthika) reality that an individual ascribes to objects out of ignorance is now lost. Objects enjoy conditional existence as name and form and are available for transaction (vyāvahāra), but they are entirely dependent upon the reality that is the self. The objects are dṛśyam eva (simply the seen), not reality as real as oneself.

The seen (dṛśya) is capable of being dismissed in thought, dismissed in samādhi, and permanently dismissed as absolute reality in knowledge, dismissed as mithyā. What is capable of being dismissed defines the dismissed as less real than what dismisses it (see the commentary on Yoga Sūtra 1.3). What is not dismissed in thought, contemplation, or knowledge is oneself (puruṣa), the being that alone remains real.

The pursuits and skills of yoga are themselves part of the vyāvahārika world. Yoga starts with inculcating an understanding of the absolute reality (initially as the reality of the limitless Lord) behind all this transactional life we lead. From there, we can loosen the grip of our mistaken identities with our limited and limiting thoughts in the mind. They are all a part of the universal order called the Lord, and are not my personal possessions or identity. Then one can begin to appreciate that I am this reality that is the Lord, in which all thoughts and objects come and go.

This is not wishful thinking, or a simple positive attitude. It is a disciplined analysis and immersion in the realities of how I see myself and how I deal with an overwhelming large and complex world. The techniques have worked to free those who have gone before. As a student of this yoga, one starts with the following understanding.

This universe is what I view from the limited perspective of my experiences I have in this mind during this life, so it is not absolutely, categorically real – not as real as me, its witness. And the various facets of this limited perspective may be wrong – “My perspective may be wrong.” This not only includes my perspective of the world and others, but of what I think myself to be, or to have been or will be.

This allows one’s objectivity to be complete. This truly objective perspective helps heal the sorrows retained from the past that are based on absolutely identifying with the painful projections of my perspective of events and people. It provides a buffer from present pains to help keep them from becoming sorrows. This objectivity culminates in a clear absolute knowledge of life, where even this transactional universe has no more power to limit me than a dream can affect the one who awakens from dream. Life, like the dream upon waking, can surprise and pain me. But it has not the power it had, once I know it for what it is. This universe is not absolutely real as I had once thought. It has lost (
:: ‘नष्टः मोहः स्मृतिः लब्धा त्वद्-प्रसादात् मया अ-च्युत’ “Gone (naṣṭa) is the delusion. I have gained recognition [without error] [of myself] by Your grace [i.e., by Your teaching], O Kṛṣṇa.” (Bh. Gītā 18.73) ::
) its power, its reality, to define me. I am the reality, who alone validates the reality this transactional reality can enjoy. The world is no different than before, but how I more wisely take the world has changed. This is true wisdom that frees.

This is the full vision, and for Patañjali to point this out here among sūtras meant for explaining the nature of the self and of objects clearly places him outside of the later Sāṅkhya philosophy of Īśvara-kṛṣṇa, where duality is taken as real. These sūtras naturally fall within the teaching of the sacred scriptures of India, within the field of the Upaniṣads and the Bhagavad Gītā, where Patañjali clearly placed them. The sūtras understood in that field, in the field of knowledge, not of a sectarian philosophy, are where these words are pregnant with a depth of meaning and clarity, with tradition and certainty.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃyoga – conjunction; śaktis – natures; sva – itself; svāmin – master; hetu – cause; upalabdhi – ascertainment; sva-rūpas – their natures.]

स्व-स्वामि-शक्त्योः स्व-दृश्य-शीलस्य स्वामि-द्रष्टृ-शीलस्य च स्व-रूप-उपलब्धि-हेतुः भिन्न-स्व-रूप-अनुभाव-हेतुः सह-ज-दृक्-दृश्य-संयोगः (YS.4.22)॥ –
“The conjunction (saṃyoga) of the nature of the seen (sva, the object itself) and the nature of the seer (svāmī, its master) is caused by the experience of their natures. The experience of separateness and difference in perception is the cause of this natural (saha-ja) conjunction or interrelationship of the seer and the seen (YS.4.22).”

Without the knowledge of reality, I have a notion of a separate, real object or thought only when I perceive or think of it; and I entertain a notion, a wrong notion, of myself as a separate, individual witnesser only when I see or think of an object or thought. Like pot-space, as though separate from limitless space, appears to come into existence when a pot is formed, so an individual, limited seer appears to come into existence when a thought is formed.

But an independently existing, absolutely real pot-space is not really created when a pot is formed. It is in fact only as if, but becomes a definite mistake if taken as absolutely real. So too, I (ātman), the witness-being, am not really created when a thought is formed. A pot comes and goes within limitless space without affecting space in the least; a thought comes and goes within the witness-being without affecting or limiting the witness-being in the least. This is the truth. If thought does seem to affect you, then that notion, an ego notion, of oneself being affected is itself just another thought, the same as any other thought. These notions that thoughts actually affect the witness of the thoughts are themselves thoughts, ignorant of their mixing up of realities.

Because one thinks the self is like this or that thought, does not make it so. We need a pramāṇa (a valid means of knowledge) to help us see that the self and the thoughts are not in interrelationship, not in conjunction (saṃyoga). The self is the unchanging witness and reality of the thoughts. If one imagines the self is changing while seeing the thought, that imagined self is only a notion, a thought, about the self. The self witnesses that notion also, but does not change (YS.4.22). Even in confusion one remains the changeless, limitless witness-being (sat-cit). This is what the scripture and this teaching says. Continue listening (śravaṇa) to this teaching pramāṇa while living a life of yoga and contemplation; the truth of this teaching will be one’s own truth.


 
←PrevNext→
[hetu – cause; tasya – of that; a-vidyā – ignorance.]

तस्य संयोगस्य हेतुः अ-विद्या॥ –
“The cause of this conjunction or interrelationship is ignorance (a-vidyā).”

We see now why one has to include the phrase “as if” or “as though” in Yoga Sūtra 2.20. By doing so, the connection between seer (draṣṭṛ) and thought/object is clarified. The limitless self, which has no attributes, cannot be an object, nor even a thought, which is within the realm of words. Every statement about it is an as if. The best one can think about the self is what it is not – neti-neti (not this – not that), since we have so many wrong conclusions about ourselves. Because the one who negates is oneself, then this negation ends in reality, your reality free of its seeming limitations, where you have always been.

Negation is one technique within the teaching methodology. Another technique involves using words with a positive sense, such as satya (reality) and jñāna (knowledge). The understood meanings of these words are used as the basis to expand their sense and indicate the affirmative, inexplicable whole. Some negation is used to free these positive words of the limitations they connote within space, time, and the dualist separation of knower and known. Both negation and expansion of meaning are used to point out the nature of oneself as limitless reality (an-antam brahman), pure perception (jñapti-svarūpa), the
:: ‘सत्यं ज्ञानम् अन्-अन्तं ब्रह्म’ “Brahman is limitless (an-anta) reality (satya), knowledge (jñāna).” (Taittirīya Up. 2.1.1) ::
. This reality is the changeless reality of all notions and objects, the inherent reality of the universe in and between every cycle of its manifestation.

 
←PrevNext→
[hāna – giving up; a-bhāva – disappearance; saṃyoga – conjunction; tad-a-bhāva – disappearance of that; tad – that; kaivalya
:: ‘अनेन (कैवल्य-उपनिषद्-अध्यायेन) ज्ञानम् आप्नोति संसार-अर्णव-नाशम्। तस्मात् एवं विदित्वा एनं कैवल्यं पदम् अश्नुते’ “By this [teaching regarding brahman] is attained a knowledge that dispels the ocean of saṃsāra (the life of continual unbecoming becoming). Therefore, knowing in this way, one attains the goal (pada) [called] completeness (kaivalya) [i.e., mokṣa (freedom)].” (Kaivalya Up. 2.2) ::
; dṛśi – seer.]

तद्-अभावात् अ-विद्या-अ-भावात् विवेक-ख्यात्या (YS.2.26) संयोग-अ-भावः अ-विद्या-रूप-संयोग-अ-भावः (YS.4.25–26) हानम् इति एवं दृश्यं नष्टम् इत्यर्थः, तद् द्रष्टृ-स्व-रूपे अवस्थानं च दृशेः कैवल्यं जीवन्-मुक्तिः इत्यर्थः॥ –
“Due to the absence of ignorance (a-vidyā), with the absence of the conjunction caused by ignorance, the discernment of the true self (viveka-jñāna) occurs (YS.2.26). This is its ‘disappearance (hāna),’ the loss of it being a distinct seen (dṛśya) (YS.4.25–26). This its remaining in the true nature as the seer. It is liberation from the seen, or living liberation (jīvan-mukti).”

Patañjali makes very clear here what is meant by freedom (kaivalya). It is not the disappearance of objects, the disappearance of the world. Freedom is the appreciation of the absence of any conjunction (saṃyoga) of the self with objects, the confusion of mixing the nature of the object with the nature of oneself, which confusion is a form of ignorance (a-vidyā). Once ignorance disappears, is removed, then confusions of ignorance also disappear. There is no reasonable way to interpret the words of this sūtra as a statement that Patañjali advises making the worldly objects disappear.

Kaivalya means being one, non-dual (
:: from Śabda-Stoma-Mahānidhi: A Sanskrit Dictionary by Tārānātha Bhaṭṭāchārya ::
), which also means the nature of being pure, without non-intrinsic attributes (kevalasya śuddhasya upādhi-rahitasya bhāvaḥ). One is no longer seen as limited by some one thing or notion. This entire universe is but oneself, one non-dual, indivisible whole. This alone is known as complete freedom – not to be mistaken for isolation from the world.

The disappearance is of the ignorance, not of the objects of the world, because what distinguishes the wise from the unwise is simply their knowledge. It is like a child looking at a rock, and a physicist looking at the same rock. The child simply sees what is before its eyes, the physicist sees the rock and knows it is not completely solid, but consists of mass-less packets of energy in mostly empty space, more information than matter. The physicist knows the rock is simply a temporary, massive phenomenal presentation to the human’s senses, but its basic component reality is altogether something else. The phenomenal reality is less real and less amazing than its underlying component reality. But if the rock comes flying his or her way, like the child, the physicist ducks. That much practical reality it has. The physicist does not stop seeing the rock simply as a rock, nor does he or she have to stop perceiving the rock to clearly know its underlying component reality. Similarly here, the yogins know the practical reality of the rock and the absolute reality as themselves in which this rock phenomenally appears, and that it is time to duck.

Sāṅkhya-Yogins, on the other hand, seek to dismiss the objects of the world in kaivalya, even though believing the objects, as prakṛti (nature), are as equally real as themselves. It is as if they are simply closing their eyes in the face of the approaching rock. Their contradiction looms large. This is because of a mechanical interpretation of kaivalya, instead of the knowledge-based kaivalya which Patañjali clearly indicates (YS.4.25–34). Knowledge cannot dismiss what is practically real; it can only dismiss ignorance. Along with that ignorance goes the confusions based on that ignorance, including the belief in the absolute nature of what is only practically real. In fact, knowledge is what discerns the practicality of objects as well.

The freedom of the self is not some new condition of the self gained or accomplished by meditation or any other activity, nor is it the loss of the ability of the senses and the mind to behold their objects. It is merely the loss (a-bhāva) of what cannot withstand inquiry. Freedom is already the nature of the seer. Living one’s life practically in this world with this assimilated knowledge is living in freedom. Then only can we have wise people who may be teachers for the otherwise. The necessity of having a
:: ‘यथा सोम्य पुरुषं गन्धारेभ्यः अभिनद्ध-अक्षम् आनीय तं ततः अति-जने विसृजेत्, सः यथा तत्र प्राङ् वा उदङ् वा अधराङ् वा प्रत्यङ् वा प्रध्मायीत “अभिनद्ध-अक्षः आनीतः अभिनद्ध-अक्षः विसृष्टः”॥‘
“Just as, my dear, having been blind-folded [and bound], and taken from the Gandhāra [region], and thereupon left in a desolate place, one would shout ahead, up, down, and behind, ‘[I have been] brought blind-folded and left blind-folded!’”
‘तस्य यथा अभिनहनं प्रमुच्य प्रब्रूयात् “एतां दिशं गन्धाराः एतां दिशं व्रज” इति, सः ग्रामाद् ग्रामं पृच्छन् पण्डितः मेधावी गन्धारान् एव उपसंपद्येत,’ ““And as one [a compassionate passer-by] would remove his blind-fold and teach him, ‘Gandhāra is in this direction, go in this direction,’ then inquiring from village to village this [thusly] educated (paṇḍita) and smart [i.e., retentive and logical] (medhāvin) person alone would reach Gandhāra.”
‘एवम् एव इह आचार्यवान् पुरुषः वेद, तस्य तावद् एव चिरं यावत् “न विमोक्ष्ये अथ सम्पत्स्ये” इति (मन्यते)॥’ “In this way, a person [left] here [by his/her desires and blinded to his/her own nature] who [somehow] has a teacher would know [the ātman (self)], and for him [or her] the delay would only be as long as one [thinks] ‘I am not freed nor yet reached’ [or to match the example another way… though he or she is no longer blind to ātman and already abides in this freedom, still that body and mind is not released from this life’s karma nor yet reached its final mergence back to nature – otherwise called ‘videha-mukti’ so it still has to walk those last years until then].”
‘– सः यः एषः अणिमा, एतद् आत्म्यम्, इदं सर्वं, तत् सत्यं, सः आत्मा, तत् त्वम् असि श्वेतकेतो’ “This very [sat (being)] is the subtlest. All this [universe] has this [subtlest] as its nature. That is reality (satya). That is the self. That you are (tat tvam asi), O Śvetaketu.” (Chāndogya Up. 6.14.1–3).
‘परीक्ष्य लोकान् कर्म-चितान् ब्राह्मणः निर्वेदम् आयात् न अस्ति अकृतः कृतेन। तद्-विज्ञानार्थं सः गुरुम् एव अभिगच्छेत् समित्-पाणिः श्रोत्रियं ब्रह्म-निष्ठम्’ “Examining the worlds gained by action, the one who has been initiated in the scripture (brāhmaṇa), and being dispassionate (nirvedam āyān) [by thinking] the uncreated [i.e., reality] is not by action, should, for clearly knowing that [brahman (reality)], approach with sacrificial fire sticks in hand a teacher who indeed is [both] steeped in the scriptures (śrotriya) and established in brahman (brahma-niṣṭha) [i.e., who both knows how to teach and knows what to teach].” (Muṇḍaka Up. 1.2.12) ::
, and hence the necessity of that teacher being liberated even while living, is pointed out often in the scriptures.

 
←PrevNext→
[upāya – means; hāna – giving up; viveka-khyāti – discerning knowledge; a-viplavā – which does not go astray.]

विवेक-ख्यातिः दृक्-दृश्य-विवेक-बुद्धिः अ-विप्लवा अ-बाधिता संसार-रूप-संयोग-हान-उपायः॥ –
“Discriminative wisdom (viveka-khyāti) is the clear understanding that distinguishes the seer from the seen, which is unwavering (a-viplavā), unaffected (a-bādhitā). It is the method for the cessation of the conjunction that forms the cycle of existence (saṃsāra).”

Again, Patañjali points out that the ignorance in the form of mutual identification (saṃyoga, YS.2.17) goes away only by knowledge, not by some mechanical, karma stopping of the mind in samādhi. This knowledge has to be a-viplava, one that does not go astray – not float away or get inundated by life’s situations. This is what we have been stating to be a fully assimilated knowledge, not some new information or philosophy about the self and the world that one remembers, can forget, or be distracted from.


 
←PrevNext→
[tasya – its; prānta-bhūmi – final stage; saptadhā – seven-fold; prajñā – assimilated knowledge.]

तस्य हान-उपायस्य कृत-अर्थ-जीवत्-मुक्तस्य वा सप्तधा प्रान्त-भूमिः सप्त-अवस्थावती प्रज्ञा – यतः सूत्रेषु प्रज्ञा-अवस्थाः न प्रथक् व्याख्याताः, इदं ज्ञानं च ‘अ-क्रमम्’ इति वक्ष्यमाणं (YS.3.54), ततः इह इयं प्रज्ञा प्रज्ञा-उपाये योग्यतायां वा यथा-उक्तम् अभ्यास-वैराग्य-श्रद्धा-वीर्य-आदि-तारतम्यम् अपेक्ष्या। अथवा, योग-अष्टाङ्ग-उपोद्घात-रूपेण सप्तधाः इति, यत्र यम-नियमे प्रथम-भागः एव। कथम्? सूत्र-करेण यम-नियम-सूत्राणि मिश्री-भूतानि (YS.2.30–45) प्रवृत्ति-निवृत्ति-कर्म-योग-क्रीया-योगतया। का प्रात-भूमिः? कर्म-योगः मोक्ष-उत्तम-पुरुष-अर्थ-दृष्टि-अर्थः, तस्य ज्ञानार्थत्वात् एव (BhG.13.11)॥ –
“The method for the cessation of suffering and for the attainment of liberation (kaivalya), whether for the already liberated being (the kṛtārtha-jīvan-mukta) or the aspirant, is sevenfold in nature. Seven stages of wisdom (prajñā) may be described, but the wisdom stated in the sūtra are not separately explained. This knowledge is what is referred to as ‘lacking progression (a-krama)’, as will be explained later (YS.3.54). Therefore, this wisdom requires qualifications such as practice (abhyāsa), detachment (vairāgya), faith (śraddhā), and vigor (vīrya), which must progress in a specific order. Alternatively, as per the eight limbs of yoga, the first part consists of yama and niyama, as elaborated in the sūtras (YS.2.30–45), blending actions of avoidances and observances, and the practices of karma yoga and kriyā yoga. What is the preliminary stage? The path of karma yoga leads to the vision of the ultimate purpose of liberation (mokṣa) and the ultimate being (parama-puruṣa), whose knowledge is the very means of attaining liberation (BhG.13.11).”

The seven-fold nature of the final, assimilated knowledge is not explained in this or the following sūtras. We could assume that there are some missing sūtras, since Patañjali has certainly given a consistent and thorough presentation. The commentators have assumed the task of delineating the seven aspects of this knowledge, and not with convincing success. Vyāsa’s
:: ‘तद् यथा –’ “This is as follows –”
(1) ‘परिज्ञातं हेयं न अस्य पुनः परिज्ञेयम् अस्ति।’ “What is to be given up (heya) [i.e., all the kleśas (afflictions), see YS.2.10] is fully known, [so] nothing more is to be known about this.”
(2) ‘क्षीणाः हेय-हेयवः न पुनः एतेषां क्षेतव्यम् अस्ति।’ “The [continuing] reasons [i.e., the kliṣṭa (hindering) thoughts, see YS.1.5] for what is to be given up [the kleśas] have diminished and nothing more of them is to be diminished.”
(3) ‘साक्षात्-कृतं निरोध-समाधिना हानम्।’ “Their [the kleśas’] giving up is clearly seen through disciplined contemplation (nirodha-samādhi).”
(4) ‘भावितः विवेक-ख्याति-रूपः हान-उपायः।’ “The means for their giving up in the form of a discriminative knowledge has matured.”
(5) ‘…चरित-अधिकारा बुद्धिः।’ “The intellect has fulfilled its function.
(6) ‘गुणाः गिरि-शिखर-कूट-च्युताः इव ग्रावाणः निरवस्थानाः स्व-कारणे प्रलय-अभिमुखाः सह तेन अस्तं गच्छन्ति, न च एषां विप्रलीनानां पुनः अस्ति उत्पादः प्रयोजन-अभावात् इति।’ “Like rocks [naturally] find their level having been dislodged from the peak of a mountain, the guṇas [naturally] settle down [i.e., their potential for affliction is gone and, upon death of this embodiment, the guṇas of this body return to the elements] and are on the verge of [eventual] universal dissolution (pralaya) [i.e., become unmixed together] into their cause [i.e., into the a-vyakta (the unmanifest) prakṛti according to Vyāsa, or rather into the Lord as the unmanifest] along with that [intellect/mind (citta) of the yogin]. Having been dissolved, there is no rebirth [for the yogin] since there is no more [karma] purpose [for another embodiment].”
(7) ‘एतस्यां अवस्थायां गुण-सम्बन्ध-अतीतः स्व-रूपमात्र-ज्योतिः अ-मलः केवली पुरुषः इति’ “When they have settled down, the puruṣa, who transcends any relationship with the guṇas, shines in its own nature, free of impurity [any second thing], and complete (kevalī) [i.e., free].” (Vyāsa’s Pātañjali Yoga Sūtrāṇi Bhāṣya 2.27) ::
attempt, which everyone seems to follow, looks more related to the various steps one takes to get to this knowledge, than the nature of the final stage itself.

Many of the ancient texts were fixed and essentially frozen by their commentaries. These commentaries established a final form that was thereafter maintained. In the case of the Yoga Sūtras, the commentaries, which became popular by quirk of history (perhaps simply due to the famous names [or titles] of two of those authors – Vyāsa and Śaṅkara – not likely the same as the famous Veda-Vyāsa and Ādi-Śaṅkara) and thus passed down to us, were the Sāṅkhya influenced commentaries. If they skipped over or dropped sūtras that were missing in their original or which contradicted their own views and might have been themselves thought to have been corruptions or incorrect additions, those sūtras would be lost. Certainly the content of the missing sūtra or sūtras that would have detailed this seven-fold nature of knowledge is a significant elision.

A better and benign way of looking at this sūtra, though, is to see this as part of Vyāsa’s commentary being later confused as a sūtra in Patañjali’s work. These texts and commentaries were maintained as recopied, edge-to-edge lines of Sanskrit on stacks of palm leaves, not the highly formatted, multi-font texts we have nowadays. There are other possible examples of this mixing up of original with commentary in Patañjali’s Yoga-Sūtra text. This sūtra and Vyāsa’s filling in the answer are all just part of Vyāsa’s commentary, and is not a sūtra in Patañjali’s work. So nothing of Patañjali is lost at all, and that is why there is no follow up sūtra needed to explain the seven-fold nature of this knowledge.

I’ve not seen anyone else suggest this, but it seems a possibility. Other translators in different places suggest that one or more sūtras have crept in from the surrounding commentary, though usually on the clue that those sūtras are missing in some of the existent manuscripts. Not attempting a textual exegesis, that manuscript claim is not being made here.

Alternatively, the ‘seven stages’ here perhaps introduces the following eight limbs of yoga, where the first two limbs, yama-niyama, are combined into the first of the seven stages – both being the initial stage of karma-yoga. The next sūtra shows how these limbs may be looked upon as prajñā, knowledge, in that they lead to knowledge.


 
←PrevNext→
[anuṣṭhāna – following; aṅgas – limbs; yoga – the means; a-śuddhis – impurities; kṣaya – diminish; dīpti – light; jñāna – knowledge; ā – reaches to; viveka-khyāti – discerning knowledge.]

वक्ष्यमाण-योग-अङ्ग-अनुष्ठानात् अ-शुद्धि-क्षये परम-तत्त्व-नाना-विध-संशय-रूप-अन्तःकरण-अ-शुद्धि-क्षये शनैः शनैः सति ज्ञान-दीप्तिः आ अ-बाधित-विवेक-ख्यातेः॥ –
“Through the practice of the limbs of yoga as described, with the gradual reduction of impurities, as the inner impurities in the form of doubts are removed, the light of knowledge gradually shines clearly, leading to the unimpeded clarity of discriminative wisdom.”

Patañjali does not say that these eight limbs, which include samādhi, create new knowledge. They only remove the impurities that inhibit knowledge. We will discover more about the nature of knowledge in the last (the fourth) pāda (chapter) of these sūtras. Now Patañjali explains the eight limbs of yoga.


 
←PrevNext→
[aṣṭa – eight; aṅgas – limbs; yama – avoidance; niyama – observance; āsana – sitting posture; prāṇa-āyāma – controlling the breath; pratyāhāra – withdrawing; dhāraṇā – restraining the pursuit of unwanted or hindering thoughts in contemplation; dhyāna – retaining the flow of wanted or helpful thoughts in contemplation; samādhi – contemplation resulting in assimilation.]

यम-नियम-आसन-प्राण-आयाम-प्रत्याहार-धारणा-ध्यान-समाधयः नाम अष्टौ योगस्य अङ्गानि॥ –
“The eight limbs of yoga are: Yama (restraints), Niyama (observances), Āsana (postures), Prāṇāyāma (breath control), Pratyāhāra (withdrawal of the senses), Dhāraṇā (concentration), Dhyāna (meditation), and Samādhi (absorption).”

The limbs of yoga are effective as a full lifestyle. They are much less effective as part-time (YS.1.13–14). They are explained in order in the following thirty four sūtras, stretching into what the commentaries divide as the third chapter to sūtra 3.8. The pairs, yama-niyama and dhāraṇā-dhyāna, are of special note. Yama-niyama is the basic life of the karma-yogin. Dhāraṇā-dhyāna is the basic life of the jñāna-yogin. These are the two lifestyles discussed in the Bhagavad Gītā. They are essentially the same. That is, both avoid what hinders and observe what helps. The yama-niyama pair is more in regard to one’s activities and attitudes in life, the dhāraṇā-dhyāna pair is more in regard to the quite life of contemplation. This is why both lifestyles are said in the Bhagavad Gītā to be
:: ‘लोके अस्मिन् द्वि-विधा निष्ठा पुरा प्रोक्ता मया अन्-अघ। ज्ञान-योगेन साङ्ख्यानां कर्म-योगेन योगिनाम्’ “O Arjuna, long ago in this world I taught [in the Upaniṣads] two different lifestyles – [one] through jñāna-yoga (yoga while simply pursuing knowledge, i.e., renunciation) for those dedicated to knowledge (sāṅkhya), [and the other] through karma-yoga (yoga while performing one's duties) for yogins [i.e., those dedicated to duty as a means].” (Bh. Gītā 3.3).”
‘सन्न्यासः कर्म-योगः च निःश्रेयस-करौ उभौ’ “Both [lifestyles of] sannyāsa (renunciation) and karma-yoga (yoga while performing one’s duties) lead to complete freedom.” (Bh. Gītā 5.2) ::
.


 
←PrevNext→
[yamas – avoidances; a-hiṃsā – non-violence; satya – truthfulness; a-steya – non-usurping; brahma-carya
:: ‘श्वेत-केतुः ह आरुणेयः आस तं ह पिता उवाच श्वेत-केतो वस ब्रह्म-चर्यम्, न वै सोम्य अस्मत् कुलीनः अन्-अनूच्य ब्रह्म-बन्धुः इव भवति इति॥’ “There once lived one Śveta-ketu, grandson of Āruṇi. His father said to him, ‘O Śveta-ketu, you please live as a brahma-carya [a student in a teacher’s house, since I am not now able to teach you myself]. Indeed, my dear, no one in our family is a brāhmaṇa in relation only, having not studied.’”
‘सः ह द्वा-दश-वर्षः उपेत्य चतुर-विंशति-वर्षः सर्वान् वेदान् अधीत्य…एयाय’ “He left at twelve years old and returned at twenty-four years old having studied all the Vedas.” (Chāndogya Up. 6.1.1–2) ::
; a-parigraha
:: ‘अ-सक्तिः अन्-अभिष्वङ्गः पुत्र-दार-गृहादिषु। नित्यं च सम-चित्तत्वंइष्ट-अन्-इष्ट-उपपत्तिषु॥…एतद् ज्ञानम् इति प्रोक्तम् अ-ज्ञानं यद् अतः अन्यथा’ “[Also] absence of ownership; lack of identification towards son [i.e., offspring], wife [i.e., spouse], house, etc.; continual equanimity of mind (sama-cittatva) towards occurrences of the desirable and the undesirable; [etc.] … [all] this is called knowledge (jñāna) [an expression of knowledge and, thus, a means of gaining knowledge]. What is other than this is an obstacle to knowledge (a-jñāna).” (Bh. Gītā 13.9 & 11) ::
.]

अहिंसा-सत्य-अ-स्तेय-ब्रह्म-चर्य-अ-परिग्रहाः वक्ष्यमाणाः (YS.2.35–39) यमाः नाम॥ –
“The Yamas are: A-hiṃsā (non-violence), Satya (truthfulness), A-steya (non-stealing), Brahma-carya (pursuing the scripture), and A-parigraha (non-possessiveness) as will be described (YS.2.35–39).”

Each of these yamas will be discussed in later sūtras. First, though, is an explanation of the translation of certain of these yamas. A-steya is rendered as non-usurping. This is a rather old terminology, but so is this text. Though the popular meaning is not stealing (steya), as a part of karma-yoga that popular meaning stands out in this list as not needing to be said. Of course one should not behave like a criminal! The deeper meaning is through pairing it with a-parigraha (renunciation of what is given). A-steya, then, is not confiscating what is not given. This is an avoidance of both the act and the attitude of usurping. A-steya is then a satisfaction that what little I have is enough. This is maturity, not just an avoidance of criminal behavior.

In a Victorian way, brahma-carya is often equated with chastity, sexual abstinence. This can and should be a component in a full-time student’s life (particularly as a student from the age of twelve to twenty-four, while living in the teacher’s house!), but the total dedication to this study is so much more than avoidance of unnecessary or inappropriate sex. Traditionally, the term brahma in brahma-carya means the Veda (brahman, scripture). So it meant Veda studies, the life of a scriptural student. Over time and with secular intensions, the expression took on the pre-marital status that a young student was to have. It was only after finishing studies that one was qualified to get married. Until then, one was to remain chaste. The interpretation of brahma-carya as simply chastity is a result of a more and more secular society giving greater weight to the status of marriage than the status of scriptural studies. Moreover, the secular side of modern yoga does not want to promote scriptural studies as part of kriyā-yoga, or as one of the yamas.


 
←PrevNext→
[sārva-bhauma – applied to the entire universe; an-avacchinna – not limited; jāti – origination; deśa – place; kāla – time; samaya – circumstance; mahā-vrata – great vow.]

जाति-देश-काल-समय-अन्-अवच्छिन्नाः ब्राह्मण-आदि-जाति-अ-परिच्छिन्नाः देश-काल-अ-परिच्छिन्नाः, जीवन-दशा-अ-परिच्छिन्नाः यमाः सार्व-भौमाः सर्वथा-सर्व-विषये (YS.3.54) इत्यर्थः महा-व्रतं सर्व-सन्न्यास-अर्थ-व्रतम्, अथवा तथा अहिंसा-आदि-यम-व्रतम् अन्तिमं भवेत्॥ –
“The yamas (restraints) are not limited by birth, location, time, or specific circumstances. They apply universally, in all places and to all subjects, such as to Brahmins and others, and are not bound by any particular conditions. This refers to the great vow (mahā-vrata), the vow of total renunciation (sannyāsa-vrata), or similarly the vow of non-violence (a-hiṃsā) and other yamas, which is the ultimate practice.”

A-parigraha (renunciation) of the entire universe is
:: ‘केन भगवन् (प्रजा-पते) कर्माणि अ-शेषतः विसृजानि इति।’ “‘O Lord [Prajā-pati], how should I renounce karmas (actions and their results) completely?’
‘तं (आरुणिं) ह उवाच प्रजा-पतिः तव पुर्त्रान् भ्रातॄन् बन्धु-आदीन् शिखं यज्ञ-उपवीतं यागं सूत्रं स्व-अध्यायं च भूलोक-भवलोक-स्वर्लोक-महर्लोक-जनोलोक-तपोलोक-सत्यलोकं च अतल-तलातल-वितल-सुतल-रसातल-महातल-पातालं ब्रह्म-अण्डं च विसृजेत्।’ “Prajā-pati said to him [Āruṇi], ‘Your children, siblings, relations, etc. [i.e., every one and thing related to you], the [sacred] tuft of hair, [performing the] investiture of the sacred thread, oblation rituals, the sacred thread [itself], [the initial, bulky heaven-going portion of the] Veda study, and the brahma-aṇḍa (i.e., the universe, see Chāndogya Up. 3.19) [all the worlds (lokas), from] Bhū-loka [i.e., Earth], [and up to] Bhuva-loka, Svar-loka, Mahar-loka, Jalas-loka, Tapas-loka, Satya-loka, and [down to] Atala, Talātala [though usually placed just below Rasātala], Vitala, Sutala, Rasātala, Mahātala, and Pātāla – one should renounce…”
‘…(इदं सर्वं) सन्धिं समाधौ आत्मनि आचरेत्। सवेषु वेदेषु आरण्यकम् आवर्तयेत्, उपनिषदम् आवर्तयेत् उपनिषदम् आवर्तयेत् इति।…ब्रह्म-चर्यम् अ-हिंसां च अ-परिग्रहं च सत्यं च, यत्नेन हे रक्षतः हे रक्षतः हे रक्षतः’ “One should merge (sandhim ācaret) [the entire universe] in samādhi which is ātman. One should recite the forest section (Āraṇyaka) in each of the Vedas [in which upāsanas (meditations) and the teaching of brahman are given]. One should [especially] recite over and over the Upaniṣads [within them]. …Commitment to study (brahma-cārya), non-violence, renunciation, and truthfulness – O may you always observe (rakṣataḥ) [these] with effort.’” (Āruṇeya Up. 1–3) ::
. This renunciation is cognitive, born out of an understanding of reality. A life of sannyāsa encompasses a life of yamas and niyamas. See the Bhagavad Gītā for a complete unfoldment of what constitutes sannyāsa. Only indirectly is sannyāsa defined in terms of a stage in one’s life, like a retirement from competitive society for study and contemplation. Sannyāsa and its less formal equivalent vāna-prasthya (retirement in the forest) lifestyles are well known and accepted stages in the lives of people within the Indian culture.

A more general interpretation of this sūtra, but one that is less likely to be what Patañjali intended, is – [The yamas as virtues] are applicable universally, not limited by [one’s own] social status, location, time, or circumstance, and (would be) a great vow [for anyone who could more fully live in accordance with these virtues].


 
←PrevNext→
[niyamas – observances; śauca – cleanliness; santoṣa – contentment; tapas – prayerful discipline; svādhyāya – one’s study of the family’s Veda scripture; Īśvara-praṇidhāna – intelligently surrendering to the Lord.]

शौच-सन्तोष-तपस्-स्व-अध्याय-ईश्वर-प्रणिधानानि वक्ष्यमानानि (YS.2.40–45) नियमाः नाम॥ –
“The observances (niyamas) are: cleanliness (śauca), contentment (santoṣa), prayerful disciplines (tapas), self-study (svādhyāya), and devotion to Īśvara (Īśvara-praṇidhāna) as described (YS.2.40–45).”

Together, the yamas and niyamas cover what is expressed in the Bhagavad Gītā as living in keeping with dharma (the universal physical and psychological order in nature). Acting against the universal order – against the natural forces in nature, objective justice, and universal values – is acting against dharma. The yamas and niyamas essentially help connect the individual to the whole, helping the individual to be a better participant in the natural cosmic order.

Patañjali does not take advantage of this understanding. He describes instead how they personally advantage the individual. The same also happens in the third chapter, where Patañjali offers many contemplations ostensibly for gaining superpowers. The values incorporated in these yamas and niyamas may be better understood by referring to their explanation in the Bhagavad Gītā and Śaṅkara’s commentary thereon. Within the limits of these sūtras, this commentary will attempt to bring in a sense of the cosmic order perspective in regard to these values, and to the contemplations in the third chapter.


 
←PrevNext→
[bādhana – hindered; vi-tarka – wrong thinking; prati-pakṣa-bhāvana – contemplate the contradiction.]

वि-तर्क-बाधने विपर्यय-तर्केन योग-प्रतिबन्धने सति प्रति-पक्ष-भावनं तद्-वि-तर्कात् विपरीत-भावनं भवेत्॥ –
“When reasoning and doubt hinder yoga, cultivating the opposite perspective can reverse the incorrect reasoning and lead to the correct understanding.”

As in Yoga Sūtra 2.10, this practice here is to see the illogical and false nature of any hindrance as being in fact a hindrance to the truth. Until I am convinced that what I am doing results in the opposite of what I need and want, that ill behavior will remain uninhibited. I may stop doing it for a while. But, having not thought out the nature of that activity and its results, it can unconsciously return back in my life.

Here, the word vitarka is not used in its general sense of reasoning as in sūtra 1.17. Instead, the prefix vi in vi-tarka has the sense of vaiparītya (the reverse of) tarka (logic). This means vi-tarka has the sense of illogic, for which prati-pakṣa-bhāvana (contemplating the contradiction) is required to counteract that illogic, that wrong thinking.

Wrong thinking, even a moral mistake, as is noted in the next sūtra, is seen to be illogical. Within this tradition dharma, the just and right thing to do, will always be the logical thing to do. The most logical will be what takes into account not only what seems best for me, but also best for others, best for the community, best for everyone’s spiritual well being, and best for our shared environment. If all this is considered in one’s deliberation, then such logic will be in keeping with dharma, the most supportive for everyone.

The West tends to view logic as cold and misleading when it comes to doing what’s right. That is often true only because of an out of balance importance to what is me-and-mine. Fixing the me-and-mine balance, reducing the over importance of the individual and of what’s in it for me in relationship to everything else in life, will fix both logic and our emotional heart. Within this balance, treating others as you would want others to treat you is logical, not just a commandment.

If I am just commanded not to do something, I can easily disobey out of a sense of me-and-mine. If I understand it is wrong because it is illogical and not in my interest, then I will be disobeying myself by doing it. That is a more intelligent and powerful argument.


 
←PrevNext→
[prati-pakṣa-bhāvana – contemplating the contradiction; hiṃsā-ādi – violence, etcetera; kṛta – done; kārita – ordered; anumodita – permitted; pūrvaka – out of; lobha – greed; krodha – anger; moha – delusion; mṛdu – small; madhya – middling; adhi-mātra – great measure; an-anta – continuous, unfailing; phalas – results; duḥkha – pain; a-jñāna – ignorance; vi-tarka – illogical; iti – “…”.]

यथा ‘ये वि-तर्काः हिंसा-आदयः कृत-कारित-अनुमोदिताः लोभ-क्रोध-मोह-पूर्वकाः मृदु-मध्य-अधि-मात्राः ते दुःख-अ-ज्ञान-अन्-अन्त-फलाःइति प्रति-पक्ष-भावनम्॥ –
“Just as, ‘The doubts (vi-tarkas) such as those related to violence and other actions, which are motivated by greed, anger, and delusion, whether mild, moderate, or excessive, lead to suffering and ignorance as their ultimate fruit,’ this is the cultivation of the opposite perspective (Prati-pakṣa-bhāvana).”

 
←PrevNext→
[pratiṣṭhā – establishment; a-hiṃsā – non-violence; tyāga – dropping; vaira – hostility; tad-sannidhi – those around that.]

अहिंसा-प्रतिष्ठायां सत्यां तद्-सन्निधौ तस्य योगिनः सन्निधौ वैर-त्यागः॥ –
“Through the establishment of non-violence (a-hiṃsā) in truth, in the presence of such a yogī, the presence of enmity (vaira) is removed.”

Violence toward another is often an attempt to control. The best approach towards this felt need to control another is to address that felt need within oneself, where a degree of control is more likely to succeed now and be yours later to have in relating to others. A matured non-violent understanding, attitude, and behavior toward others help evoke the same from others towards oneself. It does not always thwart hostility from some, but from some people there may be nothing more effective in the long run.

Along with this non-violent understanding, attitude, and behavior towards others is an equal directing of these towards oneself. Attending to non-violence towards one’s own body and mind, such as clearly knowing their capabilities and not chasing after what they do not really need, will help protect them and keep them from having to need so much protection. Additionally, attending to non-violence towards one’s own body and mind encompasses defending and protecting one’s own body and mind from others, when required. A-hiṃsā as a paramount value and a comprehensive skill is both logical and in keeping with dharma.

An even deeper meaning for a-hiṃsā is the understanding that the one behind these eyes of mine is the very one behind all other eyes. Ātman (the self) is one and the same in all embodiments, in all life-forms. To hurt another is genuinely to hurt oneself.

This understanding and behavior is saintly. There is no more miraculous change than to change one’s own attitudes for the better.


 
←PrevNext→
[pratiṣṭhā – establishment; satya
:: ‘अन्-उद्वेग-करं वाक्यं सत्यं प्रिय-हितं च यत्’ “Speech that is not agitating, is truthful, and both pleasant [now] and beneficial [later] [for the other person].” (Bh. Gītā 17.15) ::
; āśrayatva – has the power of sustaining; phalas – results; kriyā – action.]

सत्य-प्रतिष्ठायां सत्यां क्रिया-फल-आश्रयत्वं तस्य योगिनः क्रिया-इष्ट-फलानाम् उत्पत्ति-स्थानम्॥ –
“When there is establishment in truth (satya), for such a yogī, the origin and accomplishment of desired outcomes of action is found.”

A karma-phala (result of action) requires the willful, conscious power of a doer performing the action and desiring to gain its hoped for reward in order for the eventual result (karma-phala) to be stored in the individual doer’s karma account, and to be enjoyed or bemoaned later, even in succeeding births. An action without this will power, for example, purely accidental, yet not out of carelessness, will not create a lasting karma-phala accrued in one’s karma account for later fruition, though there will be an immediate result of action out of simple cause and effect. One’s head will hurt if it is accidentally bumped, but a residual karma to rebound later is not generated.

We have a will, but its power is variable depending upon how informed and clear each choice is. The less informed and clear our choice, the weaker the will power in that choice, as well the power of the karma result to accrue in keeping with our intention.

An informed, conscious, willful choice is not there (or is not fully developed) for very young children and other creatures lacking a fully functioning facility of choice, a buddhi (intellect). They act and react mostly instinctually from their manas (faculty of notion and doubt, saṅkalpa-vikalpa). We mistakenly think children are willful when they are being adamantine in their cravings of the moment. A craving is not a willful choice; it is itself a result, not a chosen action.

In the karma model, innocent children and animals cannot create new karma-phalas. A lioness will not have to reap the karma result of killing, no matter how horrific it may seem to us. The activity itself, of course, has a result. For every action there will be a reaction. The action of the lioness will result in the death of the prey, but there is no willful mental action beyond just the intelligence to acquire food for survival, right now.

Action is either physical (bodily or vocally) or mental. In willful actions, we are talking of a subtle karma result of the action of the mind – not of a physical action itself and its result. This action of the mind is an action of the willful choice by a mature human.

Satya (truthfulness to ourselves and others) will better inform our not-so-blind actions. Truthfulness will guide our actions to do the most benefit for ourselves in the short and long term, and least harm to others. The more clarity in the intelligence behind our choices and the more pure our will power, uncompromised by our self-serving desires or fears, then the more power behind the fruition of a truly beneficial result.

This willful power of a human is strengthened when the doer aligns thought, word, and deed in a truthful straight line, in other words, when there is integrity. This power, generated through all three actions of thought, word, and deed will sustain the karma-phala and presumably keep that result more on the top, so that it is retrieved more quickly. Any dilution or pollution of this power through these three sources of action will weaken and delay the fruition of the result, which may as well be harmful or less helpful when inadequate or inappropriate thinking is involved.


 
←PrevNext→
[pratiṣṭhā – establishment; a-steya – non-usurping; sarva – everything; upasthāna – around; ratnas – jewels.]

अ-स्तेय-प्रतिष्ठायाम् अ-लोभ-प्रतिष्ठायां सत्यां सर्व-रत्न-उपस्थानं तस्य योगिनः ईश्वरमत्त्वेन एव सर्व-विभूति-आधारः, न ममत्वम् इत्यर्थः॥ –
“When there is establishment in non-stealing (a-steya), non-greed (a-lobha), all precious jewels are attained. For such a yogī, the abode of all divine powers (vibhūtis) is in the form of Īśvara, not in the form of ‘mine’ (attachment to the me and mine).”

When one appreciates everything as the precious glories (vibhūtis) of the Lord, of the total, to be enjoyed freely wherever they are and in whosever temporary possession they are in, then the need to personally possess a few simply drops away. This helps the mind settle and be available for what is really essential in life, including and especially for this teaching.


 
←PrevNext→
[pratiṣṭhā – establishment; brahma-carya – pursuing the scripture; lābha – gain; vīrya – strength.]

ब्रह्म-चर्य-प्रतिष्ठायां सत्यां वीर्य-लाभः योगे तीव्र-संवेग-लाभः (YS.1.21)॥ –
“When there is establishment in brahma-carya (chastity and sole pursuit of scripture, not progeny) in truth, there is the gain of tenacity (vīrya) in yoga (YS.1.21)

When this pursuit becomes the only pursuit, the power and tenacity in that inquiry will overcome all obstacles to understanding the scripture.


 
←PrevNext→
[sthairya – establishment; a-parigraha – renunciation; sambodha – understanding; kathaṃtā – reason; janma – birth.]

अ-परिग्रह-स्थैर्ये परित्याग-स्थैर्ये सति जन्म-कथंता-सम्बोधः त्यक्तव्य-कर्म-आशयतया अन्-आदि-जन्म-याथा-अर्थ्यं सम्बुध्यते (YS.2.12)॥ –
“When there is establishment in renunciation (a-parigraha), in tyāga (letting go of possessiveness), there is understanding of the reason for births, knowing the reason for beginningless rebirth as being due to one’s karma that ought to be let go (not identified with) (YS.2.12)

In cognitive-based renunciation, one comes to clearly understand that unwarranted desire, a sense of lack and inadequacy in oneself, leads to further re-birth, and that knowledge of the self, which possesses nothing yet is everything, removes the ignorance which is the source of desire and re-birth.

There is no basis found in this sūtra to say that the tradition holds a value for discovering or exploring past life experiences, as some claim. If renunciation is the value here, then it would naturally include the renunciation of a me-and-mine notion in those past life experiences too. There is no purpose in renunciation to go there. Nevertheless, there are many commentators and authors who would like to take the student in that direction. The current life holds more than enough to come to the freedom that these sūtras unfold. The karma setup here is that the individual’s mind is wiped of the details of the previous life’s memories, allowing a fresh, clean start to get it right this time. This mind, after many years, has brought you to this teaching, so why regress back into what happened in your past? It may distract you, and this opportunity for the teaching may be missed.


 
←PrevNext→
[śauca – cleanliness; jugupsā – repulse; sva-aṅga – one’s own body; a-saṃsarga – non-attachment; paras – others.]

बाह्य-शौचात् नियमात् स्व-अङ्ग-जुगुप्सा स्व-देह-अ-पुण्य-भाग-त्याग-दृष्टिः परैः बाह्य-मनस्-हारैः अपि पुण्य-अ-पुण्य-मिश्र-देहैः अ-संसर्गः भाग-त्याग-दृष्टिः तथा अपि इत्यर्थः॥ –
“Through the observance (niyama) of external cleanliness (śauca), there arises a natural repulse (desire to guard oneself) from one’s own body, a disregard (tyāga-dṛṣṭi) towards the natural present impurity of one’s own body. This is a non-attachment (bhāga-tyāga-dṛṣṭi) with this body, as a mixture of merit and demerit, as well as with the bodies of others.”

The objective attributes of the body are, of course, what they are. But when the mind also labels these as alluring or repulsive due to the ignorance of mutual identification, namely, “This improves or ruins me,” then this subjectivity needs to be balanced. If one extreme is seen then the other extreme cannot be far away, since an opposite does not exist without its contrary. Moreover, once the subjective nature of the labeling is better appreciated, then the allurement and repulsion is properly placed in one’s mind instead of in the object. This balance and understanding towards one’s own body is easily applicable to the bodies of others too.

This technique of prati-pakṣa-bhāvana (contemplating the contradiction) is useful here. We are not trying to develop a repulsion or disgust with the body or with other bodies. This and all other bodies are glories of the Lord. But, if one is nagged by emotions towards others, they can effectively be jolted back into balance by a one-time realignment, as and when necessary. This is the repulse (an instance of being driven away) regarding the least agreeable aspects of this body being surely present in that other, otherwise alluring, body also.

This is a preliminary discipline to counter-balance the extremes of attachment, so that one can get to a more objective center, from which to progress altogether out of attachment in all its forms, positive and negative, to arrive at an acceptance of all that one sees. But this is an objective acceptance, not a blind acceptance. If something needs fixing, and it is within my means to fix, then cleanliness (śauca) does not stop. It proceeds without attachment.


 
←PrevNext→
[sattva-śuddhi – mental cleanliness; sau-manasya – contentment; aika-agrya – ability to stay on one; indriya-jaya – mastery over the senses; yogyatva – capacity; ātma-darśana – knowing the self.]

सत्त्व-शुद्धि-सौ-मनस्य-ऐक-अग्र्य-इन्द्रिय-जय-आत्म-दर्शन-योग्यत्वानि अन्तःकरण-शौचात् सु-मनस्-भावे ऐक-अग्र्ये इन्द्रिय-विनिग्रहे आत्म-ज्ञाने च योग्यत्वानि ॥ –
“And from mental (internal) cleanliness (sattva-śuddhi) there arises (the observance/niyama of) contentment (sau-manasya) , which leads to the ability to stay on one contemplation topic and the mastery over the senses (instead of the senses mastering one’s mind). This gives fitness for this self-knowledge.”

 
←PrevNext→
[santoṣa
:: ‘यः तु आत्म-रतिः एव स्याद् आत्म-तृप्तः च मानवः। आत्मनि एव च सन्तुष्टः तस्य कार्यं न विद्यते’ “Whereas, the person who would [find] pleasure within the self alone, be satisfied (tṛpta) with the self, and be contented (santuṣṭa) in the self alone – that one has nothing [yet] to be done.” (Bh. Gītā 3.17) ::
; lābha – attains; an-uttama – unsurpassed; sukha – fullness.]

यतः आत्म-दर्शन-योग्यत्वं ततः सन्तोषात् नियमात् अन्-उत्तमः सुख-लाभः आत्म-स्व-रूप-तृप्तिः इत्यर्थः॥ –
“Because of the fitness for self-realization by the discipline (niyama) of contentment (santoṣa), there arises the ultimate happiness, the satisfaction in the true nature of the self.”

When the mind attains clarity, the nature of the limitless fullness of oneself, which is the teaching of this tradition, is unimpeded. This is through a discerning knowledge that I am full and complete, untainted by the limitations of the mind and body since, as their witness, I cannot be them, yet they cannot be without me since I am the existence they enjoy.


 
←PrevNext→
[tapas – prayerful discipline; kṣaya – wane; a-śuddhis – impurities; kāya – body; indriyas – senses; siddhi – success.]

काय-इन्द्रिय-सिद्धिः देह-इन्द्रिय-योग्यत्व-सिद्धिः इह जन्मनि च परम-पुरुष-अर्थ-सिद्धिः अ-शुद्धि-क्षयात् क्लेश-क्षयात् तपसः (YS.2.1) नियमात्॥ –
“The success of this fitness of body and senses here itself, which is for being the ultimate Person, is through the discipline of austerity (tapas) – the wane of impurities, of afflictions (kleśas) (YS.2.1)

The body and senses also are allowed to be all they can be, not hindered by an undisciplined and doubting mind and by a weakness of will-power, which erect barriers that are not there. The tapas listed in the Bhagavad Gītā verses 17.14–17 quoted under sūtra 2.1 clearly are reasonable and effective disciplines that directly address the weaknesses the mind may have in assimilating this teaching.

Tapas is sometimes confused with torturing the body or mind. Stories of exaggerated self-torture in local tales get passed down and spread by otherwise well-meaning people – thinking they may be inspiring others, but are more likely discouraging. Self-torture is not what reasonable people would want to do unto themselves, or want others to do unto themselves. Self-violence cannot be the intention or the practice of tapas, since this runs exactly counter to a-hiṃsā (non-violence). One cannot observe both at the same time. Patañjali neither introduces nor suggests any torturous practices in his sūtras.

Self-violence is disrespect for the Lord’s creation, for the temple of the ātman. All these disciplines are to be imbued with satya (truthfulness) and a-hiṃsā (non-violence), the two pillars of all values. A yogin undertakes certain practices because they are the more intelligent to perform. It may be like a medicine that could be unpleasant, though it is corrective. But if the corrective is more destructive than the problem, then such cures should be avoided or dropped. The body and senses cannot attain their success if they are distorted or destroyed in the practice of tapas.


 
←PrevNext→
[svādhyāya – one’s study of the family’s Veda scripture; saṃprayoga – identity; devatā – Lord; iṣṭa – one’s family or personal worship.]

स्व-अध्यायात् (YS.2.1) नियमात् इष्ट-देवता-संप्रयोगः सर्व-विभूति-रूपेण सर्व-नियन्तृ-रूपेण जन्म-स्थिति-लय-रूपेण च ईश्वरस्य इष्ट-देवता-रूपेण अ-भिन्नत्वम्॥ –
“Through the discipline (niyama) of self-study (svādhyāya) (YS.2.1), one attains identity with the Lord (Īśvara), as one’s desired deity (iṣṭa-devatā), in the form of all the glories, the all-controlling power within, and the source of (universal) birth, existence and dissolution.”

One can gain enough of an understanding of limitless reality, of the Lord, so one can proceed to contemplate upon that Lord. One’s worshiped Lord (iṣṭa-devatā) may be just an aspect of the Lord. Any and all of the forces in nature can be looked upon as devatās (deities). A devatā is a manifestation of the Lord, so the Lord can be invoked in that particular form. Recognition of the Lord’s awareful presence in the sacred waters of Gaṅgā, in a temple stone carving, or in the embodiment of Lord Kṛṣṇa, is similar to gaining another’s attention by just touching their hand, instead of having to touch their entire body. This is why the term devatā (deity) was used here. It can have this limited sense, unlike the term Īśvara (Lord) used in sūtra 1.24, that rarely has a limited sense.

The term devatā (deity) here can be extended to nearly all the various descriptions of the gods and goddesses of any and all cultures.

A limited form of the Lord does not limit the Lord itself. Even the worshipers of the gods and goddesses of any and all cultures really worship in their heart, knowingly or unknowingly, the limitless Lord. Though they may be temporarily confused into believing their own version of the Lord is the limitless, since a distinct version or perspective of anything, even of the Lord, can only be something that is limited.

In fact, no one really worships a form, such as an element of nature, the sun, a stone-carving, or a historical person, but only what that form stands for, what it means, what it is a manifestation of. No one keeps staring at their glasses on their nose, but uses them to clearly focus beyond them. The iṣṭa-devatā is the lens adopted to appreciate the formless, limitless reality, called the
:: ‘सः एव काले भुवनस्य गोप्ता विश्व-अधिपः सर्व-भूतेषु गूढः। यस्मिन् युक्ताः ब्रह्म-ऋषयः देवताः च तम् एवं ज्ञात्वा मृत्यु-पाशान् छिनत्ति’ “He alone is the preserver of the universe in time, the Lord (adhipa) of the universe, [as though] hidden in all beings. Knowing in this way the one [Lord] in whom all the sages of the Vedas and the deities (devatās) are united, one cuts the noose of death.” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 4.15) ::
.

To grow up with such spiritual study and enjoying the presence and support of a personal and family deity is the norm in Veda inspired India. Few Westerners have experienced this quality of interaction with an ever-present and loving deity. The devotee grows up knowing that his iṣṭa-devatā hears and sees all words and gestures and understands their fullest meaning. That Lord is non-judgmental and points always to the way to grow from life’s experiences and challenges – the extra parent, so to speak, that one may need in life. This is an appreciation that fully lends itself to success in the contemplations in these Yoga Sūtras. Anyone can choose an aspect of creation to use as an altar for devotion and meditation. The Lord’s presence is in and available in all things. The student who does not already do so begins a relationship with the Lord as an aspect of nature and as a symbol of what she sees as her most complete and most mature self.

It should again be noticed with due importance that Patañjali has not mentioned any other source or teaching upon which to contemplate than the Veda, as a means of knowledge. Completeness and clarity require a broad and certain basis – physically, emotionally, and logically. The various philosophies throughout history are based on various sets of assumptions that may or may not be true or pertinent. These philosophies may not have such a grand vision of oneself that encompasses the entire universe and accepts all forms of worship. They may not have a vast array of practical, mythical, psychological, and logical teachings that have been lived fully for thousands of years. Those other philosophies may not provide the student such a certain and firm basis that this teaching tradition does provide.


 
←PrevNext→
[Īśvara-praṇidhāna – intelligently surrendering
:: ‘तम् (ईश्वरम्) एव शरणं गच्छ सर्व-भावेन भारत। तत्-प्रसादात् परां शान्तिं स्थानं प्राप्स्यसि शाश्वतम्’ “With all [your] being, surrender to that [Lord] alone [who is the center of your being and is in the form of your natural disposition moving you through life], O Arjuna. By that [Lord’s] grace you will attain the ultimate peace, the timeless abode.” (Bh. Gītā 18.62) ::
; siddhi – attainment; samādhi – contemplation resulting in assimilation.]

समाधि-सिद्धिः परम-पुरुषे सर्वं समाधीयते यस्मिन् इति समाधिः तस्मिन् समाधौ सिद्धिः (YS.1.51) ईश्वर-प्रणिधानात् (YS.2.1) नियमात्॥ –
“The accomplishment of contemplation (samādhi) occurs when everything is resolved in the ultimate being, Īśvara, in whom all is merged. This state of samādhi is achieved through intelligently surrendering to Īśvara (Īśvara-praṇidhāna), the final discipline (niyama) (YS.1.51, YS.2.1)

Gradually one comes to the surrender of the belief that one controls the results of one’s actions. When this surrender is fully assimilated, and all of one’s body and mind, and all of one’s actions and their results are no longer mine, but are known as belonging to nature as a manifestation of the Lord, of reality, and further, when one knows that this reality, the Lord, cannot be separate from, and in fact is, oneself, then that is samādhi. There is no second limiting, real thing – no thoughts, no body, no actions, no results which can be misidentified as one’s limited self. Then you understand that which is and always was yourself as complete and free of any sense of limitation.


 
←PrevNext→
[āsana
:: ‘स्पर्शान् कृत्वा बहिः बाह्यान् चक्षुः च एव अन्तरे भ्रुवोः। प्राण-अपानौ समौ कृत्वा नासाभ्यन्तर-चारिणौ॥’ “Keeping external the external sense objects and the vision within the eyebrows [i.e., the eyes shut], keeping [naturally] equal the exhalation and inhalation moving within the nostrils,”
‘यत-इन्द्रिय-मनो-बुद्धिः मुनिः मोक्ष-परायणः। विगत-इच्छा-भय-क्रोधः यः सदा मुक्तः एव सः॥’ “…the one who is contemplative – whose senses, mind, and intellect are mastered [enough to sit in meditation], having mokṣa (complete freedom) as the ultimate end, from whom are [mostly or completely] gone requiring/anticipating, fear and anger – that one [who sits in meditation, contemplating this teaching] is always liberated indeed.” (Bh. Gītā 5.27–28).
‘शुचौ देशे प्रतिष्ठाप्य स्थिरम् आसनम् आत्मनः। न अति-उच्छ्रितं न अति-नीचं चैल-अजिन-कुश-उत्तरम्॥’ “Arranging one’s seat in a clean place, firm, not too high nor too low, on which the cover is [from top to bottom:] a [soft] cloth, a hide [for padding], and kuśa grass [for insulation from cold and dampness] [or whatever else provides the same].”
‘तत्र एक-अग्रं मनः कृत्वा यत-चित्त-इन्द्रिय-क्रियः। उपविश्य आसने युञ्ज्याद् योगम् आत्म-विशुद्धये॥’ “[Then] sitting upon that seat [or its equivalent] – making the mind single-pointed [i.e., having just one object] – may the one whose activities of the mind and senses are mastered contemplate [the teaching] for clarity of mind [i.e., for removing obstacles to abiding in this knowledge].”
‘समं काय-शिरो-ग्रीवं धारयन् अ-चलं स्थिरः। सम्प्रेक्ष्य नासिका-अग्रं स्वं दिशः च अन्-अवलोकयन्॥’ “Holding the body, head, and neck in line and still, being steady [i.e., having a wide base], [as though] looking at the tip of one’s nose [i.e., relaxing the shut eyes, whose open gaze otherwise would be along the tip of the nose], not looking [listening, etc.] in all directions,”
‘प्रशान्त-आत्मा विगत-भीः ब्रह्म-चारि-व्रते स्थितः। मनः संयम्य मद्-चित्तः युक्तः आसीत मद्-परः॥’ “…being of clear mind, without fear, and firm in [one’s] vow of seeking brahman (brahma-carya; i.e., listening to the teacher, then continually contemplating and teaching others), mastering the mind – may the yogin sit, thinking of Me [through My teaching], having Me as the ultimate.” (Bh. Gītā 6.11–14) ::
; sthira – stable; sukha – comfortable.]

स्थिर-सुखं स्थिरं सुखं च भवेत् आसनं ध्यान-अर्थम् एव पद्म-स्वस्तिक-आदि-देह-स्थापनं नाम तृतीय-योग-अङ्गम्॥ –
“Stable and comfortable, the posture (āsana) becomes suitable for contemplation (dhyāna). The establishment of the body in positions like Padma (‘the lotus’), Sv-astika (‘the conducive to well-being’), etc. (for meditation), is called the third limb of yoga.”

If one cannot sit erect with head-neck-back in balanced alignment, remaining still and comfortable for a span of 48 minutes, one muhurta, then prior to meditation one can practice various yoga-āsanas (healing postures) to gain the required flexibility and strength to maintain this alert sitting posture. Whatever sitting, after practice, allows one to remain alert and comfortable for a sufficient length of time is called āsana. For more, one can see Śaṅkara’s Brahma-Sūtra-Bhāṣya 4.1.7–11.


 
←PrevNext→
[śaithilya – relaxation; prayatna – straining; samāpatti – contemplating; an-anta – limitless.]

प्रयत्न-शैथिल्य-अन्-अन्त-समापत्तिभ्यां स्थिर-आसने प्रयत्न-शैथिल्येन सुख-आसने च आकाश-प्राण-आदि-अन्-अन्त-विषय-समापत्त्या॥ –
“Through the relaxation of straining, stability is gained. Through contemplating the limitless, such as on universal space (Ākāśa) and life-force (Prāṇa), comfort (sukha) is gained.”

Until there is relaxation in the posture, then that stress will keep it from being still and stable. Comfort, on the other hand, is gained not only physically (by repeated practice in flexibility), but also mentally by removing the mind’s focus from the confines of any small bodily pain, and focusing instead on what lacks limitation. The body and its small pains are then, in time, dismissed and dropped in the seat of contemplation on the limitless. If the pains persist, though, better corrective measures should be applied to gain a more painless, still and stable posture.

Samādhi is for gaining complete freedom in all of one’s life. Even to attain comfort in sitting for meditation Patañjali recommends contemplation on the limitless. Even the smallest thing, like breath, can be connected in the seat of contemplation to its cosmic manifestation, intelligently appreciating breath as the life force that pervades this entire universe. Similarly, the space of the body, or the space in the heart, is not different, not separated in anyway, from the entire expanse of the space in this universe, just as a pot does not divide or limit the space of the universe.

Āsana for meditation may involve the visualization of the body, mentally observing the physical body as an object. Start from the top of the head slowly down to the toes, or from bottom up. Bathe in your attention and breath (as life’s energy) each part of the body – the top of the head, forehead, eyes, mouth, jaw, ears, neck, shoulders left and right, chest, and the rest of the lower body, relaxing each of them in turn. Then visualize the entire body, like it was a statue – a living, breathing statue – in limitless space, in the limitless space of awareness in the heart.

Appendix - Nature of the Mind presents effective steps in contemplation.


 
←PrevNext→
[tataḥ – from that; an-abhighāta – not assailed; dvan-dvas – pairs of opposites.]

ततः स्थिर-सुख-आसनात् योगी शीत-उष्ण-सुख-दुःख-आदि-द्वम्-द्व-अन्-अभिघातः॥ –
“From that stable and comfortable posture, the yogī is not assailed by extremes such as cold and heat, pleasure and pain, and other dualities.”

If the body has an itch, mentally scratch it with attention and let it go. You have an appointment later – note it and let it drop for now. A memory of what someone said to you arises – acknowledge its current significance, then drop it for the time being.

With repeated practice one can sit and quickly shut out awareness of the physical environment, including one’s body. The attention then can shift to the more subtle – the breath, the mind, the teaching, and oneself. This alone is Patañjali’s advice concerning āsana. One needs to be able to sit still and comfortable, without bodily affliction, in order to contemplate subtle reality. Other yoga āsanas and practices are for addressing health and related concerns that might be a distraction for the mind (YS.1.30).


 
←PrevNext→
[tasmin sati – established in this; prāṇa-āyāma – controlling the breath; viccheda – separating; gati – flow; śvāsa – inhalation; pra-śvāsa – exhalation.]

तस्मिन् द्वम्-द्व-अन्-अभिघात-आसने सति, श्वास-प्रश्वासयोः अन्तर्-श्वास-बहिर्-श्वासयोः गति-विच्छेदः प्राणायामः नाम चतुर्थ-योग-अङ्गम्॥ –
“While in that posture, free from the disturbances of dualities, the interruption of the movement of the breath between inhalation and exhalation is called prāṇāyāma, the fourth limb of yoga.”

Established in this (tasmin sati) does not mean when this (āsana) is perfected (siddha). That could take a lifetime and beyond. The breath control practices here only require one to be able to have a stable, comfortable sit, which naturally blocks out the environment, including the pains and itches of the body. The mind can then start to fully contemplate upon the infinite, the cosmic aspect of a topic of contemplation.

Between inhalation and exhalation, introduce a pause. This pause is the first step in prāṇāyāma (controlling the breath). Because of the continual necessity for this major source of life-energy, this pause naturally draws one’s attention to the quiet subtleness of the life-breath. If the mind wanders away from this attention on the breath, recognize the distraction, acknowledge that the distraction too is present in this same life-force that pervades the universe, and gently bring it back. Do not scold the mind for wandering. The art of continually bringing the mind back to its topic is what meditation is. This prāṇāyāma (breath control) naturally calms the mind into its own quiet, subtleness, and thus fulfills its expressed purpose as the fourth limb of yoga.


 
←PrevNext→
[vṛtti – operation; bāhya – outward; abhyantara – inward; stambha – stoppage; paridṛṣṭa – is observed; deśa – location; kāla – length; saṃkhyā – count; dīrgha – long; sūkṣma – subtle.]

बाह्य-अभ्यन्तर-स्तम्भ-वृत्तिः श्वास-प्रश्वासयोः बाह्य-वृत्तिः अभन्तर-वृत्तिः स्तम्भ-वृत्तिः च त्रि-विध-प्राण-आयामः, देश-काल-संख्याभिः देशतः कालतः संख्यातः च परिदृष्टः परीक्षितः, दीर्घ-सूक्ष्मः काल-संख्यातः दीर्घः अन्-अन्त-बाह्य-अभ्यन्तर-प्राण-देशतः (YS.2.51) सूक्ष्मः च प्राण-आयामः॥ –
“The three types of prāṇāyāma are: the external (bāhya), internal (abhy-antara), and the suspension (stambha) of the breath. These are measured by the duration (kāla), location (deśa), and number (saṅkhyā) of breaths. They are observed and measured in relation to external, internal, and suspension phases of breath. The external prāṇāyāma is the breath that involves exhalation, internal prāṇāyāma involves inhalation, and suspension prāṇāyāma involves the holding of breath. These practices, whether long or subtle, are classified by duration and measurement (YS.2.51).”

Prāṇāyāma can be a simple practice learned in a few sessions, which is good enough for settling into contemplation. Its more elaborate practices need careful instruction and direction from a skilled and experienced teacher, but are not necessary for the following next step in prāṇāyāma.


 
←PrevNext→
[caturtha – fourth; ākṣepin – diminishing; viṣaya – attention; bāhya – outward; abhyantara – inward.]

बाह्य-अभ्यन्तर-विषय-आक्षेपी बाह्य-अभ्यन्तर-श्वास-गमन-विषयात् दृष्टि-प्रत्याहारः चतुर्थः प्राण-आयामः प्राण-सन्निधि-वीक्षणम्, अ-बाह्य-अन्-अभ्यन्तर-सर्व-व्याप्त-प्राण-वीक्षणम् इत्यर्थः॥ –
“The fourth type of prāṇāyāma involves the regulation of the breath in relation to both external and internal aspects, with the focus on the direction of the breath. It includes the practice of pratyāhāra (withdrawal of the senses), through observing the movement of the prāṇa, both external and internal. This also involves focusing on the prāṇa present throughout the body, beyond the external and internal breathing process.”

The other three prāṇāyāmas are the bāhya (outward), abhyantara (inward), and stambha (stoppage). In the fourth, breathing continues, but no attention is placed on controlling the out-going or in-coming movements, or holding of the breath. Rather attention is placed only upon the presence of the breath. One’s breathing then becomes effortless and imperceptible. During this time the conscious controlling of the breath stops and the inward and outward breaths would become naturally equal (sama). This then becomes the more subtle, simple witnessing of the presence of the breath without attention to controlling the breaths, also called prāṇa-vīkṣaṇa. One moves from there to the next more subtle step of withdrawing the senses.

The practices of āsana and prāṇāyāma will bless any practitioner. They are skills that can be gained and enjoyed for themselves. Indeed, for adept yogis they are simple, reasonable ways to promote a healthy life that supports the commitment to knowledge. Nevertheless, breathing techniques have an observable effect on the thought processes (YS.1.31) and the ability to contemplate on and with them.


 
←PrevNext→
[tataḥ – from that; āvaraṇa – blocking; prakāśa – clarity; kṣīyate – lessened.]

ततः प्राण-आयामात् क्षीयते प्रकाश-आवरणं रजस्-तमोभ्यां चित्त-सत्त्व-गुण-आच्छादनम् (YS.1.31)॥ –
“From the practice of prāṇāyāma, the covering of light (knowledge) is removed, along with the obscuration of the mind by the qualities (guṇas) of rajas and tamas, leading to the clarity of the sattva quality of the mind (YS.1.31).”

The dullness (tamas) of the mind is lessened by oxygenating the body and brain through prāṇāyāma. Restlessness (rajas) is lessened by attention put on the quiet, still subtleness of the breath. Then, the natural clarity (sattva) of the mind will become more predominant. But a clear mind needs correct thinking to be brought in. We are not looking for an empty-headed samādhi.

Like samādhi, prāṇāyāma cannot give knowledge. Prāṇāyāma quietly awakens the mind for entering into contemplation, and contemplation (samādhi) is for sitting undistracted in appreciation of what one already understands, but has not yet assimilated as firm knowledge in one’s heart.


 
←PrevNext→
[ca – and; manas – mind; yogyatā – fitness; dhāraṇā – restraining the pursuit of unwanted or hindering thoughts in contemplation.]

अ-बाह्य-अन्-अभ्यन्तर-प्राण-वीक्षणात् धारणासु (YS.3.1) च योग्यता मनसः॥ –
“Through the observation of prāṇa, both external and internal, in the practices of concentration (dhāraṇā) (YS.3.1), the mind gains fitness (yogyatā).”

 
←PrevNext→
[pratyāhāra – withdrawing; indriyas – senses; iva – seeming; anukāra – take on; sva-rūpa – very nature; citta – mind; a-saṃprayoga – withdraw; sva-viṣayas – their own objects.]

स्व-विषय-अ-संप्रयोगे इन्द्रियाणां सति, चित्तस्य स्व-रूप-अनुकारः इव आसने प्राण-आयामे च चित्तस्य यथा अन्-अन्त-विषय-अनुरूपः बाह्य-अभ्यन्तर-विषय-आक्षेपि-अनुरूपः अपि इन्दियाणां प्रत्याहारः नाम पञ्चम-योग-अङ्गम्॥ –
“In the meditation posture and breath control, when the senses do not engage with their respective objects, as they seemingly take on the non-engagement of one’s mind, then this withdrawal of the senses and mind from their external and internal objects is called pratyāhāra (withdrawing), the fifth limb of yoga.”

The senses are by their nature led by the mind. If the mind lacks discipline and gives up the lead, then the senses, like wild horses yoked to a chariot with an unskilled driver, will drag the mind through the fields of their objects. When the mind gains the discipline and skill of the yamas and niyamas, the rāga-dveṣas (attraction and aversion toward objects) diminish. With the help of āsana and prāṇāyāma, the mind experiences a composure that is naturally available. When that informed and composed mind takes lead of the senses, then the senses will naturally follow suit,
:: ‘यः तु अ-विज्ञानवान् भवति अ-युक्तेन मनसा सदा। तस्य इन्द्रियाणि अ-वश्यानि दुष्ट-अश्वाः इव सा-रथेः॥’ “But the undisciplined senses, of that [intellect] which lacks discernment and [thus is] ever with a mind (manas) not in control, are like the unruly horses of the charioteer [i.e., of the intellect without control of the reins, of the mind].”
‘यः तु विज्ञानवान् भवति युक्तेन मनसा सदा। तस्य इन्द्रियाणि वश्यानि सद्-अश्वाः इव सा-रथेः’ “Whereas, the disciplined senses, of that [intellect] which has discernment and [thus is] ever with a mind in control, are like the trained horses of the charioteer.” (Kaṭha Up. 1.3.5 & 6).”
‘राग-द्वेष-वियुक्तैः तु विषयान् इन्द्रियैः चरन्। आत्म-वश्यैः (बुद्धि-वश्यैः) विधेय-आत्मा (विधेय-अन्तःकरणः) प्रसादम् अधिगच्छति’ “Whereas, moving among the objects with the senses under authority of the intellect and freed from [being overpowered by] rāga-dveṣa (attraction and repulsion), the one whose mind is disciplined attains clarity (prasāda).” (Bh. Gītā 2.64) ::
anticipating the subtle orders of their master.

The senses seeming to take on the nature of the mind is the key to gaining control of the senses. One has to command the mind by an informed intellect to not allow the mind’s attention to be stolen away against one’s will. The informed intellect is one that is clear about what is hindering (kliṣṭa) and what is helpful (a-kliṣṭa) in this discipline. Such an intellect will guide the other functions of the mind to remain in this discipline.

It is not by blocking sensory experiences that we command the senses. You can close your eyes in the seat of meditation, but the other senses remain wide open. They will do their job regardless. You cannot live your life in a sensory deprivation chamber. In meditation, as well as in your life, you simply have to choose not to let your mind be distracted by following after a sound, smell, or any other sensation that is not your current concern. That choice can only have effect when it is backed by a clearly ascertained understanding of what is one’s goal, what is the appropriate discipline for that goal, and how to undertake that discipline.

If the intellect is not maintaining this control, then the preceding yamas and niyamas should be revisited. They concern the values, and the meaning of the values, that the intellect needs to invoke in the mind to control the senses and the body.

With ahiṃsa (non-violence) in your life, when the world has no need of fear from you, then you can relax your ninja stance against the world and allow the Lord as the natural order to provide your sustenance. With satya (truthfulness) in your life, will power is strengthened by your mind, words, and deeds being in natural alignment. With asteya (non-usurping) in your life, the cravings of the senses are filtered through your assimilated values. With brahma-carya (pursuing the scripture) in your life, those values you have can be better assimilated through the more universal perspective the scripture invokes. With aparigraha (renunciation) in your life, a cleaner and simpler lifestyle will bring balance back from living your life for the sake of your senses to living your life for the sake of the highest goals your intellect can envision. Similarly, the niyamas (physical and mental cleanliness, contentment, prayerful discipline, studying one’s Veda, and intelligently surrendering to the Lord) will move one’s center of attention from sensory phenomena to contentment and contemplation of the reality stage upon which all these phenomena dance.

Pratyāhāra (withdrawal of the senses) is at its core vairāgya – non-attachment to and non-identification with sense objects, as well as with thoughts that are equally objects within awareness.


 
←PrevNext→
[parama – best; vaśyatā – mastery; indriyas – senses; tataḥ – by that (
:: ‘इन्द्रियाणां हि चरतां यद् मनः अनुविधीयते। तद् अस्य हरति प्रज्ञां वायुः नावम् इव अम्भसि’ “Because, that very mind (manas), which follows after the roaming senses, takes away one’s wisdom (prajñā), like a small boat on the water, which follows after the wind.” (Bh. Gītā 2.67) ::
).]

ततः चित्त-पूर्वका वश्यता, परमा वश्यता इन्द्रियाणाम् अपि मानसः इन्द्रिय-शमः भवेत् इत्यर्थः, न तु इन्द्रिय-दमः॥ –
“From that (pratyāhāra), the mind gains the best (parama) control over the senses. This is not the same as simply subduing, by physical denial, the senses (indriya-dama).”

Compare this with Yoga Sūtra 2.41. This sūtra emphasizes the importance of an informed understanding of the erroneous ways of thinking that increase the distraction and agitation of the senses. An informed intellect bests the various forms of mechanical sense denial, because the point of this mastery is to command calmness in and out of the seat of meditation, not just when the senses can be temporarily denied.

One of the Sanskrit words for the mind is hṛd or hṛdaya (heart or center). When the scripture talks of the heart, it means the buddhi (intellect). The hṛd of anything is its center. The individual’s subtle body, which includes the mind and intellect, pervades the entire physical body, and at its center is the intellect. This tradition does not accept that the heart and mind should be separated in any way. The intellect is where one’s deepest convictions are. Where the intellect is, where this heart is, that is where the senses will naturally be directed. If the intellect, the heart, is weak and unstable, then the senses will be in charge.

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)

Accomplishments

Intro s.01 s.02 s.03 s.04 s.05 s.06 s.07 s.08 s.09 s.10 s.11 s.12 s.13 s.14 s.15 s.16 s.17 s.18 s.19 s.20 s.21 s.22 s.23 s.24 s.25 s.26 s.27 s.28 s.29 s.30 s.31 s.32 s.33 s.34 s.35 s.36 s.37 s.38 s.39 s.40 s.41 s.42 s.43 s.44 s.45 s.46 s.47 s.48 s.49 s.50 s.51 s.52 s.53 s.54 s.55

The preceding five limbs of yoga deal with being in keeping with dharma – being an objectively virtuous and just citizen in the world, relatively free from conflicts and actions that result in conflicts. Additionally, one gains the ability to sit quietly in meditation, dropping attention towards sense stimuli. This creates the meditative environment for the mind to turn its attention to a selected contemplation. This chapter on siddhis (accomplishments) begins with the first siddhi – the skill of contemplation. That skill is developed in the next three limbs of yoga, namely, dhāraṇā (restraining the pursuit of unwanted or hindering thoughts in contemplation), dhyāna (retaining the flow of wanted or helpful thoughts in contemplation), and samādhi (contemplation resulting in assimilation). The chapter (pāda) ends with the teaching on the ultimate fulfillment – contemplation on the reality of the world and the puruṣa (YS.3.43–53). This contemplation leads directly to Patañjali’s goal of yoga, kaivalya (complete freedom), the ultimate siddhi.

Sūtras 3.16–42 point out an additional accomplishment. This is the acquisition of a cosmic perspective towards objects in the universe in contemplation. This helps one gain and abide in limitless freedom. This accomplishment is connected to specific side-effects (gauṇa-phalas, by-products, secondary to the main goal) in the contemplations of this section. These side-effects are the superpowers mentioned, but deemphasized by us. They too are called siddhis in Sanskrit.

The student should avoid confusing these superpower siddhis with the main accomplishments in yoga. These superpowers play a part in the popular spiritual literature within this tradition, namely the Purāṇas (legends dealing with creation stories and the deities), such as the Viṣṇu-Purāṇa, and the Iti-hāsas (epic histories), such as the Rāmāyaṇa and the Mahā-bhārata. These superpowers are typically attributed to heroes or demons, and are key to advancing a story within a particular legend or epic. The quests for superpowers were and are a part of the practices of some yogis, as well as of shaman practitioners from around the world in cultures old and new. Patañjali gives mention of them in this chapter, though he too deemphasizes their import (YS.3.37).

The mention of these superpowers is more to connect these helpful cosmic contemplations to what the Indian practitioner has read in these very popular legends and epics that tell how these powers can be helpful and can be detrimental. In the West, where there may not be exposure to this literature, there could be an over-tendency to take these superpowers out of context, and as being the most interesting and so necessary pursuits in yoga.

There is no separate, special, or unique experience or capacity that one needs to fulfill the knowledge yogins seek. Every experience, every object, every thought, when viewed in keeping with the cosmic whole, reveals that whole. The task of this commentary, in keeping with the scripture of this tradition and with Patañjali, is to clearly indicate the real purport of these sūtras as the development of the three principle siddhis: skill in contemplation, the gaining of a cosmic perspective in the mind that certain contemplations can give if understood in the light of this tradition’s physics and metaphysics of life, and then the final goal of kaivalya. In the contemplations we will elaborately explore how the contemplations are employed in gaining a cosmic perspective, and then briefly note the purported side-effect superpowers and their connection with the topic of the contemplations.


 
←PrevNext→
[dhāraṇā – restraining the pursuit of unwanted or hindering thoughts in contemplation; bandha – keeping; citta – mind; deśa – place.]

भूयः – देश-बन्धं क्लिष्ट-विषयात् अ-क्लिष्ट-एक-विषये स्थापनं पुनः पुनः चित्तस्य धारणा नाम षष्ठ-योग-अङ्गम्॥ –
“Further, keeping the mind on one helpful (a-kliṣṭa) object (contemplation) from straying to unhelpful thoughts, again and again, is called Dhāraṇā (Restraining of the mind), the sixth limb of yoga.”

This is keeping the mind from straying to other places, other areas of thought, that hinder or are not the topic of the contemplation. Dhāraṇā naturally culminates in the following dhyāna. When the mind is not where it should not be, then it is where it should be. All the preceding disciplines have given the mind this strength to settle down and the wisdom to know what to settle into. Like for pratyāhāra, it succeeds from an informed intellect that can stay alert to when the attention strays from the contemplation topic. Remember, we are talking about the mind here. Restraint in thinking does not mean suppression. It is not like the physical restraint of a pet. It is a cognitive alertness allowing the most appropriate and helpful thinking to arise and remain, in and out of the seat of meditation (see comm. on YS.1.2).

The Contemplation Process

There is a progression from pratyāhāra through dhāraṇā to dhyāna – from redirecting the mind’s attention away from the external to being only upon the chosen topic of contemplation. But this directing inward is directing the mind toward the more inward truth of everything, not seeking isolation from the external world.

The student generates a systematic practice that establishes a firm seat of meditation. There may be a confirmation of one’s intention to address the mind and to nurture a friendly and supportive relationship with one’s emotions. The student attends to āsana (including visualizing the parts of the body to relax them), prāṇayāma, and pratyāhāra. The student acknowledges the physical environment around, and mentally affirms that this particular time is for oneself not for everything else – including your body, health, finances, family, neighbours, co-workers, friends, foes, politics, and the world. They will all be there afterwards. Now is the time for this mind to attend to its own purpose in freeing itself, no matter what the environment.

Then, beginning japa (quiet or silent chant), the student repeats a sacred mantra whose meaning he or she knows, for example, Om īśāya namaḥ, meaning, “Om (see sūtra 1.27) I surrender all ownership and identification with this body, mind, and senses unto the natural cosmic order that is the embodiment of the Lord.” I am one with the Lord that manifests and enlivens this entire universe, which is the reality into which all universes resolve in sleep as well as at the ends of time.

If one finds that the mind tends to drift during the mental repetition of the mantra, use the voice to softly chant the mantra for a time. We can often control our body – here, the voice – better than our mind, so vocalization may be introduced to bring the mind back. Returning to mental repetition, make the chant non-physical. Keep the mouth, tongue, and vocal chords still during the chant. This keeps the chant in the more absorbing depth of the intellect. The mental chant can be disassociated from the rhythms of the breath. Let the chant sometimes occur during in-breaths as well as during the change over from the in and out breaths. An additional technique is keeping the tongue still in the middle of the mouth without touching any part inside the mouth.

Appreciate in the heart, in the center of one’s certitude and conviction, the truth of the mantra. Do not think about the mantra or its meaning; simply behold its truth, as to how it encompasses you and your universe.

Let the silent pause between chants and between words of the chant lengthen, and sometime stop, while beholding their meaning. The chant and silence are oneself, pure awareness. They resolve in the reality of oneself as the meaning of the mantra. They come out of the reality of oneself, they appear, and they resolve back into oneself. The truth of the mantra is the truth of oneself.

Once the silence of oneself is foremost, let the chant drop. There is only oneself as the self-evident reality and truth of the mantra.

One may recognize other thoughts or perceptions arising. If these thoughts or perceptions are felt to be distractions, recognize that they are all within your awareness, the truth of oneself. If it is a sense perception, that could only be from a contact of one of the senses with its object. Being a contact, there can be no distance between your sense organ and the object, whether it is the sense reaching out to the object or the medium of the object reaching to the sense organ. Even the notional distance or the calculated estimation of the distance between the seat of the sense and the seat of the object are a notion or estimation within the mind right now. There is no distance or separation of that notion or estimation in the mind from awareness. The sense or notion of the time elapsed also only occurs right now in the mind within awareness. Simply appreciate that these thoughts are well within the order and convention of the mind. The entire mind is within the Lord’s order. This thought and its object are both a manifestation of the Lord, the reality that is the Lord.
:: ‘यतः यतः निश्चरति मनः चञ्चलम् अ-स्थिरम्। ततः ततः नियम्य एतद् आत्मनि एव वशं नयेत्’ “Bringing it [i.e., the mind] back from whichever [distracting object] the [naturally] mobile, unsteady mind goes to – [by understanding that object also as] within limitless ātman alone – may one bring [the mind] under control.” (Bh. Gītā 6.26) ::
the mantra which holds this fact and carries the sense and wisdom of surrender and freedom from identification with the mind and its separate thoughts.

This understanding of the nature of thought, sense perceptions, objects, distance, and time will be unfolded in this text in keeping with the teaching tradition here and in the scriptures.

The absorption discovered in contemplation is natural, unforced, and all-encompassing. Give depth to that absorption by introducing thoughts that express the truth of the identity of the Lord and oneself. These are the contemplation of one’s choosing. They may only be the mantra one has used for japa. They may be words of the teacher or from scripture that the student finds particularly meaningful and helpful. They may be prati-pakṣa-bhāvanas (YS.2.33–34) that counteract an affliction that is hindering your progress in yoga. Do not be content with aimless pondering, wandering through a disconnected enjoyment of some part of the whole truth. Keep in the mind well thought out expressions that encompass a truth you wish to always remain in your heart. This truth should be clearly seen as the truth of oneself in and out of contemplation.

Again, when the mind strays during contemplation, see that thought and its object as not outside of the truth one is contemplating, then, having been brought back to the truth, remain in its contemplation – with or without words.

For the steps involved see Appendix - Suggested Steps in Contemplation.


 
←PrevNext→
[tatra – when that is; dhyāna – retaining the flow of wanted or helpful thoughts in contemplation; ekatānatā – nature of having a oneness; pratyayas – thoughts.]

तत्र धारणायां पर्याप्तौ सत्यां प्रत्यय-एक-तानता अ-क्लिष्ट-एक-विषये स्थितिः ध्यानं नाम सप्तम-योग-अङ्गम्॥ –
“In that (dhāraṇā), when the dhāraṇā is sufficient and is a flow of one helpful (a-kliṣṭa) contemplation, without distractions, this is called Dhyāna (contemplation), the seventh limb of yoga.”

Consciousness is the one, timeless witness of all thoughts. The conscious mind is characterized by a flow of thoughts and images (of pratyayas). That flow tends to jump from one associated or distracting thought to another. This is the common mind with which we are all very familiar. Dhāraṇā is the practice we saw of limiting unwanted thoughts. This practice merges into dhyāna where only the wanted thoughts occur. Mind being a flow of thoughts, then this oneness of thought is a flow of the same (sajātīya) thought. It can be likened to a
:: ‘तैल-धाराम् इव’ “Like the flow of oil.” (Dhyāna-bindu Up. 18) ::
of pure, clear oil.

Oneness of thoughts (pratyaya-ekatānatā) is not to be seen as only keeping one single thought in the mind for some time. The oneness of thoughts, the flow of thoughts, here implies an ongoing, relevant topic of contemplation. A topic started in dhāraṇā can be any prayer, such as
:: ‘यज्ञानां जप-यज्ञः अस्मि’ “I [Īśvara] am, among yajñas (rituals), the yajña that is the mental repetition [of the Lord’s name] (japa).” (Bh. Gītā 10.25) ::
, which sets up or is the topic of contemplation, or any reasoning (tarka) or inquiry (vicāra) belonging to the contemplation. Dhyāna naturally culminates in the following samādhi.


 
←PrevNext→
[samādhi – contemplation that culminates in assimilation; tad eva – the same; nirbhāsa – appearance; artha-mātra – only the object; iva – as if; śūnya – lacks; sva-rūpa – its own form.]

तद् ध्यानम् एव अर्थ-मात्र-निर्भासम् अस्मितामात्र-दर्शनता (YS.1.43) अस्य तद् चित्त-स्व-रूप-शून्यं यदि अपि भेद-वासना-बुद्धिः तिष्ठति, भेद-कल्पना-स्मृतिः सु-अल्प-कालं गलिता अस्य तद् इत्यर्थः इव समाधिः नाम अष्टम-योग-अङ्गम्॥ –
“That contemplation (dhyāna) is the illumination of the meaning or object alone (artha-mātra), a state of perceiving only the is-ness (‘asmitā’), as if (iva) the mind lacks its own separate form. Even if a subtle tendency towards differentiation persists, it fades away after a short time. This is called Samādhi (absorption), the eighth limb of (aṣṭāṅga) yoga.”

As noted in Yoga Sūtra 1.43, because this is as if (iva), the mind is still subtly present. This indicates the samādhi is with-seed (sa-bīja), that is, with-idea, the seed/idea being the teaching. The attention is completely on the object/topic of the contemplation, and there is no attention on the fact one is thinking of or contemplating on this object/topic. There is no conscious thinker-thinking-thought distinction.

This is not the final goal of samādhi, though. The goal is without-seed (nir-bīja) samādhi (Yoga Sūtras 1.51 & 3.8), where the teaching has done its job and one abides in this knowledge in and out of the seat of meditation.

In sa-bīja samādhi the quality of the absorption is not too unlike that experienced by an artist or scientist when they create or invent, or by someone engrossed in a visual or mental activity such as reading. The difference is only in the nature of the topic under consideration. Here, for the yogin, the topic is oneself and, at the time of contemplation, not one’s psychological processes. The yogins mature their intellect so it abides in the teaching and in the truth that is oneself. Samādhi is not a degree of mental awareness and not a special awareness. It is the teaching, the bīja, one brings to the absorbing contemplation that makes this abidance a samādhi.


 
←PrevNext→
[traya – three; ekatra – together; saṃyama – uniting.]

त्रयं धारना-ध्यान-समाधि-साधनम् एकत्र संयमः नाम॥ –
“The combined practice of concentration (dhāraṇā), contemplation (dhyāna), and absorption (samādhi) is called Saṃyama.”

Saṃyama (uniting) is not a new contemplation. It is simply a convenient term that Patañjali uses to group the last three limbs of yoga. Again, in the seat of meditation, one directs one’s attention from thoughts that you do not want to the teaching that you want to be there. This is dhāraṇā leading to dhyāna. The teaching is seen in its fullest meaning, to the purpose these words point, at which the words drop, having done their job. You sit with that assimilated knowledge, that revelation, of their meaning, their goal. With the background of the scripture, this revelation, this goal, will be acknowledged to its very reality, the reality that is oneself. This is prajñā (wisdom). That wisdom, once all doubts and vagueness are finally cleared, will not stray (YS.2.24–27) no matter where life takes you. This is timeless freedom, even while one still lives in time.


 
←PrevNext→
[tad-jaya – mastering that; āloka – there manifests; prajñā – knowledge that is assimilated.]

तद्-जयात् संयम-जयात् प्रज्ञा-आलोकः संयम-विषये प्रज्ञा-विस्तारः, ऋतं-भरा प्रज्ञा इत्यर्थः (YS.1.48)॥ –
“From the mastery of saṃyama, there manifests an assimilated knowledge (prajñā, wisdom), an expanse of knowledge encompassing the object of the saṃyama. That knowledge bears the truth (ṛtam-bharā).”

 
←PrevNext→
[viniyoga – application; tasya – of that; bhūmis – stages.]

तस्य संयमस्य भूमिषु योग-उपाय-प्रति-अवस्थानेषु (YS.2.27) विनियोगः प्रवृत्तिः, योगी ध्यान-शीलः भवेत् इत्यर्थः॥ –
“The application (viniyoga) of saṃyama should occur at each level of progression in yoga (YS.2.27). As a result, the yogī remains in a contemplative life.”

Do not leave contemplation of reality to the end, exhausting life’s energy trying only to perfect the imperfectible body and mind. This is Patañjali’s injunction to include contemplation with your āsana practice. What can be done to heal, strengthen, or relax the body is to be done. Then employ the mind, where the knowledge takes place and where Patañjali’s techniques have proven their worth. Find out what is to be contemplated and contemplate.


 
←PrevNext→
[traya – these three; antar-aṅgas – internal limbs; pūrvas – preceding.]

त्रयं संयम-नाम अन्तर्-अङ्गं सूक्ष्मतर-अङ्गं पूर्वेभ्यः पञ्च-योग-अङ्गेभ्यः॥ –
“The three parts of saṃyamadhāraṇā, dhyāna and samādhi – are the internal limbs of yoga, subtler than the previous five limbs (yama, niyama, āsana, prāṇāyāma and pratyāhāra).”

They are more internal since they deal only with the mind, which is more internal than one’s activities, posture, breath, and senses. The other limbs of yoga address those. These three internal limbs are more direct when it comes to assimilation of the knowledge. Nevertheless, without the external practices the internal cannot be mastered. Certainly without the external pursuit of the scriptures there would be nothing to contemplate, and so nothing to master.


 
←PrevNext→
[tad api – even they; bahir-aṅgas – external limbs; nir-bīja – free of seed.]

तद् त्रयम् अपि बहिर्-अङ्गम् अ-सु-सूक्ष्म-अङ्गं स-अविद्या-बीजतया निर्-बीजस्य ऋतं-भर-समाधेः कैवल्यस्य॥ –
“These three (dhāraṇā, dhyāna, and samādhi) are as well external limbs, as they are not the subtlest. They retain the seed of ignorance (a-vidyā). However, when they reach the Nir-bīja (seedless, nir-bīja-samādhi), which bears the truth (ṛtam-bhara), this is liberation (kaivalya).”

In the quiet appreciation of the self, there is no duality of seer-seen. The self is not the object of any word or thought. There are no thoughts as second things, as other than oneself. There is only oneself, the only reality without a second, equal, and limiting reality. It becomes clear that this is in fact the nature of the self, the nature of reality. Even before this samādhi this was my nature. The thoughts, even mistaken thoughts of me being the thoughts, never affected or restricted the pure, limitless reality of me.

The afflictions are known to have been due to the mutual identification that is ignorance. The well-assimilated knowledge (prajñā) removes for good the prior ignorance. Its crops, the afflictions (kleśas), are seen for what they are and cannot return in force. This is not a knowledge subject to forgetting; it is oneself. Once known it is always known. The reappearance of thoughts and their objects, even ones tied to emotional well-being, are within this prajñā that releases them of identification with oneself and eliminates any possibility of their having an independent reality. The thoughts remain as mere appearances, and the afflictions lose their potency to touch
:: ‘(सनत्-कुमार: उवाच) तस्य ह वै एतस्य एवं पश्यतः एवं मन्वानस्य एवं विजानतः’ “For the one who sees (paśyan) thus [i.e., knows as clearly as seeing], [because of being one] who contemplates (manvāna) thus [i.e., thinks over with reason], and who ascertains (vijānan) thus [i.e., correctly determines].…”
‘– आत्मतः प्राणः, आत्मतः आशा, आत्मतः स्मरः, आत्मतः आकाशः, आत्मतः तेजः, आत्मतः आपः, आत्मतः आविर्-भाव-तिरो-भावौ, आत्मतः अन्नम्, आत्मतः बलम्, आत्मतः विज्ञानम्, आत्मतः ध्यानम्, आत्मतः चित्तम्, आत्मतः सङ्कल्पः, आत्मतः मनः, आत्मतः वाक्, आत्मतः नाम, आत्मतः मन्त्राः, आत्मतः कर्माणि, आत्मतः एव इदं सर्वम् इति॥’ “– from ātman is life (prāṇa), hope and love, space, fire and water, appearance and disappearance, food and strength, cognition, meditation, memory, intension and mind, speech and name, Veda verses and rituals – all this is from ātman alone.”
‘तद् एषः श्लोकः। न पश्यः मृत्युं पश्यति, न रोगं, न उत दुःखतां, सर्वं ह पश्यः पश्यति सर्वम् आप्नोति सर्वशः इति’ “There is this verse – ‘Seeing [thus] one does not see death, nor disease, nor affliction. Seeing [thus], one sees all and attains all, in all ways.’” (Chāndogya Up. 7.26.1–2) ::
.

The final stage of Patañjali’s teachings on samādhi is the culmination in complete freedom (kaivalya). Here, there is no longer an as if. This is different than the prior stage (see Yoga Sūtra 1.18) where the student suspended the presence of limiting thoughts which were otherwise taken as real. In nir-bīja samādhi there is no thought taken to have absolute reality and no affliction taken to limit the free self. Even latent tendencies of doubt and confusion are left impotent to reappear as they were. If any personal criticisms arise from me or from others, they are objectively seen to apply only to the limited mind, not to oneself. They will lack any force or reason to afflict the self. No longer is there confusion with regard to the real and the unreal.

This is what nir-bīja (free of seed) means. The many old seeds of doubt and confusion in the field of ignorance in the form of afflictions neither sprout, or grow, or flower. Nir-bījā (the state of being free of seed) is where the potency of the seeds of doubt and confusion has been burnt by the fire of knowledge (
:: from the text Sarva-Tantra-Siddhanta-Pada-Artha-Lakṣaṇa-Saṅgraha ::
).

This samādhi, as assimilated knowledge of reality, remains in and outside the seat of meditation. The meditation has swallowed all time and all situations within this knowledge. All of one’s life resolves into this samādhi that is the very nature of I. This is no passing experience and no super-experience. The earlier states of samādhi pass. The beatific or prophetic or psychedelic experience, though memorable and inspiring, passes without yielding abiding knowledge. This knowledge abides as the reality that is self.


 
←PrevNext→
[pariṇāma – change; nirodha – assimilation; anvaya – regarding; citta – mind; kṣaṇa – moment; nirodha – assimilation; prādur-bhāva – arising; saṃskāras – latent tendencies; nirodha – assimilation; abhibhava – quelling; vyutthāna – active mind.]

अथ संयमे की-दृशः चित्त-परिणामः, सर्व-दृष्टेषु च धर्म-लक्षण-अवस्था-परिणामानां वस्तु-देश-काल-परिणामानां (YS.3.13) प्रथम: – व्युत्थान-निरोध-संस्कारयोः अभिभव-प्रादुर्-भावौ अ-निरोध-चित्ते क्लिष्ट-संस्कारस्य शमः निरोध-चित्ते शासन-अ-क्लिष्ट-संस्कारस्य उद्भवः च निरोध-क्षण-चित्त-अन्वयः निरोध-समय-चित्ते सन्तत-अनुगतः निरोध-परिणामः समाधि-निरोधे धर्म-विकारः भवति॥ –
“Now, what kind of change of the mind is there during saṃyama (concentration, contemplation, and absorption)? In the case of all perceptions, the change is influenced by the nature of its objects, places, and times (dharma, lakṣaṇa and avasthā, or vastu, deśa and kāla) (YS.3.13). The first change is the arising of the latent tendencies introduced by the teaching (śāsana) that negate the kleśas (afflictions) in assimilation and the quelling (śama) of the other saṃskāras from the active mind (vyutthāna) that nourished the kleśas. This momentary quelling of the mind leads to a continuous quelling (nirodha-pariṇāma) of those saṃskāras. This is the change of characteristic (dharma-vikāra) in the mind during assimilation in samādhi.”

The quelling or deactivation of the latent tendencies (saṃskāras), the seeds, of ignorance and associated tendencies (the crop of kleśas) by the activation of the saṃskāras, the seeds, of the teaching is the essential characteristic (dharma) of assimilation (nirodha) in samādhi. If it were just the quelling of the ignorance without the teaching, then such a nirodha (dropping) would either be deep sleep or a mechanical stunning of the mind, which is not the distinguishing characteristic, the dharma, of nirodha in samādhi. The saṃskāras of the teaching are active in samādhi.

With continued progress, the adept yogin quells even the saṃskāras of the teaching, the cause of the first nirodha. With assimilation of the reality that is the focus of the contemplation, the second and comprehensive nirodha is the accomplishment of nir-bīja-samādhi in the clear knowledge of reality.

This sūtra addresses only the first nirodha, the change from no nirodha to nirodha. The beginner’s mind had active saṃskāras of ignorance. Then, at the first stage of nirodha, those saṃskāras are deactivated by the teaching saṃskāras.

This is the start of a discussion on the three factors involved in change, initially as it relates to the changes that take place in saṃyama, and then extended to all objects – physical and mental. The three factors are the dharma (characteristic) that distinguishes one thing from others, the lakṣaṇa (external symptom) that surround a thing and in that way help point out a thing based on its surroundings, and the avasthā (period) that is the time a thing exists.


 
←PrevNext→
[tasya – its; vāhitā – flow; praśānta – clarity; saṃskāra – latent tendency.]

तस्य चित्तस्य प्रशान्त-वाहिता सत्त्वता-शम-सन्तत-प्रवाहः अ-क्लिष्ट-संस्कारात्, चित्ते अ-क्लिष्ट-संस्कार-प्राधान्य-अनुगतः समाधि-धर्म-सन्तत-परिणामः इत्यर्थः॥ –
“The mind, when it follows a continuous, tranquil flow of is-ness (sattvatā) due to the helpful tendencies (a-kliṣṭa saṃskāras), and progresses towards a state where there is a predominance of helpful impressions, then there is the continuous change (santata-pariṇāma) consisting of the nature (dharma) of this samādhi.”

The final latent tendency (saṃskāra), knowledge in the form of the teaching being fully assimilated, maintains the characteristic (dharma) of the quelling of latent tendencies (saṃskāras) of ignorance during samādhi. The maintenance of the same characteristic of a thing that is continually being regenerated, such as the flow of thoughts during nirodha, requires a cause. In this case it is the saṃskāra of the teaching.

Saṃskāras are not manifest thoughts. They are tendencies assumed to be present in the unconscious part of the citta (the storehouse of the mind). Again, see Appendix - Nature of the Mind for a description of the mind within this tradition. The existence of saṃskāras is proposed to explain how certain manifest thoughts or images arise in the mind and not others. The saṃskāras are seed potentials that when triggered may manifest a certain memory or image, or effect the flow and content of manifest thoughts, even during nirodha.

The quelling here is not destruction of saṃskāras that can manifest unhelpful thoughts; it is the blocking of unhelpful saṃskāras by other, helpful saṃskāras. If the quelling of unhelpful thoughts is temporary, because the teaching is not clearly and fully assimilated, then the unhelpful thoughts return. If permanent, this is because of the assimilation of the teaching so that one no longer has to remember it or keep it in the forefront of the mind to fight off notions of limitation, of bondage. One simply lives the teaching in the first person (as I am free), not as a student trying to get it.

In nir-bīja samādhi and in the freedom that is kaivalya, there is even the nirodha of all saṃskāras, including the teaching, because one need no longer have to remind oneself of the teaching to negate the limiting saṃskāras of ignorance. The teaching is no longer a memory to be recalled, but is firm, assimilated knowledge, like we do not remember one plus one is two, we just know it.

This nirodha is of all saṃskāras because it affects how I understand everything. The relativity and dependence of everything one knows is now perfectly clear. Everything one knows is now known as only as if. They are recognized as only mithyā, as always only from a relative perspective. They are not and never will be absolutely true, as I had previously believed. They are imaginary or transactional, not pāramārthika (absolute). Only I, only awareness-being, am pāramārthika. The nirodha of these saṃskāras and their manifest affect as thoughts in the mind is not their disappearance; it is recognizing their nature of being mithyā (relative). This teaching is now ingrained in my thinking. This new perspective of thinking is now natural, not requiring an effort to remember it.

We may think we know a person’s name, until we forget it. Perhaps the only name we know is our own, because we just don’t seem to forget it. We may forget facts regarding some area of knowledge, such as in calculus. But the simple fact of one plus one is two, does not appear to be forgettable. Its unforgettable nature may be said to be due to the unfading and unblockable power of the saṃskāra that maintains this particular knowledge. The simple knowledge of this teaching is “I am absolutely free.” With continued listening to the scripture from a qualified teacher, understanding what is being said, and contemplation, this simple teaching becomes ingrained as an unfading and unblockable saṃskāra. If contrary notions lack any power to contradict or block this simple knowledge, then this is one’s assimilated knowledge (prajñā).

Controlling the appearances of contrary notions does not control the cause for them being taken as real, being taken as myself (see Yoga Sūtra 1.4). In the assimilation of knowledge as the culmination of contemplation, the latent tendencies that manifest as contrary notions lose their power when the fundamental ignorance about oneself goes, and they can no longer manifest a notion of a real duality of seer-seen, limiting oneself. When there is no manifestation of a believed notion of a real duality of seer-seen, limiting oneself, that is nir-bīja samādhi. One is now free of the bījas (seeds) of ignorance and living a life of assimilated knowledge, of kaivalya.

This liberating teaching brings with it an appreciation of its own fiction. The liberating teaching is relative to, is dependent upon, the belief in being bound. Even the teaching is mithyā – this is
:: ‘न निरोधः न च उत्पत्तिः न बद्धः न च साधकः। न मुमुक्षुः न वै मुक्तः इति एषा परम-अर्थता’ “There is no destruction, nor origination, nor one in bondage, nor one trying [to get out of bondage], no desire for freedom, nor freedom – this is the nature of ultimate reality.” (Brahma-bindu Up. 10, Māṇḍūkya Up. Kārikā 2.32) ::
too. The teaching says the self is never bound, therefore any liberating teaching is no less a fiction than the sense of bondage itself. Nevertheless, until the liberating teaching is heard, considered, and assimilated, the delusion of bondage will not go away except in sleep or coma. The liberated person would have a natural modesty in regard to this discovery of the already liberated self.


 
←PrevNext→
[pariṇāma – change; samādhi – contemplation; citta – mind; kṣaya – losing; sarva-arthatā – all directedness; udaya – gaining; eka-agratā – one directedness.]

सर्व-अर्थता-एक-अग्रतयोः क्षय-उदयौ विविध-विषयत्व-चित्तस्य क्षयः एक-अग्रता-चितस्य उदयः च उभौ चित्तस्य समाधि-परिणामः समाधि-प्रथम-क्षण-पूर्वकः विकारः भवति, समाधि-पुरस्-सरण-लक्षणं धारणा-ध्यान-धर्म-परिणामः इत्यर्थः॥ –
“The mind’s losing its all directedness (sarvārthatā) in dhāranā and gaining its one directedness (ekāgratā) in dhyāna is the change just before the first moment of samādhi. The change of characteristic (dharma) starting from dhāraṇā through dhyāna subsequently becomes the lakṣaṇa (extrinsic symptom) that precedes samādhi, indicating its starting point.”

Objects that cause, foster, or are a result of another object may be used to indicate that object. They become that object’s lakṣaṇas (external symptoms). The lakṣaṇas may even be causally unrelated, like a crow sitting on a house may help indicate the second house down the street, so long as they help point out the indicated object.

The all-directedness, or rather the mis-directedness, is the mind’s normal condition, or symptom, prior to dhyāna. That symptom goes away, becomes external, in dhyāna. One directedness of the mind happens in dhyāna, and continues in samādhi. Dhyāna, in which the change to this one directedness first occurs, is thus indicated (lakṣita) by its contrast from the extrinsic condition of our normal all-directedness. Inside dhyāna and samādhi one characteristic of the mind occurs, outside another as an external symptom of the mind occurs. After samādhi, activities of life start again, and the all-directedness returns, except in the case of nir-bīja samādhi. Nir-bīja samādhi is the appreciation of even all-directedness as within the limitless reality that is oneself and is the Lord. That assimilation would be, then, defined by Patañjali as an ongoing samādhi.


 
←PrevNext→
[punaḥ – and; tataḥ – apart from those; pariṇāma – change; eka-agratā – one directedness; citta – mind; tulya – same; pratyaya – thought; śānta – past; udita – present.]

ततः तद्-द्वि-परिणामयोः पृथक् पुनर्शान्त-उदितौ तुल्य-प्रत्ययौ पूर्व-उत्तरौ तुल्य-द्वि-प्रत्ययौ चित्तस्य एक-अग्रता-परिणामः एक-अग्रतायाम् अवस्था-विकारः भवति, ध्यान-अवस्था ध्यान-कालः एक-अग्रता-सम-धर्म-परिणामः इत्यर्थः॥ –
“Apart from those two changes – one involving the quelling (śānta, of unhelpful thought) and the other involving the arising (udita, of helpful thought), when the mind appears with consistent thoughts (tulya-pratyaya), one after another, this is the change to one-pointedness (ekāgratā-pariṇāma) of the mind. In this state of one-pointedness, there only occurs a change of period or time (avasthā or kāla) during dhyāna, where the change is the uniform characteristic of one-pointedness.”

The change occurring during one directedness (eka-agratā) of the mind is one thought ending and the same thought arising again. In one directedness the successive thoughts have a consistent theme and content. Because this succession involves past and present thoughts, it is better to connect avasthā (period) with time, than lakṣaṇa (extrinsic symptom). Other commentators, following the lead of Vyāsa, reverse these, connecting lakṣaṇa with time (a stretch grammatically), and avasthā with place (which can grammatically be either time or place). Whichever is the intended significance of these two terms individually, together they certainly indicate the two factors involved in change, namely, time and place. The three factors in change (Yoga Sūtras 3.9–12) during various meditative steps were singled out to set up the next sūtra.


 
←PrevNext→
[etena – by this; vyākhyāta – are explained; pariṇāmas – changes; dharmas – distinguishing characteristics; lakṣaṇas – extrinsic symptoms; avasthās – periods; bhūtas – objects; indriyas – senses.]

एतेन चित्त-परिणाम-त्रयेण दृष्ट-अन्तेन भूत-इन्द्रियेषु सर्वेषु दृष्टेषु दर्शनेषु च अपि धर्म-लक्षण-अवस्था-परिणामाः नाम वस्तुतः देशतः कालतः च विकाराः इत्यर्थः व्याख्याताः॥ –
“Through these three changes of the mind (during saṃyama), all perceptions of external elements seen and operations of the sense, are explained through their changes due to distinguishing characteristics (dharma), external symptoms (lakṣaṇa), and periods (avasthā). Otherwise known as changes due to their content, place and time (vastu, deśa, kāla).”

The change of the mind during nirodha is an example of a change of characteristic (dharma), as the appearance and subsequent quelling of the latent tendencies, of their self-limiting notions, is a distinguishing characteristic of nirodha (assimilation).

The change of the mind leading to samādhi is an example of a change of an extrinsic symptom (lakṣaṇa), as the all-directedness to one directedness is prior but leading to (indicating where is) samādhi proper, not distinguishing it.

The change of mind during eka-agratā is an example of a change of period (avasthā) where the same one directedness continues over time. Each thought is essentially the same within a flow of thoughts.

These three types of changes happen to all other phenomena also. By these changes then, every change in phenomena can be defined (the what), located (the where), and their track through time (the when) be pointed out. Using the
:: Using similar terms, these three factors are also employed, in different contexts, in Yoga Sūtras 2.31 & 3.53 ::
, a change taking place is to be understood vastutaḥ (in terms of content), deśataḥ (in terms of place), and kālataḥ (in terms of time).

In this text, the objects that undergo change are the three guṇas (Yoga Sūtras 2.18–19) that form the five subtle elements (see commentary on Yoga Sūtra 3.41), which combine to form the five gross elements and everything made from them.


 
←PrevNext→
[dharmin – domain of the characteristics; anupātin – consequence; dharmas – distinguishing characteristics; śānta – past; udita – present; a-vyapadeśya – future.]

शान्त-उदित-अ-व्यपदेश्य-धर्म-अनुपाती (YS.3.9) भूत-भवत्-भविष्यत्-कालतः धर्मभिः उपाधीयते धर्मी देशतः वस्तु, यस्मिन् धर्माः स्व-काले व्यक्ताः अ-व्यक्ताः च सः धर्मी, तद् सत्-वस्तु अधिष्ठानं न परिणमते न व्यभिचरति, यथा घटे व्यक्ते अ-व्यक्ते च सति तद्-आकाशः न व्यभिचरति, ततः इदं धर्म-परिणाम-भेदत्वं धर्मि-भेदत्वेन कल्पते अ-विवेकतः॥ –
“As a consequence of the distinguishing characteristics (dharmas) in the past, present and future, the domain of the characteristics (the dharmī, the object, the place the dharmas manifest) is (seemingly) conditioned (upādhīyate). That in which the dharmas in time are manifest or are unmanifest is this very dharmī. This dharmī, the substrate (adhiṣṭhāna), does not change or deviate from its nature (before or after), just as space (ākāśa) remains unchanged whether a pot manifests within it or not. From this, any distinction in the change of distinguishing characteristics (dharmas) is imagined as a distinction of the (unchanging) dharmī, because of a lack of discernment (a-viveka) between the two.”

The sūtra now switches from the change that objects undergo, to the very object itself, while using the same terminology of characteristic, place, and time. With regard to an object itself, we are concerned only with the location (deśa) of the characteristics, not with the surroundings (lakṣaṇas), as we were when we looked at the change that objects undergo. Here, the characteristics are the lakṣaṇas, the indicators, of the location, of the object (dharmin). An object is seen in terms of its place. Indeed, that place (deśa) itself is the object (dharmin, what has a dharma), and it is where the characteristics (dharmas) are within time (avasthā or kāla).

An object, a dharmin (domain of characteristics), is separately distinguished from other objects (domains) by virtue of a set of qualities (dharmas) being held together over a span of time (kāla). The separation of objects is from the standpoint of a set of qualities in time, not from the nature of the domain itself in which the qualities appear for a time. Qualities do not attach to a permanently separable domain. Rather, our senses perceive certain qualities persisting in time and, we posit that there is a separate, individual object or domain, somehow distinguished from other objects.

The example of pot-space is employed to point out how the mind assumes the objects it perceives are separately real, in the way we assume a separately real pot-space is created by a pot being formed.

A visible clay pot (a set of perceived characteristics), when formed, seems to create a pot-space (the domain) within. In truth, before the pot there is no pot-space, after the pot is destroyed there is no pot-space, and even during the life of the pot there is no independently existing pot-space. Pot-space is a creation of the human imagination (see comm. on YS.1.9). It exists only because we give a name to it.

There is, objectively speaking, space and there is a pot, but there is no pot-space. The pot exists within space. Space exists outside the pot walls, within the clay of the pot walls, and between the pot walls. Space did not get cut up into separate entities or objects, any more than space can be sliced up into separable chucks by swinging a sword in space. The human mind through language gives a name to an area between the walls of the pot and calls it a pot-space. That name, that pot-space, is not separately there for the countless other creatures in this world who have not this language, this imagination.

In the example, limitless space is the more objectively real dharmin (domain, or reality basis), the particular pot walls are the dharma (characteristic), such as round or rectangular shape, and the pot-space is the imagined dharmin, the imagined object, existing as it is only because of the characteristics of the pot walls. If it had been a rectangular pot that was formed instead of a round pot, would that same space have been really a rectangular space all along? Is that same space instead or also a room-space, a city-space, a state-space, a country-space, a continent-space, an Earth-space, a solar system space? Are these equally knowable to whom – a human, an ant, an atom? Or is that space really, categorically, none of these?

Patañjali is telling us that an object (dharmin) is not its distinguishing characteristics; rather, it is wherever the particular conjunction of these distinguishing characteristics happens to occur within time. It is its intersecting, distinguishing characteristics’ domain. These distinguishing characteristics are then the limiting adjuncts (upādhi) for what we perceive the object, the domain of the characteristics, to be. The form of these intersecting characteristics within time, as they appear to this mind, is the peculiar form to which we can give a name. That name and form defines by circumscribing a domain.

Later (in discussing sūtras 4.12–14) we will see that the ultimate domain (
:: ‘मनस्-आदिः च प्राण-आदिः च इच्छा-आदिः च सत्त्व-आदिः च पुण्य-आदिः च एते पञ्च-वर्गाणां’ “The mind, [memory, intellect, and I-notion], the outward breath, [downward breath, dispersing circulation, upward energy, and uniting digestion], desire, [and aversion], sattva, [rajas, and tamas guṇas], and karma merit, [and demerit] – these are the five groups [of characteristics of the individual person who travels from birth to birth, the jīva].”
‘धर्मी भूत-आत्म-ज्ञानात् ऋते न विनश्यति, आत्म-सन्निधौ नित्यत्वेन प्रतीयमानः आत्म-उपाधिः यः तद् लिङ्ग-शरीरं हृद्-ग्रन्थिः इति उच्यते।’ “The domain (dharmin) [i.e., the individual jīva] of these five groups, lacking knowledge of the self of these elements [the bhūta-ātman], does not die [i.e., keeps wandering in saṃsāra]. It appears as being timeless [only] within [i.e., because of] the presence of [the timeless] ātman. What is an [apparently limiting] adjunct (upādhi) of ātman is that subtle body (liṅga-śarīra) called the knot of [i.e., around] the heart (hṛd-granthi) [– the shackle of ignorance within the mind that needs to be dissolved for freedom].”
‘तत्र यद् प्रकाशते चैतन्यं सः क्षेत्र-ज्ञः इति उच्यते’ “In that [subtle body], the consciousness which lights it up is called the knower of the field [of this body and of the body of the universe] (kṣetra-jña).” (Sarva-Sāra Up. 16, or 7–8 by a different numbering) ::
) is not many, individual things or beings, but is nothing other than the one, indivisible existence itself that lights up everything within. The limiting adjuncts (upādhis) are the words connected to perceptions of qualities that our mind uses to impose a temporary division in reality, without making any real change to the reality at all.

Patañjali’s presentation of the nature of our perceptions and our unexamined take on reality is based on the Upaniṣads, this culture’s science of the nature of the person and the nature of the universe. Together they deconstruct the attribution of reality to objects and take us back from sense-perceptions to ourselves, to the underlying reality. As we have said, doing this does not discount or seek to dismiss the experience and usefulness of objects and the empirical universe. We seek knowledge at a fundamental level of truth about the human condition. A mind firmly established in the appreciation of the limitations of perception will not inappropriately ascribe those limitations to oneself.

Back to the topic of change regarding an object, as it is for change, to know or imagine any object all three factors are needed. This is knowing an object in terms of content, place, and time.


 
←PrevNext→
[anyatva – difference; krama – sequence; hetu – cause; anyatva – difference; pariṇāma – change.]

क्रम-अन्यत्वं धर्माणां क्रम-भेदत्वं, यथा पूर्वं शीतम् अपरम् उष्णम्, अथवा पूर्वम् उष्णम् अपरं शीतं परिणाम-अन्यत्वे तापन-शीतल-आदि-परिणाम-रूप-भेदत्वे हेतुः परिणामः धर्म-क्रम-अपेक्षः इत्यर्थः॥ –
“The sequence of difference (krama-anyatvam) in distinguishing characteristics refers to the variation in sequence, such as first cold and then hot, or first hot and then cold. In change (pariṇāma), the cause of differences such as heating and cooling is dependent on the order of change in characteristics (dharma-krama-apekṣa).”

Change in an object is a function of differences in its characteristics that apply to the sequence of past, present, and future. Again, the object is the domain for these characteristics. With regard to the mind as an object, in the movement from being all directed to one directed the characteristic of the quality of attentiveness changes and is noticeable. You do not see the mind, the domain of thoughts, as such; you see the attendant dharmas (characteristics), the thought characteristics, changing over time.


 
←PrevNext→
[traya – three-fold; saṃyama – contemplation; pariṇāma – change; jñāna – knowledge; atīta – past; an-āgata – future.]

अथ विविधाः परिणाम-आदि-संयमाः – परिणाम-त्रय-संयमात् (YS.3.13) अतीत-अन्-आगत-ज्ञानं भूत-भविष्यत्-रूप-काल-ज्ञानं चित्त-कल्पनात्वेन (YS.4.12–13 & 33) – प्रत्यक्ष-प्रमाण-अ-विषयतया चित्त-कल्पना-धर्मवन्तौ, प्रत्यक्ष-धर्म-भवत्-लक्षणात् अन्यौ यदि अपि भवत्-अवस्थायाम् एव प्रतीतौ॥ –
“Now, follows various saṃyamas starting with change. From the saṃyama on the three types of change (dharma, lakṣaṇa and avasthā, or vastu, deśa and kāla) (YS.3.13), one attains knowledge of the past and future, which is the knowledge of time (YS.4.12–13 & 33). Since time is a figment (kalpanā) of the mind and not an object of direct perception or proof, both the past and future only exist as modifications of the mind. Because they are an external symptom (lakṣaṇa) of the nature (dharma) of perception, they appear distinct, yet are perceived only in the present period (avasthā).”

Accomplishments and Superpowers – Siddhis

Sūtras 3.16–53 list a variety of contemplations and their results. These results can be taken as what are called superpowers. But that is far from their most useful and meaningful interpretation. As superpowers, these results fall far short of the limitlessness that is the object of samādhi. Patañjali, himself, notes their limited nature and their potential as obstacles to an enlightened appreciation of the self in Yoga Sūtra 3.37.

Initially the listed results of these contemplations are forms of praise (stuti). Praise points out some glory in something or someone, but it may also involve exaggeration. One may draw a parallel with today’s commercials – Buy and use this toothpaste and that special person of your dreams will be irresistibly attracted to you. Not that one follows from the other, but they are not totally unconnected.

These sūtras say that if you do saṃyama (that is, dhāraṇā, dhyāna, and samādhi) on some particular object for a certain number of years, or decades, or who knows how long, and if you are the best at it in the past year, decade, century, or millennium or so, then maybe this superpower will be yours. Patañjali may be putting value on strict discipline as a part of a healthy life. He may be emphasizing the value of these disciplines as they affect the chance for a better next life, including a heaven. Overall though, the student who pursues these disciplines and powers may be disappointed with the results of his or her attempts. The toothpaste does not often fulfill one’s dreams – but your teeth may be healthier. Mere praise of the disciplines leading toward enjoyable results, though, does not justify the space allowed here in the terse
:: ‘सु-अल्प-अक्षरम् अ-सन्दिग्धं सारवत् विश्वतो-मुखम्। अ-स्तोभम् अन्-अ-वद्यं च सूत्रं सूत्र-विदः विदुः’ “Those who know sūtra literature know a sūtra as having minimal syllables (su-alpa-akṣara), lacking ambiguity (a-sandigdha), being meaningful (sāravat), being able to have more than one valid meaning as well as being non-contradicting (viśvato-mukha) [with what is said before and after], lacking elaboration in praise (a-stobha), and having no fault (an-a-vadya) [in grammar or logic].” (Śabda-Stoma-Mahānidhi: A Sanskrit Dictionary by Tārānātha Bhaṭṭāchārya) ::
.

Sūtra literature does not introduce a new subject matter; it consolidates and filters the verbal and written material already extant. Much of the yoga tradition and history is covered in the vast body of the Purāṇas. The yogins and their accomplishments live on in the Purāṇas. The Purāṇas hold the history and tradition of the culture. They are a mixture of the histories of events and people and other beings in a way that reflects their current cultural mores and teachings while also being flexible and able to accept and carry new interpretations and meaning. The Purāṇas are the mind and heart of India in the form of fable and parable.

The Purāṇas are the playing field for superpowers and super-beings. There are stories of powerful yogins, and even of
:: Remember that saṃyama itself need not include the first two aṅgas (limbs) of yoga, which bring in values. If one is meditating on unbecoming things, then one also will gain strength in those unbecoming things. See the 16th chapter of the Bhagavad-Gītā titled Distinction Between Worthy and Unworthy Dispositions ::
(bad guys and gals), whose special powers are important features to dramatize the story. These highlight and amplify the struggle between the forces of dharma and a-dharma (justice and injustice). It is the grey area between the two that life is lived. The superpowers are not the exclusive property of either side of this struggle. Patañjali may give them space in the sūtras because, in light of the tradition, the superpowers are of interest and may encourage study and contemplation which do yield benefit for anyone.

A more ancient literature that this section harkens to is the Veda Āraṇyakas, including the Upaniṣad literature, when they present various upāsanas (meditations), sometimes with their side-effects (gauṇa-phalas) being superpowers used as a praise to encourage their worthy practice. These various meditations involve contemplating the nature of the world with the specific intent to create a cosmic perspective in the meditating mind. They often connect a feature in the meditator to a feature in the cosmos, such as the being behind one’s right eye and the being behind the face of the sun, indicating their identity of some sort. This helps expand one’s thinking and helps one to more easily accept the ultimate truth that the Upaniṣads are interested in, namely that oneself is limitless reality, and the whole cosmos is oneself alone.

As we go through this section we will pay attention to the objects of contemplation, see their inter-connections and their connections to their superpower side-effects (gauṇa-phalas). This analysis of the Upaniṣad upāsanas introduces the cosmic perspectives valuable to the meditator.

We can also consider the strength of these powers as being of value to the student in a relative way. We do not consider the superpowers to be impossible, since that is generally impossible to prove. Rather, there is a maxim in the Mīmāṃsā discipline that analyses the statements in the Veda as to their context. The maxim is that if a statement in the Veda says that fire is cold, then the Veda would be wrong, and since the Veda should not be wrong, then there must be some other meaning indicated by such a statement. In this example, a particular ritual fire should not cool down too much.

A scriptural statement, as a means of knowledge (pramāṇa), cannot contradict any other means of knowledge (in our example, the sense of touch in contact with fire); therefore we need to revise our understanding of the scriptural statement so the two do not conflict. We will generally apply this Mīmāṃsā maxim in the following sūtras, if necessary, to see if there is something else being indicated here, than its literal or an exaggerated meaning.

Saṃyama on Change

Patañjali has thrown light on the dependent reality of objects (see comm. on YS.2.21–22). By reflecting on what the nature of change is in distinguishing characteristics (dharmas), extrinsic symptoms (lakṣaṇas), and periods of objects, one gains a better understanding of time itself. We can draw from his instruction and see that time itself, in spite of our perception of past and future, is itself an object that exists only to our senses and in our mind in the present.

The characteristic of a present experience of an object right now is different from the characteristic of a present notion of the object in the past or in the future. Nevertheless, the present experience of an object right now is often influenced by, and even mixed up with, how that object was in the past (through memories) or will be in the future (through fears and expectations) (see comm. on YS.1.43 & 3.17). Even the present experience of an external object right now is an experience of its past, since it takes time for the light reflected from the object to get to us and for our mind to reach out to form a conscious idea of the object as being out there. Time often seems to drag or speed up. During dream, time is even more flexible, sometime stopping or repeating. While in deep sleep, time itself disappears.

Time is a mental construct for thinking about and talking about that which is not now before one’s senses. We have cultural conventions that set time to certain units, for example, moments, minutes, and months. Even these will vary according to one’s individual experience, mood, age, and situation. Neither time nor its partner space is a fixed reality. Space too expands, contracts, and disappears in our daily experiences – between and within waking, dreaming, and deep sleep.

Einstein and Heisenberg taught us about the relative nature of time and the importance of the observer’s intent when he looks at things in nature. However, this teaching goes straight to the point of the reality basis of time by focusing on the individual mind’s experience of time, where alone time, as we know it, exists and matters.

Patañjali clarifies the processes and meanings of our day-to-day experiences. He asks us to question and investigate how we give value and reality to things in the world and in our minds. He incorporates this into a practical approach to maximizing one’s life. This is neither theoretical or an exercise of a superpower. Clarity in this pursuit makes the difference between the wise and the otherwise.

Concerning the nature of change in terms of distinguishing characteristics (dharmas), extrinsic symptoms (lakṣaṇas), and periods (avasthā) of things, the dharma of the past is as a memory, of the future is as an expectation. The lakṣaṇa of the past and the future is the connection of both in the present. The avasthā of both is but the present alone.

Without reflecting on all its aspects, there is so much we take for granted about our understanding of time, indeed any object, thinking it to be transparently real. The fact is there is much confusion about time. It appears to be both real and unreal. This status is what the teaching calls its being indefinable (a-nirvacanīya), unavailable for categorical definition as to whether it exists or does not exist. Sūtras to come will explain this further (YS.3.52, 4.12–13 & 33). This indefinable nature extends to all objects within time and space also. All objects are useful and available for transaction, and they would not even be said to exist but for the one indivisible reality. None of them enjoy independent reality.

Nevertheless, one can certainly gain some transactional knowledge of an object’s past, which has its effect in the present object, and its future, which is its present potentiality, by a reflection – not necessarily on time itself, but, granting time and the object their transactional reality – on a particular object in its past, present, and future. As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, everything of an entity’s past and future is knowable.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṅkara – confusion; śabda-artha-pratyaya – word-object-idea; adhyāsa – being imposed; itara-itara – each other. saṃyama – contemplation; tad-pravibhāgas – its separate parts; jñāna – knowledge; rutas – sounds; sarva-bhūtas – all beings.]

शब्द-अर्थ-प्रत्ययानाम् इतर-इतर-अध्यासात् यस्मात् नाम-वस्तु-रूपाणां परस्-पर-अध्यासः सङ्करः मिश्रं, तद्-प्रविभाग-संयमात् सङ्कर-विवेक-संयमात् सर्व-भूत-रुत-ज्ञानं सर्व-भूतानां वाक्-प्रयोजन-ज्ञानं संसार-सङ्कर-निमित्तत्वेन भवेत्, ‘समाने वृषे पुरुषः निमग्नः अन्-ईशया शोचति मुह्यमानः’ इति (MunU.3.1.2) ‘प्राणि-सुख-दुःख-उद्भूत-हर्ष-शोक-जात-नृत्य-गीत-वादित्र-क्ष्वेलित-आस्फोटित-हसित-आकृष्ट-रुदित-हा-हा-मुञ्च-मुञ्च-इति-आदि-अन्-एक-शब्द-कृत-तुमुली-भूत-महा-रवः’ इति (‘ऊर्ध्व-मूलः अवाक्-शाखः…’ इति KathU.2.3.1 Śāṅkara-bhāṣya)॥ –
“Since word-object-idea (śabda-artha-pratyaya) are often intermingled with each other, there arises name and form (nāma-rūpa) confusion. From saṃyama on the differentiation between these mixtures (YS.1.42-4), one can attain knowledge of the sounds of all beings, and the purpose of speech. This leads to the understanding that confusion in the world arises from their being mixed up. “On the same tree, one person is depressed, and without lordship (over hardly anything), this deluded one grieves” MunU.3.1.2. For example, “It has its uproar, rendered tumultuous through the various sounds arising from dancing, singing, instrumental music, disport (play, jest, etc.), clapping on the arms, laughing, pulling, crying, exclaiming ’Alas, alas!,’ ’Leave me, leave me!’, induced by mirth and grief arising from the enjoyment and pain of living beings” (KathU.2.3.1 Bhāṣyam).”

The student’s contemplation and understanding gain by an appreciation of Patañjali’s teaching on perception and time. They also gain by a similar examination of what occurs in the process of naming, in the process of word recognition and ascription of a meaningful word to a recognized object. We do not as a rule separate the steps involved, and one may live an entire life without doing so. But by taking them apart we can see that mixing them up can lead to basic but correctable errors.

Without examination, we may tend to see what we are habituated to see, or expect to see, without seeing what is actually there. We may think that what we believe we saw was what was really there. The automatic and habitual practice that happens in our mind when we see and identify by name an object tends to cement our acceptance of that object as real and true. This in turn informs and conditions subsequent perceptions as to their valuation and reality. We tend to develop a mental narrative in our life that continually conditions our world of experiences. Unless we take the time to examine this narrative objectively, it may not serve us well.

There is a reality in naming that attracts us; we like to know the names of the objects around us. Knowledge of our environment helps gives us a sense of security. This may be a false comfort that hides the fact of not knowing oneself. The name, the object, and the thought-form can be separately objectified, but they all exist within and because of the one consciousness that is the only reality.

Contemplation is, in part, a quiet examination of how I interact with myself and with the world. I now also have an appreciation of myself as the whole in which this world shines. The clarity of understanding of myself is the basis with which to appreciate the world.

Sounds of living beings, unlike sounds of inanimate objects, are often a form of communication. There is an intelligence in living beings that allows a rudimentary language for communication. We see this from insects to mammals. At the apex of this capacity for communication is the human. Since this human body and brain seems to be a product of the evolution of life on Earth, this same rudimentary capacity lays at the core of the human also. As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, all sounds of all creatures are understandable and thus knowable.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃskāras – latent tendencies; sākṣāt – immediate; karaṇa – instrumental cause; jñāna – knowledge; pūrva – prior; jātis – births.]

संस्कार-साक्षात्-करणात् अस्मिन् जन्मनि संस्कार-साक्षात्-करण-संयमात् पूर्व-जाति-ज्ञानं स्वे परेषु च पूर्व-जन्मनां निज-संस्कार-अपेक्षा-ज्ञानम् (YS.2.12–13)॥ –
“By direct perception of the latent impressions (saṃskāras), through the practice of saṃyama on these impressions in this life, one attains knowledge of previous births, both in oneself and in others. This knowledge is the result of the impressions of past lives, understood in relation to one’s own saṃskāras and those of others (YS.2.12–13).”

Contemplation on one’s unique tendencies leads to an assumption of prior causes for these tendencies. Prodigies and those with inborn talent are examples of the breadth of human uniqueness. Patañjali gives us the traditional explanation for the individual conditions and capacities with which each being comes. The Indian perspective gives meaning and promise to the whole of human experience. We are as actors who come to the stage of life with a script to play, a script with many roles. We are actors who do not realize that we are more than our roles. The promise is that, when one recognizes the truth of the actor who takes on all the roles, the fullness of life is appreciated. Only as a self-conscious actor can you come to this realization – knowing that as the actor one is not diminished or exalted while playing the role of a beggar or a king with equal ease and satisfaction. Deities, animals, and other sentient beings must go around again until they earn birth as an actor capable of recognizing that the role does not define the actor.

Since this script is for just one part in the great drama of creation, it can be taken as having been crafted for this individual to fit in with the whole. The scripture teaches that this script was self authored through various prior lifetimes, and it is this particular embodiment at this time in this place that was designed to play out this part in the drama. This script, in the form of these latent tendencies, thus becomes the immediate instrumental cause for ordering up this particular embodiment to appropriately play out the role.

Of course, the ultimate cause of these tendencies, and thus this embodiment, is the basic ignorance of which these tendencies are its manifestation. By contemplating this script in the form of one’s natural latent tendencies, one can gain an appreciation for the existence of, and to a certain extent the nature of, the variety of causes for these effects in the form of these tendencies. For example, if I am having a protracted problem with some other person, it can indicate something in the relationship that occurred in the past, or it may be symbolic of how I act within all similar relationships. This can indicate an aspect of me where I can learn and grow and thereby contribute to my chances for a better current life and a better coming life.

This is a recognition that everyone, including oneself, comes with a background that cannot be fully known. Misunderstandings and confusions in relating to others can be the result of not appreciating these backgrounds. One’s known and unknown latent tendencies work in concert with new experiences and conditions to shape the current and future lives. There are recognizable patterns of behavior and feeling that can help one to learn and grow. Or this may be a lifetime where you enjoy so many assets and opportunities that you have little need to question life. The teaching tradition says that we all come to earth with some work to do toward mental and emotional maturity, and to the discovery of and owning up to the truth of the self. And we all, no matter our situation or our capacities, have an opportunity to seek the fullest expression of our intellects and to realize our sense of fullness.

Clarity with respect to latent tendencies has positive benefits in this life. As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, all of one’s prior lives can not only be understood but also known.


 
←PrevNext→
[pratyaya – thought; jñāna – knowledge; para – other; cittas – minds.]

स्व-प्रत्ययस्य संयमात् पर-चित्त-ज्ञानम् अन्य-चित्त-प्रकार-ज्ञानम्॥ –
“Through saṃyama on one’s own perception, one gains knowledge of the minds of others and the types of mental states of others.”

Human minds overall have more in common than they do differences. Though there is a broad range of human expression, the feelings, motivations, and capacities are similar. One may contemplate on the distinguishing characteristics, defining stimuli, and patterns of thought and behavior within oneself, within one’s mind. By doing so, one may get in touch with empathy and patience and an understanding toward other human minds.

Beyond maturing an empathy and an accommodative attitude towards others whose minds are not unlike our own, we may also consider the very nature of the mind and how it makes contact with others.

In the West we tend to identify the mind with the brain. But mind can be seen as much more, as a subtle capacity for knowledge that reaches out beyond the skull (cf. ManKa.2.13–16). One feels pain or movement in the toe as being down there in the toe, not in the spinal cord leading to the brain. One sees a tree across the valley and sees it as being over there, not in the brain or back of the eye. The mind encompasses the distance, as well as the object of the
:: ‘मातुर् मानाभिनिष्पत्तिः निष्पन्नं मेयम् एति तत्। मेयाभिसङ्गतं तच् च मेयाभत्वं प्रपद्यते’ “From the cognizer the cognition is produced. Having been produced, it reaches out to its object. Having come together with its object, it assumes the form of the object.” (Pañca-Daśī 4.30)
‘यत्र यथा तटाक-उदकं छिद्रात् निर्गत्य कुल्या-आत्मना केदारान् प्रविश्य तद्वत् एव चतुर्-कोण-आदि-आकारं भवति, तथा तैजसम् अन्तःकरणम् अपि चक्षुर्-आदि-द्वारा निर्गत्य घट-आदि-विषय-देशं गत्वा घट-आदि-विषय-आकारेण परिणमते।’ “Here [regarding an external object cognition], just like water from a pond goes out through an opening, enters the fields in the form of canals, and becomes a four cornered form, etc., similarly the luminous mind (antaḥ-karaṇa) also goes out through the gate of sight, etc. [any of the five senses], reaches the locale of an object (viṣaya), such as pot, etc., and changes into the form of the object, the pot, etc.” ‘सः एव परिणामः वृत्तिः इति उच्यते’ “That modification (pariṇāma) is called a vṛtti (thought or thought-form).” (Vedānta-paribhāṣā 1.18).
These are from latter day Vedānta writers (14th and 17th century). This literal contact of the mind via the senses with the external objects is a natural extrapolation of scriptural statements, such as the ‘पराञ्चनि खानि’ “outgoing senses” (Kaṭha Up. 2.1.1), ‘पञ्च-श्रोतस्-अम्बुं पञ्च-योनि-उग्र-वक्राम्’ “the five streams of water [the five senses] violently meandering among their five sources [the five great elements]” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 1.5), ‘अन्यत्र-मना अभूवमं न अदर्शम्, अन्यत्र-मना अभूवं न अश्रौषम्’ “With the mind elsewhere I did not see, with the mind elsewhere I did not hear” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 1.5.3), and others.
Earlier Vedānta texts were less concerned with explaining the mundane world than the sacred, so their treatment of perception of everyday objects was more cursory, speaking only of a “contact of the senses with their objects,” without finding a need to speculate what is the nature of that contact ::
. The form of the thought of a distance is the distance we experience.

Is it not so that the mind has gone to the toe and to the tree, by means of touch and sight, and filled the objects, taken their form and used those to identify and name the objects? Does not the mind envelop the expansive world of your experience? Does this not bring the whole of the universe into the realm, the scope, of your mind in a very intimate yet objective sense? Can you envision how a simple change in your mind changes how you see the world; how you can best see the world?

The Western science model begins with the assumption that there are totally independent sense objects outside our minds, yet the current perceptual model in science is that all perceptions happen only inside this mind, this brain. Since this assumed model has to also apply to the scientists themselves doing their experiments and analyses, there is no way for them to objectively be sure any object can be a totally independent entity outside their own, much less their test subject’s, mind. Since the determination that any object can be a totally independent entity is itself dependent on the world-view assumptions of those who setup and measure the experiment, then the experiment would be prejudiced by these unavoidable assumptions.

That there are objects external to, distanced from, our brain is a common sense assumption not in dispute. However, science has no tools to independently verify the assumption that objects are also external to the mind, much less that these objects are not only external but also totally independent of our thought of them. The teaching here does accept as a given that objects exist externally to the brain, but the teaching does not accept that these objects can be independent of our mind.

It takes the mind to know any object, and this mind will unavoidably have its own perspective and limitations that will color the perception or knowledge of any object it can think of. Even our current science is starting to recognize that the very act of perceiving an object or event, such as measuring whether light behaves like waves or particles, in some way affects the nature, or understanding of the nature, of the object or event. How could that be if the observer is simply a passive entity only encountering the object or event once it arrives to the brain? Can we take this scientific observation and its logical consequences as perhaps a confirmation that no object can factually be external to the mind?

Moreover, since the current perceptual model is that an object stimulus indirectly reaches the brain and a resulting thought of that stimulus occurs, then doesn’t this implicitly impose a separation of external objects from our internal thoughts? The world of stimuli outside our brain is of one nature, totally independent of thought, and the world of thought inside our brain is another. Whether that model matches our common sense assumptions, or even our most current science, is debatable.

The scientific perceptual model seems to propose some unknowable universe of stimuli outside our brain that, once it enters into the brain, forms a known universe of thoughts within. This model tends to invoke a sense of isolation of myself from the universe, an isolation of my world of thoughts from the supposedly real world of stimuli out there. Nevertheless, we can muddle along in our life with this perspective. Thankfully, we don’t spend too much time pondering this perceptual model and its implications. While growing up, we have all managed to survive well enough before our teachers taught this perceptual model. Life has and can be lived with or without acknowledgement of this model.

Let’s assume another model can apply. Suppose thought is not a passive, reactive entity in this universe. Imagine thoughts are active entities participating in every aspect of our universe. Imagine that there cannot be any object outside of or away from thought. If one assumes there is any object that is outside or away, that object at that time is not a totally, independently existing object, but is only an assumption of such an object. That assumption is itself a thought, a type of thought we call an assumption. How could we possibly think of any object, perceptual or logical, that is totally unconnected to thought?

Let us imagine a model that, whereas the brain is a physical base or coordinating center for subtle thoughts and their sense organ apertures, these thoughts extend or expand out from that base (this teaching, however, prefers this base to be the heart as the center of the person, the center of the person’s subtle body) into the perceptual, known, and imagined universe in keeping with the nature of the thought. If the thought has the nature of a distance between my body and a tree, for example, this thought is in the form of this distance. The nature of the thought is all we could ever know about the distance itself. The sense of any distance we have is simply our thinking of it. This is maybe why it varies from time to time in our perspective. The mountain at the other end of the valley we live in doesn’t look too far way, until we have to start walking towards it. We do not so much objectively see distance, as we sense distance. Our perceptual sense of distance is more wrapped up in our sense of current comparisons of near and far, than actual measurements. Near and far are valuation thoughts.

This teaching here does not prescribe any specific model of perception. It is concerned with the essential nature of oneself and world, not with different models of the universe wherein we can happily choose one or the other. But we can gain by a reexamination of any model of the universe that concretizes a sense of isolation and otherness within this world of experience.

At least we may be able to learn to not be so inclined to think this experienced world perspective, this one life, is in fact categorically real and the permanent truth. Just recognize that every individual in the past, present or future has its own experienced world perspective. Our own perspective alone cannot categorically be the truth. This seems obvious, yet we continue to believe that the world is exactly how we currently think it to be. This certainty in our current beliefs would seem to be rationally impossible, yet we do it all the time.

The traditional teaching here uses the word mithyā to describe the dependent nature of all that is objectified by our minds. The world is not independent of our thinking of it. Our thinking of it varies in time, so naturally the specific nature of the world appears variable and is not categorically true. Mithyā is not unreality or simply imagination; it is just incomplete knowledge which an individual is satisfied or stuck with for the time being. Objects are taken as absolutely real only until we more clearly understand them. We talked about mithyā when discussing Yoga Sūtra 2.22.

The contemplative model of perception suggested here is that sight and the other senses, followed by the mind, directly expand or extend out into the universe. Where the senses cannot extend, the intellect reaches out beyond. Whereas sight can see that the stars are far away, only to the extent that the intellect knows how far away those stars are can one think them to be that far away. The distance is only what each person thinks it to be. This alone can be the expanse of one’s universe.

This contemplative model provides a perspective in which the individual is integrally connected to and is co-extensive with the entire phenomenal and known universe, in keeping with how we each know our universe of experience. This universe, because it is pervaded by the mind, is directly lit-up in situ, in place, by the awareness-being we are. As far as and to where the senses and mind are directed, that mind-pervaded universe of experience is lit by you, the awareness-being. One’s self, as this awareness-being, is at least as vast as one’s universe.

You are the witness-being lighting this mind that pervades this entire universe of your experience, from your perspective. As the only witness-being, you are the witness-being (cit-sat) lighting up all minds that pervade all their perspectives of this entire manifestation, the manifestation of the Lord as this universe. There is a continuing thought and belief in this particular mind, in my mind, that its experience is all there is, that this particular universe of experience is absolutely real. This misconception can be removed by the teaching, by Vedānta as yoga.

We will apply this understanding of the mind and of reality to gain a depth of understanding in those sūtras that deal with the individual and with the cosmos.

Here, if the mind is not limited to the confines of the brain, then the ability of a mind to come in contact with another’s thoughts is not necessarily a stretch of imagination. It can be viewed as objectively possible within the contemplative model of perception. Just as external phenomenal objects can be contacted by our mind, so too can other minds. Your mind moves about within a shared field of minds – of your family members, neighbours, community, group, and so on. The more intimate and interconnected the shared field of minds, such as between loved ones, twins, etcetera, the more the possibilities of these mental contacts. In an objective sense your mind moves about in others’ universes of experience, in their mind spaces too.

But an ability to intentionally contact another’s mind seems thankfully limited in people. We generally seem to not have any more contact with the minds of others beyond mentally sensing another’s emotion or someone’s presence nearby. We would hardly recognize we have this subtle natural ability, unless it proves itself unusual in comparison with others. Different people naturally have, or perhaps can develop, a more extensive contact with others’ minds. There are also some people we may diagnose as unstable who may attest to having an extensive form of this ability.

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, one can perceive thoughts in another’s mind, can read another’s mind.


 
←PrevNext→
[ca – but; na – not; tat-sa-ālambana – accompanied with its basis; a-viṣayī-bhūtatva – is not within the scope; tasya – of that.]

तद्-ज्ञानं न च तु तद्-स-आलम्बनं पर-चित्तस्य आदिम-संस्कारेण सहितं, तस्य स्व-चित्तस्य अ-विषयी-भूतत्वात् तस्मात् पर-चित्तस्य ज्ञानं न संपूर्णं भवेत्॥ –
“That knowledge (of other’s mind) is not based on their external objects and is not associated with the initial impressions (saṃskāras) of the their mind. Because it is not within the scope of one‘s knowledge, therefore, knowledge of the minds of others does not become complete.”

One’s mind can come into contact with another’s current thought, but not with the object of that other’s thought. A yogin may cognize another’s feeling of desire, but the yogin’s mind does not also contact, at the same time, the actual object of that desire. We say this because we look upon a thought as different from the object perceived. A latent tendency of the mind can also generate a desire, but, just as with the object of desire, that latent tendency will not be contacted by the yogin’s mind. Latent tendencies involved in memory, in general, are not available to even the thinker’s mind. A latent tendency, the originating thought, or the object of that thought cannot be read by another. Only the current manifest thought is available.

It might be possible that a manifest, though subliminal, thought may be noticeable to a yogin. Perhaps, whatever blocks the thinker from distinctly noticing his own subliminal thought would not be a block to the yogin. A subliminal thought, or aspect of a thought, is like an unnoticed object, such as a neighbour in a crowd, in one’s field of perception (see Yoga Sūtra YS.4.17).

Why another person has a specific thought cannot be fully known even when this is interpreted as a superpower, since fully includes the original object and the latent tendency sources of the thought.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃyama – contemplation; rūpa – form; kāya – body; tad-grāhya-śakti – its capability of being grasped; stambha – stopped; a-saṃprayoga – non-contact; prakāśa – light; cakṣus – sight; antar-dhāna – concealment.]

काय-रूप-संयमात् तद्-ग्राह्य-शक्ति-स्तम्भे स्वयं तिरस्-भूते तूष्णी-भूते च इत्यर्थः चक्षुस्-प्रकाश-अ-संप्रयोगे चित्तस्य पर-देह-आदि-विषय-आक्षेपेण च सति स्व-देहस्य पर-देहस्य च अन्तर्-धानं बुद्धि-कृतम् अन्-अवधानं, स्थूल-विषयेषु न चित्त-विक्षेपाः इत्यर्थः (YS.1.30–31, YS.2.51–54)॥ –
“By contemplating on the physical form (kāya-rūpa) through saṃyama, the power of its perception can be halted, resulting in one’s stealth. When the mind is not engaged with external objects, such as the body or other forms, and remains unaffected by them, the concealment of both one’s own body and others’ bodies is maintained without disturbance. In this state, the mind does not experience distractions from external objects, thus achieving a state of calm (YS.1.30–31, YS.2.51–54).”

If this is taken as a saṃyama dealing with the form of other bodies, other objects, then this is a method for making those bodies unnoticed, invisible. These bodies may also become unavailable to the other senses, inaudible, etcetera, by taking one’s attention from them. This may be seen as a development of the ability to intentionally not pay attention to what one knows is not helpful in life. Instead of being distracted by so many things, we do need to discipline our time and be selective in our attention.

Or perhaps, by reflection on the form of one’s own body, understanding its nature of reflecting light and creating sounds, one can gain a certain stealth. This is a practicality when living in a forest with predators, a skill in the martial arts, and a science actively pursued today for military advantage.

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, one can gain a laser-like, undistracted focus of attention and one’s body can become invisible to others.


 
←PrevNext→
[karma – subtle result of willful action; sa-upakrama – has a sequence that is quick; ca – and; nir-upakrama – has a sequence that is slow; saṃyama – contemplation; tat – that; – or; a-riṣṭas – ill-omens; jñāna – knowledge; apara-anta – death.]

स-उपक्रमं निर्-उपक्रमं च स-फलं शीघ्रम् अ-शीघ्रं च कर्म, तद्-संयमात् अपर-अन्त-ज्ञानं मरण-काल-ज्ञानम्, अ-रिष्टेभ्यः दुर्-निमित्तेभ्यः वा॥ –
Karma has immediate results and delayed results. From saṃyama on that or from ill-omens, arises the knowledge of death including the time of death.”

To have a body is to have the means to exhaust past karma. These karmas get exhausted early or later in life, but they eventually get exhausted, at which end the embodiment will end. Knowing this makes clear that the end is certain and relatively near. There are also said to be omens that indicate that death is near. Some are very clear, such as closing one’s ears and not hearing any sound, that is, there is little or no pulsing of blood heard. There are also said to be omens from the environment around or from the beyond. These are anecdotal beliefs that one may choose to take seriously or not.

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, one knows exactly when one will die.


 
←PrevNext→
[maitrī-ādi – goodwill, etcetera; balas – strengths.]

मैत्री-आदिषु (YS.1.33) संयमात् बलानि मैत्री-करुणा-मुदित-उपेक्ष-बलानि॥ –
“Through saṃyama on goodwill, compassion, approval, and allowance (YS.1.33), one gains powers related to these qualities: the power of goodwill, compassion, approval, and allowance.”

Contemplating on these four makes a significant contribution to one’s clarity. Despite what some commentators claim here, allowance (upekṣa) towards those who have committed offence and towards the offence itself is a virtue of great value. It is, once again, seeing everything as within the order, within the Lord’s order. It is also a practical attitude because the yogin consciously limits the areas for which he or she needs to take responsibility. Seeing beyond good and bad is part of this. Often the tendency to criticize, condemn, and control others is a compensation for one’s doubt that a person can control himself. The student will use this sūtra as a guide toward emotional strength and good judgment. Saṃyama is to be done at all stages in one’s progress in yoga (YS.3.6).

All the pairs of opposites we deal with in life are seen within this teaching tradition as the natural flow of the three guṇas. Stepping back from reactivity by means of contemplation gives the student freedom from unnecessary involvement with anything other than his or her proper concern. Apart from self or others’ immediate defense, in the view of the yogin, only a parent and perhaps someone in law enforcement needs to restrain another. Watching the guṇas at work, one knows he cannot influence them except as they affect his own intentions and manifest in his own behavior. Watching the guṇas at work, in a sense, is this contemplation.

Clarity is not a mechanical clearing or cleaning of the mind. Clarity is being clear in the nature and quality of one’s thoughts so that they are in keeping with a proper means of knowledge, are without error, and are free of unnecessary imagination. This results in knowing what one wants and needs, and knowing the means to that.


 
←PrevNext→
[balas – strengths; bala-ādi – strength, etcetera; hastin – elephant.]

पर-भूत-बलेषु संयमात् हस्ति-बल-आदीनि हस्ति-आदि-अपेक्षा-नैपुण्यानि॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the strength of other beings, one gains powers such as the strength of an elephant and other similar abilities, such as dexterity, etc. associated with these beings.”

Beyond their names, many of the yoga-āsanas draw from animals as examples of how to stretch, relax, and tone one’s body and to fill it with maximal energy. The elephant is certainly an Indian icon of strength, steadfastness, dexterity, grace, and even wisdom. Other animals and forces in nature also have strengths and abilities that are worth contemplating. Many of the martial arts have adopted this study. Our sciences study nature for these same reasons.

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, one can gain super strength.


 
←PrevNext→
[nyāsa – directing; āloka – light; pravṛtti – outward; jñāna – knowledge; sūkṣma – subtle; vyavahita – concealed; viprakṛṣṭa – remote.]

प्रवृत्ति-आलोक-न्यासात् बहिर्-बुद्धि-प्रकाश-लक्ष्यी-करणात् सूक्ष्म-व्यवहित-विप्रकृष्ट-ज्ञानं सूक्ष्म-गूढ-दूराणां ज्ञानं यथा सूर्यं प्रति॥ –
“Through directing attention of the light of the intellect outward, one attains advanced knowledge of the subtle, the concealed, and the remote, like the sun illuminates all these.”

Where the senses cannot penetrate, the intellect uncovers the rest of the universe. Our sciences have already demonstrated that this extends from the tiny loops of energy at the heart of matter to the farthest limits of space, and back in time from the first moments of this universe to the farthest reaches of possible futures. This teaching tradition goes further in that it opens this mind to the mind of the Lord (i.e., a universal perspective), and in that way it resolves with objectivity this intellect, along with the entire universe, all the way to its singular reality. The light of awareness lights the way for this intellect.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃyama – contemplation; sūrya – sun; jñāna – knowledge; bhuvanas – worlds.]

भुवन-ज्ञानं तमस्-रजस्-सत्त्वस्य भूर्-भुवस्-स्वरः ज्ञानं सूर्ये भास्करे पूषनि ब्रह्म-लोक-द्वारे संयमात्॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the Sun one attains knowledge of the worlds (bhuvana-jñāna), which consist of the three guṇas (tamas, rajas, sattva), including earth, atmosphere and the heavens, up to the highest spiritual realm of Brahma-loka beyond the Sun.”

The energy of the big bang is the source of the hydrogen and helium that eventually formed the stars by way of the gravitational attraction of these two elements. These stars are the source of all the other elements in the universe needed to form all the earths there may be. The gravity of the suns and their elements are the cause for the formations of planets. And the suns heat those planets to allow life to exist. This is what our sciences tell us.

This was recognized, in very general, less exacting technical terms, by the tradition we are studying. In their terminology, the earth (bhū) is predominantly mass (tamas), while the sun (svar, the heavens including the sun) is predominantly energy (sattva), the obvious source of all energy on earth. The atmosphere (bhuvas) between the earth and the heavens is predominantly motion or turbulence (rajas). Between mass and energy, between tamas and sattva, is the entire makeup of the universe (bhū-bhuvas-svar, tamas-rajas-sattva).

Further, the light (the truth) of the sun removes the darkness here, so the sun also stands for the
:: ‘तत् सवितुर् वरेण्यं भर्गो देवस्य धीमहि। धियो यो नः प्रचोदयात्’ “We meditate upon that to be worshipped of the sun as this effulgence of the Lord which impels our intellects.” (Gāyatrī Mantra, Ṛg Veda 3.62.10).
‘केन इषितं पतति प्रेषितं मनः’ “Impelled by what (agent, by its mere presence) does the mind go directed (to its object)?” (Kena Up. 1.1) ::
, the awareness itself that is the light of the mind. Intelligence (sattva, also called satya), is the basic, subtle nature or reality of the universe. It manifests in the mind and to the senses as motion (rajas) and mass (tamas), by way of name (the motion of forming a thought) and form (the seeming fixed structure of the motion of thought), like the appearance of distinct patterns when the glowing end of a firebrand or incense stick is waved in darkness. In this firebrand example, the glow is the awareness-intelligence that alone is both the movement and the patterns, and their absence.

The sun is also considered the
:: ‘आदित्यं गच्छति एतद् वै खलु लोक-द्वारम्’ “He goes to the sun, this indeed is the doorway to the [highest] realms [of heaven].” (Chāndogya Up. 8.6.5–6).
‘हिरण्मयेन पात्रेण सत्यस्य अपिहितं मुखम्। तद् त्वं पूषन् अपावृणु सत्य-धर्माय दृष्टये’ “The face [i.e., the true nature] of satya (i.e., brahman) is [as though] hidden by the golden vessel (pātra) [i.e., the blinding sun]. O Sun, please remove that [pātra, the blinding manifest form of yourself] for showing [the satya] to [me] the one whose nature is that satya.” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 5.15.1) ::
to the subtle heavenly worlds, and beyond to the truth of everything. This is recognition that heavens and hells are subtle forms of energy within the universe. They are not specific locations in space. Neither the physical body nor even a subtle body goes to heaven or a hell in a particular location in physical space. The subtle body – the mind and the subtle powers of sensing and action – has gone to various subtle realms before and after the death of this physical body. These are regions of thought-like reality, like in a realm of dream. Their order up and down is in terms of their pleasant or unpleasant valuation, not necessarily in terms of physical space. These subtle realms are the topic of the scriptures and the literature based on these scriptures.

The sun is especially seen as a doorway to the highest heaven,
:: ‘ते ये एवम् एतद् विदुः, ये च अमी अरण्ये श्रद्धां सत्यम् उपासते,’ “Those who meditate upon this [five-fire ritual] in this way, and those in the forest who meditate with faith upon satya [i.e., Hiraṇya-garbha, the limit of subtlety but as ‘other’ than oneself, falling short of limitless brahman],”
‘ते अर्चिः अभिसम्भवन्ति, अर्चिषः अहः, अह्नः आपूर्यमाण-पक्षम् आपूर्यमाण-पक्षात् यान् षण्मासान् उदन् आदित्यः एति, मासेभ्यः देव-लोकं, देव-लोकात् आदित्यम्, आदित्याद् वैद्युतं,’ “they enter into the [funeral] fire[-deity], from the fire[-deity] they go to the day[-deity], from the day[-deity] to the waxing fortnight[-deity], from the waxing fortnight[-deity] to those six-months[-deities] where the sun travels north, by those six-months[-deities] to the heaven of the deities, from the heaven of the deities to the sun[-deity], from the sun[-deity] to the lightening-deity.”
‘तान् वैद्युतान् पुरुषः मानसः एत्य ब्रह्म-लोकान् गमयति,’ “From the lightening-deity a person born of the mind [of Hiraṇya-garbha] comes and takes them to the realms called brahma-loka [the highest heaven, wherein one can be taught brahma-vidyā, presumably, in the highest of these realms and get out of this rebirth cycle completely].”
‘ते तेषु ब्रह्म-लोकेषु पराः परावतः वसन्ति, तेषां न पुनर्-आवृत्तिः’ “In those realms of brahma-loka they live a long time. For them there is no return again [during the life of this Hiraṇya-garbha, if at all, they will return upon the dissolution of that current brahma-loka during pralaya, the dissolution of all worlds for the next manifestation cycle].” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 6.2.15) ::
. There one enjoys an extended opportunity to gain knowledge that frees one from moving through all realms of heavens and hells. Let your contemplation tie what you know from science together with what Patañjali and the Upaniṣads say. They are not at odds; they are helpful perspectives from those who have gone before.

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, one gains detailed knowledge of the universe as this tradition understands it – with seven heavens (including the earthly realm in the lowest of these heavens) and seven hells, and the various regions within each one of these. These details are already given in various accounts throughout the classic literature of this culture.


 
←PrevNext→
[candra – moon; jñāna – knowledge; vyūha – arrangement; tārās – stars.]

चन्द्रे नक्षत्र-नाथे दक्षिण-आयन-देवतायां संयमात् तारा-व्यूह-ज्ञानं नक्षत्र-रचना-मार्ग-ज्ञानम्॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the Moon, the ruler of the constellations, and the deity of the southern solstice, one attains knowledge of the arrangement of the stars and the path of the constellations.”

The moon traverses the visible sky in its nightly journey. The constellations and their positions were important to the herding and agrarian segments of this society in need of knowledge of the seasons, and for maintaining their ritual calendar. The lunar calendar is based on the movement, and the waxing and waning, of the moon against the backdrop of the constellations.

In this tradition, the moon is seen as the doorway to all the lower
:: ‘अथ ये यज्ञेन दानेन तपसा लोकान् जयन्ति ते धूमम् अभिसम्भवन्ति, धूमाद् रात्रिं रात्रेः पक्षीयमाण-पक्षम् अपक्षीयमाण-पक्षाद् यान् षण्मासान् दक्षिण-आदित्यः एति, मासेभ्यः पितृ-लोकं, पितृ-लोकात् चन्द्रं,’ “Whereas, those who win [heavenly] worlds through ritual, charity, and prayerful discipline enter into the [funeral] smoke[-deity], from the smoke[-deity] they go to the night[-deity], from the night[-deity] to the waning fortnight[-deity], from the waning fortnight[-deity] to the six-months[-deities] where the sun travels south, from those six-months[-deities] to the heaven of the ancestors, from the heaven of the ancestors to the moon[-deity].”
‘ते चन्द्रं प्राप्य अन्नं भवन्ति, तान् तत्र देवाः यथा सोमं राजानम् आप्यायस्व अपक्षीयस्व इति, एवम् एनान् तत्र भक्षयन्ति, तेषां यदा तत् पर्यवैति अथ इमम् एव आकाशम् अभिनिष्पद्यन्ते, आकाशाद् वायुं, वायोः वृष्टिं, वृष्टेः पृथिवीं,’ “Reaching the moon[-deity] they [i.e., their karmas that brought them here] become food. There the deities enjoy them [like one enjoys] King Soma [saying] thus, ‘May you increase and [then] diminish [like the moon].’ When that [karma] of theirs elapses, then they fall out [of the lunar heaven] to this space [i.e., they, being emptied of their load of karma that was consumed by and thus swelled the waxing of the moon, become like empty space], from space to air, from air to rain, from rain to the earth.”
‘ते पृथिवीं प्राप्य अन्नं भवन्ति, ते पुनः पुरुष-अग्नौ हूयन्ते, ततः योषा-अग्नौ जायन्ते, लोकान् प्रति उत्थायिनः ते एवम् एव अनुपरिवर्तन्ते,’ “Reaching the earth they [i.e., their watery bodies] become food again, and they are offered into the [digestive] fire of a male, from him they [as seed] are born in the [reproductive] fire of a female, in this way alone rising [again] to [other] worlds they revolve [in saṃsāra].”
‘अथ ये एतौ पन्थानौ न विदुः ते कीटाः पतङ्गाः यद् इदं दन्दशूकम्’ “But, those who do not know [and follow] either of these two paths [of rites to the lunar heavens and of meditations to the solar heavens] [directly] become [i.e., may be born as] worms, flies, and this [bug, etc.] that keeps biting [us].” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 6.2.16) ::
, from which there will be a return to this world of opportunity to create new, beneficial karma or get out of the transmigration cycle altogether.

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, by contemplation on this nightly wanderer there is detailed knowledge of all the constellations.


 
←PrevNext→
[dhruva – pole star; jñāna – knowledge; tad-gati – their movement.]

ध्रुवे संयमात् तद्-गति-ज्ञानं नक्षत्र-चक्र-गति-ज्ञानम्॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the pole star (Dhruva), one attains knowledge of its motion, as well as the rotation of all the constellations as a whole.”

Around the Northern pole star, the constellations of stars slowly revolve as the earth daily spins around its axis. The stars visually arise from the horizon
:: according to Skywatching (A Nature Company Guide), David H. Levy, Time-Life Books, 1998, p. 86 ::
earlier every day throughout the year because of the combination of the earth’s spin on its axis and its rotation around the sun. Together, by these one can tell the time in the night. As the tipped earth rotates around the sun, the constellations revolve at a slightly different angle throughout the year, so one can also tell the date. Even the pole star revolves in a circle around the earth’s axis once every
:: according to Skywatching (A Nature Company Guide), David H. Levy, Time-Life Books, 1998, p. 87 ::
as the earth wobbles on its axis like a spinning top that is off center.

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, there is detailed knowledge of the movement of the constellations around the pole star.


 
←PrevNext→
[nābhi-cakra – navel plexus; jñāna – knowledge; vyūha – arrangement; kāya – body.]

नाभि-चक्रे संयमात् काय-व्यूह-ज्ञानम्॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the navel cakra, one attains knowledge of the physical structure or formation of the body.”

Like the fixed pole star, so the central navel plexus may be used as a fixed point of reference to contemplate the arrangement of the various systems in the body.

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, there is detailed knowledge of the various systems of the body.


 
←PrevNext→
[kaṇṭha-kūpa – cavity of the throat; nivṛtti – suppression; kṣudh – hunger; pipāsā – thirst.]

कण्ठ-कूपे संयमात् क्षुत्-पिपासा-निवृत्तिः॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the throat center (kaṇṭha-kūpa), one overcomes hunger and thirst.”

Hunger and thirst may be suppressed by this contemplation. The mind plays, or can play, a large role in what we otherwise consider to be bodily processes outside of our control.


 
←PrevNext→
[kūrma-nāḍī – bronchial passage[s]; sthairya – calmness.]

कूर्म-नाड्यां कूर्मः इव कूर्मः नाम उरस्-स्थ-नाडी तस्यां, तद्-सन्निधि-प्राणे संयमात् स्थैर्यं चित्त-स्थैर्यं, यथा प्राण-वीक्षणे॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the kūrma nāḍī (a specific turtle-likened energy channel), which is located in the chest, one attains steadiness of the mind. Such as from contemplation on just the presence of the prāṇa (prāṇa-vīkṣaṇa).”

This is related to control of the breath in that, just as slowing the breath calms the mind, watching the breath in the upper chest also calms the mind. This can be taken as the focus on the presence of the breath in prāṇa-vīkṣaṇa (Yoga Sūtra 2.51), the focal point for life’s energy, since this is where the essential life force of air is centered in the body. We may gain more energy from food than from air, but we can survive weeks without food, while only minutes without air.


 
←PrevNext→
[mūrdhan-jyotis – light in the head; darśana – vision; siddhas – accomplished beings.]

मूर्ध-ज्योतिषि मूर्धनि शिरसि ज्योतिः चित्त-चैतन्यं तस्मिन् दृशि, मूर्ध-नाडी-प्राणस्य वा प्रगत्यां संयमात् सिद्ध-दर्शनं तेषां सिद्धं ज्ञानं भवेत्, अथवा वि-देह-आदि-सिद्ध-पुरुष-स्वर्ग-स्थस्य दर्शनं भवेत् (YS.3.25 & 1.19)॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the light in the head (mūrdha-jyoti), or on the prāṇa in the mūrdha-nāḍī (the energy channel in the head), one attains the knowledge belonging to the perfected souls (siddhas), or the gains the vision of those who have transcended the body, such as the perfected beings and those in heavenly realms (YS.3.25 & 1.19).”

There are references to siddhas (accomplished beings) in the Purāṇa literature, and saṃyama on them is said to be a way of contacting them. If there is a description of any thing or any place, the human mind will find a way to reach it, and there will be those who claim to have the only or best way. The available teaching sources, present in these appropriately analysed scriptures and texts, are enough to point the way to yoga’s freedom. If these teaching sources were not available at certain times or places, perhaps the mind would still be able to connect to a source wiser than itself.

These siddhas are subtle beings that only the mind reaches, similar to someone you encounter in dream, who have a certain knowledge of these teachings. Being still within saṃsāra after their previous life, they themselves are not liberated. They may know about this knowledge, but would not as yet have fully assimilated it (cf. YS.4.32 & 34). A teacher can be one who is fluent in the teaching methodology of the scriptures, but has not yet assimilated the knowledge being taught. He or she may be a śrotriya (scriptural master), but not yet a brahma-niṣṭha (reality master). Or, if they have assimilated the knowledge, then their karma, yet to be exhausted, is still somehow maintaining their subtle body after the death of the physical body. In either case, the best of knowledge they can impart to those who contact them would be this same teaching – that perfect reality always exists everywhere, is right here now, and you are that.

You would know if there was another teaching that is more valid and reliable than this teaching. If you do know, you should take advantage of it.

A more traditional way of understanding what the sūtras mean by the siddhas and the afterlife is found in the Upaniṣads that talk about the path the subtle body takes when it leaves the physical body behind. Siddhas can be subtle beings who guide us along the path to higher or lower heavens. Or, one’s actions and meditations on the shining conscious being behind the right eye (see footnote for jyotiṣmatin in Yoga Sūtra 1.36) gain for you the highest heaven within the universe,
:: ‘अथ यत्र एतद् अस्मात् शरीराद् उत्क्रामति अथ एतैः एव रश्मिभिः ऊर्ध्वम् आक्रमते सः ओम् इति वा ह उद् वा मीयते सः यावत् क्षिप्येन् मनः तावद् आदित्यं गच्छति एतद् वै खलु लोक-द्वारं विदुषां प्रपदनं, निरोधः अ-विदुषाम्॥’ “Thus when this one [the common person] departs from this body, as well as the one who dies [uttering, i.e., meditating upon] ‘Om,’ then one goes upward through these rays alone [that come from the sun into the subtle pathways in the body called the nāḍīs reaching to the heart, and from them back to the sun, see Chāndogya Up. 8.6.2, i.e., there is no disconnect of energy between the center of oneself and the representative center of the universe]. After the mind fails [to remain tied to this body], then one goes to the sun, this indeed is the doorway to the [highest] realms [of heaven]. There is passage [through the sun] for the [sufficiently] wise, but there is obstruction [there] for the unwise.”
‘तद् एषः श्लोकः। शतं च एका च हृदयस्य नाड्यः तासां मूर्धानम् अभिनिःसृता एका। तया ऊर्ध्वम् आयन् अ-मृतत्वम् एव विष्वन् अन्याः उत्क्रमणे भवन्ति उत्क्रमणे भवन्ति’ “There is this verse – ‘One hundred and one nāḍīs of the heart. One of them goes out to the head. Going upward through that, one attains deathlessness. The other [nāḍīs] [going] in different directions are when going out [in those other directions, upon death].’” (Chāndogya Up. 8.6.5–6, and Kaṭha Up. 2.3.16).
‘सर्व-द्वाराणि संयम्य मनः हृदि निरुध्य च। मूर्ध्नि आधाय आत्मनः प्राणम् आस्थितः योग-धारणाम्॥’ “Closing all the gates [i.e., the sense organs] and [as a visualization] withdrawing the mind into the heart; placing one’s breath at [the top of] the head, and remaining [there] holding [the last breath] by [the strength of] yoga;”
‘ओम् इति एक-अक्षरं ब्रह्म व्याहरन् माम् अनुस्मरन्। यः प्रयाति त्यजन् देहं सः याति परमां गतिम्’ “chanting the single syllable ‘Om,’ which is brahman; remembering Me accordingly [through My teaching], [while] giving up the body – the one [yogin who is not yet fully wise] who departs [by movement as it were] – that one reaches the most exalted end [within saṃsāra, i.e., brahma-loka, the seventh heaven, where one may be taught brahma-vidyā and thus freed].” (Bh. Gītā 8.12–13) ::
, in that world there will be other likewise accomplished (siddha) beings in residence. Or, as an upāsana (meditation), in this life itself, one can gain the greatness (the siddhi) and
:: ‘यः एव असौ आदित्ये पुरुषः…अतिष्ठाः सर्वेषां भूतानां मूर्धा राजा इति वा अहम् एतम् उपास इति, सः यः एतम् एवम् उपास्ते अति-ष्ठाः सर्वेषां भूतानां मूर्धा राजा भवति’ “That person [brahman] which is in the sun…I contemplate this one as existing across all beings, as [their] head and resplendent. The one who contemplates this one in this way [also] exists across all beings, as their head and resplendent.” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 2.1.2) ::
of whatever, or whoever, siddha is meditated upon.


 
←PrevNext→
[ – and; prātibha – light; sarva – everything.]

प्रातिभात् (YS.3.25) बुद्धि-चैतन्ये संयमात् वा सर्वं परम-पुरुष-अर्थ-कृतम् इत्यर्थः॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the light, the consciousness of the intellect (buddhi-caitanya) (YS.3.25), all knowledge is attained, as it leads to the Ultimate Puruṣa.”

By intelligence, which is the mind lit in awareness, alone we come to know everything of our world. This fact can be lost in our interactions with the world. The mind often appears transparent and not a factor when we perceive the world, but it is only by the form our mind takes in perceiving and understanding the world that we can ever know anything. Whatever limitations or colorings the mind has, these limitations and colorings inform our knowledge of everything in our world. Contemplating this gives rise to renewed commitment to gaining more clarity of mind so that it does not unnecessarily limit and afflict one’s world of experience.

Alternatively, the sūtra can be taken as: Or from the light (prāti-bha) [of intelligence just before total absorption in samādhi] there is [knowledge of] everything.

The prefix, prāti- (= prati-), can mean pre- or before. As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, just before total absorption of understanding in samādhi that is enlightenment, there is a power of knowing everything – according to some in the Sāṅkhya-Yoga tradition.

However, this knowing everything is an expression in the Upaniṣad tradition for knowing everything to be known. One knows that everything is the reality that is oneself, so, in knowing oneself as such, one knows everything in essence. For example, when one knows the nature of clay, one knows the essential nature of all things made of clay. In the Upaniṣads the knowing everything by knowing reality itself is the enlightenment. Nothing more needs to be known for one to be totally free. There is even an entire Upaniṣad called Muṇḍaka that is devoted to answering this specific question, “Upon having known what
:: ‘शौनकः ह वै महा-शालः अङ्गिरसं विधिवत् उपसन्नः पप्रच्छ। कस्मिन् नु भगवः विज्ञाते सर्वम् इदं विज्ञातं भवति इति’ “Śaunaka, a great householder, appropriately approached Aṅgiras and asked, ‘Venerable sir, upon having known what all this is known?’” (Muṇḍaka Up. 1.1.3) ::
?” With this knowledge the knower comes to terms with all fear that is the result of giving absolute reality to what is other than oneself, to what appears to limit and afflict oneself.

The student can see here the major distinction between the freedom the Veda tradition teaches, the tradition Patanjali comes from, and the misinterpretation by those who see yoga contemplation as bringing about a fundamental change to oneself to become free and with superpowers.

Sāṅkhya-Yoga writers misinterpret what yoga freedom is. They think that the mind has to disappear for freedom to arise in samādhi. The knowing of everything, if it happens, can only be possible just prior to the mind disappearing in samādhi absorption in which there is no other thing known. It is then designated as a superpower that comes to the meditator just prior to this absorption. Total absorption is their goal; it is a lonely goal (kaivalya, freedom in isolation). But this is a misinterpretation of freedom. It is not even consistent with the third sūtra of Patañjali’s text – “(From yoga’s success) then the witness remains in its own nature.” If freedom was not already one’s nature, then remaining in one’s nature could not be freedom.

Freedom cannot be a state or stage arrived at in contemplation, preceded or not by a superpower of all-knowledge. If freedom were a result of contemplation, and not the very nature of the self, then, like every other result gained in the world, it would be limited in time and equal to its cost, and could just as well slip away in time and value. As with every experience, we soon enough get used to it and start demanding more and better and new. When has experience ever been anything else than that?


 
←PrevNext→
[hṛdaya – center; saṃvid – knowledge; citta – mind.]

हृदये बुद्धौ हृद्-आकाशे संयमात् चित्त-संवित् चित्त-स्व-रूप-ज्ञानम्॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the heart (hṛdaya), the intellect (buddhi), or the inner space of the heart (hṛd-ākāśa), one attains knowledge of the mind (citta-saṃvit), of the very center of the mind.”

When this tradition talks about the heart, it is talking about the mind, in particular the intellect (buddhi). There is no knowing that goes on in the physical heart, but it is in the heart that one can be said to feel the truth of wisdom.

Placing the mind or intellect in the heart is an imagery that has been used in the West too. The heart is the center of our body that remains active day and night. The heart is said to be the seat or wellspring of the mind. The heart stands for the center of one’s being, and that is realistically the mind, since one is essentially a cognitive being. Even now we still point to our heart when we talk about our deeply held convictions, and deeply held convictions are what constitute the intellect. Our language, even today, allows the use of the word ‘heart’ when we are indicating where we know or believe something. As was pointed out before, the mind is subtle and thus is not really something that can be categorized as having, or being limited to, a physical location. But as the center of one’s own mind, in any culture, the heart is as good as any place to point.

The heart is as vast as the mind. Within it can be seen the
:: ‘यावान् वै अयम् आकाशः तावान् एषः अन्तर्-हृदये आकाशः। उभे अस्मिन् द्यावा-पृथिवी अन्तः एव समाहिते॥’ “Indeed as vast as this space [in the cosmos] is this space inside the heart (antar-hṛdaye ākāśaḥ) [i.e., the mind]. In this [mind, the space in the heart] are contained [are contemplated] (samāhite) within both sky and earth,”
‘उभौ अग्निः च वायुः च सूर्या-चन्द्रमसौ उभौ विद्युत्-नक्षत्राणि। यद् च अस्य इह अस्ति यद् च न अस्ति सर्वं तद् अस्मिन् समाहितम्’ “…both fire and wind, both sun and moon, and lightening and stars. Whatever here one has and does not have [in this world], all that is contained [is contemplated] in this [mind, the space in the heart].” (Chāndogya Up. 8.1.3) ::
.


 
←PrevNext→
[bhoga – experience; arthatva – sake; para – other; a-viśeṣa – non-distinguishing; pratyaya – notion; sattva – mind; puruṣa – self; atyanta – completely; a-saṅkīrṇa – separate. saṃyama – contemplation; artha – sake; sva – the self; jñāna – knowledge; puruṣa – self.]

सत्त्व-पुरुषयोः चित्त-पुरुषोः अति-अन्त-अ-सङ्कीर्णयोः अ-शेष-भेदयोः धर्मतः (YS.2.5) प्रत्यय-अ-विशेषः अ-विवेक-प्रत्ययः भोगः पर-अर्थत्वात् यस्मात् अन्-आत्म-अर्थः, स्व-अर्थ-संयमात् आत्म-अवस्थान-अर्थे संयमात् तु पुरुष-ज्ञानं स्व-परम-पुरुष-ज्ञानम्॥ –
“The intellect (sattva) and the puruṣa (self), though entirely distinct in their nature, appear as undifferentiated due to ignorance (a-vidyā), leading to misidentification (a-viveka-pratyaya), which results in worldly experience (bhoga). This happens because the intellect functions for another (para-arthatva), not for itself. However, through saṃyama on the nature of the self (sva-artha-saṃyama) for the purpose of abiding in one’s true self (ātma-avasthāna), one attains knowledge of the puruṣa, the ultimate self.”

Objects by their nature are limited, and the self by its nature is unlimited. We seek experience because of our binding desire for objects as unending sources of satisfaction. Unending satisfaction is the nature of only the self. Mutual imposing their natures is thinking the objects are limitless and the source of satisfaction, whereas oneself is limited and not satisfied. When this mutual imposing of natures of oneself and the objects is there in the confused mind, and oneself is thus thought to be unacceptable, then there is a drive for the sake of these objects of experience. This yoga is for turning away from this delusion and seeking the real, lasting satisfaction in the self.

Sattva (pure-energy) is the guṇa that constitutes the essential nature of the mind. The other two guṇas, rajas (agitation) and tamas (darkness), are considered impurities of the mind. These two guṇas allow the mind to experience all objects, since every object is a composite of the three guṇas. If these two guṇas are predominant in the mind, they are said to inhibit the ability of the mind to contemplate their reality as dependent on the self that is
:: ‘तत्र सत्त्वं निर्-मलत्वात् प्रकाशकम् अन्-आमयम्। सुख-सङ्गेन बध्नाति ज्ञान-सङ्गेन च अन्-अघ॥‘ “Among these [three guṇas], sattva – since it is free from impurity – is illuminating and free from affliction – [yet] binds by [one’s] attachment to pleasure and by [one’s] attachment to knowing [i.e., attachment/identity is the problem, not the pleasure or knowledge], O Arjuna.”
‘रजः राग-आत्मकं विद्धि तृष्ण-आसङ्ग-समुद्भवम्। तद् निबध्नाति कौन्तेय कर्म-सङ्गेन देहिनम्॥’ “Know rajas, which is of the nature of attraction [i.e., it is an impurity to the natural clarity of the sattva mind – projecting virtues on things they don’t have], as born of [i.e., increased by] longing and attachment. O Arjuna, it binds the embodied one by attachment to activity.”
‘तमः तु अ-ज्ञान-जं विद्धि मोहनं सर्व-देहिनाम्। प्रमाद-आलस्य-निद्राभिः तद् निबध्नाति भारत’ “Whereas, know tamas – for all those identified with their body – as delusion [i.e., as the lack of discerning the difference between oneself and objects of desire] born of [i.e., perpetuated by] ignorance. It binds by carelessness, laziness, and sleepiness, O Arjuna.” (Bh. Gītā 14.6–8).”
‘न अन्यं गुणेभ्यः कर्तारं यदा द्रष्टा अनुपश्यति। गुणेभ्यः च परं वेत्ति मद्-भावं सः अधिगच्छति’ “When the seer sees [according to the teaching] that there is not a doer other than the guṇas and knows [the self] as beyond the guṇas, [then] that one attains My nature [called mokṣa (freedom)].” (Bh. Gītā 14.19) ::
. When rajas and tamas are in abeyance, when they have only their appropriate proportion, the sattva predominant mind – in contemplation of the self, in removing its wrong notions of the self – becomes like a clear crystal unclouded by ignorance and doubt.

The sattva mind in assimilated knowledge is said to have the form, so to speak, of the self, of brahman (nondual reality), called a-khaṇḍa-ākāra-vṛtti – the knowledge that limitations have
:: ‘मनसः वृत्ति-शून्यस्य (भेद-वृत्ति-रहितस्य अ-खण्ड-आकारतया) ब्रह्म-आकारतया स्थितिः’ “The status of the mind whose thoughts are unreal (śūnya) by having the form of brahman.” (Pātañjala-Yoga-Sūtrāṇi-Bhoja-Sadāśiva-Vṛtti 3.3) ::
from the self, that there is only one undivided reality. In terms of contemplation, this is said to be the dawn of self-knowledge, of knowledge that is true to the nature of the self. The tradition clearly says, though, that it is the words of the teaching from a
:: ‘तद्-विज्ञान-अर्थं सः गुरुम् एव अभिगच्छेत् समित्-पाणिः श्रोत्रियं ब्रह्म-निष्ठम्’ “For assimilated knowledge of that [reality] one must with ritual fuel in hand [as a sign of dutifulness] approach only a teacher (guru) who is learned in the scripture (śrotriya) and established in that reality (brahma-niṣṭha).” (Muṇḍaka Up. 1.2.12).”
‘अन्-अन्य-प्रोक्ते गतिः अत्र न अस्ति अणीयान् हि अ-तर्क्यम् अणु-प्रमाणात्’ “When taught by one who is [established] in no other (an-anya) [reality], there is no going (gati) [astray] in regard to it. Because, it is subtler (aṇīyas) than the subtle (aṇu) and unapproachable by mere logic (a-tarkya).” (Kaṭha Up. 1.2.8) ::
to the adept student that afford the possibility of realizing that knowledge. The practice of contemplation supports and helps the assimilation of that knowledge; it does
:: ‘वेद अहम् एतं पुरुषं महान्तम् आदित्य-वर्णं तमसः परस्तात्। तम् एव विदित्वा अति-मृत्युम् एति न अन्यः पन्थाः विद्यते अयनाय’ “I know this fullness (puruṣa) that is limitless (mahat), clear and bright as the sun (āditya-varṇa), and beyond the darkness [of ignorance]. By knowledge of that alone (tam eva viditvā) one goes beyond death. There is no other way of getting [there].” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 3.8) ::
.

Ignorance with regard to the nature of the self, once burned away in the light of truth, cannot stage a comeback. Just as one clearly and doubtlessly knows one exists, and this is not forgotten, similarly when one clearly and doubtlessly knows one exists free of limitations, this cannot be forgotten. One is no longer deluded by the appearance of limitations, thinking them to be real, to be as real as me. This contemplation is an appreciation of myself as unlimited reality, free of any mixing up with that which is not self. Compare this sūtra with Yoga Sūtras 2.17, 2.18, 2.20, and 2.21.

The only way one can know objects as other is through the duality of taking them as other. When contemplating simply oneself, there can only be non-duality, since one’s self is but the reality of everything.


 
←PrevNext→
[tataḥ – from that; jāyante – arise;
See also the alternative meaning of prātibha in Yoga Sūtra 3.33 ::
– light
; vārttās – activities; śrāvaṇa – hearing; vedanā – sensation; ādarśa – sight; āsvāda – taste.]

ततः स्व-अर्थ-संयमात् प्रातिभ-श्रावण-वेदना-आदर्श-आस्वाद-वार्त्ताः बुद्धि-शक्तिः श्रवणस्य स्पर्शनस्य दर्शनस्य रसनस्य घ्राणस्य इन्द्रिय-शक्तयः च, अथवा वार्त्तः वृत्ति-इत्यर्थे ततः चतुर्-इन्द्रिय-वृत्ति-शक्तयः इत्यर्थः जायन्ते॥ –
“From saṃyama on the self (sva-artha-saṃyama), arises the light (prātibha), the power of the intellect, along with heightened sensory abilities, such as hearing (śravaṇa), touch (vedanā), vision (ādarśa), taste (āsvāda), and smell (vārttā). These are the enhanced cognitive abilities of the intellect (buddhi-śakti) related to the five senses of hearing, touch, sight, taste, and smell. Alternatively, vārtta refers to the act of perception itself through each of the preceding four sensory faculties.”

The word vārttā (vārtā in some texts) is from the Sanskrit verbal root vṛt (to happen or take place) and generally means an occupation. It is rendered here as the activities of the four senses. Some take the word to mean smell, because of the word being limited sometimes to agricultural occupation. We can imagine the smell of the rich earth, the element connected with smell, in that occupation. Then the sūtra would read, “…the light [of intelligence], hearing, touch, sight, taste, and smell.”

This sūtra indicates that meditation, or certain forms of meditations, can enhance the senses. For whatever entertainment or occupational value that would be, it can be considered a superpower.


 
←PrevNext→
[siddhis – superpowers; vyutthāna – active mind; te – these; upasargas – impediments [or secondary]; samādhi – contemplation.]

ते प्रातिभ-आदि-शक्ति-रूपाः पुरुष-ज्ञान-अर्थ-समाधौ उपसर्गाः प्रतिबन्धकाः यदि भोगार्थाः एव, अथवा अधिकाः एव प्रतिबन्ध-रहिताः (YS.1.12 & 15), भोग-अर्थे व्युत्थाने अ-निरोध-चित्ते तु प्रयोजनवत्यः सिद्धयः॥ –
“These powers, such as an enhanced light of intelligence (prātibha) and others, in the form of abilities, as ‘upasargas’, can either be obstacles (pratibandhakas) in the pursuit of the purpose of the self (puruṣa-jñāna) when they are used for worldly enjoyment (bhoga) instead, or they can be aids (adhīkas) free from obstruction when they are directed towards higher goals (YS.1.12 & 15). When the mind is agitated and undisciplined in pursuit of worldly pleasure, the powers become tools for more helpful siddhis (accomplishments).”

Superpowers or imagined superpowers are not the nature of limitless reality that is the goal of samādhi. They are possible side-effects along the way. If they are mistaken as the main goal, they become upasargas (impediments) waiting along the way, from which one may not get back on the path. Final wisdom is relatively uncommon (see Bhagavad Gītā 7.3); seeking can be a drawn out process. There are those who settle for the limited attainments of powers and perhaps the charisma to attract followers. There is no shortage of followers. This sūtra encourages the student to maintain focus on the goal and the worthy guides to that goal.

These superpowers in and of themselves are not impediments. However, they can become impediments when they invoke in the seeker attitudes not helpful to success in yoga. Any attention the student gives to the superpowers should not be counter to vairāgya (non-attachment, YS.1.12 & 15). The superpowers can only become impediments when the side-effects become ends in themselves.

The pronoun te (these) in this sūtra refers specifically to the siddhis in sūtra 3.36. These are not intrinsically different, though, from all the other siddhis in the preceding and following sūtras, in regards to being possible impediments. All of them are attractive side-effects (gauṇa-phalas). They are neither the accomplishments of skill in contemplation (saṃyama), the gaining of a cosmic perspective in the mind, nor the attainment of greater clarity of mind that was pointed out in the first chapter as the immediate goal of contemplation. Nor are they the final attainment of samādhi culminating in assimilated knowledge (prajñā). So they are not part of the direct path to assimilated knowledge. They are like the other
:: ‘सः यः एवं वेद प्रतितिष्ठति। अन्नवान् अन्न-अदः भवति। महान् भवति। प्रजया पशुभिः ब्रह्म-वर्चसेन। महान् कीर्त्या’ “One who knows [through contemplation] thusly becomes established [in the ultimate being within (parame vyoman)]. That one possesses food and is the eater of food, and is bountiful in progeny, wealth, spiritual radiance, and fame.” (Taittirīya Up. 3.6.1) ::
mentioned here and there in the scriptures, such as gaining abundance or fame. By the very same reasoning that the siddhis in sūtra 3.36 can be impediments, all the superpower siddhis mentioned in this chapter are indicated by this sūtra here as capable of being impediments.

However, the siddhis in sūtra 3.36 were possible from the contemplation in sūtra 3.35. That contemplation has a quite distinct topic. The contemplation in sūtra 3.35 was on the ultimate topic, the puruṣa free of misidentification with the mind or other objects. This contemplation would be the contemplation detailed in the first chapter of these sūtras. Any side-effect there would be considered by yogins possessing sufficient vairāgya (non-attachment) far short of his or her goal.

Moreover, the other contemplations in this section are on various objects within the universe. Those contemplations may even be suggested for persons interested in other disciplines besides yoga. Students of astronomy, astrology, healing, martial arts, and other disciplines may find them useful. These superpowers, even in limited measure, may be their ultimate goal. They would not be impediments for such seekers. Since sūtras can have more than one meaning or application, this can be an additional and acceptable interpretation of this sūtra, and thus of this section of sūtras.

Perhaps another way to understand the superpowers, while avoiding here the consideration of them being impediments, is by taking the word upasarga as meaning additional or secondary, opposed to pradhāna (primary). The simple, alternative meaning of the sūtra would be, “Though being superpowers, upon arising out of contemplation these are secondary to final progress in samādhi.”


 
←PrevNext→
[śaithilya – loosening; kāraṇa – cause; bandha – bondage; ca – and; saṃvedana – fully understanding; pracāra – travel; citta – mind; āveśa – entering; para-śarīra – another body.]

बन्ध-कारण-शैथिल्यात् इदम्-शरीर-बन्ध-कारण-मोचनात् अभिनिवेश-क्लेश-मोचनात् च प्राचुर्येण प्रचार-संवेदनात् उदान-आदि-जीव-यात्रा-ज्ञानात् च चित्तस्य पुनर्-जन्मनि ‘योगिनाम् एव कुले’ (BhG.6.42) पर-शरीर-आवेशः॥ –
“By the loosening of the causes of bondage, the release from the affliction of attachment (abhiniveśa) to this body, and through knowledge of the natural travel of the mind, one attains knowledge of the journey of the prāṇa (life force), such as udāna (the upward and ejecting prāṇa). This leads to the realization of the rebirth of the mind in another body, such as ‘in the family of yogīs.’ (BhG.6.42)”

Here, the nature of the subtle mind as not being an effect of the gross brain must be assumed. Nor does the mind die when the body dies. This allows the mind to not only go out during perception through senses, but also leave the body upon the body’s death.

This sūtra also brings up questions about the propriety of a yogin ending this life to continue the pursuit in a young, healthy body.

Belief in reincarnation can be just as sure in the believer’s mind as a belief in going to a heaven. Belief in karma that continues past this life can be just as sure as the belief that one’s life résumé and personality tendencies continue up to and into a heaven, or doesn’t. Everyone, no matter what their beliefs, eventually arrive at the threshold of death. The wise in this tradition chose to contemplate this topic to their most honest satisfaction. Their decision should be understood within the context of their beliefs.

At the advent of death, though the mind might not let go easily, the body may naturally lose appetite for life sustaining food and drink. The mind may also wish to let go as death nears. These are common experiences. Though we understand and accept that the body naturally can and eventually must shut down, we often do not understand or accept another person choosing death. We have recently gained a greater ability to extend the death process through medical discoveries. This has benefits in certain circumstances, but also prolongs an often agonizing event process for the individual and for others in relationship with the person.

This sūtra provides some relief, acknowledging that in the karma model everyone’s spiritual progress continues to the
:: ‘पार्थ न एव इह न अमुत्र विनाशः तस्य विद्यते। न हि कल्याण-कृत् कश्चिद् दुर्-गतिं तात गच्छति॥’ “O Arjuna, neither here itself [due to the positive attitude of śraddhā (trust in the teaching)] nor hereafter [according to karma] is there loss for that one. Because, O Dear One, [to the extent] anyone performs adaptive action [in keeping with dharma], [to that extent] that one does not get a bad lot.”
‘प्राप्य पुण्य-कृतां लोकान् उषित्वा शाश्वतीः समाः। शुचीनां श्रीमतां गेहे योग-भ्रष्टः अभिजायते॥’ “The one who has ‘fallen’ from this yoga gains the [same] worlds [i.e., heavens] of those who do adaptive actions, lives there for countless years, [then] is [re-] born in the home of a virtuous [i.e., following dharma] and fortunate [family].”
‘अथवा योगिनाम् एव कुले भवति धीमताम्। एतद् हि दुर्-लभतरं लोके जन्म यद् ईदृशम्॥’ “Or [even better] that one is born in the family of wise yogins. Such a birth as this is indeed more difficult to attain in this world.”
‘तत्र तं बुद्धि-संयोगं लभते पौर्व-देहिकम्। यतते च ततः भूयः संसिद्धौ कुरु-नन्दन॥’ “There, one gains connection with [i.e., quickly matures to] an intellect [like the one] that existed while in the previous body and [then] strives further than that, towards success [i.e., complete freedom], O Arjuna.”
‘पूर्व-अभ्यासेन तेन एव ह्रियते हि अ-वशः अपि सः। जिज्ञासुः अपि योगस्य शब्द-ब्रह्म अतिवर्तते’ “By that previous [life’s] practice [i.e., its karma-phala (the results of its karma)] alone, even without will, one is indeed swept along. Just desiring to know about [this] [jñāna-] yoga [one quickly] goes beyond the Veda text [i.e., its bulky heaven-going section].” (Bh. Gītā 6.40–44) ::
. Though the karma model promotes a-hiṃsā (non-injury or offence) towards any body as a preeminent value, it allows the knowledge and decision of the individual as a positive or negative factor within this value.

If one could separate from the physical body without injuring it (see the next sūtra) simply by the power of will to choose to separate from the physical body, then no hiṃsā would incur. It is the nature of the body to disintegrate and that will naturally continue and accelerate when the mind and the rest of the subtle body are not there to provide and direct the body’s life extending functions.

In the legends and epics of India there are stories of characters leaving their own body to inhabit another body. This sūtra could be indicating how this may be accomplished. As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, one may gain, for whatever benefit it may be, the ability to leave this body, and even, according to the Purāṇa stories, enter into another person’s body.


 
←PrevNext→
[jaya – mastering; udāna – upward energy; a-saṅga – not getting stuck; jala – water; paṅka – mud; kaṇṭakas – thorns; ādi – etcetera; ca – and; utkrānti – ascending.]

उदान-जयात् शरीर-त्याग-आदि-उदान-नाम-प्राण-ऊर्ध्व-शक्ति-वशी-करणात् जल-पङ्क-कण्टक-आदिषु अ-सङ्गः अ-निमग्नः मरण-काले उत्क्रान्तिः च॥ –
“By the mastery over udāna (the upward-moving prāṇa), one can achieve the ability to leave the body, which is associated with the upward force of prāṇa. By gaining control over udāna, one remains unattached and unstuck by water, mud, thorns, and similar obstacles. At the time of death, the soul departs without being stuck.”

Udāna is one of the five subtle life-force energies (prāṇas). It accounts for any rising up power within the body. Certainly it takes power to stay afloat in water and to pull oneself out of mud. It takes dexterous power to tiptoe over thorny ground. Upon death’s door, it also takes strength to hang on longer or let go of the body, at one’s choosing.

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, one may become light and can walk on water and over mud, and lightly walk over thorns without getting stuck. Exit from the body, death, is a power one can wield at any time. The latter is connected with the preceding sūtra, since udāna is the force that also ejects the subtle body, including the mind, out of the then lifeless physical body.


 
←PrevNext→
[jaya – from mastering; samāna – uniting energy; jvalana – glowing.]

समान-जयात् उदर-परिपाक-आदि-समान-नाम-प्राणस्य समी-करण-शक्तेः वशी-करणात् ज्वलनं बल-आदि-तेजः॥ –
“By the mastery over the prāṇa called samāna, which governs the digestive processes and other similar functions, one gains control over the force of assimilation. This results in the ability to generate heat, strength, and other forms of energy.”

Digestion, another of the five prāṇas, is the body’s subtle assimilation of the energy from food, water, and air. It provides strength to the body. So this glow is the glow of good health and strength, including the ability to survive cold temperatures when needed. This glow is also the brilliance of the senses and mind because of the assimilation of the
:: ‘एषः हि एतद् हुतम् अन्नं समं नयति तस्माद् एताः सप्त-अर्चिषः भवन्ति’ “Since this [samāna] distributes equally the food offered [into the fire of prāṇa], from that these seven flames [of prāṇa] [issue out] [through the mouth and the two eyes, ears, and nostrils].” (Praśna Up. 3.5) ::
. This brilliance may increase through a broad based knowledge and self-confidence, called brahma-varcasa (brilliance in scriptural knowledge).

Through a broader knowledge of the various topics in the scriptures one can unfold these sūtras without having to leap to mystical or nearly impossible superpowers. This scriptural background should be there through svādhyāya (study, YS.2.1).

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, one’s aura brightens, illuminates a room, or dries the clothes on one’s back in winter.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃyama – contemplation; saṃbandha – connection; śrotra – sense of hearing; ākāśa – element space; divya – divine; śrotra – hearing.]

श्रोत्र-आकाशयोः श्रवण-आकाशयोः संबन्ध-संयमात् कार्य-कारण-व्यष्टि-समष्टि-संबन्धे संयमात् दिव्यं श्रोत्रं श्रुति-व्यष्टि-समष्टि-शासन-श्रवणम्॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the cause/effect and the individual/universal connections between the sense of hearing and the element space, one gains the divine hearing (divya-śrotra), the listening to the divine teaching on the individual and the universal from the authoritative scriptures.”

Vedānta accepts one of the traditional Upaniṣad and Sāṅkhya explanations of the process of creation via the elements that make up the dependent universe. We use that explanation to unfold the Yoga Sūtras. Within that explanation, space is the first of the five elements: space (ākāśa), air (vāyu), fire (agni), water (āpaḥ), and earth (pṛthivī). From the subtle element space come the other four subtle elements, each successively less subtle than the other. Subtle, here, means incapable of being an object of the five sense organs, as well as being more innermost and/or more pervasive.
:: ‘तस्माद् वै एतस्माद् आत्मनः आकाशः संभूतः। आकाशाद् वायुः। वायोः अग्निः। अग्नेः आपः। अद्भ्यः पृथिवी’ “From that [brahman] indeed, which is this self (ātman), exists space. From space [exists] air, from air fire, from fire water, from water earth.” (Taittirīya Up. 2.1.1) ::
comes air, from air comes fire, from fire comes water, and from water comes earth. Out of these subtle elements is the
:: ‘सद् एव सोम्य इदम् अग्रे आसीद् एकम् एव अ-द्वितीयम्’ “In the beginning [of this manifestation cycle], my dear, [all] this was existence (sat) alone, one indeed without a second.”
‘…तद् ऐक्षत बहु स्यां प्रजायेय इति तत् तेजः असृजत, तत् तेजः ऐक्षत बहु स्यां प्रजायेय इति तद् अपः असृजत। तस्माद् यत्र क्वच शोचति स्वेदते वा पुरुषः तेजसः एव तद् अधि आपः जायन्ते॥’ “…That [existence as the Lord] envisioned [as it was before and in keeping with that], ‘May I be many, may I be born [as though many].’ That [existence] gave rise to Fire. That Fire envisioned, ‘May I be many, may I be born [as though many].’ That [Fire] gave rise to Water. Therefore, whenever a person is hot he perspires. So water is produced indeed from heat.”
‘ताः आपः ऐक्षन्त बह्व्यः स्याम प्रजायेमहि इति ताः अन्नम् असृजन्त, तस्माद् यत्र क्व च वर्षति तद् एव भूयिष्ठम् अन्नं भवति अद्भ्यः एव तद् अधि अन्न-अद्यं जायते’ “That Water envisioned, ‘May I be many, may I be born [as though many].’ That [Water] gave rise to Food, i.e., Earth. Therefore, whenever it rains, then abundant food arises. So eatable food is produced from water.” (Chāndogya Up. 6.2.1 & 3–4).”
‘पृथिव्याः ओषधयः। ओषधीभ्यः अन्नम्। अन्नात् पुरुषः। सः वै एषः पुरुषः अन्न-रसमयः’ “From the earth are plants. From plants is food. From food is the person. This very person is made from the essence of food.” (Taittirīya Up. 2.1.1).
‘एतावद् वै इदं सर्वम् अन्नं च एव अन्नादः च’ “All this [universe] is indeed this much – food and the eater of food.” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 1.4.6) ::
. Each succeeding subtle element includes the natures of the previous.

These elements seem to be just a selection of five common features we see in the world, but there is a significant sophistication behind these terms, when the tradition expounds on them as subtle elements. They are not actually the five features we experience in the world. Here, they are the subtle, hidden basics behind all features we experience in the world.

Subtle space is defined as what gives accommodation (avakāśayati iti ākāśa). Subtle space thus means dimension. Subtle air means movement (vāti gacchati iti vāyuḥ). Subtle fire means heat and light (dahati iti dahanam agniḥ). Subtle water means liquidity (āvṛnoti iti vāriḥ). Subtle earth means solidity and mass (sambhavati iti bhūḥ).

Each subtle element allows the following element to arise. Dimension allows the possibility of movement and form (rūpa), including thought forms. Dimension and movement via vibration allow heat/light, the start of visible form. Dimension, movement, and heat/light allow liquidity, for example, the possibility of magma. Dimension, movement, heat/light, liquidity via cooling allows solidity/mass, for example, the possibility of land formation.

These subtle elements, also called the tan-mātras (literally, merely that) the basic elements, not mixed together with any of the other elements, are not the gross elements we interact with. The mixing of these subtle elements are their grossification – each one a combination of the other four with itself being the predominant element. This five-folding of the five elements is an extrapolation from the three-folding of the last three (visible) elements mentioned in scripture as just a
:: ‘सा इयं देवता ऐक्षत हन्त अहम् इमाः तिस्रः देवताः अनेन जीवेन आत्मना अनुप्रविश्य नाम-रूपें व्याकरवाणि इति॥’ “This very Lord thought, ‘Well, may I enter into these three deities [i.e., Fire, Water, and Food/Earth] through this [individual] living ātman [as in the previous cycle] and [through the enlivened mind therein] differentiate [all things] into name and form.’“
‘तासां त्रि-वृतं त्रि-वृतम् एक-एकां करवाणि इति सा इयं देवता इमाः तिस्रः देवताः अनेन एव जीवेन आत्मना अनुप्रविश्य नाम-रूपे व्याकरोत्॥’ “This very Lord (thought), ‘Of these [three deities], may I make each one threefold. May I enter into these three deities through this [individual] living ātman and [through the enlivened mind therein] differentiate [all things] into name and form.’” (Chāndogya Up. 6.3.2–3)
‘…यद् अग्ने रोहितं रूपं तेजसः तद् रूपं यद् शुक्लं तद् अपां, यत् कृष्णं तद् अन्नस्य – अपागाद् अग्नेः अग्नित्वं’ “In [triplicated, i.e., material/visible] fire, what is the red color/form is the color/form of [undifferentiated] Fire, what is the white color/form [in the fire] is that of Water, and what is the black color/form [in the fire] is that of Food/Earth – [thus] [a single] form/nature of [visible] fire has gone away from [what we call] fire [that is really tri-formed] [i.e., all that we give a name to is in fact a semblance consisting of something more subtle, and that more subtle is more real as it is more permanent].”
‘वाचा-आरम्भणं विकारः नामधेयं त्रीणि रूपाणि इति एव सत्यम्’ “[All] modification [i.e., form (rūpa)] is originating from speech (vācā-ārambhaṇa), mere name alone (nāmadheya). The three forms [of undifferentiated Fire, Water, and Food/Earth, not available to the senses] alone are [relatively] real (satya) [as even their reality is but existence (sat) itself, which has no beginning, no modification, and no end].” (Chāndogya Up. 6.4.1) ::
employed by living beings to distinguish things. For example, the gross space we interact with is a combination of the subtle elements space, air, fire, water, and earth, with space being the predominant. That is, gross space we move through is a combination of mostly dimension, with movement, heat/light, fluidity, and solidity/mass. Because of its movement aspect, the expanding and bending of space can be demonstrated by experiments. In this way, we may say a particular space is breezy, hot, humid, or polluted. It is from the distinguishing names of these gross elements that their more sophisticated subtle elements get their names: space, wind, and so on.

This is our model. The model could be the string theory (multiple dimensions of space and spins of energy making up the characteristics of everything) or the periodic table of the elements from the airy light to the most massive. But those mappings have no benefit in understanding the self-based freedom that this teaching is alone concerned with. Our model’s purpose is simply to comprehend in five components the entirety of the universe, so everything within the universe can be later summarily dismissed as not fully satisfying our basic quest for ultimate freedom.

This is an ancient, sophisticated presentation of the entire universe into five components because we happen to have five sense organs. The subtle elements of the macrocosm are matched to the five subtle sense organs with which the human body is equipped. So, wherever you go, whatever you perceive will be in keeping with this model. The addition of better means of gathering data, such as the telescope, microscope or electrocardiograph, is simply useful extension of the five senses. Eventually, they and their data also have to be perceived through the five senses. This five-fold elemental model, and its purpose within this teaching, will thus never become outdated.

Space/dimension is connected to the sense of hearing, air/movement to the sense of touch, fire/heat/light to the sense of sight, water/liquidity to the sense of taste, and earth to the sense of smell. If we had six sense organs, then the tradition would have come up with six subtle and gross elements. If someone is born with less than the five senses, their entire universe would only consist of a mix of those elements sensed.

An alternative presentation, which we have already seen, is the later, three-guṇa model, perhaps derived from the three-elemental presentation in the scripture of fire-water-earth.
:: Both of these models originate from the Upaniṣad literature. The Sāṅkhya and Sāṅkhya-Yoga philosophies would like to say they first thought of these explanations. They try to garner the perennial scriptural authority of the sage Kapila, who is connected with the guṇa model and who preceded the dates of the existent writings of these two philosophies ::
for comprehending everything in the universe without the sophisticated scientific tools and data we have now. Sitting in a cave in the Himalayas or in an apartment in New York City the entire universe through these elements can be contemplated.

Our model sees the universe as proceeding from three or five and then assuming or condensing into the forms that are available to the five senses. Again, the three or five are themselves said to manifest within the one reality that alone exists. The universe is but the names applied to the forms appearing along the continuum of the evolution of the universe.

No future science could ever improve or dismiss this world view. This knowledge of the one reality that is everything and is oneself is more complete than any possible Theory of Everything from science. The sciences can, without certitude, speculate what is the building block of everything perceived, but lack a method to resolve with certitude both the perceived and the perceiver into one absolute reality – beyond time and space, beyond mind. One cannot objectively stand outside this singular reality-consciousness to describe it or experiment with it.

The subtle sense of hearing in the body is directly connected to the subtle element space, dimension. In the dark of night or closed eye meditation, hearing connects us to the dimensions of the universe. By reflecting on the connection of subtle, limitless space and the subtle sense of hearing, one can start to appreciate the participation of one’s body-sense-mind complex in the limitless. Space is not altogether limitless, since it is bound up with time. And space itself is said to be re-created along with each manifestation cycle of the universe from the one, limitless reality called brahman, the Lord. But within this embodiment, hearing directly connects us to the relative limitless within this transactional world we live in.

Indeed, hearing also connects us to this oral teaching of the limitless reality of oneself, and this universe of space and time. Nothing is apart from this space, including the subtle realms of heaven. So one is directly connected, even here and now, to the entire universe including the divine heavens – everything one has heard of.

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, one’s hearing gains access to the whole, to all that is divine.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃyama – contemplation; saṃbandha – connection; kāya – body; ākāśa – space; ca – and; samāpatti – contemplation; laghu-tūla – light cotton; gamana – movement; ākāśa – space.]

काय-आकाशयोः देह-आकाशयोः संबन्ध-संयमात् कारणमय-कार्यस्य कारणस्य च व्यष्टेः समष्टेः च संबन्धे संयमात् लघु-तूल-समापत्तेः तूल-पिण्ड-आदि-लघु-पद-अर्थ-समापत्तिः तया अपि आकाश-गमनम् आकाशे हि आकाशतया च सर्व-गमनम्, अ-प्रतिबद्ध-चित्तस्य हृद्-आकाशे च॥ –
“Through saṃyama upon the connection between the body’s space and cosmic space, on their causal relationship and their individual and universal forms, and upon light cotton, one attains the ability to become light, such as the lightness of a cotton ball or other light objects. With this, one also gains the ability to move through space, as space within space, and as the unbounded space in the heart.”

Remember from the preceding sūtra’s commentary that the element air, meaning movement, exists from space, from dimension.

The body, which we take as solid, is, in fact, mostly space. The subatomic particles of matter are many, but far between. Even these particles of matter are, at their basis, mass-less packets of vibrating energy in multiple dimensions of space. Even these mass-less packets of energy are more intelligence, more conception in our mind and in our mathematics more abstractions, than something actually there.

This body is standing on earth, but the earth is spinning around on its axis. The earth is also flying around the sun. The sun is flying around in its star cluster. This star cluster is flying around in its galaxy. This galaxy is flying around in its galaxy cluster. This galaxy cluster is flying outward along with the expanding space of the universe. There is no standing still in space; it is mithyā – only apparently-real, valid only from a limited perspective and falsifiable when viewed in a broader and more factual context.

Our experiences in life are appearances gained through our senses and mind. This is the nature of life. It is not that someone can peek behind the curtain, behind the appearances, to see absolute facts free from the limited perspective of the senses and mind. Since appearances are the nature of all things, then it is not really an illusion. An ordinary illusion, such as pulling a rabbit out of an empty hat, can be corrected by figuring the trick. Here in our experiences, even figuring the trick, the appearances constantly continue to be believed. Seeing is believing, but if believed absolutely then the belief – not the appearance – is dismissible and can be characterized as a grand, though natural, illusion. The entirety of our experiences is not an illusion, but our believing in their absolute validity does qualify. Appreciating this helps free oneself from being caught up and identified with our natural belief system as a categorical, static reality in and of itself.

What alone is not an illusion is the limitless reality that is oneself. What can be an illusion in regard to the self are only our wrong notions of our self. Once those notions get exposed to knowledge, they dismiss themselves and there is only you, the undeniable reality. This reality was before, during, and will be after every big bang of the universe that was, is, or ever will be. It is unmoving and unchanging, since it is outside of time and space. Time and space are totally within it, without modifying or affecting it. Though unmoving, this reality is still called
:: ‘ते सर्व-गं सर्वतः प्राप्य धीराः युक्त-आत्मानः (=युक्त-चेतसः) सर्वम् एव आविशन्ति’ “Those wise [sages], whose minds are merged [in that reality] [and thus] having attained the all-pervading (sarva-ga) in every way, they enter [i.e., become] everything indeed [as the self of all].” (Muṇḍaka Up. 3.2.5) ::
, literally, the all-moving, as it includes all that moves within it.

Short of the freedom called kaivalya, even objectively resolving in understanding this gross body down to its subtlest elemental source, to ākāśa (space), according to the preceding sūtra’s understanding of subtle space, and via our scientific understanding to be 99.999…% multi-dimensional space, one is, in a relatively real sense, the all-pervasive space within this universe.

This whole universe of names and forms before you is within your mind, within the space in the heart, that wields these names and forms. Within that space of your personal universe of experience you freely move, in the day and night.

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, one can fly, can move, unaided through space.


 
←PrevNext→
[vṛtti – thought; bahir – externally; a-kalpita – without error; mahā-vi-deha – great disembodiment. tataḥ – from that; āvaraṇa – covering; prakāśa – light; kṣaya – removed.]

बहिस् पराक्-इन्द्रिय-द्वारेण अ-कल्पिता आत्म-परिच्छेद-विकल्पना-रहिता बुद्धि-वृत्तिः महा-वि-देहा अत्यन्त-देह-विमुक्ता, ततः प्रकाश-आवरण-क्षयः विद्या-प्रतिबन्द-क्षयः॥ –
“Thought – by way of the outgoing senses – without the erroneous conception of the self being limited, is the great viyoga (disassociation from the body) and the complete freedom from the body are attained. From this, the covering of light is removed, and the bondage to one’s knowledge is also eliminated.”

Externally, here, means pertaining to beyond just this limited individual, to the entire phenomenal universe including this mind and body – in other words, with eyes wide open, not just in closed-eye meditation. A-kalpita means a-vikalpita, having a nature that is without vikalpa, without error. Knowledge of the external that is a-kalpita is then knowledge that is without one’s own erroneous imaginations (kalpas). It is seeing the universe objectively as it is, as has been unfolded in the scripture and indicated in these pages through these helpful five-element, three-guṇas, and waking-dream-sleep state categorizations, and other teachings that properly connect and resolve the individual into the total, into the Lord, in keeping with this teaching tradition.

Ultimately, all that is external is seen as but names and forms, as constructs. When thought, knowledge, of all that is external, of the entire universe within space, is free of error, that knowledge is great – as vast and true as the universe is, and is not limited to the body (deha). It is not bound up by the limitations of one’s body and mind.

Knowledge totally free of error, of course, cannot mean knowledge about all the details one could possibly and impossibly know regarding the universe. It only means the knowledge of the one essential truth of everything that makes the difference between oneself as totally free in this life, or not.

One’s body and mind do not determine the nature of the universe; rather the universe ought to be recognized as it is, not as my senses present it. Any knowledge of the universe that is based on the senses, and on inferences from that sense-generated knowledge, cannot but be constricted by the perspective and other limitations of those senses.

Knowledge of the universe is clearly recognizing the limited and the not so real nature of the entire phenomenal universe. Knowledge is recognizing that the actual nature of the universe is not exactly what is presented to the limited senses, but it is the reality that one’s self is. This knowledge is what is gained from the teaching of the Upaniṣads, the āgama. This is the removing of the covering, of the ignorance, that has kept one from seeing the nature of the external world as it is, and appreciating oneself as completely free of its phenomenal limitations. Again, the conclusion that there are
:: ‘विकरोति अपरान् भावान् अन्तर्-चित्ते व्यवस्थितान्। नियतान् च बहिर्-चित्तः एवं कल्पयते प्रभुः॥’ “The Lord (prabhu) [i.e., the limitless self] diversely manifests (vikaroti) the limited (a-para) objects existing [dis-orderly, as in dream] inside the mind as well as the orderly [objects] outside the mind – in this way [the self] imagines (kalpayate).”
‘चित्त-कालाः हि ये अन्तः तु द्वय-कालाः च ये बहिः। कल्पिताः एव ते सर्वे विशेषः न अन्य-हेतुकः॥’ “Those [objects] are inside because their time [of manifestation] is only that of their thought, whereas those others are outside [because] their time [of manifestation] is twice [i.e., as the time one is thinking of them and as the time of their being seen, or, in other words, their time from the perspective of the seer and from the perspective of the seen], so, the distinction having no other reason [than their time of manifestation, and not for reason of any separate intrinsic nature on their part], they all [both internal and external objects] are but imaginations (kalpitas) [i.e., temporally ‘fixed up’ by the mind].”
‘अ-व्यक्ताः एव ये अन्तः तु स्फुटाः एव च ये बहिः। कल्पिताः एव ते सर्वे विशेषः तु इन्द्रिय-अन्तरे’ “Those [objects] which are inside are indistinct (a-vyakta), whereas the others which are outside are distinct (sphuṭa). [Since] their distinction is but the difference in the organ [that perceives it, whether the mind or the mind via the senses], then [external objects being not intrinsically different from dream or mental-only objects] are [as well] all imaginations [i.e., not absolutely real].” (Māṇḍūkya Up. Kārikā 2.13–15) ::
of the self is known to be a mistake. The limitations are nāmadheya (in name only). This is the great dis-embodiment. This is oneself disembodied of all limitations.

The manifestation of the phenomenal universe is by māyā, the power (śakti) of the Lord. This māyā has two components: āvaraṇa (covering) that hides the real, non-dual reality that is the Lord as being oneself and vikṣepa (projection) of an unreal duality – in the form of the notion that these projections are distinct from each other and from oneself. This universal āvaraṇa that affects all creatures can be seen through, can be penetrated, by an individual who sees that the truth of this phenomenal universe is but the non-dual reality that is one’s nature, which is the non-dual nature of the Lord. Then, the phenomenal objects are seen as being the reality, as being oneself, but I am not any of them.

No super power accomplishment, whether visualized or actualized, is greater than that. The disembodiment, the freedom from limitation, always has been your nature. Through the teaching and your contemplations, as you inquire into the nature of yourself, see if you do not come to this appreciation and all it encompasses. Be wise!


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃyama – contemplation; arthavattva – significance; anvaya – connection; sthūla – gross; sūkṣma – subtle; sva-rūpa – its own nature; jaya – mastery; bhūta – created.]

स्थूल-स्व-रूप-सूक्ष्म-अन्वय-अर्थवत्त्व-संयमात् स्थूल-रूपं स्व-रूपं सूक्ष्म-रूपं च तेषां समन्वयस्य तत्त्वे संयमात् – स्थूल-रूपं सूक्ष्मेण स्व-काल-बाधितं सूक्ष्म-रूपं च स्व-रूपेण स्व-काल-बोधितम् इत्यर्थः (YS.1.42–44) भूत-जयः सर्व-स्थूल-सूक्ष्म-भूत-वशी-करणम् (YS.2.18)॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the gross, the subtle, and one’s own and their real nature, along with the significance of their connection, one gains mastery over the gross, subtle, and their interrelationship. The gross is in its time sub-rated by its subtle. The subtle is in its time sub-rated by its (unchanging) real nature (YS.1.42–44). This practice results in the mastery over all gross and subtle elements (bhūta-jaya) (YS.2.18).”

The connection between the gross, the subtle, and the essence of a thing is one of a sub-rating the one by the other. ‘Sub-rating’ or ‘sub-ration’ is a useful term this author is borrowing from Eliot Deutsch in his book Advaita Vedanta: A Philosophical Reconstruction. Sub-ration is his rendering of the Sanskrit technical term bādha, which is often translated by the English term sublation. Sub-rating is more transparent in its meaning. It says that one thing is sub, meaning subsumed under or within, and is sub-rated (bādhita), meaning it is less valued in terms of its reality, when compared to another thing. That is, one thing sub-rates another when the latter is subsumed and devalued by that first thing. The term bādha is also usefully rendered as negation, where, in comparison to another, one thing is more negative, that is, lessened in value or truth.

The term sub-rating is employed in the context of levels or orders of reality. For example, the dream world is sub-rated by the waking world. Both worlds are known to the waker, but the dream world is a less inclusive level of reality than is waking. The dream world is based totally upon the waking world.

We compose the world of our nighttime dreams from what we have gathered as memories while awake. These may be colored by saṃskāras (subtle impressions) gained in our prior births’ waking experiences, however mixed up or distorted those impressions may appear in the dream. A portion of those saṃskāras may be otherwise described as the collective unconscious, common to the human mind. In turn, the dream world has only a limited effect on the waking world. In this tradition, the waking is taken as more basic, more real than the dream. We tend to place more value on our waking experiences than our dream experiences. After a nightmare dream, we are relieved upon waking to discover it was just a dream and not real. The nightmare of physical or emotional pain and suffering experienced in waking may not be as easily dismissed. The waking world in this way sub-rates the dream world.

In the traditional teaching, there are three levels of reality – imaginary (prātibhāsika), objective (vyāvahārika), and absolute (pāramārthika). This teaching literature, which talks about these three levels of reality, also makes further distinctions within the objective (vyāvahārika) reality that amount to similar sub-rating connections between distinct sub-levels of that reality. For instance, we sub-rate falsified or subordinate notions with more correct or inclusive notions. My being human sub-rates my being an author, or any other role I play in this life.

In the context of this sūtra, generally, the subtle sub-rates the gross, and the essence sub-rates the subtle. The gross is what our subtle senses perceive. This gross universe is the material world. In the language of this tradition’s physics (see commentary on Yoga Sūtra 3.41), the elements that make up the gross are actually composed of a mixture of the subtle elements. The gross is then nothing but a manifestation of the subtle. Moreover, the gross universe appears as it does only because of one’s peculiar senses, and is there only in our waking experience. It is not there in either the dream or deep sleep experience, which are both subtle. Two thirds of our experience, then, is purely subtle.

While dream and sleep are limited to the subtle, the waking world also has a significant subtle component. In the waking experience, we likely spend more time manipulating our subtle thoughts, our ideas, than we spend manipulating the gross objects of the world. Moreover, the names and forms that constitute the distinctions of this multitudinous universe are all within the subtle mind that wields these names and forms. And, as was pointed out before, we determine the reality of objective things by our mental estimation of their reality. In other words, our subtle mind weighs the reality or unreality of phenomenal, gross things. Put together, we can easily see how our subtle world sub-rates the gross world.

Sub-ration is even part of maturing as an adult. We get over dolls, marbles, excesses in unhealthy activities, and so on by sub-rating them for more fulfilling activities and interests. We usually get over pains and fears in life through being more concerned and occupied with and by the present moment. As we have seen, the present is the truth of both the past and future. Sub-ration, then, should not surprisingly be a natural process in spiritual maturation too.

If one exposes oneself to this teaching and stays committed until it is assimilated, he or she will understand the absolute reality that is the basis and reality of the gross and subtle worlds. The expression, “its own (real) nature (sva-rūpa),” in the sūtra here is the same as the absolute (pāramārthika). It is reality in and of itself. As such, it cannot be other than the basic nature of me. And the basic nature of me is a conscious being. I am, and I light up everything else within my experience. This is sat-cit, reality-consciousness – not a mixture of these two, rather these two are equivalent words indicating the single nature of myself. That single nature is what we say is beyond words and mind. These two words, sat and cit, point out that one reality which is all existence, which shines in the gross and the subtle, which is all words and mind, and which is more than words and mind.

This reality-consciousness is the nature of oneself, the puruṣa. It is also, without being a second thing, the nature of reality, brahman. And it is also, without being a second thing, the real, essential nature of the universe, which is but a manifestation of the Lord, of brahman, the only reality. Thus this reality, the sva-rūpa of everything, sub-rates the entire universe. It is the absolute reality that allows the dependent reality of the gross and subtle universe. The entire gross and subtle universe is swallowed into this
:: ‘सः यः च अयं पुरुषे। यः च असौ आदित्ये। सः एकः॥’ “The one who is in this person [the individual] and the one who is in the sun [the Lord] – that is one (eka).”
‘सः यः एवं-वित्। अस्मात् लोकात् प्रेत्य। एतम् अन्नमयम् आत्मानम् उपसंक्रम्य। एतं प्राणमयम् आत्मानम् उपसंक्रम्य। एतं मनोमयम् आत्मानम् उपसंक्रम्य। एतं विज्ञानमयम् आत्मानम् उपसंक्रम्य। एतम् आनन्दमयम् आत्मानम् उपसंक्रम्य।’ “That one who knows thus – leaving this world [of ignorance], transcending [by swallowing in terms of knowledge] this body (ātman) made of food, transcending this body made of energy (prāṇa), transcending this body made of mind, transcending this body made of intellect (vijñāna), transcending this body made of joy (ānanda)“
‘इमान् लोकान् काम-अन्नी काम-रूपी अनुसंचरन्। एतत् साम गायन् आस्ते। हा वु हा वु हा वु॥’ “– moving about [all] these worlds consuming at will any food, assuming at will any form – he [or she] sits singing this song, ‘Oho [repeated 3 times].”
‘अहम् अन्नम् अहम् अन्नम् अहम् अन्नम्। अहम् अन्न-अदः अहम् अन्न-अदः अहम् अन्न-अदः’ “[As every thing] I am [all] food [repeated 3 times]. [As every being] I am the eater of [all] food [repeated 3 times].’” (Taittirīya Up. 3.10.4–6) ::
.

This reality also sub-rates, in terms of devaluing, the entire universe, since within this reality alone is one’s limitless and total satisfaction, ānanda. Every experience we go after in life is for our own experience. It is for our self alone (YS.2.18). Even altruistic activity is finally for the well-being of our own conscience, so we can be at peace with ourselves. This reality is indicated by the expression sat-cit-ānanda (existence-awareness-fullness). Gaining the knowledge of this self is the only real mastery of the universe; it alone completely and finally fulfils one’s life.

As a superpower, when extrapolated to its extreme, fictional or not, this sūtra, according to the Sāṅkhya-Yoga commentaries, shows how one can manipulate all the elements (bhūtas) of the universe. This could have been a valuable accomplishment in their system. This advantage over nature and over others was as well the pursuit of the demons in the epics and myths of India. We are just not sure how a superpower like this, or all the previous superpowers, fit with vairāgya (non-attachment), and all the values like a-steya (non-usurping) and a-parigraha (renunciation) that really lay at the core of this teaching.

If secondary (gauṇa-phala) superpowers are kliṣṭas (hindrances) to the goal of yoga, then what is the point of presenting the sūtras (3.16–48) about siddhis (accomplishments) as only meant for superpowers, instead of for accomplishing kaivalya in keeping with the means given in the other three chapters, as well as the starting and ending sutras (1–15, and 49–55) of this chapter? Yet, commentary after commentary gets sidetracked into exaggerating these sutras as primarily or only about superpowers. Has anyone else questioned this?

We continue to show how these siddhis (accomplishments) pertain to inculcating a more cosmic perspective towards this body, mind, and the things of this universe. In this way, all these sūtras resolve into the singular goal of oneself completely free from limitations without having to change this body, or this universe.


 
←PrevNext→
[tataḥ – from that; prādur-bhāva – evident; aṇiman-ādi – the most small, etcetera; kāya-saṃpat – attainment of the body; ca – and; tad-dharma – that nature; an-abhighāta – cannot be assailed.]

ततः स्थूल-सूक्ष्म-भूत-जयात्, भूत-व्यापनात् भूत-अत्ययनात् च अणिम-आदि-प्रादुर्-भावः अति-सूक्ष्मता-अति-महत्ता-आदि-आख्या-स्व-रूप-आत्म-दर्शनं, काय-संपद् जगत्-काय-लाभः जगत्-स्व-रूपतया तद्-धर्म-अन्-अभिघातः सर्व-जगत्-स्व-रूप-लाभात् न अन्येन अभिघातः बादितः भवेत्, यस्मात् सर्व-आत्मनः अन्यद् न किम्-चन स्थूल-जगत्-जयः इत्यर्थः॥ –
“From the mastery over the gross and subtle elements (bhūta-jaya), through the pervasiveness and transcendence of the elements, there arises the manifestation of powers like aṇimā (the ability to become very small), along with extreme subtlety and vastness, by means of seeing the dimensionless nature of the self. This results in the mastery over the physical body, the acquisition of the world’s form, and the experience of the world as nothing more than one’s true self. There will be no obstruction from any external force, as the yogī has attained the universal essence of the entire universe, seeing nothing apart from one’s self. This is the meaning of the mastery over the gross world.”

Once one acknowledges that one’s self is the limitless reality, then
:: ‘यद् अर्चिमद् यद् अणुभ्यः अणु च यस्मिन् लोकाः निहिताः लोकिनः च। तद् एतद् अ-क्षरं ब्रह्म’ “What is shining and is subtle (aṇu) among the subtle [i.e., the tiniest] objects (aṇus), and in which are placed all the worlds and dwellers in these worlds, that is this immutable brahman (reality).” (Muṇḍaka Up. 2.2.2) ::
, from the smallest to the largest. This self is smaller than the smallest, and
:: ‘अणोः अणीयान् महतः महीयान् आत्मा अस्य जन्तोः निहितः गुहायाम्’ “The self (ātman) is smaller than the small (aṇu), bigger than the big (mahat); present in the heart of [every] creature.” (Kaṭha Up. 1.2.20) ::
larger than the largest. Such a one whose form is all forms and is one without a second – who or what could assail? There is no second thing.

Even on a relative level, at the level of the subtle (aṇiman), the contemplation of the yogin is to bring to mind the identity of the subtle prāṇa in one’s body with the cosmic subtle prāṇa – reaching whatever limit in the universe one is contemplating. For example, in a typical meditation one is to contemplate the subtle being behind the right eye as being the same as the subtle being behind the solar orb. This is a will-based expansion and appreciation of the mind from the individual to its cosmic source, to the total subtle body of the universe.

The Sāṅkhya-Yoga writers, drawing from the storied yogins of the epics and myths, instead of from the scriptures, imagine the yogins’ gross body can become as small (aṇimā) as an atom and big enough to touch the moon (as if that is really big in comparison to the entire universe). But this is not what Patañjali would advise all his flesh and blood students. These myths live large in the imaginations and psyche of those who know India’s heritage, but the Sāṅkhya viewpoint fades in the truth of the Yoga Sūtras.

There is something profound to be understood here, yet some people can miss it out of desire for the prosaic.


 
←PrevNext→
[kāya-saṃpat – attainment of bodies; rūpa – shapely; lāvaṇya – beautiful; bala – strong; saṃhananatva – hard; vajra – diamond.]

रूप-लावण्य-बल-वज्र-संहननत्वानि च सु-रूप-प्रिय-बल-वज्र-इव-दृढत्वानि जगत्-सर्व-काय-रूपाणि ईश्वर-विभूतित्वानि काय-संपद् सर्व-जगत्-काय-लाभः, क्षेत्र-लाभः क्षेत्र-ज्ञतया (BhG.13.1–6)॥ –
“And that attainment of bodies is of bodies that are shapely, beautiful, strong, and indestructible (like a diamond), resembling the divine manifestations of Īśvara in all physical forms. This kāya-saṃpat is the gain of all forms of the universe, of the kṣetra (the field of experience) as being the knower of the field (kṣetra-jña) (BhG.13.1–6).”

All glories (
:: ‘मत्तः परतरं न अन्यत् किञ्चिद् अस्ति धनञ्-जय। मयि सर्वम् इदं प्रोतं सूत्रे मणि-गणाः इव’ “Like collections of gems [i.e., so many glories] on a thread, all this is strung in Me.” (Bh. Gītā 7.7).”
‘श्री-भगवान् उवाच। हन्त ते कथयिष्यामि दिव्याः हि आत्म-विभूतयः। प्राधान्यतः कुरु-श्रेष्ठ न अस्ति अन्तः विस्तरस्य मे॥’ “The Lord said: Well now, O Arjuna, I will tell to you the extraordinary glories of Myself [the self of all] wherever there is importance, since there is no end to My detailed description.”
‘…यद् यद् विभूतिमत् सत्त्वं श्रीमद् ऊर्जितम् एव वा। तद् तद् एव अवगच्छ त्वं मम तेजः-अंश-सम्भवम्’ “…Whatever entity has glory (vibhūti), has wealth, or is indeed powerful – that itself, may you know, is born of a fraction of My power.” (Bh. Gītā 10.19 & 41) ::
) of the universe are one’s own glories. They cannot all be physically possessed; they need not be. Than chasing bodily perfection, this body and mind have enough to do just taking care of themselves. Whereas, simple maintenance of the body and maturation of the mind through this teaching is all the effort required for allowing complete fulfillment.

All glories are perfectly fine just where they are.
:: ‘यः तु सर्वाणि भूतानि आत्मनि एव अनुपश्यति। सर्व-भूतेषु च आत्मानं ततः न विजुगुप्सते’ “The one who according [to the teaching] sees all beings in one’s self (ātman) alone, and one’s self in all beings.” (Īśā Up. 6).”
‘येन भूतानि अ-शेषेण द्रक्ष्यस्य् आत्मनि अथ-उ मयि’ “By this [knowledge] you will see all beings in Me and even in yourself.” (Bh. Gītā 4.35) ::
are mine, wherever they are. Like the Lord, we too can say that all glories in the world are mine – if one knows oneself as not other than the Lord. The real nature of my self and the Lord is one, and my body and mind is none other than the body and mind of the Lord.

This is a mature non-usurping (a-steya), mature renunciation. As an individual, I did not create the elements of which this body and mind is composed. I do not create the food on which they live. I do not create the upbringing and environment that nurtures them. I am not the author of any of this around me. All this cannot be “mine”; it is not mine. It is factually a portion of the interconnected whole of nature that forms the body of the Lord. As the Lord, though, all this, all glories, are mine, are ātman, wherever they appear.

The special glories of the world are not what they seem; all things, all aspects of the Lord, are glories. Even the glamour and glitter publications show that the supposedly beautiful and the rich suffer the same human failings as the rest. The body and its possessions can gain culturally valued glories, but the mind alone controls one’s appreciation of those glories. The mind is not made any more adequate by a beautiful body or fabulous possessions. These material things of the world have no edifying affect on the subtle world of the mind. Nor can educated minds, skilled in the valued professions of a society, by profession escape the same human failings as the rest. It is not learning how to manipulate things and people that is going to educate you in how to be a fully satisfied person in your own glory, without need of comparison with others.

A teaching the equal of this ancient tradition alone can bring out this full satisfaction in oneself as perfectly acceptable in every way. In this vision all glories are one’s own. I am the self of all – this is the vision born of sure knowledge, not imagination. I need not suffer the trials and tribulations in physically gaining and retaining those glories in order to appreciate that they are all the glories of my own reality. They are perfectly and naturally acceptable wherever they are in my reality. This physical body need not have to suffer their gain and their expense for this mind to appreciate their beauty. They are there free to have and hold in the glory of my reality – effortless, painless, limitless, and ever-lasting. This comes from understanding this teaching and remaining in contemplation therein.

Fixation on one’s own or others’ objects, or body, or mind, is a hindrance. All things can be enjoyed fully as they are, without comparison or possession. All things pass away, even diamonds. Only the reality that is the self is what will not decay, will not ever be away from you.

In the Bhagavad Gītā, Kṛṣṇa taught that the embodied one is untouched by any physical element, that the embodied one is none other than the Lord, and the Lord is that embodied one. And Kṛṣṇa taught that all glories are the Lord’s glories. All actions and their results, including a nice body,
:: ‘न एनं छिन्दन्ति शस्त्राणि न एनं दहति पावकः। न च एनं क्लेदयन्ति आपः न शोषयति मारुतः’ “Weapons [made from the element earth] do not cut it [the embodied one], nor [does the element] fire burn it, nor [does the element] water soak it, nor [does the element] wind wither it.” (Bh. Gītā 2.23).
‘अहम् आत्मा गुडाका-ईश सर्व-भूत-आशय-स्थितः। अहम् आदिः च मध्यं च भूतानाम् अन्तः एव च’ “O Arjuna, the self (ātman) [yourself, the I] residing in the mind [i.e., in the seat of thoughts wherein reality is to be acknowledged] of all beings is Me. The source, the center, and the resolution of [all] beings is Me.” (Bh. Gītā 10.20).
‘न अन्तः अस्ति मम दिव्यानाम्’ “There is no end to My divine glories.” (Bh. Gītā 10.40).
‘कार्यम् इति एव यद् कर्म नियतं क्रियते अर्जुन। सङ्गं त्यक्त्वा फलं च एव सः त्यागः सात्त्विकः मतः’ “O Arjuna, if – renouncing both attachment [to action] and [its] result [i.e., as karma-yoga] – enjoined karma is performed as simply what is to be done, [then] that renunciation is considered predominately sattva.” (Bh. Gītā 18.9) ::
, not to the individual.

Kṛṣṇa was not interested in catering to the desires of the masses in his teaching to Arjuna. He was interested in teaching reality, and living in keeping with this reality. We do not think Patañjali was interested in trying to entice the largest following by promoting their desires either. You’ll have to decide for yourself how much the superpower advocates bend and break the teaching of Kṛṣṇa and Patañjali. As we have shown, one does not have to interpret Patañjali’s Yoga Sūtras as they do, and remain more true to the sūtras’ words than they, but, more importantly, remain true to the sacred literature of India that is the entire background of this work.

Without over-emphasizing them, there is nothing wrong with going after limited goals, such as a healthy body and a pleasant environment, if that is what one dearly needs and wants. And the means should be taught! Especially, a means that is as benign and beneficial as meditating. This is the spirit of the bulk of the Vedas when they give countless prayers, rituals, and meditations for these human goals of security (artha) and pleasure (kāma), which includes having a beautiful, impervious, heavenly body in the heavens.

But these limited goals need not, and should not, be overly promoted in a text that is clearly meant for kaivalya, liberation from these ill-informed notions of lacking and insecurity. Incremental moving from the limited to the limitless, through goal seeking, is not only mathematically and logically impossible, it is also psychologically impossible. It requires a total cognitive re-orientation in keeping with a clear knowledge of reality that is already limitless by nature. The teaching has to be based on reality, not on fiction or vague promises in the future.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃyama – contemplation; arthavattva – significance; anvaya – connection; asmitā – I-notion; sva-rūpa – its own nature; grahaṇa – perceiving; jaya – mastery; indriyas – sense organs.]

ग्रहण-स्व-रूप-अस्मिता-अन्वय-अर्थवत्त्व-संयमात् इन्द्रिय-ग्रहणे सत्-चित्-स्व-रूपस्य ‘अहम् अस्मि’ इति-बुद्धेः च समन्वयस्य तत्त्वे संयमात्, व्यष्टि-ग्रहण-क्रियायां समष्टि-स्व-रूपस्य प्रतिबन्धि-अ-संभवतायां संयमात् इत्यर्थः इन्द्रिय-जयः इन्द्रिय-वशी-करणम्, इन्द्रियाणि अ-प्रतिबन्धकानि, सूक्ष्म-जगत्-जयः इत्यर्थः॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the significance of the connection between perception and the sense of ‘I am’ (asmitā) – the intellect’s awareness of the self in its true form (sat-cit), where, in the individual’s act of perception as the very essence of the universe there is no limitation. One gains mastery over the senses (indriya-jaya), leading to the mastery of the senses and the ability to perceive without feeling bound. This results in mastery over the subtle realm and all of creation (sūkṣma-jagat-jaya).”

As the mind’s I-notion (“I am…”) loses its possessiveness which is caused by a sense of limitation and neediness, the mind gains the fullness that is knowledge of its limitless reality basis. This allows the mind and the senses to relax and do their natural jobs, free of ultimately baseless desires and of ignorant fears. This sūtra takes us back to the first chapter and contemplation on the asmitā (I-notion, YS.1.17).

The difference between the real I and the notional I may be likened to the difference between the sun and its
:: ‘यथा आदर्शे तथा आत्मनि (=बुद्धौ), यथा स्वप्ने तथा पितृ-लोके। यथा अप्सु परि इव ददृशे तथा गन्धर्व-लोके (एवं च लोक-अन्तरेषु अपि – Śāṅkara Bhāṣyam)’ “As [clearly] in a [spotless] mirror, so in the mind [i.e., here in this world with the valid teaching]; [but] as [indistinct] in dream, so in the world of the ancestors, and as was seen [more distinct but still not steady] in water so in the world of the celestial musicians [and so also in any other world where the teaching is not available, therefore make effort to prepare your mind here itself to get this clear teaching].” (Kaṭha Up. 2.3.5) ::
in a mirror or in a bucket of water. The one is the source, the ever-shining light of knowledge, while the latter is a pale reflection, disturbed by the slightest ripple in the waters of the mind. When I identify with the mind, due to misidentification, I as though become the rippling reflection. From the perspective of the reflection, I am in the bucket, in the body, peering out, like reflected rays of the sun, at my surroundings, their overwhelming size and danger. Moreover, my life seems to be leaking out from this holey bucket. Like the sun to the rippling water, the reflection, the bucket, and their surroundings, I can enjoy the mind’s rippling, the body, and their surroundings. I can know that I am that which is unconnected to and unaffected by the mind, the I-notion, the senses, the body, and its surroundings.

When the reflection gets enlightened, so to speak, and sees its reality as pure-light itself, pure awareness, that lights up every experience, and that light survives every bucket of water this reflection manifests in, what fear can affect this enlightened one who takes itself as purely its limitless real nature, not as this surface patch of water? In this full appreciation of reality, what does it matter if there are re-births in more buckets or not? In either case, I remain the pure light of awareness, without limit in time or space.

Any sense experience is another glory of my shining nature. Pleasure and pain are alike powerful expressions of my brilliance; I bask in their show of life. The senses can no longer confuse me, no matter what they see or do not see. I am the master, and these are just tools with which to play the game of life. I do not identify with them, like the pale reflection did, disturbed by every ripple fracturing and helplessly tossing around its sense rays pointing wildly around their surroundings. I do not follow, like a captive, these wild swings of the mind, as before. Because this reflection, which still remains after enlightenment and is nothing but an aspect of the mind, a notion in the mind about myself that no longer takes itself as only this limited reflection, is no longer upset at the ripples of the mind.

That reflection of myself, the notion of myself, no longer disturbs the rest of the mind. The mind itself calms down naturally as a result. When the mind calms, the senses naturally follow suit.


 
←PrevNext→
[tataḥ – from that; javitva – swiftness; manas – mind; bhāva – one exists; vi-karaṇa – free from the senses; ca – and; jaya – mastery; pradhānamother nature.]

ततः इन्द्रिय-जयात् मनस्-जवित्वं मनसः तीव्र-संवेगः (YS.1.21), वि-करण-भावः इन्द्रिय-करणेभ्यः विमुक्तिः, प्रधान-जयः अ-व्यक्त-समष्टि-वशी-करणं स्व-रूपतया कारण-जगत्-जयः इत्यर्थः॥ –
“From mastery over the senses (indriya-jaya), one attains the swiftness of the mind (YS.1.21), and liberation from the limitations of sensory actions. Mastery over mother nature (pradhāna-jaya) leads to mastery of the unmanifested totality as own very nature. This represents the mastery over the entire causal world.”

When the senses are under control through an informed and calm mind, then the mind is free to wield its power of swiftness in what does not hinder this vision of reality. The senses no longer control the mind. The mind is not pulled down wasting by-lanes. The mind is now freely in control of the senses (the horses in the chariot illustration, see commentary on sūtra 2.54). They quickly get the mind to wherever it directs them. In this way, one not only becomes free from the control by the senses, one now is allowed the natural control of them. And from this, one has mastery over nature itself.

By mastering the subtler, one masters the less subtle. By self knowledge, which is the subtlest of knowledge, since it informs one of the nature of oneself and of all of nature, then there is control of the subtle mind. When the subtle mind is in control, the grosser, more external, senses come under
:: ‘कर्म-इन्द्रियाणि संयम्य यः आस्ते मनसा स्मरन्। इन्द्रिय-अर्थान् विमूढ-आत्मा मिथ्या-आचारः सः उच्यते॥’ “The one who sits restraining the organs of action, [yet] contemplating the sense objects with the mind – that one is called one whose mind is deluded and whose conduct is useless. [Such is the predicament of a renunciate not prepared for a contemplative lifestyle].”
‘यः तु इन्द्रियाणि मनसा नियम्य आरभते अर्जुन। कर्म-इन्द्रियैः कर्म-योगम् अ-सक्तः सः विशिष्यते’ “However, O Arjuna, the one who rules the senses with the mind, is unattached [i.e., not anticipating results], who through the organs of action undertakes action as a yoga (a means for preparing for knowledge) – that one is better [than the deluded of useless conduct].” (Bh. Gītā 3.6–7).
‘इन्द्रियाणि पराणि आहुः इन्द्रियेभ्यः परं मनः। मनसः तु परा बुद्धिः यः बुद्धेः परतः तु सः॥‘ “They say that the senses are superior [to the body and all other objects], the mind is superior to the senses, the intellect is superior to the mind; whereas the one who is superior to the intellect is that [limitless self].”
‘एवं बुद्धेः परं बुद्ध्वा संस्तभ्य-आत्मानम् आत्मना (संस्कृतेन मनसा)। जहि शत्रुं महा-बाहो काम-रूपं दुर्-आसदम्’ “O Arjuna, in this way [of] knowing [oneself] as superior to the intellect, steadying the one by the other one [steadying the senses by the mind, the mind by the intellect, and the intellect by self-knowledge], destroy the enemy in the form of kāma (overpowering desire), [otherwise so] difficult to get a fix on.” (Bh. Gītā 3.42–43) ::
. When they are in control, then the outside, gross world is now under one’s control, in that it no longer limits you – there is nothing to fear from it. When the chariot, the mind-sense-body complex, is under your control, the avoidable (kliṣṭa) ditches on either side of the road are no longer sources of danger; they clearly mark the highway of life that can now be smoothly travelled with ease and certainty.


 
←PrevNext→
[khyāti-mātra – one who has reached discernment; anyatā – distinction; sattva – mind; puruṣa – self; adhiṣṭhātṛtva – one presides; sarva-bhāvas – all beings; ca – and; sarva-jñātṛtva – very nature of the
:: ‘ते ध्यान-योग-अनुगताः अपश्यन् देव-आत्म-शक्तिं स्व-गुणैः निगूढाम्। यः कारणानि निखिलानि तानि काल-आत्म-युक्तानि अधितिष्ठति एकः’ “Committed to contemplation as a means (dhyāna-yoga), they have seen [i.e., come to know] the power (śakti) behind the individual (ātman [i.e., the jīva]) as the shining being (deva) [or, the power (śakti) behind (ātman) the shining mind (deva)] [as though] hidden by the guṇas, who alone (eka) presides in (adhitiṣṭhati) all causes related to time [i.e., nature] and the individual.” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 1.3).
‘यः योनिं योनिम् अधितिष्ठति एकः यस्मिन् इदं सं च वि च एति सर्वम्। तम् ईशानं वर-दं देवम् ईड्यं निचाय्य इमां शान्तिम् अत्यनम् एति’ “One completely attains this peace [i.e., freedom from grief], seeing that shining (deva), worshipful, blessing-bestowing Lord (īśāna), who is the one alone (eka) who presides in (adhitiṣṭhati) each and every [other] source (yoni), within which all this resolves and manifests.” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 4.11).
‘सर्वाः दिशः ऊर्ध्वम् अधः च तिर्यक् प्रकाशयन् भ्राजते यद् उ अनड्वान्। एवं सः देवः भगवान् वरेण्यः योनि-स्वभावान् अधितिष्ठति एकः॥’ “Lighting up all directions – up, down, and across – the one who shines [powerfully] like a bull [in a field of cows], that Lord shining (deva) in this way, the one to be chosen, is the one alone (eka) who presides in (adhitiṣṭhati) [all] that have the nature of being sources (yonis).”
‘यद् च स्वभावं पचति विश्व-योनिः पाच्यान् च सर्वान् परिणामयेत् यः। सर्वम् एतद् विश्वम् अधितिष्ठति एकः गुणान् च सर्वान् विनियोजयेत् यः’ “The [single] source (yoni) of everything [including prakṛti], who ripens [everything’s] nature, who would [appropriately] mature all those that are to be matured [i.e., deserving maturity, one way or another, according to their karma], who would [appropriately] present (viniyojayet) all attributes (guṇas), is the one alone (eka) who presides in (adhitiṣṭhati) this entire universe.” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 5.4–5).
‘ज्ञानं ज्ञेयं ज्ञान-गम्यं हृदि सर्वस्य विष्ठितम्’ “It is jñāna (knowledge) [i.e., universal order and what lights everything in that order], jñeya [to be known], and the result to be attained by/as jñāna. It abides (viṣṭhita) in the center (hṛd) of everything [and is to be known in this intellect at the center of the human being].” (Bh. Gītā 13.17) ::
.]

सत्त्व-पुरुष-अन्यता-ख्याति-मात्रस्य मनस्-पुरुष-विवेक-ख्यातिः एव यस्य तस्य योगिनः सर्व-भाव-अधिष्ठातृत्वं सर्व-भाव-अस्तित्वं सत्-स्व-रूपत्वं सर्व-ज्ञातृत्वं सर्व-ज्ञप्तित्वं (YS.1.25), चित्-स्व-रूपत्वं परम-पुरुष-स्व-रूपत्वम् इत्यर्थः॥ –
“For the yogī who attains the realization of the distinction between the mind and the true self (Puruṣa), and through the understanding of this distinction, that one presides (adhiṣṭhātṛtva) over all states of being. This mastery includes the realization of the true nature of the self, universal existence, and is universal knowledge, the essential knowledge of all things (YS.1.25). This is the attainment of the nature of consciousness itself, which is the true nature of the Ultimate Puruṣa.”

Sattva means the mind, since the sattva guṇa is the predominant nature of the mind in its non-confused, non-agitated state. A sattva predominant mind is the immediate goal of yoga.

Sattva (literally exist-ness, sat-tva) can also mean any object, since an object is that which enjoys sat (existence). Knowing that one is the self alone, and not the limitations presented in the mind or the limitations apparent in objects, one knows the nature of oneself as sat-cit, unlimited reality-consciousness. This reality-consciousness is the reality in all things. It is the adhiṣṭhātṛ, the one who provides the adhiṣṭhāna (reality basis, asmitā, of all things), like the power of employees within a business is only an expression of the power given by the owner and president of that business.

In common parlance, the word adhiṣṭhātṛ would mean a ruler or an administrator. But this teaching is hardly common parlance. An individual yogin cannot be the administrator of all, since all in this teaching has come to mean just that, the entire universe including all of time and space, in fact every cycle of the manifestation and dissolution of the universe. Only the Lord has this title of the administrator of all, since the Lord manifests as the order within this and all other manifestations of the universe. Nor is the Lord just the administrator and not also the body of this entirety (see Śaṅkara’s Brahma-Sūtra-Bhāṣya 2.2.37–41).

When I say, “I am the Lord,” I do not mean this yogin as the body-mind complex right here and now is the equivalent of that universal Lord. I mean this sat-cit (unlimited reality-consciousness) is not other than that sat-cit (unlimited reality-consciousness). In self-knowledge, as an individual, I do not become the administrator of all. There is no reason or reality for the individual to claim of being the ruler of all.

When one approaches a text like this, one does mīmāṃsā (analysis of the words). This analysis assumes the text is internally consistent with itself and, if part of a tradition, consistent with that tradition also. Therefore, we understand each word in its present, whole context. If a word or statement cannot be taken in its common usage, for example, “fire is cold,” then we resort to its possible grammatical meanings that fit the context. In this sūtra, we derive the root meaning of the word adhiṣṭhātṛ differently than is done in day-to-day speech.

As sat-cit, unlimited reality-consciousness, I cannot do any activity, whether administering or knowing. Only the body and mind can do such activities, and they, being limited, cannot administer everything, the all. However, as sat-cit, unlimited reality-consciousness, I am the reality that, relatively speaking, supports these activities, and that support does extend to all, every cycle of the universe. On a grammatical basis we understand this word in keeping with the rest of the teaching as the one who provides the basis (adhiṣṭhānaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ kartā iti adhiṣṭhātṛ), the reality basis of all, of everything in the yogin’s universe.

Of course, everyone unknowingly does this providing reality to everything all the time (see commentary on Yoga Sūtra 1.3) by being the source of the attribution of reality. One cannot but be the reality of everything, yet one may not fully know this fact or its implications. This teaching is reality based knowledge, not a time-bound activity of becoming something one is not already. This knowledge is timeless and alone is complete, because it is ever and always an accomplished fact. What is different here is that this yogin now knows this reality completely, and has completely assimilated this knowledge in his or her understanding of himself or herself and the universe.

Additionally, even as an administrator, as the sole owner and president of a company, I alone hand out, provide, the titles to the others in the organization which become their only basis, their authority roles, within the organization. Even assuming any one of the roles within an organization, each one allows the other employees their authority roles, their bases, only to the extent that they recognize and understand those titled roles.

An administrator does not create the people. He or she only assigns and allows their title/basis. That is basically what this creation is also. The separate individuals in this creation, this universal organization, are only distinguished by their names (nāmadheya) – their being, their reality, is not created. Only their title or name is assigned or allowed that distinguishes them and relates them within the universal organization, for example, “my co-worker,” “my spouse,” “my neighbour,”, “that person,” “this bird,” “those stars,” and so on. In this way too, even as an individual, I assign or allow the titles/names of all entities within my universe. These titles alone are the basis of their so-called separate existence, as nāmadheya. The yogin, as one who truly knows reality, alone can properly assign these titles/names without creating real divisions beyond the separate names and thus lessening his or her reality, without creating afflictions by these names.

The yogin no longer hands out titles/names to things as sources of happiness, as separate, real entities. This is the true, unlimiting power of the yogin. In this way, the yogin alone remains as the administrator of all, whereas others immediately lose that status as administrator of all by reducing their own status through naming things as sources of happiness, as separate, real entities. Accepting a limited, dependent role for themselves, the others become overwhelmed and even
:: ‘अथ अतः आत्म-आदेशः एव –’ “Now the teaching in regard to oneself (ātman) apart from this [body-mind complex] –”
‘आत्मा एव अधस्तात् आत्मा उपरिष्टात् आत्मा पश्चाद् आत्मा पुरस्ताद् आत्मा दक्षिणतः आत्मा उत्तरतः आत्मा एव इदं सर्वम् इति,’ “Oneself alone is alone below, oneself is above, oneself is west, oneself is east, oneself is south, oneself is north, and oneself is indeed all this.”
‘सः वै एषः एवं पश्यन् एवं मन्वानः एवं विजानन् आत्म-रतिः आत्म-क्रीडः आत्म-मिथुनः (यस्मात्) आत्म-आनन्दः,’ “The very one who sees in this way, who contemplates in this way and who has assimilated knowledge in this way [as well] revels [inside] (rati) in the self, plays [outside] (krīḍā) in the self, and copulates [with a partner] (mithuna) in the self, [because] oneself is fullness (ātma-ānanda).”
‘सः स्वराट् भवति, तस्य सर्वेषु लोकेषु काम-चारः भवति,’ “That one alone rules (sva-rāṭ). That one has free rein (kāma-cāra) in all worlds.”
‘अथ ये अन्यथा अतः विदुः अन्य-राजानः ते क्षय्य-लोकाः भवन्ति तेषां सर्वेषु लोकेषु अ-काम-चारः भवति’ “Whereas, those who know otherwise than this are ruled by another. Their worlds decay. They have no free rein in any of those worlds.” (Chāndogya Up. 7.25.2) ::
all other things. The yogin is in control of his or her thoughts and the naming of everything; the others are controlled by their thoughts and naming.

From the point of view of the total, this can be expressed as the assimilation of one’s identity as the Lord, the only ruler and
:: ‘श्रोत्रं चक्षुः स्पर्शनं च रसनं घ्राणम् एव च। अधिष्ठाय मनः च अयं (ईश्वरः जीव-भूतः) विषयान् उपसेवते’ “Presiding over (adhiṣṭhāya) [by giving conscious-being to] [the subtle functions of] hearing, vision, touching, taste, and smelling – and the mind – this [Lord, in the form of the individual] experiences the sense objects.” (Bh. Gītā 15.9) ::
. The Lord is the perfect person (puruṣa) that is one’s reality in truth. As one gains clarity in knowledge of being this perfect person, one
:: ‘यः तु आत्म-रतिः एव स्याद् आत्म-तृप्तः च मानवः। आत्मनि एव च सन्तुष्टः … न च अस्य सर्व-भूतेषु कश्चिद् अर्थ-व्यपाश्रयः’ “Whereas, the person who would [find] pleasure within the self alone, be satisfied with the self, and be contented in the self alone, …for that one there is no dependence for [any] thing toward any being.” (Bh. Gītā 3.17–18) ::
towards what was other, even towards some notion of a Lord as other. When there is no subservience to anything, since there is no other thing or power, then that is ultimate sovereignty (adhiṣṭhāna). One’s role is subservient in this interrelated universe, but the role’s natural subservience does not adhere to the reality and understanding of oneself. One may be a janitor as a participating role, but this person is foremost the Lord with perfect dignity and sovereignty.

As one gains knowledge of being a perfectly acceptable person, one loses the sense of being less than or unworthy of full integration with oneself and the Lord’s world. The difference between oneself and the Lord is incidental in terms of creation and naming. There is no Lord who is in reality other than oneself. That knowledge is ultimate sovereignty (adhiṣṭhāna).

The only reality that all objects, starting with the mind, really enjoy is this reality which is none other than oneself. And one is the awareness in which all things can become known. These are not two qualities of oneself; they are the single nature of oneself manifesting in our understanding in these two ways: I exist, and I am the witness. This is the essential person. As this essential person, there is no limitation. As reality, there cannot be anything outside of me. There can be no division in reality. If one were to imagine a division, the only thing that could exist outside of reality is non-reality, and that is just the point. Nothing exists outside of reality, so nothing exists outside of me. This being a fact, then any such division in reality itself amounts to no more than an imagination, a mere name as ‘other’ – nothing more.

All that enjoy the claim of reality are only what I am aware of in order to lend that claim. I am aware of everything – I clearly am aware of what my mind knows and does not know. I am as much aware of the Mandarin language which my mind does not know – this is why I am absolutely sure I do not know it – as I am aware of the English language that I do know, at least sufficiently enough.

Since this is the subtlest of knowledge, it bears repeating (abhyāsa). All exist in the shining reality that I am. This mind through its sense organs can only point in one direction or another, therefore its field is certainly limited, but that does not create a limit in me who is illumining this mind and its senses. This shining reality is not inside the mind or body. This shining reality is free of spatial division – being the witness of these phenomenal divisions.

There cannot be an inside or outside for reality, so there cannot be an inside or outside for me, the real me. When one says that all things exist within me, the meaning is that as reality itself, there can be no second thing. If something appears in my awareness, it cannot be a separate thing. There can only be reality; there cannot be reality plus the divisions. If the divisions are real, then they are not apart from reality, and so not a second thing that can really divide me. If they are not absolutely real, then they do not exist to be a second thing or create a real division. This is having one’s identity in reality, in awareness, itself, and not in the phenomenal divisions. This is being all-knowing, being the very nature of the knower of all (sarva-jñātṛtva).

By ascertaining the meanings of these words according to their grammatical roots and context, the student can appreciate the fullest meaning of these sūtras. Their meaning presents a total re-orientation of one’s understanding that is a freedom which is more real than the bondage, the limitations, I previously thought I was under. That bondage ends. This freedom always was and will be the reality.

This is a reality-based knowledge which brings a complete and lasting satisfaction in oneself. This is a knowledge and teaching tradition, couched in the Sanskrit language, that we know has been available in India for thousands of years and has proved true for countless adepts. It is a knowledge that is said to be true, real, in every cycle of manifest universe, so it can be reasonable to think it is present throughout the extent of each universe. The teaching is so fulfilling and reality-based it is hard to imagine it would not be universally present. This teaching is getting clearly expressed here and now
:: Swami Chinmayananda initiated in 1952 public talks on these scriptures in English for the first time to anyone who came to listen throughout India and abroad. This now continues with Swamiji’s disciple, Swami Dayananda Saraswati, in public talks, and in short and long term courses in English around the world. Swami Dayananda’s precise presentation of the original Sanskrit teachings into English is unique in its ability to keep these scriptures current and pertinent and applicable in terms of the student’s own experience. This precision in teaching will continue through enough of the hundreds of students Swami Dayananda has taught and who have matured into teachers themselves. We hope the English presentation of this text is a clear example of the clarity that can be brought to a traditional text, long thought to be outside of the Advaita Vedānta tradition ::
.


 
←PrevNext→
[api – and; tad-vai-rāgya – non-attachment to that; doṣa-bījas – defect-seeds; kṣaya – withered; kaivalya – freedom.]

तद्-वैराग्यात् सत्त्व-पुरुष-अन्यता-ख्याति-मात्रस्य वैराग्यात्, सर्व-आत्म-भावात् न तु सत्त्व-पुरुष-विवेक-वृत्ति-ज्ञान-मात्रात् इत्यर्थः अपि दोष-बीज-क्षये अ-विद्या-दोष-बीज-क्षये सति कैवल्यं नाम भवति॥ –
“Through non-attachment (vairāgya), not identifying with the limited mind as being different from the true self (the Puruṣa), which amounts to being the self of all (sarvātma-bhāva), not just distinguishing the mind from the true Puruṣa. This detachment, through eliminating of the seeds of ignorance and its defects, leads to kaivalya (liberation).”

This knowledge is meant to be completed. If one stops before clarity is attained, one may be left with just a self-righteous or scholarly view of the texts. The real I is not a topic – it is oneself. One cannot know the real self, know about the real self. One can only be the self, without limitations. Any knowledge about the self, such as, “I am limitless,” can amount to only a notion about oneself. This can only be another thought, another notion, not the being-witness of thoughts.

This teaching is about knocking off the notions that limit the self. It is not for gaining more notions of grandeur of a holy or perfect self. When the seeds of affliction can no longer stage a comeback, one enjoys the fruit of this knowledge called complete freedom.

Like light to darkness, knowledge is opposed to ignorance – the dark field in which these seeds of afflictions sprout and flower. Knowledge and ignorance cannot co-exist. In the wake of knowledge, ignorance must go. Once gone, it cannot come back. Even if one were to lose the powers of the mind through accident, disease, or senility, there is no reason for wrong notions to be re-entertained. This knowledge is not extraneous knowledge that can be forgotten. It is a loss of wrong notions, without reason for them to return. It takes practically no mental power to know that one exists; even a bug knows it exists. It takes very little more to know that one exists without limitations. And this is all one needs for knowing oneself as free of limitations. No religious, prophetic, or mystic promise can surpass this.

At that point, one no longer has attachment to or identification with this mind, the objects of the mind, or any grandeur gained in the process. Even the words and practices of the teaching are themselves but means to the end, which is here now. I always exist without limitations. More teaching than this clear knowledge is just words (nāmadheya).


 
←PrevNext→
[upanimantraṇa – invitation; sthānins – those in high position; a-karaṇa – no reason; saṅga – attachment; smaya – conceit; prasaṅga – necessitate; punar – return; an-iṣṭa – what would
:: ‘श्वः-भावाः मर्त्यस्य यद् (हे) अन्तक एतत् सर्व-इन्द्रियाणां जरयन्ति तेजः। अपि सर्वं जीवितम् अल्पम् एव तव एव वाहाः तव नृत्य-गीते॥’ “O Lord Death, all this is so much ephemerals lasting only till tomorrow. They waste away the power of all the senses. All of life is short. [As for Your counter-offer, let] the cars, dances, and songs be Yours alone.”
‘न वित्तेन तर्पणीयः मनुष्यः लप्स्यामहे वित्तम् अ-द्राक्ष्म चेत् त्वा। जीविष्यामः यावद् ईशिष्यसि त्वं वरः तु मे वरणीयः सः एव’ “A mortal cannot be [fully] satisfied by wealth. If I have beheld You [Lord Death] [and survived], I will receive wealth [anyway, when I get back to Earth]. [Having already been freed from You] as long as You rule, I will live. But, my best choice (vara) [to be taught the knowledge of existence (asti) by You] [instead] remains the same.” (Kaṭha Up. 1.1.26–27) ::
.]

स्थानि-उपनिमन्त्रणे सु-स्थानिनाम् आवाहने सति सङ्ग-स्मय-अ-करणं बन्धस्य दर्पस्य वा निमित्त-रहितं पुनर्-अन्-इष्ट-प्रसङ्गात् यस्मात् आत्म-अनात्म-विवेकिना बन्ध-दर्प-आदि-दोषाः न एव पुनः वरितव्याः भवेयुः॥ –
“When there is invitation from those in high position, there is no reason or occasion for attachment or conceit, because there is no addiction to their unwanted return. Due to the discernment of Ātmā and An-ātmā, what is oneself and what is not, the return to the defects of attachment and conceit would no longer be chosen.”

Once knowledge dawns, whatever happens in life, whether life gets simpler or more complicated, whether one enjoys position or power or influence, these situations make no change to me. These situations happen to the mind and body, not to me. The self does not become simpler or more complicated, or more or less powerful. It remains as it is, as limitless reality. When promotion or demotion happens in life’s situations, these have no connection with oneself. They only relate to the body and mind, and the unfoldment of the karma that brought them into being. These are results that, in this life, are mostly
:: ‘समः शत्रौ च मित्रे च तथा मान-अपमानयोः। शीत-उष्ण-सुख-दुःखेषु समः सङ्ग-विवर्जितः॥’ “The same (sama) toward [another who takes himself or herself as] an enemy or a friend and toward respect or disrespect; the same toward [the opposites] cold and hot, pleasure and pain; free from attachment,”
‘तुल्य-निन्दा-स्तुतिः मौनी सन्तुष्टः येन केनचित्। अ-निकेतः स्थिर-मतिः भक्तिमान् मे प्रियः नरः’ “…for whom censure and praise are alike [addressing only this body or mind, but not one’s self]; disciplined in speech; satisfied with whatever [happens]; homeless [i.e., a renunciate or who has no ownership toward a house he or she may own]; whose knowledge is firm – who [in this way] has devotion, [that] person is dear to Me.” (Bh. Gītā 12.18–19) ::
, much less are they reasons for worry, disdain, fear or hatred at their approach.

The scripture is replete with stories of great sages, such as Yājña-valkya in the Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Upaniṣad, whose counsel and instruction were sought by the great kings of the time. The sages were well rewarded for contributing their knowledge to those who were wise enough to approach and request the greatest of teachings. Some of those kings in turn became wise teachers of this sacred knowledge. In the Indian tradition, the best of politics, economics, and even war were in the light of spiritual wisdom.

There are translators who interpret this sūtra to mean one should avoid those in high position or in power out of fear of contamination. But the student need not necessarily limit his contact with anyone of power. Those powers can be confronted and dealt with as well as temptations from other sources. Those with authority and influence can and do benefit from association with adepts who understand the scriptures. It was indeed part of the culture that scriptural students pay no tuition while living with the teacher, but afterward were expected to go to the king or ruler in the area to demonstrate their learning and, if impressive, receive rewards for the student’s teacher. Surprisingly, the commentators and translators here either ignore or are unaware of this traditional role of the rulers in supporting the educational systems of India.

This sūtra emphasizes the student’s focus on her own growth and learning, and her strength of character that keeps her from binding attachment and distractions from her purpose. This is the attitude one has as a karma-yogin of accepting life’s twists and turns as part of the natural order of nature. There is no reason now for a sudden fear or hatred toward those who happen to be rich and powerful. If that were so, then this wisdom would be a sudden stupidity.

No new situation is unacceptable, though there may be situations not of one’s choosing. Only the inappropriate attitudes towards these situations, such as attachment or conceit, that are completely under one’s control, are not allowed back in, not chosen, since they were based on an ignorance that is gone. Or at least, these inappropriate attitudes would not be chosen by the seeker pending the gain of the real
:: ‘अ-भयं सत्त्व-संशुद्धिः ज्ञान-योग-व्यवस्थितिः। दानं दमः च यज्ञः च स्व-अध्यायः तपः आर्जवम्॥’ “Freedom from fear, purity of mind, steadiness in [i.e., commitment to] knowledge and its contemplation, charity, mastery over the [ways of] behavior, performing [daily] yajña [prayers, etc.], reciting to oneself the Veda texts, prayerful discipline, straightforwardness,”
‘अ-हिंसा सत्यम् अ-क्रोधः त्यागः शान्तिः अ-पैशुनम्। दया भूतेषु अ-लोलुप्त्वं मार्दवं ह्रीः अ-चापलम्॥’ “…harmlessness, truthfulness, resolution of anger, renunciation, clarity, apaiśuna (not exposing defects of one person to another), compassion toward living beings, aloluptva (absence of agitation of the senses in the presence of objects), gentleness, modesty, absence of [meaningless] physical agitation,”
‘तेजः क्षमा धृतिः शौचम् अ-द्रोहः न-अतिमानिता। भवन्ति सम्पदं दैवीम् अभिजातस्य भारत’ “…brilliance [expressed as self-confidence], accommodation [i.e., patience and understanding], resolve, cleanliness, absence of malice, absence of demanding respect from others – [these] are there for one born to the wealth of a deva (i.e., a worthy person), O Arjuna.” (Bh. Gītā 16.1–3) ::
.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃyama – contemplation; kṣaṇas – moments of time; tad-krama – their sequence; jñāna – knowledge; viveka-ja – born of discernment.]

क्षण-तद्-क्रमयोः काल-क्षण-स्व-रूपे क्षणानां क्रमे च (YS.4.33) संयमात् काल-बद्ध-जगतः जगत्-स्वरूप-काल-अ-बद्ध-परम-आत्मनः च विवेक-जं ज्ञानं भवति॥ –
“Through saṃyama on the nature of moments of time and their sequence (YS.4.33), one attains the discerning knowledge (viveka) between the time-bound world and the ultimate self, unbound by time and the very nature (sva-rūpa) of this universe.”

This sūtra returns us to the types of change that objects may undergo. Here, by contemplating on one of the factors, time itself, one attains a knowledge that discerns the difference between the self and this transactional universe.

There is no single entity that is exactly a moment of time. Any length of time is further divisible into shorter and shorter lengths. If we say that a moment is just the shortest length of time that a human can notice, then what of other creatures? For creatures whose life-span is only in terms of a few human days or hours, then couldn’t their moment be much shorter? Moreover, our sciences cannot advance without an even shorter understanding of moments of time, so they measure down to fractions of vibrations of an atom or frequency of light. In fact, there cannot be a single shortest moment of time. If there is any length to a moment, then the beginning of the length is really part of the past, and the ending a part of the future. Yet we imagine time as a series of moments. If we cannot really know what a moment is, how can we know what is a series (krama) of such moments?

Let us assume there is a series of moments that characterize time. How do we experience this flow of time?

A past moment is something that does not exist anything like a present moment. A future moment also is something that does not exist anything like a present moment. Nor is a past moment anything like a future moment. A past moment is more like a memory of an experience that does not (now) exist. A future moment is more like an expectation of an experience that does not (yet) exist. The present is the experience of what exists. The flow of time would then be an expectation of an experience that does not exist, becoming an experience of existence, which then becomes a memory of that which does not exist. These three are much more unlike than alike. Yet we think of them as a series of the same thing, a series of moments.

Which is the real moment? Is it the expectation, the experience, or the memory? Of the three, the only one that deals with reality is the present moment. But that present moment can have no length lest it again be reduced into expectation and memory, future and past. Any measure that aggregates future, present, and past, such as a minute, and which we call time, cannot exist apart from our conception of that aggregate existing.

In fact, the past is nothing more than a present moment of an existing memory of an experience that does not (now) exist, and the future is no more than the present moment of an existing expectation of an experience that does not (yet) exist. What alone is real of time is the experience of existence, of the present. That present has nothing to do with any length of time. The present is wholly a length-less, a time-less, experience of existence. Existence is all there is in life. And it is present only in the present. Never is there non-existence. The present is not even an experience of existing in time. This length-less experience of existence, having nothing to do with time, is but my self, existence itself. My self is
:: ‘न जायते म्रियते वा विपश्चिद् न अयं कुतश्चिद् न बभूव कश्चित्। अ-जः नित्यः शाश्वतः अयं पुराणः न हन्यते हन्यमाने शरीरे’ “This intelligence (vipaścit) [i.e., consciousness] is not born nor does it die. Nor did this come from anything, nor did it become anything else. This, which is unborn, timeless, ever the same, and is always there, is not destroyed [i.e., changed] when the body is destroyed [i.e., changed].” (Kaṭha Up. 1.2.18).
‘नित्यः अ-नित्यानां चेतनः चेतनानाम्’ “The timeless of the time-bound (a-nityas), the consciousness of the conscious.” (Kaṭha Up. 2.2.13) ::
.

This timeless existence that is myself is that by which my mind has what it calls experiences, and then attributes reality to these experiences and to this seeming fiction we call time. It is the mind that creates the concept of time, of past-present-future moments and their passage (krama). But the conscious mind itself is a flow of thoughts in time. The mind, it seems, then has no more reality than time itself. The mind and time appear to be mutually dependent fictions. Yet they make up our experience of reality.

This is what is meant by transactional reality (vyāvahārika-sat). Transactional reality is what appears to be real, but becomes less and less real the more one questions it. Yet it cannot be dismissed as not real. It is good enough for life to carry on; it need not be anything more than that.

What alone is unquestionably real and cannot be dismissed is oneself. It is the same throughout the moments of time and the flow of the thoughts of the mind that allows these to be aggregated. It remains the unblinking witness that never changes, and remains the unchanging background by which all this ever changing transactional reality we call life flows. Without this unchanging background, there would be no experience of change (YS.4.18).

If the self changed along with the flow of life, then there could be no experience of the flow of life. Just as, when our senses move along at the same speed, they never sense the fantastic speeds in various directions that we move through the universe on this spinning planet flying through the ever revolving and expanding systems that make up this universe. If our senses could somehow stand outside of this movement, then only would this movement be fully sensed. Only because there is a reality outside of time and space do we have our limited experience of time and space gained through our senses and mind.

The existence of reality that includes time and space but is more than time and space is what we come to appreciate through the teaching and contemplation. This reality is yourself, and this is why you have these experiences throughout your life that make up this transactional reality. The same ever-fresh witness of your childhood, is the ever-fresh witness of your adulthood, and is the ever-fresh witness of your old age. That witness does
:: ‘गुणान् एतान् अतीत्य त्रीन् देही देह-समुद्भवान्। जन्म-मृत्यु-जरा-दुःखैः विमुक्तः अ-मृतम् अश्नुते’ “Transcending these three guṇas that give rise to the body – and freed from birth, death, ageing, and sorrow [i.e., guilt and hurt] – the embodied one attains immortality.” (Bh. Gītā 14.20) ::
. That is why all your experiences remain ever vivid. The timeless reality of your awareness, of your sense of your self, is why a child cannot wait until his body grows up, the teen thinks he will live forever, and an older person cannot accept his mortality. Only the body and mind undergo transformations in time, not the self.

We do not even experience a real flow of life or of thoughts. There is no real flow of life plus myself as its witness. Life itself is less permanent and real than the reality of me, and the flow of life is an abstraction in the mind’s eye. This mind also is a part of impermanent life and is itself a flow. The mind has notions about life but the mind is not the witness of life, is not the I who witnesses life. The mind is lit up, so to speak, by the light of the self. This lighting of the non-luminous mind is no more than the presence of the luminous self wherever the mind goes. These ideas will be elaborated and explained in the next chapter of sūtras.

The self is called the witness relative only to the act of witnessing which happens in the subtle mind that alone is the action of witnessing and the act of labeling. As explained under Yoga Sūtra 1.3, I am the reality that allows me to ever be the witnesser. I am the existence that witnesses all that can be witnessed. I am essentially existence itself that expresses as the witness of all by way of the mind. This witness is the witness of the conscious mind that is a flow of thoughts. The self is the unchanging reality, the unchanging background, by which the mind can experience this flow. That mind is not essentially other than this reality. It participates in this unchanging reality, thus the mind can make sense of a flow, an aggregation, of time, and can become enlightened as to its basis in unchanging reality.

Through this inquiry into the nature of time, one comes face-to-face with the unchanging reality behind time, and that reality cannot be other than oneself. The mind may at first be challenged by the realization, but it will learn to rest in the truth of its unchanging basis. The mind will learn to enjoy freedom from having to try so hard to make sense of life and from trying to make oneself and one’s world acceptable. Once this unchanging reality is discerned, time itself is objectively understood. Time and all within time enjoy an objective, phenomenal reality. Whereas, the self is reality itself, being without limitation. The self is known as
:: ‘आत्मा एव इदम् अग्रे आसीत्।…तद् ह इदं तर्हि अ-व्याकृतम् आसीत्,‘ “Ātman [here, the shining intelligence manifest as the subtle universe] alone was there in the beginning. …That [which is] this very universe was at that time undifferentiated.”
’तद् नाम-रूपाभ्याम् एव व्याक्रियत, असौ-नाम अयम् इदं-रूपः इति, तद् इदम् अपि एतर्हि नाम-रूपाभ्याम् एव व्याक्रियते, असौ-नाम अयम् इदं-रूपः इति’ “It became [itself] differentiated only into name and form (nāma-rūpa), ‘this [existence] is this [particular] name, this [existence] is this [particular] form.’ Even now this [universe] is differentiated only into name and form, ‘this [existence] is this [particular] name, this [existence] is this [particular] form’ [i.e., not into separate real entities, not away or different from ātman]. ”
‘सः एषः (आत्मा) इह प्रविष्टः आ नख-अग्रेभ्यः यथा क्षुरः क्षुर-धाने अवहितः स्याद्, विश्वं-भरः वा विश्वं-भर-कुलाये,’ “This very [ātman] had [already] entered into these [bodies] all the way to the tips of the [finger and toe] nails, like a razor would be placed in its case [i.e., as manifest within like the obvious shining awareness in the mind (hṛd), the is-is-is in every cognition, yet not fully known, as if encased] or like fire/energy (viśvaṃ-bhara) [i.e., the support of the body] within the nest/body (kulāya) of fire/energy (viśvaṃ-bhara) [i.e., as latent within like fire yet to be converted from unmanifest into manifest energy within the wood, here, as existence present in the body throughout and not fully known, yet fully, blazingly, knowable].”
‘तं न पश्यन्ति। अ-कृत्स्नः हि सः प्राणन् एव प्राणः नाम भवति। वदन् वाक्, पश्यन् चक्षुः, शृण्वन् श्रोत्रं, मन्वानः मनः, तानि अस्य एतानि कर्म-नामानि एव। सः यः अतः एक-एकम् उपास्ते न सः वेद, अ-कृत्स्नः हि एषः अतः एक-एकेन भवति’ “They [the people] do not [in fact] see it [ātman]. Because [viewed from a limited perspective] it is not [seen] complete/whole (a-kṛtsna). Only while [manifesting the function of] living [does it go by] the name ‘life (prāṇa)’; while [manifesting the function of] speaking…‘speech’; while seeing…‘sight’; while hearing…‘the sense of hearing’; while thinking…‘the mind.’ Each of these are merely the names for it through these functions. The one who meditates upon it as individual and separate from it does not [in fact] know, because this is incomplete as separate from it.”
‘आत्मा इति एव उपासीत, अत्र हि एते सर्वे एकं भवन्ति। तद् एतत् पदनीयम् अस्य सर्वस्य यद् अयम् आत्मा, अनेन हि एतत् सर्वं वेद’ “Only as ātman [i.e., as oneself, complete, without separations or divisions] can one contemplate it, because in this [ātman] all these are one whole (eka). Among all these [names], this ātman is what is to be attained [by knowledge], because all this [i.e., everything, every name] is known [only] by this [by ātman, by this consciousness].” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 1.4.1 & 7) ::
through the senses and mind, whereas everything else within reality is phenomenally filtered and limited.

Time and all within time have a dependent, conditional reality. The self is the unconditional, independent reality. The conditional is within the unconditional, and they are not two separate entities. Time and all within time, the transactional world, is reality, but reality is not the transactional world. As Swami Dayananda puts it, “B is A, but A is not B.” The broad universe is ātman (oneself), but ātman is not the broad universe. The broad universe is not the equal of reality, ātman; the transactional world is not the total reality. As we have seen, that does not mean the transactional world is not real. The universe is the reality that is oneself; it cannot and does not exist apart from this reality. Yet we are not born knowing this fact, and we come to take the universe and its apparent limitation as its reality and as our reality.

The universe is real, is nothing but the reality, and its limitations are only apparent. Its limitations are apparent in the same way a shirt is apparent, is only name and form, with respect to the fabric, its material. Its material is (relatively speaking) its reality. If you remove the fabric from the shirt, there is no more shirt. If you remove shirt (shirt-ness) from fabric, there is still fabric. The shirt is not the equal of the fabric; the shirt is a name we give to fabric in a certain form. The shirt is fabric, but fabric is not shirt. Similarly, a dream is me the dreamer, but I am not the dream.

This so-called relationship between the real and the unreal (what is other than the unconditional, total reality, yet is not totally nonexistent) is what Kṛṣṇa is indicating in the ninth chapter of the
:: ‘मद्-स्थानि सर्व-भूतानि न च अहं तेषु अवस्थितः॥ न च मद्-स्थानि भूतानि पश्य मे योगम् ऐश्वरम्। भूत-भृत् न च भूत-स्थः मम आत्मा भूत-भावनः’ “All beings exist in [i.e., are because of] Me, but I am not in [i.e., because of] them. [Yet] [as separate] beings [they] do not exist in Me. Look at My, the Lord’s, yoga (connection to/attaining in) [the world]! My ātman (self, the self of all) produces [all] things [all names and forms], sustains [all] things, but does not exist in [i.e., is not dependent upon] these things.” (Bh. Gītā 9.4–5) ::
. With this understanding, the transactional universe, though unreal, is reality, but reality is not the transactional universe, the unreal. The unreal cannot be totally nonexistent (śūnya, tuccha), like a square circle or a rabbit’s horn. The totally nonexistent does not exist in any way, not even as an unreal entity. The unreal, any object both factual and imaginary, is what exists, but does not exist as absolutely real in every way.

The limitations, which make up the diversity of the universe, are only experiences from the perspective of our senses. It is we who then mistakenly take these limitations as being as real as ourselves, and then further impose those limitations (of the body and mind) on ourselves. Once all limitations, being impermanent, are known to be unreal, not absolutely real, not as real as oneself, then there can be no real difference between the universe and oneself. And that is why, once the universe is seen objectively and given proper consideration, the methodology of sub-rating, of negating, the unreal phenomenal limitation, reveals the reality of oneself and identity with the whole.

The tradition Patañjali follows does not attempt to explain reality in terms of common knowledge because what is commonly known is exactly where the mistake lies. Insecurities and misplaced values are embedded in our language and our mindset. Nevertheless, we must use common words. We use them and expand their connotation, their meaning. And we ask the student to put that expanded meaning up against his or her own experience.

This tradition unfolds an uncommon knowledge of realities that permanently frees one from all sense of shortcoming. The foundation of the meaning of words is re-oriented to the knowledge that you are whole and you are the whole. This is the revelation shared from the teacher and confirmed in contemplation. The words of the teaching bring out a more clear understanding of how reality ought to be understood, which subsume, sub-rate, our previous understandings of realities as less real, or as a lower level of reality. We already have in our common understanding two levels of reality: imaginary (prātibhāsika) and objective (
:: Actually, from the perspective of the common person, the two levels of reality are imaginary (prātibhāsika) and absolute (pāramārthika), because what is actually the objective, transactional world, once all three levels are understood, is taken, before that understanding, as an absolute reality.
That is why this transactional world is misunderstood as something that absolutely limits and binds oneself, because we take it as absolutely real. This is exactly what is meant by the error of identifying oneself, the absolute, with what is seen, with the thoughts in the mind (compare Yoga Sūtras 1.4 & 2.17).
Again, why isn’t this two level imaginary-absolute perspective absolutely true? Because the freedom from bondage sub-rates that perspective, making it incapable of being absolutely real. If freedom were not possible, then the common perspective would be absolutely true ::
). To this is to be understood an absolute (pāramārthika) reality, that is not a third reality, but the only reality, under which the other two are objectively subsumed, sub-rated.


 
←PrevNext→
[tataḥ – from that; an-avaccheda – no separation; anyatā – distinction; jāti – character; lakṣaṇa – symptom; deśa – place; pratipatti – ascertainment; tulya – both being the same.]

व्याप्त-दृश्यस्य सर्व-व्यापि-अ-काल-आत्मनः च – जाति-लक्षण-देशैः धर्म-लक्षण-अवस्थाभिः वस्तुतः देशतः कालतः च विकारैः अन्यता-अन्-अवच्छेदात् अन्यतया अ-भेदात्, तुल्ययोः मनस्-पुरुष-अ-द्वितीयस्य, यथा नामधेय-मृद्-घटस्य मृदः च ततः जगद्-आत्म-विवेकात् प्रतिपत्तिः ज्ञानं सिद्धिः॥ –
“The pervading, visible world is essentially the appearance to us of the omnipresent, timeless Self. The distinctions of objects arise due to their attributes, such as internal character (jāti or dharma), external symptoms (lakṣaṇas) and place (deśa) or time (avasthā). These separations and distinctions are not real, due to the knowledge of the unity of the mind and the Self, which are not different from each other, like the clay of a pot. They remain essentially the same even if the objects take different forms. From this realization of the world’s true nature as the Self, knowledge is accomplished.”

When the separations, the limitations, in terms of character, symptom, and period between the mind (or any object) and oneself (sattva and puruṣa, see Yoga Sūtra 3.55) are recognized as apparent and not absolute, then the identity of everything as oneself, as reality, is ascertained. This is seeing the sameness everywhere, called sarva-ātma-bhāva (being the self of all). This sameness (tulya) is the
:: ‘इह एव तैः जितः सर्गः येषां साम्ये स्थितं मनः। निर्-दोषं हि समं ब्रह्म तस्माद् ब्रह्मणि ते स्थिताः’ “Those whose mind is rooted in what is by nature the same (sama) win over birth here itself. Because the defect-less brahman is the same (sama) [i.e., everywhere it is one only], therefore they abide in brahman.” (Bh. Gītā 5.19).
‘सुहृद्-मित्र-अरि-उदासीन-मध्यस्थ-द्वेष्य-बन्धुषु। साधुषु अपि च पापेषु सम-बुद्धिः विशिष्यते’ “That one is exalted whose vision is the same (sama) toward the kind-hearted, friends, enemies, acquaintances, mediators, the hateful, kin, the virtuous, and even sinners.” (Bh. Gītā 6.9).
‘सर्व-भूत-स्थम् आत्मानं सर्व-भूतानि च आत्मनि। ईक्षते योग-युक्त-आत्मा सर्वत्र सम-दर्शनः॥’ “Whose mind is absorbed in [this] contemplation, who sees the same (sama) [i.e., brahman] everywhere – sees [one’s] self abiding in all beings and all beings in [one’s] self.”
‘यः मां पश्यति सर्वत्र सर्वं च मयि पश्यति। तस्य अहं न प्रणश्यामि सः च मे न प्रणश्यति॥’ “The one who sees Me everywhere and sees everything in Me – I am not lost [i.e., remote] to that one, nor is that one lost [i.e., remote] to Me.”
‘सर्व-भूत-स्थितं यः मां भजति एकत्वम् आस्थितः। सर्वथा वर्तमानः अपि सः योगी मयि वर्तते’ “Having attained [this vision/knowledge of] oneness, the one who [thus] gains Me as abiding in all beings, that yogin, though engaging in all types [of action], abides in Me [i.e., abides not just when in the seat of meditation – because knowledge is continuous, in and out of meditation].” (Bh. Gītā 6.29–31) ::
(the same) that Kṛṣṇa explained in chapter five and six of the Bhagavad Gītā as the reality that is otherwise called brahman.

Sarva-ātma-bhāva is not a feeling. It is a thoroughly understood perspective to your entire world within and without. What is that like? Perhaps the easiest and quickest way to glimpse a “feeling” of this perspective is the following little trick. Without trying to analyse or force any thinking or goal-seeking, gently close your eyes. For the few seconds or longer – before your mind starts thinking what-it-is-like, or paying any attention to any sound, smell or touch – there is only the conscious you, at-once effortlessly calm and shapeless without any obstructing limitation at the center of your entire world. Sarva-ātma-bhāva is the knowledgeable perspective of the teaching with this effortlessly calm, limitlessness “feeling”, even though the entire world parades before your senses and mind.

Though it is obvious that these last few sūtras from 3.49 to the end of this chapter are summing up what is the goal of yoga and the eight limbs of yoga, namely, the knowledge and what is freedom, the Sāṅkhya-Yoga commentaries and translators strive to interpret this sūtra as one more superpower.

They take the term deśa to mean only physical location, and not time. An accomplished yogin can glean knowledge of the temporal distinction of two entities that are similar (tulya) in character, symptom, and location. Then the yogin could distinguish two similar newly minted coins from each other, or one fruit from another, by being able to perceive atomic differences because of the difference in time they were formed and presented in front of the yogin. One commentator goes on to say the yogin would be able to tell if someone switched the coins or fruits when the yogin was not looking. I suppose they would be terrific at winning shell games on the streets of Delhi. But I have no idea how important this superpower is towards kaivalya (liberation).

Promoting superpowers and ignoring the scripture’s physics and metaphysics when explaining these meditations not only misses the point, it misleads the student. These meditations should be seen for their help in preparing the mind for liberation through inculcating a cosmic perspective that connects the microcosm to the macrocosm and transcends the mundane all the way to the limitless. This is recognizing and staying on the purport (tāt-parya) of all these sūtras from the beginning to end of this text.


 
←PrevNext→
[jñāna – knowledge; viveka-ja – born of discernment; iti – is said to; tāraka
:: ‘सः अहं भगवः मन्त्र-विद् एव अस्मि, न आत्म-विद्, श्रुतं हि एव मे भगवद्-दृशेभ्यः “तरति शोकम् आत्म-विद्” इति, सः अहं भगवः शोचामि तं मा भगवान् शोकस्य पारं तारयतु इति तं ह उवाच – यद् वै किंचैतद् अध्यगीष्ठा नाम एव एतत्’ “‘Revered Sir [i.e., O Sanat-kumāra], as I am, I am but a knower of mantras (sacred verbal texts), not a knower of ātman. Because I have indeed heard from those like yourself that the knower of ātman crosses over (tarati) sorrow (śoka) and, Revered Sir, as I am, I suffer, [then] may your reverence [as a teacher] help me cross over (tārayatu) beyond sorrow.’ [Sanat-kumāra] replied to him [Nārada], ‘Whatever you had studied is but name (nāman) alone.’” (Chāndogya Up. 7.1.3).
‘रुद्रः तारकं ब्रह्म व्याचष्टे येन असौ अ-मृती-भूत्वा मोक्षी-भवति’ “Rudra distinctly imparts the saving (tāraka) scripture (brahman), by which one who [already] is free (a-mṛta) [by nature], is [now] free [by knowledge].” (Jābāla Up. 1.1) ::
; sarva-viṣaya – includes everything; sarvathā-viṣaya
:: ‘तद् एषः श्लोकः – न पश्यः मृत्युं पश्यति न रोगं न उत दुःखताम्। सर्वं ह पश्यः पश्यति, सर्वम् आप्नोति सर्वशः’ “There is this verse – Seeing [thus] one does not see death, nor disease, nor affliction. Seeing [thus], one sees all and attains all, in all ways.” (Chāndogya Up. 7.26.2) ::
; ca – and; a-krama – lacks a progression.]

तारकं ‘तरति शोकम् आत्म-विद्’ (ChanU.7.1.3) इति येन तद् तारकं ज्ञानं सर्व-विषयं सर्वथा-विषयं सर्व-सर्वथा-जगत्-आत्म-विषयं ज्ञानम् अ-क्रमं न तारतम्य-वृत्ति-ज्ञानं स्व-रूप-ज्ञानत्वेन (YS.4.22), अपि च काल-अतीत-आत्मनः ज्ञानं च इति विवेक-जं ज्ञानम्॥ –
“The liberating knowledge, which ‘transcends sorrow and is the knowledge of the self,’ (ChanU.7.1.3) has as its scope everything of the universe in everyway. This knowledge has no progression as the knowledge is not a progression or accumulation of ideas. This is because the knowledge has only itself as its nature (svarūpa-jñānatvena), (YS.4.22) and knowledge is of the self beyond time. This is the knowledge born from discernment (viveka).”

There is no slowing getting liberated. Liberation is not an incremental knowledge that one gathers in terms of information, as is the case with subjects such as philosophy and psychology. The teacher’s words reveal the nature of one’s reality by removing all wrong notions regarding this reality. Until all wrong notions go, one remains limited by each one of them.

The last wrong notion is in the form, “I am limited.” Freedom is knowing oneself as limitless – nothing more and nothing less. This alone is to be thoroughly known and assimilated. It takes time to untangle and remove the layers of confusions and wrong convictions that have been taken for granted all one’s life. Then, it also takes time to assimilate this understanding during this process. But the knowledge itself is so simple; it can take no time at all. We already know we exist; we just have to know that we exist without limitations.

The knowledge itself, since it removes all notions of limitations, also removes the limitation of time. In this sense, the knowledge is timeless, and therefore does not actually take place in time. Between the limited and the limitless, from a logical or a practical standpoint, there cannot be any incremental path. The leap, so to speak, from limited to limitless can only happen because one is already and always unlimited. There can be no distance or time span in that leap, without limiting the endpoint as within space or time. Only ignorance that blocks this appreciation stands in the way of the limitless.

This teaching is about including the universe in one’s understanding in everyway. It is not about blocking out the universe in deep samādhi, hoping the self will pop up later in a blank trance of meditation. If the self has to pop up in a trance, then who has been living your life? The self is always there as the being-witness of this life. The mind has just been busy changing and justifying its wrong notions about the self. Patañjali offers us yoga, a life of assimilating the teaching regarding the world, God, and oneself, aided by values, attitudes, and contemplation.

Some Sāṅkhya-Yoga commentaries and translators here create a brand new meaning for the term tāraka, saying that it means intuitional. This is their attempt to claim that Patañjali would accept their thesis that samādhi creates new knowledge. For them, that new knowledge would be an intuition and would not come from the guru (teacher). There would be no background of study or teaching (brahma-carya and svādhyāya) involved in this intuition. Every New Age author can make any claim he or she wants under the guise of intuition. Anything goes.

But no single experience one has in meditation, no superpower or mystical epiphany, will deliver the goods. Freedom, abiding freedom, does not come and go with specific experiences, even specific intuitions. It cannot because anything that comes in time cannot but be susceptible to, and will, leave in time. The student must read all translations and commentaries, new or old, with an eye to the tendency to overstate the nature of the experiences one may have while living a life of yoga.

Samādhi along with its prior practices brings about a clarity and steadiness of mind to apply to what one has studied by way of svādhyāya (see Yoga Sūtra 2.1), so that this mind may assimilate the knowledge of the teaching. The clarity in knowledge is brought about by the words of the teaching removing ignorance. From the nothingness of a samādhi without a teacher and a teaching, one will get nothing more than a quiet sit. What is the point of contemplation, if there is nothing to contemplate? One has to bring into the contemplation the teaching, and then the culmination of samādhi will be oneself free of the notions the teaching knocks off. Why would Patañjali have wasted so many other sūtras about values and attitudes, wrong saṃskāras and correcting saṃskāras, living a life of study, learning from the scripture, and assimilating this knowledge, if all there was to yoga was a trance samādhi that created its own new intuitional knowledge?


 
←PrevNext→
[śuddhi-sāmya
:: ‘यदा पश्यः पश्यते रुक्म-वर्णं कर्तारम् ईशं पुरुषं ब्रह्म-योनिम्। तदा विद्वान् पुण्य-पापे विधू॒य निर्-अञ्जनः परमं साम्यम् उपैति’ “When the experiencer (the individual) knows as clear as seeing the shinning person (puruṣa) [him or herself as the] Lord who is the only doer and as the source of even Lord Brahmā, then this wise one, shaking off [as ‘mine’] all karma merit and demerit, is freed of impurities, and attains ultimate sameness (paramaṃ sāmyam).” (Muṇḍaka Up. 3.1.3).
‘बुद्धिः बुद्धिमताम् अस्मि’ “I [the Lord, the ultimate puruṣa] am the intellect (buddhi) of all who have an intellect.” (Bh. Gītā 7.10).
‘इन्द्रियाणां मनः च अस्मि’ “I am the mind (manas) among the powers [of perception and action].” (Bh. Gītā 10.22).
‘सत्त्वं सत्त्ववताम् अहम्’ “I am the contemplative disposition (sattva) among the contemplative.” (Bh. Gītā 10.36).
‘अहं कृत्स्नस्य जगतः प्रभवः प्रलयः तथा’ “I am the source of the entire universe, as well at [its] resolution.” (Bh. Gītā 7.6) ::
; sattva – mind; puruṣa – self; iti – is called; kaivalya – freedom.]

अथ योग-प्रयोजन-स्व-रूपः पुनर्-उक्तः – सत्त्व-पुरुषयोः मनस्-पुरुषयोः दृश्य-दृशोः शुद्धि-साम्ये निर्-उपाधि-स्व-रूप-ऐक्ये अ-द्वितीये सति कैवल्यं केवलस्य एकस्य भावः, अ-द्वैतं सर्व-आत्म-भावेन न तु जगतः एकाकित्वेन नाम इति॥ –
“Now, the purpose of yoga in its true form is reiterated: When the mind and the self (sattva and puruṣa), the seen and the seer, are a pure equality, a non-dual oneness of nature, free from phenomenal conditions (nir-upādhi), this is kaivalya (freedom), the state of being one (eka), not as a separate entity apart from the rest of the world.”

Discernment (viveka) of the self as different from the apparent world, and the apparent world as different from the self – this is an initial step in gaining the knowledge that liberates. It gets you onto the raft of self-knowledge as one’s sole pursuit. But, by itself, it may only result in an isolated self, afraid of seeing the world again. The real liberation is the next step born of this discerning knowledge. That step is called sarva-ātma-bhāva (being the self of all) – limitlessness even while seeing the apparent limitations of the universe.

Sarva-ātma-bhāva is the figurative crossing over (tāraka) the ocean of limitations to the limitless brahman as oneself. This is the active life that Kṛṣṇa lived for all to see and learn from. This is the pure equality, the equality that is obvious once there is purity from the limitations of the universe and the imagined self. That purity is not a physical destruction of limitations. The limitations of the world obviously are not destroyed. The universe, or even one’s personal universe, is not destroyed when someone, somewhere gets liberated. Rather the wise person subsumes and sub-rates these limitations by his or her all-encompassing knowledge of limitless reality.

The limitless is first recognized through the discernment that oneself is not the unreal limitations – the A is not B from the second half of Swami Dayananda’s formula (see comm. on YS.3.52). But is finally recognized according to the first half of that formula, B is A – all this broad universe is nothing but myself (ātman).

This formula, B is A but A is not B – the broad universe is ātman (oneself), but ātman is not the broad universe – applies to relating to (applies to including) the world in oneself through the liberating knowledge of this teaching. The essential knowledge that brings this understanding about is that brahman is exactly ātman, expressed in the Great Saying (mahāvākya): That (brahman) is you, you are that (
:: ‘तद् (परं ब्रह्म) त्वम् एव त्वम् एव तद्’ “That [limitless reality] is you, you are that.” (Kaivalya Up. 1.16) ::
). That limitless reality (brahman) is you (ātman) and you are that. This doubtlessly reveals the exact identity, oneness, of oneself and the limitless. Being the limitless, everything must be within oneself.

Whereas, the dualist Sāṅkhya-Yoga philosophy holds that liberation is a mechanical process like breaking a car engine. One stops the mind, stops the engine. Once the mind stops then (with a little tinkering under the hood – this is the mystical part) the karma seed linkage gets unlinked, and the mind, the engine, can never get started again. Presto, the problem is solved.

Sāṅkhya-Yogins see the mind as a problem, and they say eliminating the mind solves the problem. Liberation for them is whatever remains after this thought-stoppage. It literally amounts to the yogin stranded in his or her isolation philosophy without an intellect to get out. There are even stories of yogins walled off in a cave or an ashram room, fed by their students and devotees through a small opening. This is somehow a sign of the yogin’s liberation.

All dharma efforts toward growth, though, will bring rewards and puṇya (karma merit). A yoga-bhraṣṭa (fallen from yoga) is the one who gets as far as he or she does, but does not finish. The lot of a
:: ‘अ-यतिः श्रद्धया उपेतः योगात् चलित-मानसः। अ-प्राप्य योग-संसिद्धिं कां गतिं कृष्ण गच्छति॥’ “O Kṛṣṇa, [the renunciate talked about in this sixth chapter] endowed with trust [in this Your teaching], [but] who does not make [adequate] effort, whose mind wanders away from yoga, not gaining success in yoga – what is [that one’s] lot?”
‘कच्चित् न उभय-विभ्रष्टः छिन्न-अभ्रम् इव नश्यति। अ-प्रतिष्ठः महा-बाहो विमूढः ब्रह्मणः पथि॥’ “O Kṛṣṇa, deluded in the path [i.e., the means for the knowledge] of brahman, fallen from both [karma-yoga and jñāna-yoga] [and thus] without a basis, I hope that this one does not fizzle out, like a cloudlet [split off from a cloudbank]?”
‘…पार्थ, न एव इह न अमुत्र विनाशः तस्य विद्यते। न हि कल्याण-कृत् कश्चित् दुर्-गतिं तात गच्छति’ “…O Arjuna, neither here itself [due to the positive attitude of śraddhā] nor hereafter [according to karma] is there loss for that one. O Dear One, [to the extent] anyone performs adaptive action [in keeping with dharma], [to that extent] that one does not get a bad lot.” (Bh. Gītā 6.37–38, & 40) ::
is questioned and answered in the sixth chapter of the Bhagavad Gītā dealing with samādhi contemplation.

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)

Freedom

s.01 s.02 s.03 s.04 s.05 s.06 s.07 s.08 s.09 s.10 s.11 s.12 s.13 s.14 s.15 s.16 s.17 s.18 s.19 s.20 s.21 s.22 s.23 s.24 s.25 s.26 s.27 s.28 s.29 s.30 s.31 s.32 s.33 s.34


 
←PrevNext→
[siddhis – superpowers or accomplishments; ja – effected; janma – birth; oṣadhis – herbs; mantras – repetition of sacred declarations; tapas – austerities; samādhi – contemplation.]

अथ क्लिष्ट-अ-क्लिष्ट-कर्म-आशयं वक्ष्यामः – जन्म-ओषधि-मन्त्र-तपस्-समाधि-जाः पूर्व-जन्म-संस्कारैः (BhG.6.44) चिकित्सा-ओषधिभिः श्रुति-मन्त्र-जप-स्व-अध्ययनाभ्यां तपोभिः विविध-समाधिभिः च संवृद्धाः सिद्धयः ‘परिणाम-त्रय-संयमात्’ इति-आदि-सिद्धयः (YS.3.16–48)॥ –
“Now, we will discuss the abode (karmāśaya) of both unhelpful and helpful actions – those actions that are born from past life impressions (saṃskāras) (BhG.6.44), and those that are enhanced through various practices such as medicinal treatments, mantra recitation, self-study, austerities, and different forms of contemplation. These are the powers (siddhis) attained through the practice of saṃyamas, starting on the three types of change (pariṇāma-traya), etc. (YS.3.16–48).”

One may achieve these superpowers to varying degrees naturally from one’s birth, or from drugs, incantations, austerities, or samādhi (the various saṃyamas talked about in the preceding section). We accept these accomplishments in their relative sense as conceivably possible but unnecessary and indistinct. They hold their place in the Indian tradition as more of a cultural or cult phenomenon and, as superpowers, do not give us sensible goals.

A better understanding of siddhis (accomplishments) here is the gain of the qualifications sufficient to assimilate this teaching. That alone is the most worthwhile accomplishment within yoga, and is in keeping with everything that Patañjali has presented and intended in this text.

A conducive birth and upbringing supports and nourishes the student’s spiritual growth, his or her sense of integrity and understanding of one’s identity with the Lord. The mantras of the scriptures express the essential understanding of this liberating teaching. Patañjali refers to herbs, which may be combined with specific mantras, employed in Ayurveda to heal the mind and body of distracting conditions (see Yoga Sūtras 1.30–31). In a broad sense, a
:: ‘यज्ञ-शिष्ट-अशिनः सन्तः मुच्यन्ते सर्व-किल्बिषैः’ “Those who eat the food left after first offering to the Lord are freed from all transgressions.” (Bh. Gītā 3.13).
‘अपरे नियत-आहाराः प्राणान् प्राणेषु जुह्वति’ “Others, whose food [consumption] is regulated, offer [their] prāṇas (energies) into the prāṇas (digestive fires).” (Bh. Gītā 4.30).
‘युक्त-आहार-विहारस्य युक्त-चेष्टस्य कर्मसु। युक्त-स्वप्न-अवबोधस्य योगः भवति दुःख-हा’ “For one whose food and activity are moderated – whose bodily movement is regulated during activities, whose sleeping and waking [hours] are moderated – yoga is a destroyer of [all] sorrows.” (Bh. Gītā 6.17).
‘स्वधा अहम् अहम् औषधम्’ “The food [offered to the ancestors] is Me, the food (auṣadha, made from plants [oṣadhis]) [offered to the Lord] is Me.” (Bh. Gītā 9.16).
‘गाम् आविश्य च भूतानि धारयामि अहम् ओजसा। पुष्णामि च ओषधीः सर्वाः सोमः भूत्वा रस-आत्मकः॥’ “Having entered the earth [as the brilliance from the sun], I sustain with My strength all beings. And being the extracted juice in the form of sap [from the earth], I nourish all plants (oṣadhis) [hence, I am the food].”
‘अहं वैश्वा-नरः भूत्वा प्राणिनां देहम् आश्रितः। प्राण-अपान-समायुक्तः पचामि अन्नं चतुर्-विधम्॥’ “Being the digestive fire, obtaining in the body of living beings, and united with [i.e., stoked by] exhalation and inhalation, I cook [inside the body] the four kinds of food [drunk, chewed, licked, and sucked].”
‘सर्वस्य च अहं हृदि सन्निविष्टः’ “And I am present [as the conscious being] in everyone’s intellect [energized by Me as the digested food].” (Bh. Gītā 15.13–15).
‘आयुः-सत्त्व-बल-आरोग्य-सुख-प्रीति-विवर्धनाः। रस्याः स्निग्धाः स्थिराः हृद्याः आहाराः सात्त्विक-प्रियाः’ “Foods that increase longevity, mental clarity, strength, health, pleasure [in taste], and satisfaction [visually or physically], [that are] tasty, oily, long lasting [in the body], and pleasing to the mind – [they] are [said to be] a favorite of one predominately sattva.” (Bh. Gītā 17.8) ::
contributes to a steady mind and a healthy attitude.

A vegetarian (oṣadhi) diet complements the prime virtue of non-injury (a-hiṃsā) in one’s life. We’ve become efficient farmers in the past several thousand years. We do not have to kill to survive, unless we choose to. A vegetarian diet may be seen as an accomplishment of a more intelligent consumption from the healthier base of the food chain, instead of from its accumulated poisonous top. But, in making this personal decision does the intellect or desire win out? Which is in charge of the diet? How could the same not be in charge of the rest of one’s actions and thoughts? If intelligent sincerity and tenacity are perhaps lacking even at the sacred dining table, when and where will they show?

We simply want to present here an understanding about non-violence in one’s life. Our own choice in this matter is our choice – understandable and acceptable no matter what it is. Vedānta and yoga do not demand or command anything. We each have to demand and command our own action – that’s all. This here is simply to inform.


 
←PrevNext→
[pariṇāma – change; jāti-antara – another birth; āpūra – filling in; prakṛti – pre-existing nature.]

जाति-अन्तर-परिणामः तद्-सिद्धि-अर्थ-जन्म-अन्तर-परिणामः (YS.4.1) प्रकृति-आपूरात् पूर्व-संस्कार-प्रवाहात्॥ –
“The change into (and within) another birth (jāti-antara), which may bring (or is due to) these (siddhis), is due to the filling in of a pre-existing nature (prakṛti) by means of certain impressions (saṃskāras) gathered before (YS.4.1)

The abilities of any embodiment, whether divine, human, animal, or other, are not solely due to any current activity one undertakes in that embodiment. These current activities are themselves more an effect of the current embodiment and situations with which one has been provided, than any change within this embodiment. They are more due to one’s past store of karma that creates one’s physical body and shapes the subtle body (the mind) appropriately for the various experiences this embodiment can provide. The past karmas play out as one’s abilities and the situations around, with which to experience and grow.

There is free-will to be exercised in one’s choices throughout life. These chosen activities create new karmas. Free-will activities make growth possible, but even these are within the possibilities allowed to one’s mind with its background that has been mostly provided and not caused by you. This shaping background is provided by the total environment – one’s genetic material, one’s mother and father, one’s siblings and extended family, neighbours, friends, teachers, co-workers, guru, literature, language, art, society, technology, cuisine, locale, geography, climate, weather, and on and on. You did not cause any of these, but they shaped you according to what your karma required and allowed.

This total environment is what is appreciated as the manifestation of the Lord in one’s life. This appreciation is the predominant attitude within Īśvara-praṇidhāna (intelligent surrender to the Lord as the whole order of the universe) as part of kriyā-yoga (YS.2.1). In appreciation of this provided background and order, one has natural duties to give back as an offering to the whole, even if that offering is but this prayerful appreciation.

If part or much of this background is seen as a problem by you, still that background has also allowed you to see the problem and thus to start to address the problem. This problem was likely there because of one’s karma to be worked out in this life. That storehouse of karma was your own doing in countless lives past. Do not blame the messengers for this karma which is yours to work out. This acceptance of one’s own storehouse of karma is also part of the appreciation of this provided background, of the Lord in one’s life.

In the course of resolving the shame and blame that conflict one’s life, the student recognizes that much of what occurs in life is outside of his or her control. It can be accommodated as the given environment. Then, one can turn to adjusting one’s emotional attitude to accept this objective fact. This allows a more unclouded intellect to freely choose the best course of action in this given reality. This is a life of karma-yoga.

The concept of a storehouse or account holding one’s karma is a belief. It is a belief that is not essential to gaining liberation, but it is a healthy and supportive belief system.

Some may believe that what happens is due to good or bad luck, uncaused chance occurrences, at which to rejoice or curse. But science does not accept non-causation or uncaused magic. Or, some may think that everything in their life is caused by their will, their choices. This more easily leads to more shame, guilt, and a sense of failure, than to self-empowerment and satisfaction.

The karma model allows a balanced, healthy measure of importance to present choices within the given interlinked causal mesh of life, within the Lord. It respectfully acknowledges the intricate web of life in which one participated in forming around oneself, and pinpoints where informed choice can be effectively directed right here now. In respectful and informed choice alone is growth in life which can shape one’s current attitudes and future experiences. It is a greater mastery of one’s attitudes in life that brings real and lasting maturity – not control of situations which are, in truth,
:: ‘कर्मणि एव अधिकारः ते मा फलेषु कदाचन। मा कर्म-फल-हेतुः भूः मा ते सङ्गः अस्तु अ-कर्मणि॥’ “You have control only in doing action, never in its results. Do not [think yourself to] be the cause of the results of action [that cause being but the Lord as embodied in the universal laws of karma]. Nor should you have attachment to inaction.”
‘योग-स्थः कुरु कर्माणि सङ्गं त्यक्त्वा धनञ्-जय। सिद्धि-अ-सिद्ध्योः समः भूत्वा’ “O Arjuna, being free from attachment [toward anticipated results], [i.e.] being the same (sama) towards success or failure, established in yoga [this attitude], [then] perform action.”
‘समत्वं योगः उच्यते’ “Sameness (samatva) [of attitude (buddhi) towards results – whatever they are] is called yoga.” (Bh. Gītā 2.47–48) ::
.

There are translators of this sūtra and the next one who find in the meaning of the word jāti a connection to the evolution of species. Jāti can mean group or species. This is again an attempt to fit Patañjali into a Sāṅkhya mold, with its elaborate analysis of evolution. Patañjali’s reference here is to freedom from the confusion of seeing the world as equally real as the self. He explains how the individual makes progress in this birth within the scheme of karma towards an appreciation of that freedom. Understanding jāti as birth is the appropriate translation and is consistent with the context.

Moreover, those translators have little to offer for their efforts in trying to throw light on species or world evolution through these few sūtras here that are ill-equipped for such a topic. One is left as a result in the next sūtra wondering just who would be the farmer in its irrigation metaphor? If these two sūtras are about species, then is God their farmer? But God or the ātman, the parama-ātman, is
:: ‘अन्-आदित्वात् निर्-गुणत्वात् परम-आत्मा अयम् अ-व्ययः। शरीर-स्थः अपि कौन्तेय न करोति न लिप्यते’ “O Arjuna, since it is beginningless [i.e., uncaused/un-effected] and since it is without attributes, this changeless parama-ātman (limitless I) does not do action – even though obtaining in the body – nor is it affected [by the results of action].” (Bh. Gītā 13.31) ::
. How can an actionless farmer plant and pull weeds to cultivate crops, or anything like that?


 
←PrevNext→
[nimitta – efficient cause; a-prayojaka – not the instigator; prakṛtispre-existing causes; tu – rather; kṣetrika-vat – like a farmer; bheda – removal; varaṇas – obstacles; tataḥ – to them.]

निमित्तम् इह अस्मिन् जन्मनि कायिक-वाचिक-मानस-स्व-क्रिया-रूपः नूतन-कर्म-फल-हेतुः अ-प्रयोजकं न प्रवर्तकं प्रकृतीनाम् इदं-जन्म-अर्थे प्रकृतीनां पूर्व-कर्म-फल-संस्काराणाम्, इह जन्मनि अल्प-आगामि-कर्म न प्रयोजकम् अ-परिमित-सञ्चित-कर्मनः इत्यर्थः, तद्-नूतन-क्रियया प्रायेण वरण-भेदः प्रतिबन्धिक-उच्छेदः एव तु ततः सु-संस्कारेभ्यः, क्षेत्रिकवत् यथा क्षेत्र-पतिः क्षेत्र-आसेक-पथि प्रतिबंधनानि उच्छिनत्ति॥ –
“In this current birth, the physical, verbal and mental actions that cause new karma-phala (karma results) are not the instigator (prayojaka) of one’s inborn nature, which is a result of prior karma-phalas, which are the result of uncountable accumulated (sañcita) past actions. The (āgāmī) actions in this life are comparatively less significant. Those actions generally just remove obstructions impeding the inherent saṃskāras one wishes to cultivate. This can be compared to how a farmer removes obstacles and changes gates in the irrigation path to his field.”

The part of the storehouse of karma that materially effects and affects this current life, namely prārabdha karma, is not fate set in stone. It is a wealth of possibilities, within the mind as its latent tendencies, that is the promise this life can entail. Current choices and actions remove obstacles (varaṇa = āvaraṇa) to different karma-currents within these possibilities in this life to flow into manifestation. To use the given metaphor, the opening of certain irrigation gates is equivalent to the informed free-will choices one makes, and the removing of weeds in the chosen channels is the equivalent here of clearing away the kleśas, the blocking obstructions, within the karma matrix of fixed possibilities that hold one back from fulfillment in life. This is the importance of choice in action and then following through in thought, words, and deeds that are
:: ‘योगः (स्व-)कर्मसु कौशलम् (=यथा-अर्थता)’ “Propriety in actions [i.e., acting within dharma, where, like for the Lord, the means are as important as the end] is [called] yoga.” (Bh. Gītā 2.50) ::
(what is appropriate in every situation). This topic, which is only hinted at here, is covered very well in the Bhagavad Gītā. This freedom to exercise choice is also the basis of what prayer is.

Prayer’s purpose is to exercise a choice and mentally act upon it, where physical action is not possible or not enough of an effective option, such as in helping another in one’s life to mature in their own life. Prayer is for removing any obstacles to a preferred outcome that is possible. Much of that removal of obstacles is of one’s own false sense of helplessness that keeps one unhappy in the current situation. By gaining a healthier attitude towards what is being prayed for, by doing all that one can do in the situation, this at least helps prepare oneself for any outcome and accept it.

Prayer should not be seen as requesting some deity to interfere in the nature of things and people to create some positive outcome for you or for certain of your friends. Deities are, in this tradition, viewed as the very forces that make up the nature of things, such as Lord Agni (Fire), Goddess Sarasvatī (Perennial Knowledge), or Lord Dharma-rāja (Death), not as spoilers in nature with preferences towards whomever most appeases them. Whenever the scripture talks about appeasing the gods and goddesses, it means appreciating and acknowledging, in words and deeds, their effectiveness in this world. This is why these types of prayers, such as the Veda ritual prayers, simply praise the glories of these forces in nature. It is an expression of a fact, and an acceptance of this fact in one’s attitudes and actions in the world.

With one’s limited mind and its personal background, one cannot know exactly what is best in the long run for anything or anybody; much less know what is best for everything and everyone in this interconnected universe. Let nature by way of karma take its course. It is not enough to choose or wish an outcome; one has to act on the choice. One does what one can and one prays for what one believes is the better outcome. Then, with this maturity of a sense of duty fulfilled, and understanding of the power and interconnectedness of all karmas, one accepts whatever is the outcome with this maturity, and carries on happily with the next choices in life with wisdom.

In regard to the teaching that frees, note that the methodology of the teaching is through neti-neti (not this – not that), removing wrong notions, quite like the farmer removing weeds – as opposed to adding new information about categories of the evolution of the world through an unnecessary dualist philosophy. In seeking limitless liberation, why nurture a philosophy about divisive dualist notions? Everyone already has these divisive beliefs anyway without any study or philosophy. Those alone are the weeds that need to be cleared, not cultivated.


 
←PrevNext→
[cittas – minds; nirmāṇa – fashioned; asmitā-mātra – purely by a notional-I.]

निर्माण-चित्तानि जन्म-क्रमेण कर्म-फल-अनुरूप-देह-चित्त-सङ्घाताः जायन्ते, इदं चित्तं प्रायेण प्रारब्ध-संस्कार-कार्यं न तु संस्कार-कारिकम् इत्यर्थः। प्रयोजका का? – अस्मिता-मात्रात् परिमित-जीवत्व-अभिमानात् एव पूर्व-अ-विद्यायाम्॥ –
“Minds are (re-)fashioned during the sequence of births, matching the results of one’s prior actions (karma-phalas) and the bodies with which they manifest. This mind is primarily an effect of the current accumulated impressions (prārabdha-saṃskāras), not the cause of those impressions. What is their cause? – It is purely the notional-I, the limited sense of individuality, arising from past ignorance (a-vidyā).”

Births of new bodies and the shaping of the subtle body and mind to fit those embodiments are due directly to the storehouse of karma in one’s own series of births. In regard to all births of all individuals, these births are due to the various, personal storehouses of karma, in everyone’s series of births. My own storehouse of karma itself is due to the ignorance that I am this body and mind, and thus the body’s and mind’s actions and their outcomes are mine also. This continuing false identity, which results in further births to allow those outcomes to be expressed, is the notional-I.

Over the course of birth and rebirth, the migrating notional-I persists in a continuum of appropriate subtle body adaptations – appropriate for the next round of growth and the exhaustion and accumulation of karma. This notional-I for each individual has been there from the beginning-less beginning, and its current storehouse of karma has accumulated countless karmas for countless more and varied embodiments yet to fructify. But this notional-I, as absolutely real, does have an end in knowledge of the self as limitless reality and the notional-I is but a notion. Once this limited identity is falsified, there is no more an owner of this individual’s storehouse. The storehouse, no matter how full, wastes away on its own, like unclaimed baggage, for lack of ownership.

Patañjali in this sūtra is moving from the single seeker’s mind to the plurality of all minds (cittas), because the next sūtras are about the Lord and all individuals in respect to the karma model that has been presented.


 
←PrevNext→
[bheda
:: ‘प्रकृति एव च कर्माणि क्रियमाणानि सर्वशः। यः पश्यति तथा आत्मानम् अ-कर्तारं सः पश्यति’ “And the one who sees actions being done in every way by prakṛti (nature) alone and, in that way, [sees] that the self is not a doer – that one [alone] [correctly] sees.” (Bh. Gītā 13.29).
‘क्षेत्र-क्षेत्र-ज्ञयोः एवम् अन्तरं ज्ञान-चक्षुषा। भूत-प्रकृति-मोक्षं च ये विदुः यान्ति ते परम्’ “Those who thus know, through the eye of wisdom, the distinction between the kṣetra and the kṣetra-jña [i.e., the object and the subject – the subject being the substance of all objects, of all names and forms] and [their inherent] freedom from prakṛti (the cause) of [all] beings – they attain the ultimate.” (Bh. Gītā 13.34) ::
; pravṛtti – activity; eka – one; citta – mind or self; prayojaka – instigates; an-ekas – all other ones.]

प्रवृत्ति-भेदे चित्त-प्रवृत्तेः स्व-परम-आत्मनः विवेके सति न तु चित्त-प्रवृत्तौ अभिमाने, प्रयोजकं प्रेरितारं (SvetU.1.6) चित्तम् एकम् ईश्वर-शक्तिः लिङ्ग-मात्रम् एव (YS.2.19), अथवा एकम् एव चैतन्यं प्रति-चित्ततया वर्तमानम् अन्-एकेषां सर्व-अ-विवेकिनाम्॥ –
“When there is distinction in the form of discernment of the activities of the mind from oneself as the ultimate self, hence no doership in the form of a limited I-notion, there is but one Mind (the Lord) as the instigator (prayojaka) (SvetU.1.6). It is the power of the Lord (Īśvara-śakti) manifesting as total subtle body (liṅga-mātra) (YS.2.19). Alternatively, it is the one consciousness (caitanya) that remains as the essential nature of the mind present in every thought in the minds of all others who lack this discernment.”

That one citta can be viewed in two ways here. Citta can be the cit (the conscious reality that is oneself alone) free of ignorant limitations. The mind (citta) after all is nothing but cit (consciousness-being) in reality; and one who is liberated knows this to be the fact of the mind. That cit (consciousness-being), of course, does not instigate any second thing, but it does allow all imagined second things to come into phenomenal being, to enjoy a degree of existence, remain for a time, and then resolve without ever leaving the one and only limitless reality.

Without conflict, this one citta can also be the Mind of the Lord, the total or cosmic mind, also called the mahat (YS.2.19). This is the intelligent order of the universe that shapes the universe and all embodiments within this universe. It materially is not other than the Lord, being like the Lord’s dream that phenomenally occurs but does not make any real change in, does not have any real effect on, the Lord.

When one person, one individual mind, is liberated by knowledge, apparent saṃsāra (the life of perpetual unbecoming becoming) carries on for all other individuals until they also gain this knowledge. This universe naturally continues to be perceived by the liberated person, and this universe is maintained by the total manifestation we call the Lord, all within the reality that is oneself. The liberated one does not see duality, no longer accepts duality as absolutely real. He or she only sees the one reality that is this Lord as oneself, within which this beautiful and enjoyable dream-like manifestation is incapable of any longer afflicting the wise person. There is only the one Mind of God as everything, with everything and everyone else revolving within that
:: ‘ईश्वरः सर्व-भूतानां हृद्-देशे अर्जुन तिष्ठति। भ्रामयन् सर्व-भूतानि यन्त्र-आरूढानि मायया’ “O Arjuna, the Lord – causing all beings to spin around, [as if] mounted on a machine [as on a wheel revolving in saṃsāra – now up, now down] by māyā (the Lord’s power of projecting) – remains [unmoved as the self of all] in the seat of the intellect (hṛd) of all beings.” (Bh. Gītā 18.61) ::
.


 
←PrevNext→
[tatra – in that; dhyāna-ja – born of contemplation; an-āśaya – no storehouse.]

तत्र ऐक्ये ध्यान-जं ध्याने शासनेन विकल्प-परिशुद्धं चित्तम् अन्-आशयं तद्-चित्ते कर्म-आशयवत्त्वं जीवत्वम् अ-विद्या-हेतुत्वात् न विद्यते (YS.2.12 & 1.24)॥ –
“In oneness arrived in meditation (dhyāna), the mind is purified of imagination because of this teaching. This mind losses its storehouse of karma (an-āśaya) and hence its individuality (jīvatvam), as they are caused by ignorance (a-vidyā) (YS.2.12 & 1.24).”

The contemplation is of the one being – none other than the limitless Lord free of everything, including being free of all karma. Initially, this may be something on which one is trying to gain clarity. Eventually, it is known as a fact of one’s nature, because it is one’s nature and always has been one’s nature. This knowledge is made firm by all the contradicting notions being laid thread-bare in contemplation. In oneself as the Lord, as the perfect person (puruṣa), there is no binding storehouse of karma for new births (YS.1.24).


 
←PrevNext→
[yogin – the one who has attained success in yoga; a-śukla – neither pure; a-kṛṣṇa – nor impure; karmas – results of action; itaras – everyone else; tri-vidha – three-fold.]

कर्म-अ-शुक्ल-अ-कृष्णं न एव पुण्यं पापं वा कर्म योगिनः, त्रि-विधं सत्त्व-रजस्-तमांसि कर्माणि इतरेषाम् अ-विकेकिनाम्, ‘अहं कर्ता मम कर्म, अहं भोक्ता मम कर्म-फलम्’ इति-बुद्धिमताम्॥ –
“There is neither pure or impure, virtuous or sinful, karmas for this yogī. For others, whose minds lack discernment, actions are of three kinds – sattva, rajas, and tamas. They believe, ‘I am the doer, this is my action’ and ‘I am the enjoyer, this is my result of my action.’”

In the knowledge of the identity of the self and the Lord, a separate individual jīva who accumulates a storehouse of karmas is known to be a false conclusion. For the one who knows, without a real jīva there can be no owned storehouse of karmas. There cannot then be its pure or impure karmas. As expressed in the Bhagavad Gītā, the wise person is naturally
:: ‘सर्व-धर्मान् (=धर्म-अ-धर्मान्) परित्यज्य माम् एकं शरणं व्रज’ “Giving up all dharma [and a-dharma] (adaptive and maladaptive action) [by giving up doership], surrender to Me alone [as there is nothing other than Me].” (Bh. Gītā 18.66) ::
, all right and wrong, which are relative notions within duality. However, the wise person, having lived a life of values in order to arrive at this understanding, will have no pressure to act otherwise, nor require incentive to act in keeping with dharma. As was mentioned, when one person is liberated, life carries on for the others. For them, karma, in all its variety, is taken as real.


 
←PrevNext→
[tataḥ – from that; abhivyakti – manifestation; vāsanās – latent tendencies; anuguṇa – in keeping; tad-vipāka – fruition of those; eva – alone.]

इतरेषाम् अ-विकेकिनां ततः कर्म-आशयात् तद्-विपाक-अनुगुणानां कर्म-विपाक-अनुरूपाणाम् एव अ-प्रतिबन्धितानां च एव इत्यर्थः (YS.4.3) अभिव्यक्तिः अस्मिन् जन्मनि व्यक्तिः वासनानां संस्कारानाम्॥ –
“For those who lack discernment, from that storehouse of karma (karma-āśaya) there manifests in this birth those vāsanās (saṃskāras) that are only in keeping with the fruition from that storehouse, which have not been obstructed (YS.4.3)

Until that understanding, for everyone else, the karma model is still a healthy perspective with which to view one’s life in this interconnected universe. The karmas of the storehouse are themselves the results of previous lives’ will-based activities which in this life become subtle causes of the physical body and situations, and of the subtle nature of one’s mind. Vāsanās (latent tendencies) are aspects of the nature of the mind that themselves are the results of these karmas, as well as newly acquired karmas in this life. The vāsanās lie within as the unmanifest mind, later becoming the immediate causes of feelings, attitudes, habits, and aptitudes – all in the form of various memories whose source lies outside one’s conscious mind. Vāsanās (latent tendencies) are this tradition’s expression of the human unconscious. Another word for vāsanās is saṃskāras. Again, for a fuller discussion of the nature of the mind see Appendix - Nature of the Mind.


 
←PrevNext→
[eka-rūpatva – having the same form; ān-antarya – linkage; smṛtis – memories; saṃskāras – latent impressions; api – though; vyavahita – separated; jātis – births; deśas – locations; kālas – times.]

जाति-देश-काल-व्यवहितानां जन्म-देश-कलभिः वियुक्ताणाम् अपि आन्-अन्तर्यम् अन्वयः स्मृति-संस्कारयोः एक-रूपत्वात् यस्मात् दूर-पूर्व-काल-ज-संस्कारस्य तद्-संस्कार-परिपाक-वर्तमान-स्मृतेः च एक-रूपत्वम्॥ –
“For memories and impressions, separated by births, locations and times, there exists a continuous connection due to their sameness (eka-rūpatva). This is because we and the śruti see the similarity between the impressions of past and distant times, which ripen and manifest as current memories in a consistent (predictable) form.”

A memory and its source saṃskāra (latent tendency) created previously have the same form. The saṃskāra is that memory, but in just its potential state. The saṃskāra remains in that potential state until there occurs the appropriate embodiment, time, and place for it to express as a manifest memory – as a feeling, attitude, habit, or aptitude. The varieties of latent tendencies that match what one needs for this particular life were sown in a variety of one’s previous human-like lives as creatures with a faculty of relatively free choice, though many non-human births may have intervened. The appropriate tendencies for the non-human births were expressed in those intervening births, while the ones appropriate for a human birth remained dormant.

A particular saṃskāra appropriate to only a certain human being would itself be sown by a deliberate action in a past human-like birth, even though there may have been intervening births as other creatures or as humans in which this tendency was not appropriate to manifest. For example, a tendency sown thousands of years ago to consume beyond all rationality, would be inappropriate for a person born a hundred years ago in the jungles of New Guinea, but not unusual for one born now in the consumer driven United States.

The universe itself is
:: ‘सर्व-भूतानि कौन्तेय प्रकृतिं यान्ति मामिकाम्। कल्प-क्षये पुनः तानि कल्प-आदौ विसृजामि अहम्’ “O Arjuna, at the end of the kalpa (manifestation cycle, the start of night for Lord Brahmā), all things go [i.e., become unmanifest] into My prakṛti (māyā). Again, at the beginning of the manifestation cycle, I project [i.e., manifest] them [from My māyā].” (Bh. Gītā 9.7) ::
in its manifestations, so the separation of an original cause and its final result can span generations, centuries, millenniums, eons, or manifestation cycles – maintained in that span in seed form as a karma within one’s karma storehouse.


 
←PrevNext→
[ca – and; an-āditva – no beginning; tāsām – for these; āśis
:: ‘त्रि-विधं नरकस्य इदं द्वारं नाशनम् आत्मनः। कामः क्रोधः तथा लोभः तस्माद् एतत् त्रयं त्यजेत्’ “Desire [i.e., requiring], anger, and greed: This is the threefold gate of hell [i.e., painful experience], which is the loss of oneself [i.e., it is the destruction of a mind able to pursue a worthy existence]. Therefore, one should give up this triad [by this teaching].” (Bh. Gītā 16.21) ::
; nityatva – eternal.]

तासां वासनानां संस्कारानाम् अन्-आदित्वं न आदिमत्त्वं , आशिषः नित्यत्वात् यस्मात् संसार-चक्रे हीनता-भावना-रूपस्य संस्कार-हेतु-कामस्य न आदिमत्त्वम्॥ –
“The impressions (vāsanās or saṃskāras) have no beginning because desire (kāma), which is the cause of these, waxes and wanes (or the sense of lack survives) throughout beginningless cycles of creation (saṃsāra).”

The flow of saṃskāras from desires is beginningless. Like the chicken and egg, there cannot logically be a first saṃskāra. This is because their wellspring, desire, is beginningless. And desire is beginningless because its cause, ignorance of the real nature of oneself, is beginningless. The reason that every link in this seeming causal chain is beginningless is because all effects are a manifestation of their material cause; in this case it is beginningless ignorance. The inherent, underlying reality of each effect is its material cause. Moreover, these effects are but the seemingly different names (nāma-rūpas) we imagine, and even time and its sequence will be shown to be more apparent than real.

In this seeming time-bound life, though, when the nature of oneself as full and complete, lacking any limitation, is not known, where one identifies with the limited objects of perception, and where those objects are taken to be sources of fullness and completeness that one naturally misses in oneself, one will have a very strong desire for those objects. This desire generates the will-based decisions for actions to acquire those objects. These will-based actions create subtle karma that can take any length of time to eventually fructify. Being subtle like a photon let loose at the beginning of the universe, there is nothing to wear out the karma, other than their eventual fruition. These
:: ‘यथा सोम्य मधु मधु-कृतः निस्तिष्ठन्ति (=निष्पादयन्ति) नाना-अत्ययानां (=नाना-गतीनां) वृक्षाणां रसान् समवहारम् एकतां रसं गमयन्ति॥’ “Just as, my dear [Śveta-ketu], bees prepare honey [by] collecting the essences of many distant trees and making them one essence,”
‘ते यथा तत्र न विवेकं लभन्ते अमुष्य अहं वृक्षस्य रसः अस्मि अमुष्य अहं वृक्षस्य रसः अस्मि इति एवम् एव खलु सोम्य इमाः सर्वाः प्रजाः सति (सुषुप्ति-काले मरण-प्रलययोः च) संपद्य न विदुः सति संपद्यामहे इति॥’ “…and just as in that [honey] those [essences, though bringing with them their different flavors] have no discernment, ‘I am the essence of this tree, I am the essence of that tree [etc.],’ in this way alone, my dear, all these creatures [as subtle bodies] having merged into existence (sat) [during deep sleep, after death of the body, and after the dissolution of the universe], do not know, ‘We [separately] have merged into existence (sat).’”
‘ते इह (पूर्वं) व्याघ्रः वा सिंहः वा वृकः वा वराहः वा कीटः वा पतङ्गः वा दंशः वा मशकः वा (एवं-संस्कारवान्) यद् यद् भवन्ति तद् (एवं-संस्कारवान्) आभवन्ति (पश्चात्)’ “[Nevertheless, their individual tendencies remain as their own karma-storehouse, therefore] whatever they are here [before] – tiger, lion, wolf, boar, worm, fly, biting gnat or mosquito [i.e., having such, or a mixture of those, tendencies] – that they return to [upon waking and re-birth].” (Chāndogya Up. 6.9.1–3) ::
over a cycle of universe-manifestation. A subset of these karmas, to be exhausted in each embodiment, forms the saṃskāras at the start of each birth.


 
←PrevNext→
[saṃgṛhītatva – held together; hetus – causes; phalas – results; āśraya – abode; ālambanas – bases; eṣām – these have; a-bhāva – no existence; tad-a-bhāva – these have no existence.]

संस्काराणां हेतु-फल-आश्रय-आलम्बनैः संगृहीतत्वात् यस्मात् स्वस्य हेतु-रूप-अ-विद्या-काम-कर्मभिः फल-रूप-कार्यः आश्रय-रूप-चित्त-कार्यः आलम्बन-रूप-विषय-कार्यः च निमित्तत्वम्, एषां हेतु-आदि-व्यक्त-निमित्तानाम् अधीनत्वानाम् अ-नित्यत्वानाम् अ-भावे व्यवहार-प्रतिभास-अ-परम-सत्तायां परम-सत्ता-अपेक्षामात्रे सति, तद्-अ-भावः अ-व्यक्त-संस्काराणाम् अपि न परम-सत्ता (YS.1.24, 2.24–25, 3.49 & 55, 4.18 & 34)॥ –
“Since the impressions (saṃskāras) are held together (as a chain) by the cause (the hetu), its result (phala), its abode (āśraya) and their basis (ālambana) – which are, respectively, beginningless ignorance as the cause, its affect as the result, the mind as their abode, and the objects as their bases. Due to the dependence on causes, from the cause to the effect, and the impermanence of these, in the experience of worldly existence (vyavahāra-pratibhāsa), there is relative reality (a-parama-sattā) that is dependent on the ultimate reality (parama-sattā). And because their causal chain is unreal, then the subtle saṃskāras are also unreal (YS.1.24, 2.24–25, 3.49 & 55, 4.18 & 34).”

It is not possible to directly address the saṃskāras, the content of the unmanifest, unconscious mind. However, these unmanifest subtle potentials have linked manifest factors: the causes, results, locations, and motivations connected to them. To gain relative freedom from the saṃskāras’ painful or destructive effects, one needs to address these manifest factors. Even if these subtle potentials, the unwanted saṃskāras or vāsanās, are there but are deactivated, blocked, or neutralized to some extent, this mastering helps manage the seeming unmanageable unconscious mind.

The saṃskāras do not have to be destroyed to be free from them. Absolutely not owning, not identifying, with them or their effects, frees me from them. Not giving them a permanent existence, which is myself alone, is not valuing them with my identity, not including them in my reality. This is recognizing oneself as indeed free from everything, including the unconscious mind.

In the same way that the immutable puruṣa is, in fact, free even before the liberation called kaivalya (YS.1.24, 2.24–25, 3.49 & 55, 4.18 & 34), so too self ignorance and its effects called the saṃskāras, as well as their abode called the mind, and the saṃskāras’ bases called the objects of this universe, in fact, always are and have been a-bhāva (unreal).

The process of contemplation that Patañjali gives us addresses the causal chain involving these saṃskāras. This causal chain starts with, and never leaves, ignorance of the self, manifesting as dissatisfaction in oneself and an imagined satisfaction in the gain of objects. This forms the inner core of, the material basis of, this causal chain. This causes, or at least allows the arising of, a strong desire for the objects. These desires induce will-based actions to satisfy these desires. This will-based action creates new karmas that need to fructify. These karmas will create an embodiment with appropriate saṃskāras in the mind. These saṃskāras will shape one’s desires for their objects. Those desires induce will-based actions to satisfy these desires – and on and on. The chain itself is ignorance of reality, of the limitless consciousness-being. Whether your life is easy (golden) or hard (iron), the chain of ignorance binds to one’s sense of smallness and impotence.

Absolute or at least relative freedom can be gained by addressing this causal chain. Once ignorance of reality is removed, one is absolutely free from saṃskāras. Short of that, relative freedom can be gained by not expecting the results to be as one demands (BhG.2.47), not assuming ownership of the results (BhG.2.51), and not allowing the emotional or immature mind to control one’s choices in action (BhG.2.52–53). Put positively, relative freedom can be gained by informing the intellect so one can appreciate the natural order of the universe and then live in conformity to that order (BhG.3.30), and by understanding the nature of objects as not the source of one’s happiness (BhG.5.21) – (
:: ‘कर्मणि एव अधिकारः ते मा फलेषु कदाचन। मा कर्म-फल-हेतुः भूः’ “You have control only in doing action, never in its results. Do not [think yourself to] be the cause of the results of action.” (Bh. Gītā 2.47).
‘कर्म-जं बुद्धि-युक्ताः हि फलं त्यक्त्वा मनीषिणः’ “Because, the wise, endowed with this attitude – after discarding [the pressure for] result born of action…” (Bh. Gītā 2.51).
‘यदा ते मोह-कलिलं बुद्धिः व्यतितरिष्यति। तदा गन्तासि निर्वेदं श्रोतव्यस्य श्रुतस्य च॥’ “When your intellect crosses over the confusion that is delusion, then you will gain a dispassion for what has been heard and is yet to be heard [from the secular and the spiritual marketers].”
‘श्रुति-विप्रतिपन्ना ते यदा स्थास्यति निश्चला। समाधौ (=आत्मनि) अ-चला बुद्धिः’ “When your intellect – [previously] distracted by the śruti [i.e., the bulk of the Vedas (scriptures) concerned with providing means for gaining heaven, power, wealth, and progeny] – becomes steady and centered on samādhi (oneself)…” (Bh. Gītā 2.52–53).
‘मयि सर्वाणि कर्माणि सन्न्यस्य अध्यात्म-चेतसा। निर्-आशीः निर्-ममः भूत्वा’ “With a mind centered on oneself [as the Lord, as the reality], renouncing all action in Me [the Lord – as prakṛti (nature), the cosmic order], being free from anticipations, and free from [the judgment] ‘this is mine.’…” (Bh. Gītā 3.30).
‘बाह्य-स्पर्शेषु अ-सक्त-आत्मा विन्दति आत्मनि यत् सुखम्। सः ब्रह्म-योग-युक्त-आत्मा सुखम् अ-क्षयम् अश्नुते’ “The one whose mind is [relatively or absolutely] not attached towards external sense objects finds [relative or absolute] happiness in the self. That one whose mind is endowed with clear knowledge of brahman attains the sukha (fulfillment) that does not wane [i.e., mokṣa (freedom)].” (Bh. Gītā 5.21) ::
). In the light of the student’s understanding and resolve, the unwanted saṃskāras are buffered and weakened. The natural, unavoidable pains of living can be kept from becoming sorrows.

Being less driven by undesirable saṃskāra-based desires, one’s actions will be more mature. The results of more mature decisions and actions will tend towards human re-births more receptive to and conducive for gaining this knowledge that frees one from the fundamental ignorance that had kept one in this beginningless cycle. See the Bhagavad Gītā for a complete unfoldment of these simple, objective steps one can take to gain freedom from sorrow.


 
←PrevNext→
[atīta – past; an-āgata – future; asti – exist; sva-rūpatas – in their own form; bheda – difference; adhvan – path; dharmas – characteristics.]

अथ भूत-भवत्-भविष्यत्-स्व-रूप-विषयः (YS.3.16 & 52) – अतीत-अन्-आगतं भूत-भविष्यत्-कालः स्व-रूपतः पूर्व-भवत्-कालस्य भवत्-स्मृति-रूपतया भविष्यत्-नाम-कालस्य भवत्-कल्पना-रूपतया च अस्ति वर्तते, अध्व-भेदात् धर्माणां यस्मात् स्व-व्यक्ति-कर्म-पथ्योः धर्म-भेदाः (YS.3.14 & 49, 2.5)॥ –
“Now, the subject of past, present, and future (YS.3.16 & 52) started earlier is taken up again. The past and future are time concepts that exist only as names for certain memories and certain imagined expectations. Because of the difference in the path of their characteristics – the past via recalled memory and the future via imagined expectation – both exist only in the present (YS.3.14 & 49, 2.5).”

Among the strongest of the saṃskāras are those that nurture the notions of a past and a future time.

The past and the future are not non-existent entities. They exist according to the nature of their characteristics. The past exists as a present memory of the previously present. The object of this memory is what is presently called the past. The future exists as a present expectation. The object of this expectation is what is presently called the future. The present is what is real. The present is the reality of all three times. The past never exists except as the present, either as its thought or as its object, and the future never exists except as the present, either as its thought or as its object. When Patañjali woke up it was always the present. He himself never woke up in the past. As a child I never woke up in the morning in the past, it was always the present. If I wake up again, it will be the present, not the future.

Yet our existence within time informs us to give the past and the future an absolute reality. This is because, even though they are but the present in their essential reality, in their characteristics, in how we agree to talk about them, they are distinguished as present memories, present expectations, or as present inferences about what we agree to call the past or future. These are their characteristics, distinct from each other, by which we talk of a past or future as different from the present, and from each other. It should be understood, though, that these characteristics are not intrinsic to the present in which alone the past and future exist.

Nor does the intrinsic nature (sva-rūpa) of the past or future modify from past to present or from present to future – does not modify from was-existent into existence, or from existence into not-yet-existent. If an entity’s intrinsic nature (sva-rūpa) modifies into something else, then that was not the real sva-rūpa of that entity in the first place. In all three periods of time existence itself is the real sva-rūpa; past and future are adjectives that make no essential difference in this sva-rūpa.

The past is not something that existed and then became non-existent, and the future is not something non-existent that will become existent.
:: ‘न अ-सतः विद्यते भावः, न अ-भावः विद्यते सतः’ “A-sat (the unreal, the time-bound) has no being [of its own], and sat (the real) has no nonbeing.” (Bh. Gītā 2.16) ::
can never become existent, and existence can never become non-existent. All there can ever essentially be is
:: ‘सद् एव सोम्य इदम् अग्रे आसीद् एकम् एव अ-द्वितीयम्।’ “Existence (sat) alone, my dear [Śvetaketu], was this in the beginning – one alone without a second.”
‘तद् (=तत्र) ह एके आहुः अ-सद् एव इदम् अग्रे आसीद् एकम् एव अ-द्वितीयं तस्माद् अ-सतः सद् जायत (=अजायत)॥’ “Now, some say that non-existence (a-sat) alone was this in the beginning – one alone without a second, and from that non-existence came existence.”
‘कुतः तु खलु सोम्य एवं स्याद् इति ह उवाच कथम् अ-सतः सद् जायेत इति।’ “But how, my dear, indeed could it be said that such a thing is possible? How could existence come from non-existence?”
‘सत् तु एव सोम्य इदम् अग्रे आसीद् एकम् एव अ-द्वितीयम्’ “Rather, existence alone, my dear, was this in the beginning – one alone without a second.” (Chāndogya Up. 6.2.1–2) ::
. For this tradition’s succinct analysis on this you can read Śaṅkara’s Brahma-Sūtra-Bhāṣya (2.2.26–27). The logic of the law of conservation of matter/energy is applicable here; it is in fact why the law exists. Existence always was, is, and will be. Only phenomenal characteristics keep changing, keep being replaced, into other forms with different names. These characteristics are but the forms our human senses or mind pick up, and the names we give to them. To a rock or to another creature these characteristics (as memories or expectations) either do not appear or exist, or they appear quite differently. Therefore they do not categorically, do not universally, exist in and of themselves. That is, phenomenal characteristics are categorically (universally) indefinable (a-nirvacanīya).

These characteristics cannot but be of the very existence that is their domain, that is existence itself, the existence that is oneself as an awareful being. A non-existent characteristic is just that – non-existent. Existence alone can be the categorical truth of these characteristics. That existence is the real dharmin (domain, YS.3.14), the real and only presiding presence of everything (adhiṣṭhātṛtva, YS.3.49). All the characteristics are only the limiting adjuncts (upādhis) which do not exist except in the present, in reality. Being within existence, being dependent on the existence that is the self, the characteristics do not in any way limit that overarching reality. They come and go as various names we give in the present moment. Only the present always is as it is. These characteristics cannot be outside of existence to limit existence.

In regard to time, the present that is the reality of all three times is, in fact, the presence that is oneself free of time. This presence, this reality, is the domain (dharmin), the ultimate nature (sva-rūpa), of the different characteristics, the different forms and names, by which we phenomenally distinguish past, present, and future.

The reason Patañjali keeps coming back to the topic of time is that in the seat of meditation, with eyes closed and no attention directed to the environment, there is only oneself and time. If time itself can be seen for what it is, as nothing but a name that makes no change to the presence that is the timeless self (YS.2.5), then that resolution is samādhi – is pure presence whether thoughts come or thoughts go.


 
←PrevNext→
[te – these; vyakta – manifest; sūkṣma – subtle; ātmans – natures; guṇas – characteristics.]

ते भूत-भवत्-भविष्यत्-कालाः व्यक्त-सूक्ष्माः, तौ भूत-भविष्यत्-कालौ भवत्-काले एव सन्तौ भूत-स्मृतितया भविष्यत्-कल्पनातया च सूक्ष्म-वृत्ती, भवत्-कालः तु एव व्यक्तः, ते कालाः गुणात्मानः स्व-गुण-अनुरूपाः॥ –
“These past, present, and future times are either manifest or subtle. The past and future exist only within the present, being perceived through the memory of the past and the imagination of the future – they are both only subtle impressions. The present time, however, is alone manifest. These times are characterized by qualities that are in harmony with their inherent nature.”

The past and future are subtle, since they exist only as subtle thoughts, as memory and expectation in the mind. The objects of these thoughts are also subtle, in that they are either subtly present as their effects in the present because of which one has the memory of a present moment in the past, or subtly present as their potential in the present because of which one has an expectation of a present moment in the future.

The past and future only subtly exist, only manifest, right now. The advantage of this factual based worldview is that all one’s baggage of regrets and resentments of the past and one’s fears of the future only exist right now, whenever they are brought up as memories or expectations, respectively. All these, which we thought we could do nothing or very little about, are right now available. They can be addressed in a mind that now has more mature attitudes and understandings that can help nullify the afflictions these would otherwise evoke. The past and future need not bookend you into a tiny gap of the present. You, in fact, are the presence, the existence, of the present moment in which alone the past and future occur. You are the master of them, not the other way around. Only ignorance of realities, yours and theirs, keeps you from being the master you naturally are.

This is not theoretical. Yoga is about knowing the body, its environment, and the mind, with oneself as their sole reality. The goal of yoga is to completely assimilate these truths about realities. Try it and see the natural benefit. Because it is reality based, there can be no downside or loss of effort in the pursuit of this yoga.


 
←PrevNext→
[tattva – reality; vastu – entity; ekatva – oneness; pariṇāmas – modifications.]

अथ वस्तु-स्व-रूपं चित्त-स्व-रूपं च वक्ष्यामः – परिणाम-एकत्वात् स्व-कार्य-परिणाम-कल्पनानाम् एक-स्व-रूपत्वात्, यथा स्वर्ण-मृद्-आदि स्व-कार्याणि च वस्तु-तत्त्वं किञ्चित्-वस्तुनः एक-सत्ता, अतः सर्व-कार्य-एकत्वं परम-ईश्वर-एक-कारणम् एव परम-आत्मा परम-सत्ता॥ –
“Now, we will explain the nature of the object and the nature of mind. Due to the unity in their transformations and the singularity of their inherent nature, just as gold, clay, and similar substances possess the same underlying reality despite their different forms, all effects are unified in their essence. And because of this, the ultimate cause of all effects is the one Ultimate Lord, who is the Ultimate Self, the ultimate reality.”

The word tattva literally means that-ness. All the various modifications of an entity are the various that-s which can be connected by the oneness, the -ness of the entity, to keep it the same entity. Despite the differences in characteristics and times of an entity, their oneness allows them to be included into the that-ness of the entity. For example, a tree modifies over time – as that seedling, that small tree, that large tree, that fallen tree – but its treeness remains. Despite the differences in characteristics, places, and times of multiple entities, their oneness allows them to be included into the that-ness of the entity, for example, trees range in characteristics, places, and times – as that spruce tree, this pine tree here, that pine tree over there, or that tree back then – but their treeness remains.

Now let us connect the simple analysis of this sūtra to the topics that have come before, such as in sūtra 3.55 where we saw that the śuddhi-sāmya (pure oneness) of everything and oneself (puruṣa) constitutes freedom (kaivalya).

An entity’s modification (pariṇāma) is nothing more than its form coming together in time and place. Entities are either thought-forms or their object-forms. The object-forms are themselves either entirely subtle or a combination of subtle and physical. Each is just a form, a modification, to which we give a particular name, as well as call each in general an entity. The reality or nature (tattva) of an entity is what makes the entity what it is. An entity can be said to be either indirectly (anupātin) its distinguishing form or characteristics, or directly (sva-rūpataḥ) the more subtle, more pervasive domain (dharmin, see sūtra 3.14) in which the form comes together.

For example, the reality or nature of a shirt can be said to be either the form or shape that qualifies as a shirt, or it could, more fundamentally, be the material basis of the form – here it would be the fabric. In the first case, the form of the entity and the shirt are one and the same thing. One particular form may be slightly or quite different from another particular form, but we may still call both forms a shirt. In this case, their oneness is what allows them both to be called a shirt. It is the broad oneness of the form that does not differ in the least in all the variations of the form to which we give the same name. But a shirt can be varied until it is not a shirt, such as being cut down to a handkerchief.

Even more fundamental in the oneness is its material basis, in this case the fabric. With its material basis present, a particular form can be called a shirt, but, without this basis present, the form or shape cannot exist at all. How can one have a shirt without its fabric? Can you think of a shirt without it being made of some kind of fabric or material? Without its material there can be no particular form for any entity. So whether as a particular form, for example, a shirt or skirt or handkerchief, or as a material basis of these various forms, for example, a fabric, the sense of oneness plays an essential role in defining an entity and its reality.

We give reality to whatever we perceive and conceive, and thus give a name to. Whatever the mind has not yet or cannot perceive, nor conceive, and we have not, to our knowledge, any name for it, is as well non-existent, not distinguishable as a separate entity. If such a perception or conception later comes to us, or we gain a name for it, we will at that time attribute reality to it. It was not non-existent before and now becomes existent as an entity we recognize and know. In our understanding of our attribution of reality, we understand that it existed before our perception or conception and our naming of it. The round earth was there even before we knew the earth to be round.

The entire world has a certain composite form and a given name, because of which it exists as an entity to us, as something having a separate reality. Many possible composites are not known as distinct entities. Perhaps we know what a table is and what chairs are, but we do not know they were made and intended to be taken as a particular dining room set. Once we understand the concept we can name it as a single entity. That composite form, forming a composite unit in our understanding, is the oneness of its modifications. The table and chairs themselves did not have to change to produce the new entity. Neither did their material wood or cellulose fibers or molecules have to change. Only our understanding had to change. This applies equally to scientific discoveries. Previously we knew it took varying amounts of effort to move an object. Now we recognize different aspects of that effort through the quantifiable scientific terms: inertia, acceleration, and momentum.

A composite may also change over time and still be considered a single composite entity. It is the oneness of our understanding of that continually modifying composite that alone allows it to remain as one entity to us, such as our body. Because of the different names we have for entities, though, we may call an entity that changes over time by an entirely different word. For example, a burning log becomes ash. We set a boundary to the oneness of that composite, that form, outside of which we call it a separate entity. For example, carbon in a certain form gains the name “8-caret 58-facet round-cut diamond.”

The important idea to note in all of this is that from oneness alone comes the attribution of reality. But the more fundamental, the more subtle and objective one’s appreciation of this oneness, then the more inclusive and closer to reality, to non-sub-ratable permanence, one gets.

The ultimate reality, which provides freedom from all sense of limitation, is the oneness of existence itself that unites all including time. This ultimate reality is the dharmin (domain) of all phenomena. Nothing can gain or lose that reality. Unlike the countless, mutable composites of this universe, this ultimate reality cannot change. There cannot exist anything else to cause it to change, nor can it change into anything else, since that anything else to affect it or to change into it could only be non-existence, and non-existence is just that – non-existent. This ultimate reality alone is the non-sub-ratable truth of myself, the universe, and God. Its importance is that in thoroughly understanding it to be, in fact, my reality, I am totally free.

This freedom is as non-sub-ratable as the reality itself, because that freedom is based solely on this certain, ultimate reality, not my or anyone else’s changeable opinions or theories. No New (or Old) Age theory can shake this certain clarity of ultimate understanding. Nor will there ever be a more valuable reality of myself or the universe, since this reality is, always was, and will be limitless and perfect.

Since all that can come by my perception, all entities of perception, are modifying composites, then the easiest and clearest understanding of the one ultimate, non-modifying oneness is not the objects, but myself alone. In my universe of common understanding, the only non-modifying oneness of my experience is the single witnessing conscious being, myself. Gaining clarity of oneself as the ultimate reality allows me, with the teaching, to include the entire universe of my experience within this reality. This is why the scripture, as a teaching methodology, says that one should seek this limitless reality
:: ‘अथ यद् इदम् अस्मिन् ब्रह्म-पुरे दहरं पुण्डरीकं वेश्म दहरः अस्मिन् अन्तर्-आकाशः तस्मिन्’ “[The teacher should say] ‘Now, in this city of brahman [i.e., the body with its nine gates, which are the seven sense openings in the head and the two lower openings in the bottom of the trunk, into which brahman has ‘entered’ as the self], there is this small lotus[-like] abode [i.e., the closed, downward pointing lotus-like heart/intellect, that needs opening, expansion], and in this is [as though] a small enclosed space.”
‘यद् अन्तः तद् अन्वेष्टव्यं तद् वाव विजिज्ञासितव्यम् इति॥’ “What is interior within that [heart/intellect] is that which is to be sought and indeed to be known.’”
'तं चेद् ब्रूयुः यद् इदम् अस्मिन् ब्रह्म-पुरे दहरं पुण्डरीकं वेश्म दहरः अस्मिन् अन्तर्-आकाशः किं तद् अत्र विद्यते यद् अन्वेष्टव्यं यद् वाव विजिज्ञासितव्यम् इति सः ब्रूयात्॥’ “If [the students] were to reply to him, ‘In this city of brahman, there is this small lotus[-like] abode, and in this is a small enclosed space, [then] what is that in this which is to be sought, and indeed to be known?’”
‘यावान् वै अयम् आकाशः तावान् एषः अन्तर्-हृदये आकाशः। उभे अस्मिन् द्यावा-पृथिवी अन्तः एव समाहिते॥’ “He should reply, ‘As much indeed as this space [outside], that much [and more, as it is totally limitless] is this space [i.e., in this imagery – is this brahman] in the inner heart [i.e., the inner core of the person, the heart and intellect of the person].”
‘उभौ अग्निः च वायुः च सूर्या-चन्द्रमसौ उभौ विद्युत् नक्षत्राणि। यद् च अस्य इह अस्ति यद् च न अस्ति सर्वं तद् अस्मिन् समाहितम्’ “In it are resolved (samāhita) within indeed both heaven and earth. Both fire and air, both the sun and the moon, the lightning, the stars, and all of this that is here and is not – is resolved in this.’” (Chāndogya Up. 8.1.1–3) ::
, in the center as the reality of one’s body-mind complex.

Many philosophies get stuck on statements such as this that talk of seeking the limitless reality in one’s heart. They come to the conflicted, and hence unsatisfactory, conclusion that there are a multitude of separate ultimate realities – one in each heart. The tradition that tells us to look inside is clear that the seeking, the looking, into the heart is to appreciate the one real thing that all are, whether that single reality be called the Lord or the ultimate self. When I look within there is only myself and no second thing with independent reality.

Moreover, that reality in the heart is said in the scriptures to be as vast as this entire universe. The many and separate can only come from preconceived notions, or, later, from philosophizing. The many and separate are just preconceived I-notions (asmitā) or otherness-notions (anyatā) to be given up (heya). With this mistake, no true freedom is possible, since the scripture warns that as long as one gives reality to duality there will be
:: ‘द्वितीयाद् (वस्तु-अन्तरात्) वै भयं भवति’ “Fear [including insecurity] arises [only] from a second thing [i.e., a thought or an object of thought].” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 1.4.2).
‘अ-सद् (=अ-विकृतं ब्रह्म) वै इदम् अग्रे आसीत्। ततः वै सद् (=विकृतं ब्रह्म) अजायत। तद् आत्मानं स्वयम् अकुरुत।’ “Existence unmanifest (a-sat) [i.e., brahman unmanifested] indeed was this [universe] in the beginning. From that arose existence manifested (sat) [i.e., brahman manifested as names and forms]. That [existence (brahman)] [as though] created itself.”
‘तस्मात् तत् सु-कृतम् उच्यते इति – यद् वै तत् सु-कृतम्। रसः वै सः। रसं हि एव अयं लब्ध्वा आनन्दी भवति।’ “Therefore, it is said to be perfectly created (su-kṛta, without a second thing required as an external factor or condition, thus it is self-manifesting, svayam-kṛta). That which is self-manifesting (su-kṛta) is indeed that essence (rasa) [of everything, of names and forms], because having attained this essence (rasa) one is full (ānandin) [i.e., this essence, being without a second, is an absence of fear and insecurity, and manifests as fullness and security alone – ānanda and sat].”
‘कः हि एव अन्यात् कः प्राण्यात्। यद् एषः आकाशः आनन्दः न स्यात्।’ “Since who [else than brahman] would breath in and who [else] would breath out, if this space [within oneself as one’s essence] be not fullness (ānanda) [that is this brahmansatyam jñānam anantam brahma]?”
‘एषः हि एव आनन्दयाति। यदा हि एव एषः एतस्मिन् अ-दृश्ये अन्-आत्म्ये अ-निरुक्ते अ-निलयने अ-भयं प्रतिष्ठां विन्दते।’ “Since this alone gives rise to fullness. Since, when this one discovers [one’s] being and absence of fear in this [brahman] which is not [a second object] seen, as bodiless, as not named [i.e., not a form having a name], and not having [any other] abode [than itself], then that one has attained [as not being separate from] fearlessness.”
‘अथ सः अ-भयं गतः भवति। यदा हि एव एषः एतस्मिन् उद् (=अपि) अरम् (=अल्पम्) अन्तरं कुरुते। अथ तस्य भयं भवति। तत् तु एव भयं (ईश्वरः अन्यः मत्तः अहम् अन्यः संसारी इयेवं-)विदुषः अ-मन्वानस्य’ [But, not finding this due to ignorance] when this one makes (kurute) [i.e., imagines] even the least difference (antara) in this [brahman (reality)], then there is fear of that [other thing, e.g., as God, as others, etc.]. But that [separate other, though being but brahman] indeed becomes a terror (bhaya) for one who [thus] knows without [properly] thinking.” (Taittirīya Up. 2.7.1) ::
– fear of being overpowered or shown up by the other, fear of being forced by another to change into something else, fear of losing one’s sense of self-identity, fear of death. In oneness alone there is truth, there is reality.

Contemplations from Science

Recent science can be taken as another source of cosmic meditations (upāsanas) for this teaching regarding the mind and oneness of reality. For example, in Brian Greene’s book, The Elegant Universe (pg. 46-51), he explains Hermann Minkowski’s and Einstein’s conception of space-time.

There are our common three dimensions of forward-sideward-vertical in space. In addition, there is a fourth dimension that is time, which we also move through; hence these four are together called space-time. This space-time is as ordinary as knowing that not only do we need to know where in space to meet a friend, but also where, that is, when, in time, to meet. The concept of space-time and its mathematical consequences became extremely useful, though, in physics and in understanding relativity.

In this space-time there is an interesting fact according to Einstein – we are always moving in this space-time at the same speed, the speed of light. If we stand perfectly still (which by the way we cannot since we are standing on this spinning, careening globe), we actually move in space-time at exactly the speed of light through the time dimension alone of space-time. If we additionally move through one or more of the other dimensions in space, the combination of the speed through all four dimensions will still only equal the speed of light.

This is why the faster or slower we travel through dimensions of space the slower or faster, respectively, we move through time. And that is why a photon of light speeding through space at the speed of light actually stands still in time – it never ages. That is why we can today perceive the photons created just after the big bang, billions of years ago. The photon, from its perspective, has not gotten a second older.

Moreover, as a whole within this space-time, since it includes at once every moment of time (like three dimensional space includes within it every location at once), there absolutely (totally, cosmically) cannot absolutely be any change or movement within the space-time continuum. Everything that ever was or will be is right here now in space-time. It is only when our mind takes a relative perspective to distinguish time from space that we can conceive of change, of movement, between moments of time. That is a step down from the more absolute, and more accurate, knowledge of space-time that Einstein points to. The relative perspectives are brought about by the natural makeup of the human mind that deals with information from the senses and is conditioned by one’s identification with itself and its states.

With this understanding of space-time, we can now do a thought-experiment. To our mind, the three dimensions of space exist in their entirety as the currently unfolded universe while the fourth dimension of time only makes its appearance to our mind as an infinitely short slice in the present moment – perhaps because the mind is really just one thought after another thought, each one directly perceiving only the moment, or the only moment. Now, see if you can conceive, perceive, that fourth dimension as having the same quality of being simultaneously present, as the other three dimensions. That makes all of space-time one fully present occurrence. This would be the mind, if it had one, of the first (age-less) photon.

Now imagine a mind that exists before, during, and after every cycle of creation. For that one mind, the current universe and its entire occurrence is but one moment, one ageless thought. Normally, we have a sense of time that is limited and that sees a beginning for creation. Stretch that sense from where there is not one creation to where there is only the uncreated, timeless reality. With that sense of time, see the one cosmic mind as holding simultaneously all the thoughts of past, present, and future universes as but one present occurrence, one ageless thought in this multiverse, space-time continuum.

Only the uncreated, limitless mind of the Lord could be this pervasive. This is why this teaching tradition says the Lord is sarva-jña (all-knowledge) and sarva-śaktimat (all-power), in full recognition of the beginningless cycles of the universe. That is also why the entire universe’s complicated karma sequence could be so effortlessly accomplished by the Lord – said to be
:: ‘अस्य महतः भूतस्य निश्वसितम् एतद् यद् ऋग्-वेदः यजुर्-वेदः साम-वेदः अथर्व-अङ्गिरसः इति-हासः पुराणं विद्याः (=देव-जन-विद्याः) उपनिषदः श्लोकाः सूत्राणि अनुव्याख्यानानि व्याख्यानानि इष्टं हुतम् आशितं पायितम् अयं च लोकः परः च लोकः सर्वाणि च भूतानि’ “As the breath of this limitless being [brahman, reality] are the Ṛg-Veda, Yajur-Veda, Sāma-Veda, Atharva-Veda, Iti-hāsa (epics), Purāṇa (legends), vidyā (arts), Upaniṣads, ślokas (verses), sūtras (aphorisms), vyākhyānas (commentaries) and their anuvyākhyānas (explanations), iṣṭa (rituals), hutam āśita (ritual food) and pāyita (drink offerings), this loka (world) and the other, and all beings.”
‘अस्य एव एतानि सर्वाणि निश्वसितानि’ “All these are the breath of this [brahman, reality] alone.” (Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Up. 4.5.11) ::
. To the Lord it is no more than a thought. Not a thought starting everything off. That one thought is but this entire beginningless, cyclic universe, from beginningless beginning to endless end in total. Consider how easily you do something as complicated as driving a car, particularly a stick shift in traffic. The Lord has the capacities to accomplish the entire order of karma and nature effortlessly. We do the same, even though not so well, in our own dream worlds.

This space-time thought-experiment amounts to the same understanding of the present moment as the timeless reality contemplations this ancient tradition teaches.

Now, as this teaching unfolds, you are this Lord. This has already been indicated in the fact that all of the past and future exists only in the presence one is. The present of this presence is the same as the timeless present of that age-less photon. Within that present, the entire age and breadth of the universe is traversed. Do you still think you are limited?

This thought-experiment, this contemplation, expands the individual’s mind, expands thought, to the degree that the teaching suggests, to reality-awareness itself. At this comprehension, the mind, thought itself, does not limit and is true to its very reality, to limitless existence-knowledge called brahman (satyam jñānam an-antam brahman).

The expanded thought itself, the experience of the thought-experiment, is not limitless reality. Rather, the expanded thought does not obstruct the limitless reality of oneself that clearly reveals itself as one’s very nature. This expanded space-time presence, in which the flow of time disappears and the remoteness of space vanishes, is but the presence, the reality-awareness, of the reader of this book right now. This is the oneness of everything that includes oneself. This is the vision of this teaching.

Since this vision is an acknowledgement of reality itself, it is neither simply the thought about it nor the thought-experiment itself. The vision is an acknowledgement of reality no matter what thoughts occupy the mind. This cosmic vision remains while washing the dishes or laying down for a nap. In assimilated knowledge, all experiences are assimilated from this understanding so that any passing notion of smallness or otherness fails to obscure one’s fullness, one’s ānanda. One does not have to continually do this thought-experiment, or any of the contemplations in this text, to remain in fullness. It is rather that any stray or unresolved limiting ego thought is unable to effect a real sense of limitation, a loss of freedom. Those stray ego thoughts are like toasted seeds unable to take root in a soil of ignorance that is now gone. This is the factual oneness of everything including oneself.

The objects of the universe, including the thoughts that make up the mind, are the modifications (pariṇāmas) in the universe. Their oneness (ekatva) is the limitless, immutable consciousness-being.


 
←PrevNext→
[sāmya – oneness (YS.4.14 & 2.22); vastu – entity; bheda – different; cittas – thoughts; vibhakta – separate; panthan – path; tayoḥ – for the two.]

वस्तु-साम्ये वस्तुनः एकत्वे यदि अपि सति, चित्त-भेदात् एक-वस्तौ अन्-एक-चित्त-वृत्तीनां भेदात् तयोः वस्तुनः चित्त-वृत्तेः च विभक्तः भिन्नः पन्थाः व्यक्ति-कर्म-मार्गः वस्तु-निमित्त-मार्गः चित्त-वृत्ति-मार्गः च भिन्नौ, तस्मात् वस्तुनः चित्त-वृत्तीनां पृथक्-रूपत्वं व्यवहार-सत्तात्वम् इत्यर्थः॥ –
“Even though there is unity in the essence of the object, due to the differences in the mind, a single object gives rise to various thoughts (vṛttis). These thoughts follow separate paths: one path is via the individual’s karma (his or her action, or karma phala), another is via the object, and another is via the mind’s thought itself. Hence, worldly existence (vyavahāra-sattā) has different forms of objects and thoughts.”

From this sūtra onwards, the reality of entities is analysed to their fundamental basis, and certain philosophies about the reality of entities are dismissed in the process.

Path here simply means its own unique karma track, its modification path, that brought the object or the thought into manifestation as a single, separate entity. This sūtra denies that, even though the reality of an object is known from our thought of it, the entity is the same (sāmya) as the thought itself. That would amount to solipsism, thinking the world is only thoughts without there being any objects external to these thoughts. We continue to distinguish between the thoughts and the objects external to these thoughts. This distinction allows the student a universe that is not the private domain of his or her thoughts.

The teaching tradition here moves the student from subjectivity, from the sense of me and mine, to objectivity. It emphasizes acknowledgment of the Lord as presented in the preceding sūtras. That Lord is more than any one mind, and every mind is the Lord. The Lord stands as the objective universe which includes this body, the mind, and all that is external to the body. Within the common, external reality of this universe are all the common values. This can provide a helpful sense of dharma, of duty to this interconnected order within this objective reality. With this understanding the student can discover the truth of the ordered universe and the ultimate reality that is freedom.

Despite an entity being considered only one entity existing in time, we clearly can have many thoughts of it, and there may be many different minds having thoughts of it (YS.2.22). Since the entity exists separately from any one of these thoughts or minds, as can be seen from their karma tracks that bring them into manifestations at different times, for different lengths of time, and in different locations, then the entity and the many thoughts of it are not one and the same thing.

Objective experience has two components: the thought as my thought, and the thought’s object as an object of the world. To the extent that my mind has a limited perspective, the thought has its peculiar, limited karma track. To the extent that the object contacted has its own separate karma track, then my thought does not determine that object, though it determines how I experience the object.

My thought’s karma track is included in what I call my karma. However, the object’s karma track is separable from my karma. I know what’s mine, and I know what is other. This framing of the distinction of my thought from its object is a common sense understanding, quite unlike solipsism which can brook no distinction between the two.

External objects exist for the very reason that we all perceive them as external and we always have – not because some philosophy has convinced us, or convinced us otherwise. Moreover, we clearly recognize the different characteristic of perceptions of external objects from the characteristic of perceptions of dream objects or imaginations. For these refutations of solipsism see Śaṅkara’s Brahma-Sūtra-Bhāṣya 2.2.28-32.

This tradition accepts the common sense understanding of the nature of things in the world. But it also says that a fuller understanding is beneficial. No object or entity can categorically be defined as only one thing. We have seen how there are a variety of perspectives from which to view and redefine anything. The distinction between thought and the object of thought is an acceptable and common perspective. However, we must also understand that this distinction is not categorical; it is just a perspective – an idea expressed in so many words. A more universal perspective still remains that both a thought and its object are but a mere name (nāmadheya).

The understanding of vyāvahārika (transactional) reality, where an object is not equal to a thought, needs to include the appreciation that all of both prātibhāsika (imaginary or projected) and vyāvahārika (transactional) realities are but names and forms (nāma-rūpas).


 
←PrevNext→
[na ca – nor; vastu – object; tantra – dependent; eka-citta – single thought; tadā kiṃ syāt – were that ever to be the case; tad – that; a-pramāṇaka – never have a means of knowing.]

न च एक-चित्त-तन्त्रम् एक-वस्तु न च वस्तु स्वस्य एक-चित्त-वृत्तिः एव इत्यर्थः, तद् एवं-भूतं वस्तु अ-प्रमाणकं स्व-तन्त्र-प्रमा-करण-रहितं तदा किं स्यात्, यस्मात् पश्चात् इत्थंभूत-प्रमाण-चित्तं स्वस्य-विषयम् एव न तु पूर्व-वस्तु-विषयम्॥ –
“A single object is not the same as a specific, single mind, nor is it the same as a specific, single thought. Such an object would be without a valid independent means of knowing it (a-pramāṇaka). Then how can that be? Because a mind or knowledge-thought would then only pertain to knowledge of itself, but it would not pertain to any previous object (any prior mind or thought for its validation).”

Some say let the sameness of an entity be only its sameness to the one thought of it. If there are multiple thoughts of it, then they would each be separate entities. They say we just imagine that these separate object-thoughts are the same entity, that they have any commonality. Those imaginations themselves are each separate thoughts that exist only when they occur also. This is the philosophy of universal momentariness or impermanence – that there are only discrete momentary object thoughts that we erroneously connect. They say that makes any connection between them erroneous as well. There is then no domain, no basis, no reality in which or by which these discrete moments exist in commonality.

Such a philosophy, though, lacks any means of knowing anything. If realities are momentary and their connection is illusory, then one could have no thought of a preceding thought by which to prove the first thought true or not. If one believed there could be a thought that proved or verified a preceding thought, then such a belief in a proof or verification as really connected in any way to the preceding would itself be, by their definition, an imagination. The only proof of the truth of a thought would be the single, isolated thought in itself.

Were that the case, every single thought would necessarily be true. There could be no such thing as an untrue thought. This is not only unacceptable in common sense, it renders the term ‘true’ to be meaningless, without its opposite being possible. The philosopher of universal momentariness has condemned his or her own philosophy to not being meaningfully true. Moreover, every philosophy, every possible statement, that can ever be made would necessarily be meaninglessly true. In point of fact, according to their thinking there could be no valid statement of any thing, since any statement made of separate syllables and words would then itself be an erroneous connection of moments involved in making the statement. Meaningful statements themselves would be impossible, if not just imaginations.

Most commentaries or translations of this sūtra take the word citta to here mean a mind, rather than a single thought. Reading citta as mind makes the sūtra say that if an object were totally dependent upon only one mind then there would be no means of (provably) knowing that object. This is also untenable, since these same commentators and translators would then be stuck by their own logic into acknowledging that only what more than one mind perceives is objectively real and knowable (or at least provable). Every thought and feeling in my mind is in fact known to my mind; many objects and events in my life are seen only by me. These would then become unknown and unreal, or at least improvably true, by their logic here.

Universally experienced timeless awareness is in fact the basis of knowing what is in my own mind. No other mind is required for me to know what is in my mind. Even the thoughts that are imagination exist and are known by me. Whether they are an imagination or not depends on the nature of their content, not the thoughts’ reality or unreality or whether only I see it or others do too.

Some translators try to fix up their interpretation by giving a weaker meaning to pramāṇaka, calling it a perception instead of its clear meaning as a means of knowing. They take this sūtra as saying that an object cannot depend on one mind (citta) because that object would be non-existent when not perceived (pramāṇaka). But the momentarians would gladly accept this outcome. This interpretation does nothing to encourage the momentarians to drop their claim. While the previous sūtra answered the solipsists who say that entities are but the individual minds or individual thoughts, this sūtra answers the momentarians in a way the previous sūtra did not.

There are Buddhist interpretations of these Yoga Sūtras that ignore the subtle yet crucial differences between Buddhism and the Veda tradition. There are differences in terms of world views, the nature of the mind, and of the self. Patañjali’s tradition is that of the Veda. The Veda view is of verifiable commonsense objectivity and positive unconditional wholeness. The current Buddhist trends are to a Zen nothingness, an emptiness that is meaningless in light of consciousness as presented here.

Though Patañjali expresses a particular point of view about the efficacy of contemplation, the Veda tradition rests on and recognizes what is true in every way of thinking. Vaguely it may be said that all religions say the same thing, but how they each help the individual is quite different. This Vedānta and yoga tradition is neither a religion nor a philosophy. It is an inquiry into the reality of the world and of the self that reshapes one’s entire perspective of the world and oneself. It is not just a part-time respite from daily life. It is employed as a means of knowledge regarding all aspects of life – not a pure belief system. Commonsense and logic are not thrown out in assisting this inquiry.

True
:: ‘कामैः तैः तैः हृत-ज्ञानाः प्रपद्यन्ते अन्य-देवताः। तं तं नियमम् आस्थाय प्रकृत्या नियताः स्वया॥’ “Those whose discrimination has been robbed away by various [heavenly or worldly] requirements and are ruled by their own disposition worship various deities, following various stipulations [per the appropriate deity to fulfill each particular requirement].”
‘यः यः यां यां तनुं भक्तः श्रद्धयार्चितुम् इच्छति। तस्य तस्य अ-चलां श्रद्धां ताम् एव विदधामि अहम्॥’ “Whoever be the devotee and to whichever [limited] form [of Mine] one wishes to worship with faith – for that one, the very same faith I make firm [by giving the result of the devotee’s action].”
‘सः तया श्रद्धया युक्तः तस्याः (देवतायाः) राधनम् ईहते। लभते च ततः कामान् मया एव विहितान् हि तान्’ “That one, endowed with that faith, engages in the worship of that [deity, that limited form of Me] and obtains from that [deity] those desired objects – because those are ordained by Me alone [in the form of the laws of karma].” (Bh. Gītā 7.20–22) ::
is an acknowledgement that everyone is variously mistaken about reality, until reality is clearly known by individuals. All are appropriately blessed to the level of profundity of their beliefs. Mistaken, limited views and conclusions keep the student from a full emotional growth and clear knowledge of limitless reality. Beliefs do not need to cause one to judge others, to practice intolerance, or to try to convert others. In the course of time, perhaps over a number of births, any person can come to the vision of the oneness of reality that accommodates peacefully all differences. This is true, universal allowance (upekṣa).

The oneness of reality is not the destruction of differences. It is seeing the subtle oneness that brings everyone and everything together, even while appreciating and enjoying the varieties, including the different perceptions of those varieties.


 
←PrevNext→
[apekṣitva – requirement; tad-uparāga – its influence; citta – mind [or thought]; vastu – object; jñāta – known; a-jñāta – unknown.]

तद्-उपराग-अपेक्षित्वात् चित्तस्य यस्मात् चित्त-वृत्तेः वस्तु-अनुरूप-परिणामेन अपेक्षित्वं, वस्तु तद्-परिणत-चित्तस्य वृत्त्या ज्ञात-अ-ज्ञातं ज्ञातं भवति अथवा अ-ज्ञातं यदि अ-परिणतं चित्तं स्यात्॥ –
“Due to a requisite change of the mind, that is, through a requisite knowledge-thought (vṛtti) that corresponds to the object, the object, through the change of the mind, becomes known or unknown. If the mind is unchanged (i.e., not in the appropriate state), then the object remains unknown.”

A single object in the wide field of one’s perception-thought, like a single face in the crowd, may be immediately known or remain unknown depending on whether or not that single object in the entire vision had yet distinctly drawn the attention and thus distinctly affected the mind. Only when an object within the perception-thought makes its own distinct change to the mind does the existence of the object become known.

This becomes another problem for the universal momentarians to explain, because the object not only has to be within the thought, it also has to distinctly influence or affect the mind or the thought in order for that particular object knowledge to be included in the entire perceptual knowledge. Universal momentarians do not permit such a two-step or heterogeneous process.

This relative argument by Patañjali is no more than a light jab at the even more relative solipsist or momentarian opponents to set up the absolute knockout punch in the next sūtra. Knowledge, it will be said, is neither the mind nor the modified mind. The mind, the thought, itself can only be known by the self, the witness. And the self alone is ultimately what knowledge is. The mind, the thought, is only a particular form of that knowledge, though it does not change the self, the very nature of the knower (jñātṛtva). The mind is a known object; it is neither the knower nor knowledge itself.


 
←PrevNext→
[a-pariṇāmitva
:: ‘एकः देवः सर्व-भूतेषु गूढः सर्व-व्यापी सर्व-भूत-अन्तर-आत्मा। कर्म-अध्यक्षः सर्व-भूत-अधिवासः साक्षी चेता केवलः निर्-गुणः च’ “The one (eka) shining being (deva) is the one who is [as though] hidden in all beings, pervading all as the self (ātman) within all beings, the seer (adhyakṣa) of [all] activities, the inhabitant (adhivāsa) of all beings, the witness (sākṣin), the knower (cetṛ), complete (kevala), and without attributes (nir-guṇa).” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 6.11).
‘अन्-आदित्वान् निर्-गुणत्वात् परम-आत्मा अयम् अ-व्ययः। शरीर-स्थः अपि कौन्तेय न करोति न लिप्यते’ “O Arjuna, since it is beginningless and since it is without attributes (nir-guṇa), this changeless (a-vyaya), limitless I (parama-ātman) does not do action – even though obtaining in the body, nor is it affected [by the results of action].” (Bh. Gītā 13.31) ::
; puruṣa – self; tad-prabhu – its
:: ‘महान् प्रभुः वै पुरुषः सत्त्वस्य एषः प्रवर्तकः’ “The puruṣa is indeed the limitless Master (prabhu, the Lord); it is the prime mover (pravartaka) of the real (sattva, all entities including the mind).” (Śvetāśvatara Up. 3.12).
‘गतिः भर्ता प्रभुः साक्षी’ “The goal, the nourisher, the Lord (prabhu), and the witness (sākṣin) [are Me (the Lord)].” (Bh. Gītā 9.18) ::
; vṛttis – thoughts; citta – mind; sadā – always; jñāta – known.]

सदा तु एव ज्ञाताः चित्त-वृत्तयः, तद्-प्रभोः चित्त-प्रभोः पुरुषस्य अ-परिणामित्वात् वृत्ति-ज्ञाने पुरुष-चैतन्यं निर्-आयासेन वृत्ति-प्रकाशकं न एव परिणमते, यथा राज-शक्ति-सन्निधौ एव राज-सेवकाः कुर्वन्ति॥ –
“Rather the thoughts (vṛttis) of the mind are always known. Since the puruṣa (the self), the ultimate controller of the mind and of thoughts is not subject to change (a-pariṇāmitva), the consciousness (caitanya) of the puruṣa, which effortlessly illuminates the thoughts, does not itself change. Just as the royal servants perform their duties while simply being in the presence of the power of their king.

Unlike the mind sometimes not distinctly reflecting an individual item in a perceptual field of many items, the puruṣa, who is pure awareness, is always aware of every thought in its entirety. The self is the unblinking witness (a-lupta-dṛk) of the mind. Awareness does not have to be affected by something for that thing to be witnessed. Awareness does not change. This is why it can recognize every moment, every change, of thought. A thought has a form and has to distinctly change in order to reflect its object. That is why we sometimes miss the recognition of an object within a thought.

We are fuzzy in certain thoughts or parts of a thought, because the content of those thoughts are indistinct in their form, whether visual or in their language. For example, a friend’s face in the periphery of a crowd may not catch the notice of my mind until the mind focuses towards that face; or, for example, the language of a particular thought may be vague or in doubt when answering a pop quiz.

Awareness is the reality within which comes and goes every thought, whose content is manifest (the conscious mind) or unmanifest (the unconscious mind, the saṃskāras), is completely or partially fuzzy, or is mostly or fully clear. The unconscious mind is known only as an assumption from the manifest effects in the mind.

Awareness is also timeless and thus unaffected by time, because time itself is just one type of notion that itself comes and goes. Time is there for you only when you think about it. It is because awareness provides this timeless, unaffected background that the changing mind can reflect on its memories of the past and consider the future. The background also allows us to recollect dreamless sleep, where the conscious mind itself was asleep.

Awareness is ever fresh and shining. It is only the mind and body that can become dull and sleepy, or does not focus on every detail in its perceptions. Awareness is ever aware of the states (dull, sleepy, and etcetera) and the thoughts of the mind. Not having to change in order to be ever awareful makes its witnessing effortless. It does not therefore perform an act of witnessing the mind; rather, the self is itself the effortless witnessing.

The puruṣa is also called the master (prabhu), since it is not because of the mind. The mind is because of the puruṣa. In other words, the self is independent; the mind is dependent. The self, reality, exists whether there is a mind or not. The mind neither exists nor is known without reality, without the self.

This runs counter to the common Western notion that consciousness is a product, an effect of the brain. These Western notions of consciousness are not the consciousness being talked about here. In fact, their notions of what thought is and what consciousness is also fall to the same logical fallacies as the other philosophical notions of thought and mind discussed in the sūtras that follow.

This sūtra is for presenting the self, the witness, as the only self-revealing reality, though we may erroneously believe the mind, the thoughts, to be self-revealing. This error is simply misidentifying thoughts with oneself.

Being ever self-revealing, the self cannot submerge or surface, like a submarine, from the mind or the brain. The confusion of a self, the seer, surfacing to comprehend itself when the thoughts in the mind die away in samādhi is completely ungrounded in this teaching, in the teaching of the scripture behind this text.


 
←PrevNext→
[na – nor; tad – it; sva-ābhāsa – self-revealing; dṛśyatva – it has the nature of being seen.]

न तद् चित्तं स्व-आभासं सर्व-स्व-वृत्ति-रूप-आभासं, दृश्यत्वात् यस्मात् ज्ञातम् अ-ज्ञातम् अपि च व्यक्तम् अ-व्यक्तम् अपि च दृश्यं, यथा सर्व-अन्य-वस्तूनि॥ –
“The mind (and its thought) is not self-luminous, because it has the nature of an object of perception. If it is manifest to us it is known, if unmanifest to us it is unknown, like any other external object.”

This argument may not be very convincing on the face of it. In some explanations it amounts to a circular argument, because the reason given for something not being self-revealing is that it is because it is seen, and the reason that this is so is because the seen needs to be seen because it is not self-revealing – not very edifying.

The better argument is that because the mind, including the Westerners’ concept of mind, is an ever-changing composite, then it cannot be the one consistent knower of itself and everything around, which we obviously take ourselves to be. But we can gain some clarity here in the argument as it is given, by clarifying the terminology and the intent of the argument.

Self-revealing is not the equivalent of self-luminous. Any source of light is self-luminous. But here we are not talking of a source of light waves whose waves of light are illumining other parts of that same light generator, like a light bulb. We are instead talking of knowing, and this knowing has to amount to the completeness of knowledge in our universe of understanding. Since we are saying that there is only one self-revealing entity, and since everything else including the mind is an insentient object, then that one entity that reveals everything else including itself has to explain every bit of what knowledge is, not just part of it.

Now, if the mind is the one self-revealing entity by which all is known, then it has to stand up to a test it cannot pass. The mind is not self-revealing as it does not completely know itself, much less everything else. This is why it has an unconscious aspect that is not known to it, and why some of its memories are not available when you want them, but reappear when you do not. The mind is, in fact, not other than just another object in the world that is as well not completely known. Our vaunted sciences have to admit that there is no object in the universe that is completely known, since there will always be something more, and better to know, about any object.

Moreover, objectifying an object by the mind is really no more than reflecting the object of the thought – no more than the mind being modified, being affected, by an object. The mind appears to be a peculiar entity that has the ability to change in the presence of another object and even in the simple presence of itself. Knowledge itself is something that escapes our understanding, just like many deep secrets of nature escape the understanding of our sciences. Knowledge just happens; there is no satisfying explanation for what creates it.

However, this teaching takes a different approach to understanding knowledge. It says that knowledge is not created, and that is why its creation cannot be adequately explained. All that is really happening is that ignorance is removed. The mind is viewed as a special subtle, non-luminous matter that has this capacity to take the form of what is in the purview of the senses, including the ability to bring up memory forms from within itself. The consciousness in which these thoughts occur is the knowledge having that particular form the thought has (YS.4.22). Our notions, our thoughts, in the mind that we have about something may be dropped, replaced, or modified in this process of more clearly reflecting on some object or topic. That is, certain thoughts are sub-rated or dis-valued in this process.

It is also not that a new and better thought or notion is then the knowledge, since we know that this new notion may itself be improved when later the mind has gained a more exact form of its object. There are always new and better notions that express the exact form of the object, the real content of the knowledge that a notion is about. And that new and better notion is itself subject to correction in the near or distant future.

Knowledge is then really not something created anew here; rather, we only discover or uncover what is closer to reality. The closer to reality we get, the more we feel that we are getting closer to the truth, that we are gaining knowledge. The process of gaining knowledge is thus the mind losing its prior form, its prior modification, that was not or did not match the form of its object, which was the definition of error (viparyaya) given in the first chapter of these sūtras (1.8).

What this reveals is that it is actually reality itself that is the knowledge we are discovering. A word given in the Upaniṣads (scriptures) for the one reality that always exists is ‘jñāna’ – the one, unambiguous word for
:: ‘सत्यं ज्ञानम् अन्-अन्तं ब्रह्म’ “Brahman is limitless reality (satya), knowledge (jñāna).” (Taittirīya Up. 2.1.1) ::
. In other words, reality and knowledge are not in fact two separate things. What is actually being said when this teaching is talking about the self-revealing puruṣa is that the puruṣa alone is the reality. And if this is not obvious to you, then it is to be dis-covered.

All objects including the mind are essentially only this one self-revealing reality viewed from the limited perspective of their form and the name we give to them. These individual names and forms, being impermanent, cannot be the single witness of all their mutations. This is why this teaching says that this reality is the sole source of knowledge, because it is knowledge itself. It is what reveals itself to us in our mind, and reveals all names and forms by way of the thought forms that make up the mind. Once the mind drops its ignorance, its erroneous notions, about this singular, limitless reality, then that is complete knowledge, that is oneself, that is reality.

Knowledge, oneself, and reality are one and the same. This alone is the self-revealing. Every object including the mind is revealed by this existence-knowledge, sat-cit, and is finally revealed as nothing but this limitless existence-knowledge. Knowledge of the self simply means the knowledge that is the self. This is the reason this knowledge alone is said to be ultimate, while every other knowledge, falling infinitely short of the limitless, is nothing more
:: ‘द्वे विद्ये वेदितव्ये इति ह स्म यद् ब्रह्म-विदः वदन्ति परा च एव अ-परा च’ “There are two types of knowledge to be known, say those who know scripture – unlimited (para) and limited (a-para).” (Muṇḍaka Up. 1.1.4) ::
subject to correction, to sub-ration.

This
:: ‘ज्ञानं ज्ञानवताम् अहम्’ “I [the Lord] am the knowledge (jñāna) among those who have knowledge.” (Bh. Gītā 10.38) ::
being-consciousness is otherwise called the Lord, the total. This reality, this Lord, is not a thing to be believed or dis-believed, like a God sitting in heaven to be believed or not. It is what is to be known directly as the reality of oneself. As you cannot believe or dis-believe the reality of your own self, so you cannot believe or dis-believe the Lord, this reality of everything. Knowing the Lord completely is not knowing completely about the Lord – only the mind of the Lord contains all details of all times. It is instead knowing the Lord freely, free of any limitation. Indeed, knowing oneself freely, free of any limitation, is knowing reality freely, and is the same as knowing the Lord freely.

If you ask why the self needs to be uncovered if it is self-revealing, we agree! Why don’t you know yourself as limitless? If you do not fully know yourself, then it must be because of ignorance.

Because of ignorance, everyone projects one mistake after another upon the self – “I am mortal,” “I am unhappy,” and so on. These projections of ignorance are a covering (kośa) that only covers because it is believed to be real. Once revealed as untrue, that cover is no longer there. This means there really never was a cover, just like there never was a snake in our snake-rope error example that covered the rope. Or, like a cloud does not actually cover the sun. In fact, it is the sun that reveals, that lights up, the cloud also. Like the cloud, ignorance can only block the full appreciation of knowledge, of reality, from the mind’s perspective. And the ignorance itself is lit by that knowledge, the awareness that you are.

Like that, the self reveals even our ignorant notions of our self. Every ignorant notion shines in our knowledge of them. This allows the problem, as well as the solution. The self, being self-revealing, is already completely known as reality-awareness – “I am, and I am aware I can think and not think.” But in addition we also impose our ignorant notions which then limit reality, limit oneself, limit knowledge – “I am limited.” The solution, the process of gaining self-knowledge, is to recognize and dismiss the notions as being myself. The notions, like the clouds, do not have to disappear; they only have to be acknowledged as notions, as not the truth, like knowing clouds as clouds, not as the sun. This alone is freedom from their limitations.


 
←PrevNext→
[ca – and; eka-samaya – same moment; an-avadhāraṇa – no ascertainment; ubhaya – both.]

एक-समये सम-काले च उभय-अन्-अवधारणं स्व-वृत्ति-रूपस्य स्व-वस्तु-रूपस्य च उभयोः न अवधारणं, यथा ‘अयं घटः’ इति ‘इयं घट-वृत्तिः’ इति च वृत्ती॥ –
“At the same moment, the perception of both – the thought itself and its object is not possible, such as in the form ‘This is a thought of a pot’ and ‘This is the pot.’”

Another reason the mind is not self-revealing is because a thought is always of whatever the content of that thought is. At the same time, a single thought has either the content, the form, of an object external to the thought form, for example, “this is a big dog,” or it has the content, the form, of the thought itself, for example, “this thought is of a big dog.” But they do not coexist at the same time.

If thought was self-revealing, it would never lose this nature of revealing itself in every thought. But this is not our experience. Only sometimes are we aware of, is our attention on, the thoughts themselves, our thinking of an object. Therefore the mind itself cannot be inherently self-revealing, though it occasionally is self reflecting. That self reflecting of the mind is only taking a form or shape of itself or, rather, of a recollection of itself in memory, for example, “that was a big dog yesterday that I saw.” In either case, thought is not itself, even then, the awareness, the knowledge, of itself, nor is it objectifying the awareness.

The self illumines only by being the reality of the form of the subtle entity called the mind, which in turn simply reflects, simply encompasses, the form of the object that is its content.

Some translators take the term ‘both’ here to refer to both the object and the self, instead of the object and the thought/mind. They believe the sūtra says that at the same moment there is no ascertainment of both the object and the self. But the ascertainment of the object and the self, in fact, is what actually does happen. In every perception there is both the form (the object) seen and the knowledge that is the existence, that is oneself. It is just that this knowledge, that is oneself, is mixed up with, and thus appears limited by, the form seen.

An example of the form of a perception is – “This is a pot.” The name and form of the object is expressed here as “this pot,” a specific form (the ‘this’) of clay to which we give the name ‘pot,’ whereas the existence is expressed here as ‘is.’ Reality, expressed as ‘is,’ is there in every perception. Pot is. Shirt is. Table is. Absence of a table is. Thought is. Lack of thought is. I am. Every thing and its absence is-is-is.

This recognition of ‘is’ in every cognition is what the self-revealing of is-ness means. It is why reality is self-revealing, all the time, in
:: ‘(ब्रह्म सत्यं) प्रति-बोध-विदितं मतम्, अ-मृतत्वं हि विन्दते’ “It [brahman (reality)] is [rightly] known [when] it is known in every cognition [as ‘is-is-is,’ as ‘existence-existence-existence’], because [by that knowledge] one attains the nature of being free from death.” (Kena Up. 2.4) ::
. For more on this, one can see Śaṅkara’s Bhagavad-Gītā-Bhāṣya 2.16.

The translation of the term ‘both’ as the object and the self is the siddhānta (what is to be established), not what is to be denied by the sūtra. Several of the commentators and translators seem confused here. Their confusion may be more a matter of not knowing the scriptures, or not taking the scriptures as the inherent background of these sūtras.


 
←PrevNext→
[dṛśya – object; citta-antara – another thought; ati-prasaṅga – over necessity; buddhis – cognitions; buddhis – cognitions; ca – and; saṅkara – confusion; smṛtis – memories.]

चित्त-अन्तर-दृश्ये अपर-चित्त-वृत्त्या पूर्व-चित्त-वृत्तेः दृश्ये यदि अपि सति, बुद्धि-बुद्धेः अपर-बुद्धि-वृत्त्या पूर्व-बुद्धि-वृत्तेः अति-प्रसङ्गः अन्-अन्त-वश्यकता, न कदा-चिद् का-चिद् वृत्तिः ज्ञाता इत्यर्थः, स्मृति-सङ्करः प्रमाण-वृत्तित्वेन स्मृति-वृत्ति-सङ्करः (YS.1.7 & 11), न च अपि का-चिद् स्मृतिः ज्ञाता इति अति-प्रसङ्गात् ॥ –
“Even supposing a thought (vṛtti) requires a following thought to see it, then there would be an over necessity (ati-prasaṅga) of knowledge-thoughts (buddhis, pramāṇa-thoughts) of knowledge-thoughts. That is, it would be an infinite progression of dependences (an-anta-vaśyatā), leading to the impossibility of recognizing any single thought as known. Moreover, this is a confusion (saṅkara) of knowledge-thoughts with memories (YS.1.7 & 11). Nor could any memory thought ever exist (without its content being known) or even itself be known due to this same over necessity.”

Assuming that a thought is not self-revealing, if one argues that a thought must then require a following thought to reveal it, to see it, then there would be an over necessity of requiring a further thought to know the current one, since the current thought’s following thought would have not yet occurred. Therefore, this is a vicious logical error. The term ‘vicious’ in logic means the progression is such that none of the thoughts in the progression, each being dependent upon a latter being known, could ever be known. Namely, in the series of thoughts A-B-C-D…, A requires B to be known in order to know A, but B cannot be known until C is known, which cannot be known until D is known, ad infinitum. The whole series becomes impossible.

Since the current thought cannot be known until the next, the current thought’s knowledge of its preceding thought is not available. This is a progression to infinity. In other words, no knowledge would ever be available.

Any thought about a prior thought is, in fact, only a memory – not to be confused with a pramāṇa, a knowledge-thought such as a perception or an inference (YS.1.7 & 11).

Using the problematic logic that a thought can only be seen by another thought, a manifest memory, being just another thought, suffers the same vicious infinite progression. So there would be no memory that can be known.

Moreover, a current thought of a prior thought, could only be in the form of a memory of that prior thought, but that prior thought, not yet known, could not have generated a saṃskāra for the current mind to have a memory about it. So it is a confusion to think that there could even be memories for this endless series to continue.

Why all these nit-picking arguments? Since these questions and doubts are known to come to students and to those who hold to philosophies. The teaching is altogether willing to address any and all doubts because freedom is clarity in self-knowledge, and that clarity of knowledge has to be unshakable.

The scriptures were challenged by the Buddhist logicians prior to Patañjali, and these challenges had to be addressed. The reason they had to be addressed is because the challenges sought to erode the logic that supported the teaching’s removal of ignorance. A logic that supports, that props up, duality, even one that calls this duality emptiness, needs to be brought down in the light of knowledge that is freedom. That which is the underlying, permanent, self-revealing reality does not need support.

Any logic or philosophy that also holds that clarity in self-knowledge is only possible and available in a singular moment’s experience during samādhi, or otherwise, demands to be challenged. New experiences or epiphanies cannot be required if the self is always self-revealing, self-existing. We do not need to seek a new experience of the self; rather, we need the removal or dismissal of limiting notions. And that cannot be for just a moment, an epiphany, but needs to be permanent, needs to be sure knowledge.

It is easy to see that the popular world religions, even the popular forms within Hinduism, are grounded in emotions, thou-shalt rules, and beliefs. None talk about a physics of realities that points to a self-evident truth that can be known without confusion. Their popularity, perhaps driven historically by their conversion practices and their economic and military force, is enhanced by their emphasis on emotions or beatific experiences, than on logic. Where do most people spend their spare change? They spend on emotional entertainment, even if it is spiritual entertainment and inspiration, not on physics lectures. Thankfully, Indian thought, through their scriptures, was already well grounded in physics, which allowed its following entertainment arts (epics, legends, song, and dance) to play upon that reality-based stage.

This tradition recognizes the importance of a logical physics of reality to underpin their clarity in knowledge. It allows an unshakable freedom that does not have to hide from spiritual specialists, peddling their wares. This is the same reason, now that burning at the stake or stoning is more or less unpopular, why science today does not feel threatened by popular religious assaults to the claims of science – unless those claims overstep the bounds of their scientific experiments and logic.

The freedom sought here is an unshakable cognitive freedom, not an emotional freedom. An unshakable cognitive freedom will naturally be an emotional freedom too. The heart will be where one’s deepest convictions are. Convictions can only reside in clear, firm thought – this is buddhi (intellect). If the heart is not where the head is, or the head is not where the heart is, then this may be because one’s emotions are on bodily (chemically) driven autopilot, and/or one’s intellections are erroneous or are in conflict with each other.

Those spiritual gurus who propound that one should follow one’s heart instead of the head, or one’s head instead of the heart, are clearly misguiding. One’s heart and head should be inline with each other, since that is where their natural, healthy balance resides. The heart cannot be directly controlled, but the intellect can be corrected from error to knowledge. When that knowledge is true to the objective world, the emotional world, and to reality, then the heart will easily and fully follow. If you can imagine a teaching that has this as its goal and has been successful enough for a variety of generations to survive in retelling and in reprint for many thousands of years, then you are in fact looking at that teaching in these pages.

But that teaching is not easily and faithfully translated outside of its Sanskrit source. This makes its availability rare, but, then, so too is the student who can fathom its depth. Freedom filled knowledge within an unshakable cognitive freedom, and its logic, should become common sense to the student, though it may be an uncommon knowledge to others.


 
←PrevNext→
[a-pratisaṃkrama – unchanging; citi – consciousness; saṃvedana – knowledge; sva-buddhi – its cognition; āpatti – take; tad-ākāra – the form of that.]

चितेः अ-प्रतिसंक्रमायाः अ-परिणाम-चैतन्यस्य (YS.4.18) सर्व-व्यापक-सत्-चितः च अपि तद्-आकार-आपत्तौ चित्त-वृत्ति-रूप-व्याप्तौ सत्यां स्व-बुद्धि-संवेदनं स्व-वृत्ति-ज्ञानम्॥ –
“The unchanging consciousness (citi) (YS.4.18), though not subject to change, takes the form of the thought, (seemingly) as consciousness is present everywhere (sarva-vyāpaka-sat-cit). It is what has the cognition (saṃvedana) of one’s knowledge-thoughts and any other thought.”

If it is neither the same cognition nor a following cognition that has the knowledge of the cognition because of the preceding reasons, then what has the knowledge?

It is consciousness (citi) that has knowledge. Here, ‘citi’ is the same as the previously used term, ‘cit’ (limitless consciousness). It is oneself that has knowledge. After all, I have the knowledge of what is in my mind – this is our common understanding of knowledge. We may say that knowledge takes place in the mind, but what actually happens is that knowledge is there wherever the mind is. This is because I myself am the knowledge, which gets expressed wherever there is a cognition form – for example, “table is,” “shirt is.”

Yet it is not the consciousness-I that is actively taking the form of the cognition (YS.4.18), since existence itself can neither move or change. Where could it move to? What could it change into, and from what? Apart from existence itself, there is no second thing. Only phenomenal forms can move, change into and from each other – all within existence. When these phenomenal forms are of the special nature of the subtle forms of thought, there itself is knowledge of these thoughts and their content. The presence of awareness throughout the thought form is the knowledge of the thought form.

As mentioned before, this does not need to happen inside the brain; it can happen wherever the cognition is while it takes its various forms – going out by way of the subtle outgoing senses, or not, if the senses are not in play for the thought form. In perceptual cognition, the thought takes the form of the external object as well as the distance to the object, and the awareness lights up that entire out-going thought form. However, this teaching is not dependent on this particular model of cognition. It is just that this model of cognition so well matches the analysis that shows us that everything is nāmadheya (name only). The language of thought itself is the form of the thought and the form of the experienced object, so the meanings of the names ‘external’ and ‘distance’ are the external distance we experience. The world is essentially all nothing more than this language of thought, the form or structure of thought.

These models of explanation are themselves, like everything within the universe, not categorically (a-nirvacanīya) right or wrong. The common sense model that better explains the entirety of the experience being explained is preferred. Common sense will side with the felt sense that our thoughts wander out amongst their objects, not inside the invisible wiring of our brains.

If one wants, one can limit the mind to within the body or the brain without here being in contradiction to this essential teaching. The model one chooses to analyse the world and its experience is just another form within existence-consciousness. The essence of this teaching is that I am limitless existence-consciousness and that every form of and in the universe does not divide this existence, hence makes no limitation in me. Whatever it takes to get to that understanding is acceptable. But it helps if it is a reasonable, common sense process, otherwise it might not complete. The more one’s common sense is fooled, the less one’s certainty can reign.


 
←PrevNext→
[citta – mind; uparakta – affected; dṛśya – seen; draṣṭṛ – witness; sarva – everything; artha – object.]

द्रष्टृ-दृश्य-उपरक्तम् अ-लुप्त-दृक्-सन्निधौ प्रकाशितं दृश्य-वस्तु-अनुरूप-परिणतं च चित्तं सर्व-अर्थं किम्-चिद् वस्तु जानीयात् इत्यर्थः॥ –
“When the seer (draṣṭā) and the seen (dṛśya) are both illuminated by the presence of the unblinking perceiver (dṛk), then the mind, which is transformed according to the nature of the seen object, knows everything as an object.”

The mind can take the form of any limited object within existence, and thus can gain knowledge therein of any form in existence. Your entire universe, up till now, is all the forms your mind has assumed in your life – through perception by way of the senses and the mind, through logic or scripture, and even through knowing what all you know you do not know. Even what you do not know is known well enough to confidently say that you do not know it. Through this teaching, even the self is there for your mind to comprehend, not as a limited object of the mind but as the very existence of the mind, as knowledge itself, and as the reality of
:: ‘जाग्रत्-स्वप्न-सुषुप्ति-आदि-प्रपञ्चं यद् प्रकासते। तद् ब्रह्म अहम् इति ज्ञात्वा सर्व-बन्धैः प्रमुच्यते॥’ “The one who lights up this expanse consisting of the waking, dream, and deep sleep, etc. [the heavens, etc.], that reality (brahman) am I [the parama-ātman, previously deluded by māyā (appearances) into thinking itself limited]. Knowing this, one is free from all binds.”
‘त्रिषु धामसु यद् भोग्यं भोक्ता भोगः च यद् भवेत्। तेभ्यः वि-लक्षणः साक्षी चिन्मात्रः अहं सदा शिवः॥’ “Different from whatever is the experienced, the experiencer, and the experience, I am the witness, pure awareness, ever calm.”
‘मयि एव स-कलं जातं मयि सर्वं प्रतिष्ठितम्। मयि सर्वं लयं याति तद् ब्रह्म अ-द्वयम् अस्ति अहम्॥’ “In me alone everything is born, in me everything is sustained, and in me everything is resolved. I am that brahman, without a second.”
‘अणोः अणीयान् अहम् एव तद्वत् महान् अहं विश्वम् अहं विचित्रम्। पुरातनः अहं पुरुषः अहम् ईशः हिरण्यमयः अहं शिव-रूपम् अस्मि’ “[Since I am unlimited in everyway] I am indeed subtler than the subtle, and in that same way I am the vast, diverse universe. I am the puruṣa that is always there. I am the Lord who shines [as everything]. I am ever calm.” (Kaivalya Up. 1.17–20) ::
.


 
←PrevNext→
[tad – that; api – though; citra – diverse; a-saṃkhyeya – countless; vāsanās – latent tendencies; para-artha – for another; saṃhatya-kāritva – it acts like it is being put together.]

तद् चित्तम् अ-संख्येय-वासनाभिः अ-गण्य-संस्कारैः चित्रं विविधम् अपिपर-अर्थम् अन्य-अर्थं न स्व-अर्थं स्थूल-सूक्ष्म-शरीर-स्थ-जीव-अर्थम् एव इत्यर्थः संहत्य-कारित्वात् यथा निर्मित्त-गृहं गृह-स्थ-अर्थं सर्वं स्थूल-सूक्ष्म-जगत् चित्त-सहितं पर-तन्त्रं न तु परम-अर्थ-सत्यम् इत्यर्थः॥ –
“The mind, with innumerable latent tendencies (vāsanās) and countless impressions (saṃskāras), is variegated and diverse, and though it may perceive external or other objects, it does not perceive its own true nature (sva-rūpa). It perceives only the individual jīva residing in the gross and subtle body. This is due to its seemingly being put together (saṃhatya-kāritva), like a constructed house, the mind, is governed by the functions and purposes of the householder (the jīva), along with the entire gross and subtle world, and is dependent on external influences, and does not realize the ultimate truth or reality.”

These latent tendencies, here given the equivalent name vāsanās instead of saṃskāras, are part of the many and countlessly different components that constitute the complex called the mind. Its latent tendencies drive the mind in countless directions, though it is not being driven for its own sake. Each individual has its own storehouse of karma. All objects, including this mind, are for the individual to experience these karma results of the individual’s prior actions, and are for maturation of the individual through this teaching to be free of all limitations (YS.2.18).

When an object is an elegant interconnected complex, there is little doubt that it is a construction having a purpose. Everything’s purpose lies outside of itself as well as within, since everything is, in fact, an interconnected whole. A house not only stands by its own design, but also serves the purpose of the people who built it, the person who sold it, who lives in it, and who visits it, and for the bird who perches on it, and for the spider who puts its web in one of its corners, and is for insulating the ground below and, if a wooden house, for binding its carbon molecules for a time being. Whether anticipated or not, all of these purposes are there.

Of course, from our anthropocentric perspective we think the house is only for ourselves, the home owner. This is the usual take on this logic and is the direction of the logic here, namely that the mind, like a house, seems to be a complex for the person’s enjoyment. Being inert by its own nature, a mind cannot be for its own enjoyment or purpose. This logic is to help point out that there is something other than the mind that is the master of the mind. That master is oneself, the witness. That master, the witness, is one and partless, while the objects of the universe including the mind are all composed of parts, elements, and guṇas.

The purpose of an entity can extend its benefit beyond the individual to all individuals too. For another example of a complex entity in this universe, DNA is an elaborate construction for the purpose of passing on genetic traits to the offspring, allowing enough variety to guarantee a viable genetic pool, and providing the variety of embodiments required for individuals to be born as any of the countless varieties of creatures. It fulfills this purpose, and many others, very well. This DNA itself is a result of conforming to, participating in, and thus surviving within the intelligent order of the universe.

There is an intelligent order to the design of all these systems – from the subatomic mathematically describable particles to the inter-connected formation forces of the entire universe, and everything in between. The mind is indeed, for all we know, at the pinnacle of this evolutionary chain, with its unique ability to reflect upon the entire order of the universe from its very beginning, though centered in a tiny body for a tiny span of time in one tiny corner of this vast cosmos. By the intelligence of its construction, we can appreciate that it indeed has a grand purpose within the intelligent order of the universe.

Its ultimate purpose, for the individual, is to come to know the intelligence itself in its reality, to know the reality of the Lord manifesting as this intelligent order. That reality is yourself, waiting patiently, so to speak, for you to figure it out. Knowing this, you own up to your timeless reality.


 
←PrevNext→
[darśin – one who knows; viśeṣa – distinction; vinivṛtti – cessation; bhāvanā – imagining; bhāva – being; ātman – oneself.]

अथ ज्ञानम् एव कैवल्यं वक्ष्यामः – विशेष-दर्शिनः आत्म-अन्-आत्म-विवेकिनः आत्म-भाव-भावना-विनिवृत्तिः आत्मतया स-परिणाम-दृश्य-चित्त-कल्पनायाः निवृत्तिः, आत्मनः अ-परिणामित्वात् (YS.4.18)॥ –
“Now, we will explain that knowledge (jñāna) itself is liberation (kaivalya). The one who knows as clear as seeing (viseṣa-darśina) the distinction between the self and non-self, who has removed the imagination of mind being the self (ātmā) through the cessation of imaginations of the mind with its changing objects (as ātmā), is liberated. This is because the self is not subject to change (YS.4.18).”

Once one knows that one is the seer, the immutable (a-pariṇāmin) witness, of the changing mind, then one no longer identifies oneself with the changing thoughts in the mind. According to sūtra 1.3, then the witness remains only in its own nature without the mind’s confused identifications.


 
←PrevNext→
[tadā – then; citta – mind; nimna
:: ‘सर्व-कर्माणि अपि सदा कुर्वाणः मद्-व्यपाश्रयः। मद्-प्रसादात् अवाप्नोति शाश्वतं पदम् अ-व्ययम्॥’ “The one who – though always performing all karma – has Me as the basis [of all actions and results] attains by [this] My grace [i.e., by the result (clarity of mind), which is given by the Lord as the teacher and as what is taught] the end, which is ever the same and imperishable.”
‘…तम् एव शरणं गच्छ सर्व-भावेन भारत। तत्-प्रसादात् परां शान्तिं स्थानं प्राप्स्यसि शाश्वतम्’ “…With all [your] being, surrender to that [Lord] alone [who is the center of your being and is in the form of your natural disposition moving you through life], O Arjuna. By that [Lord’s] grace you will attain the ultimate peace, the timeless abode.” (Bh. Gītā 18.56 & 62) ::
; viveka – discernment; kaivalya-prāk-bhāra – has freedom before it.]

तदा अन्-आत्मनः आत्म-भाव-भावना-विनिवृत्तौ विवेक-निम्नं विकेक-ज्ञान-परिणतं सत् कैवल्य-प्राक्-भारं चित्तं कैवल्य-अभि-मुखं चित्तं, यद् सर्व-विषयं सर्वथा-विषयं विवेक-जं ज्ञानं (YS.3.54) तद् कैवल्य-ज्ञानम् इत्यर्थः॥ –
“At that time, when the identification of the self with the non-self is removed, the mind surrenders to the discerning knowledge, and has freedom before it (kaivalya-prāk-bhāra). The knowledge that is born of discernment, which comprehends all objects in their entirety and in every way, is the knowledge called liberation (kaivalya-jñāna) (YS.3.54).”

The mind is meant to surrender the limited notions it has about the nature of itself and of oneself unto this all-encompassing knowledge that is the reality of oneself. Then freedom itself looms on its horizon all around as its very nature. Freedom from limitation happens for the mind, but it always was the nature of oneself.

One cannot completely surrender what one is convinced is one’s own. Only when one is convinced that something is not one’s own is complete surrender possible. If one goes to the temple every day and one’s prayer is, “O Lord, I surrender to You,” then what is the nature of this surrender? If one had really surrendered yesterday, then what is the meaning of surrendering again today? This is an indication that the real surrender is yet to come. As my teacher expresses it – it is an act-it-out, an act upon what I believe until I fully understand. What I want to be is what I say I am, until I gain clarity in understanding that I am, in fact, what I say I am. Once that clarity is there, whether I keep saying it or not, it is an accomplished fact that I am what I had always wanted to be – a free being.

But if limitation is my nature, and if limitation is also the truth of the mind, then surrender of limitation is ignorance. It is an unrealizable goal. It would only be a leap of faith or a mystic goal that is unattainable in this life, and will remain an unattainable goal because it is unrealizable by its nature.

Surrender is, finally, not a belief or an emotion, though it may start as an act-it-out until I make it. If it is real, then it can only be based in reality. This is why this teaching is always centered on gaining clarity of what is reality, and this is the reason for the importance that Patañjali gives to correctly employing the proper means of knowledge in this pursuit. That is why he placed the explanation of the means of knowledge at the beginning of these sūtras, before the meditations and the other auxiliaries to gaining self-knowledge. Patañjali’s teaching should not be understood as claiming that these limitations – as their unmanifest potential, as prakṛti – are as real as the self, like Sāṅkhya philosophy claims. This goes against the āgama (scripture) that is the proper means of knowledge in this pursuit. If nature is equally real and is limited, then it cannot surrender what is its very nature. But if, in fact, limitation is unreal, and its supposed separate reality from the limitless puruṣa is equally unreal, then limitation is not its real nature. Its real nature is limitless reality.

This is why kaivalya (freedom) is when there is pure equality in reality between the mind and the self, according to sūtra YS.3.55. Otherwise, it could only be mystical imagination, or so much poetry that can only fail in the long run to allay life’s suffering.

The puruṣa is already free, and always has been free. This teaching is for the mind to lose its notions of limitation that are in fact not the nature of its reality. That is why it can surrender these notions since they are imaginary (prātibhāsika), and why that surrendering itself is real, transactionally (vyāvahārika) real, and logical.


 
←PrevNext→
[chidras – cracks; tad – that; antara – those different; pratyayas – thoughts; saṃskāras – latent tendencies.]

तद्-छिद्रेषु विवेक-भङ्गेषु सत्सु प्रत्यय-अन्तराणि अ-विकेकाः क्लेश-व्यक्त-प्रत्ययाः संस्कारेभ्यः भवेयुः, यस्मात् ते प्रत्ययाः क्लेश-अ-व्यक्त-संस्कार-जाः॥ –
“When there are cracks in that discerning knowledge (viveka), different thoughts, which lack discernment and manifest unhelpful thoughts arise. These thoughts are born from the unmanifest unhelpful tendencies (kleśa saṃskāras).”

 
←PrevNext→
[eṣām – their; hāna – giving up; -vat – like that; ukta – said (YS.2.10–11 & 4.11); kleśas – afflictions.]

हानं त्यागः एषाम् अ-विवेक-संस्काराणां व्यक्त-क्लेशवद् उक्तम्॥ –
“The abandonment of these erroneous impressions (saṃskāras) is similar to their manifest afflictions (kleśas) (YS.2.33–34).”

This gets us back to one of the express purposes of contemplation (samādhi). Full clarity is when one no longer seriously entertains thoughts of being limited by phenomenal forms. These thoughts can bubble up from the unconscious in quiet meditation. In that quiet meditation these thoughts may be clearly seen and contemplated for what they are. The practice is to objectively witness them and let them drop without reacting to and identifying with them, and also to proactively contemplate their contradiction, prati-pakṣa-bhāvana (YS.2.33–34). This contemplation develops a mind that no longer reacts to notions from old saṃskāras (latent tendencies) that the now informed mind knows were the products of ignorance. This mind will then carry on outside of the seat of meditation, bearing the fruit of this new, beneficial saṃskāra consisting of this teaching.

There is no such thing as exhausting all these latent tendencies. That is like trying to empty the ocean with a teaspoon. In trying to exhaust the old vāsanās (latent tendencies), only you will become exhausted. What bubbles up, in fact, are only manifestations of these tendencies, not the actual tendencies themselves. The fertile field of these latent tendencies has to be upended. The basic ignorance of the nature of myself and the world has to go. Then, even if these now baseless thoughts bubble up, they are never again taken as real. This is why the term ‘hāna’ is used in regard to these tendencies. Hāna primarily means giving up, not destruction. It is a giving up of the notion of these limited forms being real, as being as real as myself, so they are unable to delimit the real me.


 
←PrevNext→
[api – even; a-kusīda – no interest; sarvathā – in any way; prasaṃkhyāna – meditation process; viveka-khyāti – discerning knowledge; samādhi – contemplation; megha – mass; dharma – support.]

प्रसंख्याने ध्याने सुख-स्थाने अपि अ-कुसीदस्य अ-प्रयोगिनः मोक्ष-अर्थित्वात् सर्वथा, विवेक-ख्यातेः विवेक-ज्ञानेन धर्म-मेघः (ऋतं-भरा YS.1.48) धारयति इति धर्म तस्य धर्मस्य योनिः समाधिः समाधीयते यस्मिन् इति समाधिः, निर्-बीज-समाधिः निवृत्त-अ-ज्ञान-बीज-समाधिः द्रष्टृ-स्व-रूप-परम-आत्म-अवस्थानम्॥ –
“The one who has no interest (a-kusīda) in anyway in the pleasant aspects of the meditation process (prasaṅkhyāna), being only interested in liberation with the knowledge of discernment (viveka) – this yogī’s samādhi is a mass of support (dharma-medha), bearing truth (ṛtaṃ-bharā) (YS.1.48). Dharma is that which supports (dhārayati). Samādhi is that in which everything resolves (samādhīyate). Seed-less samādhi is where the seeds of ignorance are eradicated. It is the abode of the ultimate self, the very nature of the seer.”

The steadiness of the body, senses, and mind, and the pleasure therein, can become addictive. It is easy to be waylaid by the bodily and mental pleasures that āsana (quiet sitting, as well as the variety of other āsanas for strengthening the bodily functions) and meditation can bring. But that pleasure is not here the purpose of meditation, according to Patañjali. Here, yoga is not taken as another way to get an intoxicating high. It is much more than that. Yoga matures the person so the addiction to needing to be high is nullified. This is also why the goal of yoga is easily attainable by one who has a tenacious degree of nonattachment (vairāgya, YS.1.12, 15 & 20–21) to and independence from all one has desired before, all rāgas (attractions, YS.1.37, & 2.7).

Apart from the effects on the body and mind that accrue from the meditation process (prasaṃkhyāna), however, the contemplation itself, the clarity in understanding that takes place there, can never be a problem. One should always be contemplative – as long as one is contemplating on knowledge based in a valid pramāṇa (means of knowledge), and not in some imagination or a going after some superpower siddhi. Both clarity of the mind (YS.1.30 & 41) and contemplation ought to be pursued until the knowledge, the teaching, being contemplated gains complete clarity. This is called discerning knowledge. All doubts and the nature of everything in the universe and the nature of oneself – all are covered and resolved by this teaching of their one reality (YS.3.54).

The culmination of the teaching is this vision of oneness, the knowledge that frees oneself. This knowledge is thus called
:: ‘ब्रह्म एव तेन गन्तव्यं ब्रह्म-कर्म-समाधिना (=सर्व-कर्म ब्रह्म एव सम्यक्-दर्शनेन)’ “Brahman (reality) indeed is to be attained by the one whose vision of identity (samādhi) is that [every aspect of] action is brahman.” (Bh. Gītā 4.24) ::
(that in which everything is resolved). The reality, oneself, is also called
:: ‘यदा स्थास्यति निश्चला। समाधौ (=आत्मनि) अ-चला बुद्धिः तदा योगम् अवाप्स्यसि’ “When the intellect becomes steady and becomes centered (a-cala) on your self (samādhi), then you will attain yoga.” (Bh. Gītā 2.53) ::
, since it is that into which everything is resolved. That is why the knowledge and the self are one and the same. Additionally, where this resolution happens – the mind – is in certain contexts indirectly called
:: ‘भोगै-ऐ्वर्य-प्रसक्तानां तया (पुष्पितया वाचा) अपहृत-चेतसाम्। व्यवसाय-आत्मिका बुद्धिः समाधौ (=अन्तः-करणे) न विधीयते’ “For those whose minds are carried away by that [flowery talk] and who are attached to consumption and power, a well-discerned knowledge is not formed in their mind (samādhi).” (Bh. Gītā 2.44) ::
(that in which everything resolves). The everyday mind may also, in general, be called samādhi in the context of all the various experiences of my universe, which happen in only one place – in the mind.

The more currently popular meaning of the word samādhi is, unfortunately, the mental process of having a mystical experience of oneness. Few are aware that it is, instead, an abiding knowledge that is the basis of all experiences, including that occasional mystical experience of oneness.

Samādhi, when it amounts to discerning knowledge (prajñā, YS.1.48, 2.26–27 & 3.5), by which the clarity of the truth of oneness lasts outside the seat of meditation, is here called a mass of dharma.

Dharma means that which supports (dhārayati iti dharmaḥ). It can also be expressed as that by which the universe, the society, and the person are supported (dhriyate lokaḥ anena iti dharmaḥ). Thus dharma becomes a term variously indicating karma (what makes the world, or the individual, the way it is), tradition (what sustains the culture of society), teaching tradition (what sustains the nourishing knowledge from one generation to the next), virtue (what straightens the mind in thought-speech-action), and values (what bring maturity in a person’s life). In all of these, as their basis, dharma clearly also means the reality that supports, that is the basis of, everything and oneself, and is that by which every name and form that constitutes the variety of the universe is sustained. In this sense, samādhi is a mass of dharma, where samādhi is the culmination of the process of samādhi. It is clear knowledge itself, which is oneself alone, which is this limitless reality that supports all.


 
←PrevNext→
[tataḥ – from that; nivṛtti – cessation; kleśas – afflictions (YS.2.3); karmas – results of action (YS.2.12).]

ततः समाधेः क्लेश-कर्म-निवृत्तिः इह एव अ-विद्या-आदि-क्लेशानां च देह-पतने पुनर्-जन्म-हेतु-कर्म-आशयस्य च निवृत्तिः॥ –
“From that samādhi, the cessation of the kleśas beginning with ignorance (a-vidyā) and, upon the fall of the body, the removal of the storehouse of karma that leads to further cycles of births.”

Having discerning knowledge means that the root ignorance – by which the mind identifies oneself with the limitations seen and by which the limited objects seen are taken to be as real and permanent as oneself – is removed from the mind. The products of that ignorance – the afflictions and karma – no longer separately exist as being absolutely real for this person. This is the cessation (nivṛtti) of afflictions as being able to afflict, and of karmas as being able to bind.

Those products of that ignorance which have an objective reality, such as the practical I-notion and certainly the karmas, continue, but without afflicting the individual. The practical sense of I is still there to carry on the bodily needs. One knows that if hunger is there, one needs to put food into this mouth, not any other mouth or onto the floor. One does not become unreasonable or foolish once discerning knowledge takes place. Moreover, the karma that brought this body continues until its exhaustion in this life.

This I-notion and these karmas are incapable of afflicting the person, since this person does not take them as real as the self. It is similar to enjoying a movie without having any of the afflictions of the main character in the movie. This body and mind have their peculiar, limited natures. They are there to be enjoyed as an adventure, comedy, mystery, and tragedy. Like the movie, they end, but I do not end.


 
←PrevNext→
[tadā – then; malas – impurities; āvaraṇa – cover; sarva – all; apeta – gone away; jñeya – to be known; alpa – insignificant; jñāna – knowledge; ān-antya – limitless.]

तदा क्लेश-कर्म-निवृत्तौ सर्व-आवरण-मल-अपेतस्य आत्म-तत्त्व-आवरण-अ-विद्या-मल-विगतस्य ज्ञानिनः – परम-आत्म-ज्ञानस्य आन्-अन्त्यात् परिपूर्णात् – सर्व-विषय-ज्ञानं ज्ञेयम् अल्पम् अ-पुरुष-अर्थकं, विलास एव न तु अवश्यकं, सर्व-विषय-ज्ञानस्य परम-पुरुष-अर्थ-मोक्ष-परिसमाप्तिमत्त्वात् (YS.4.32)॥ –
“At that time, when kleśas and karma have ceased, removed of the impurities that cover all, including the veil of ignorance that obscures the true nature of the self – the one who knows, being full with the limitless knowledge of the ultimate Self, then what is yet to be known about the universe is insignificant, not significant for the person. It is mere sport (vilāsa), not essential, since all knowledge of objects culminates in the realization of the purpose of the ultimate Self, which is liberation (mokṣa) (YS.4.32).”

The impurities are the various forms of ignorance and its crop, the kleśas (YS.2.3). Since, for this person, the knowledge is as true as the limitless reality, then the knowledge itself is limitless.

This was explained before – the knowledge is reality, and reality is the knowledge, and this is now known as oneself. Then the details of the universe, the limitations of the universe, are as many as before, but now pale in significance to the limitless reality that is their real nature. When there is an abiding and complete satisfaction in oneself, then there is no binding desire for any small, limited gain. Once the limitless, that includes the truth of everything, is yours, what else could be considered a gain? Once the life-fulfilling thirst for knowledge has been quenched by the water of the truth of life itself, by the knowledge of the self as limitless, then the various sips of detailed information of the universe are like the relaxing sips of flavored teas – to be enjoyed but not necessary. They are entertaining, but triflings.


 
←PrevNext→
[tataḥ – from that; guṇas – constituents of nature; kṛta – have completed; artha – purpose; krama – sequence; pariṇāmas – changes; samāpti – end.]

ततः आन्-अन्त्य-ज्ञानात् कृत-अर्थानाम् इदानीं जन्मनि परम-पुरुष-अर्थ-कृतानां परिणाम-क्रम-समाप्तिः प्रान्त-परिणाम-क्रमस्य समाप्तिः गुणानाम्॥ –
“From that limitless knowledge (ān-antya-jñāna), for those who have fulfilled their purpose in this very life – having achieved the ultimate goal of the ultimate Self (parama-puruṣa-artha) – the sequence of change (pariṇāma-krama) comes to an end. The transformation of the guṇas reaches its ultimate conclusion for them.”

The coming to an end of the sequence (krama) of their changes is, in this context, the playing out of the guṇas that seem to have bound you. The sequence has completed its purpose by serving to free you (YS.2.18). This is the fulfillment of one’s karma and the end of saṃsāra, the continual unbecoming becoming and its attendant rebirths and deaths.

There are three types of karma – the new karma created or yet to be created in this life (the āgāmin karma), the past karma fructifying as this life (the prārabdha karma), and the balance of karma yet to fructify sitting in the individual jīva’s account (the sañcita karma).

When one knows oneself as limitless reality, that reality does not produce new karma (āgāmin). One has to have a deliberative sense of “I am an individual doer who owns the results of this action” to create new will-based karma. This is required to create the karma, attach it to one’s storehouse of karma, and then later reap its result. This limited notion of oneself as an individual doer who requires the results of the action for one’s fulfillment is no longer there
:: ‘न एव किञ्चित् करोमि इति युक्तः मन्येत तत्त्व-वित्। पश्यन् शृण्वन् स्पृशन् जिघ्रन् अश्नन् गच्छन् स्वपन् श्वसन्॥’ “The contemplative knower of the truth, maintaining that the organs [of sense and action] engage in their objects, would think ‘I do not do anything,’ even though seeing, hearing, touching, smelling, eating, moving, sleeping, breathing,”
‘प्रलपन् विसृजन् गृह्णन् उन्मिषन् निमिषन् अपि। इन्द्रियाणि इन्द्रिय-अर्थेषु वर्तन्ते इति धारयन्’ “…talking, releasing, grasping, or opening and closing [the eyes].” (Bh. Gītā 5.8–9) ::
. In effect, this body and mind complex is then, like any other innocent creature, living out its embodiment, not adding any new karma to an individual jīva’s account.

The body and mind are still acting, though, and the immediate effects of their actions (karmas) will be there and will exhaust themselves in this life-span. The past karmas (prārabdha) which brought about this embodiment play themselves out, affecting only the body and mind, not the reality, the knowledge, of the person.

The balance of the karmas (sañcita) waiting to fructify in future embodiments, belonging to the individual jīva who created and owned it, is now without an individual jīva with a sense of ownership. Those karmas become unable to sprout and thus waste away unclaimed, like unclaimed airport baggage.

Whether there is karma that survives this embodiment or not, or, if there is, whether there is an exit out of karma or not, both are beliefs. Even if such karma is not there, this freedom that Patañjali leads us to realize in this life is a satisfaction one had sought all one’s life. This satisfaction is here and now permanently and fully. One could want nothing more in life. If there is rebirth later due to karma, it is still within the Lord’s order and still is exactly what the Lord provides us to continue our growth.

It is said that God can incarnate on Earth according to this tradition (for example, Kṛṣṇa is portrayed as the incarnation of Lord Viṣṇu) or an individual’s body and mind can be viewed as the incarnation of a facet of the Lord (for example, Arjuna is portrayed as the son of the powerful warrior Lord Indra). When later schools of thought and the arts wax eulogistic about their founders and leaders, for obvious reasons, as incarnations of various gods, these are better to be understood as being like Arjuna’s (a partial incarnation), than like Kṛṣṇa’s.


 
←PrevNext→
[krama – sequence (of time, YS.3.15); prati-yogin – associated; kṣaṇas – moments; nirgrāhya – can be assumed; apara-anta – other end; pariṇāma – change (of which the puruṣa has none, YS.4.18).]

क्षण-प्रति-योगी प्रति-काल-क्षणैः सम्बन्धी परिणाम-अपर-अन्त-निर्ग्राह्यः परिणामस्य प्रान्ते कल्प्यः क्रमः गुण-परिणाम-अन्वयः यस्मात् भूत-भविष्यत्-क्षणाः कल्पनाः (YS.4.12) तस्मात् क्रमः अपि कल्पना (YS.3.52), तथा परिणाम-क्रमः जन्म-मरण-क्रमः अपि कल्पना इत्यर्थः (YS.1.9)॥ –
“Sequence (krama) is associated with moments of time (kṣaṇa-prati-yogī), and can only be assumed to exist at the other end of change. Sequence (krama) is merely conceptual, as it is dependent on the transformations of the guṇas, since past and future moments are mere conceptual constructs (YS.4.12), then sequence (krama) itself is also a conceptualization (YS.3.52). Likewise, the sequence of change, including the cycle of birth and death, is also merely an imagined construct (YS.1.9 commentary).”

Only by the change of objects do we, whether yogins or not, understand there is sequence and moments of time. Within deep sleep where there are no objects, there is no sense of time. When change itself is no longer taken as real, as real as oneself, and thus not something that can affect oneself, affect reality, then sequence and time itself can no longer be taken as real and as affecting oneself. One knows oneself as timeless and free of any sequence of births. The objects composed of the guṇas alone are within time, and have a sequence of being constructed and de-constructed. The timeless, partless reality of oneself can have no sequence. If the body continues, or if rebirths continue, this continuance has no affect on oneself or the knowledge that is oneself, free of all limitations.


 
←Prev
[artha-śūnya – no more purpose; puruṣa – person; guṇas – constituents of nature; pratiprasava
:: ‘तत्त्व-वित् तु महा-बाहो गुण-कर्म-विभागयोः। गुणाः गुणेषु वर्तन्ते इति मत्वा न सज्जते’ “Whereas, O Arjuna, the one who knows the truth of the distinction of the guṇas [from ‘I’], and of [their] actions [from ‘I’], thinking ‘the guṇas [i.e., the body and mind] engage among the guṇas [i.e., among the objects – physical and mental]’ – that one is not bound.” (Bh. Gītā 3.28).
‘ब्रह्मणि आधाय कर्माणि सङ्गं त्यक्त्वा करोति यः। लिप्यते न सः पापेन पद्म-पत्रम् इव अम्भसा’ “Giving up attachment [i.e., not anticipating results], the one who performs actions, offering [them] unto brahman (the Lord – as prakṛti (nature), the cosmic order) – that one is not affected by pāpa (karma demerit), like a lotus leaf [is not soaked] by water.” (Bh. Gītā 5.10).
‘न च मां तानि कर्माणि निबध्नन्ति धनञ्-जय। उदासीनवद् आसीनम् अ-सक्तं तेषु कर्मसु’ “O Arjuna, these karmas (actions and their results) do not bind Me, who is seated [here as the basis of prakṛti (nature)], seemingly indifferent [being its mere conscious witness] and unattached towards these karmas.” (Bh. Gītā 9.9).
‘यः एवं वेत्ति पुरुषं प्रकृतिं च गुणैः सह। सर्वथा वर्तमानः अपि न सः भूयः अभिजायते’ “The one who in this way knows puruṣa and prakṛti with its guṇas – that one, even though performing action in all ways [whether as a student, householder, retiree, or renunciate] is not born again.” (Bh. Gītā 13.23).
‘न अन्यं गुणेभ्यः कर्तारं यदा द्रष्टा अनुपश्यति। गुणेभ्यः च परं वेत्ति मद्-भावं सः अधिगच्छति’ “When the seer sees [according to the teaching] that there is not a doer other than the guṇas, and knows [the self] as beyond the guṇas, [then] that one attains My nature [called mokṣa].” (Bh. Gītā 14.19) ::
;
:: ‘अनेन ज्ञानम् आप्नोति संसार-अर्णव-नाशनम्। तस्मात् एवं विदित्वा एनं कैवल्यं पदम् अश्नुते, कैवल्यं पदम् अश्नुते’ “By this [teaching regarding brahman] is attained a knowledge that dispels the ocean of saṃsāra (the life of continual unbecoming becoming). Therefore, knowing in this way, one attains the goal (pada) [called] completeness (kaivalya) [i.e., mokṣa (freedom)].” (Kaivalya Up. 2.2) ::
– freedom. – otherwise; iti – known as; śakti – pure power; citi – consciousness; pratiṣṭha – remaining; sva-rūpa – its own nature (YS.1.3).]

पुरुष-अर्थ-शून्यानां गुणानां कर्म-आशय-रूप-गुणाः पुरुषस्य अ-प्रयोजकाः तेषां गुणानां प्रतिप्रसवः अ-व्यक्ते प्रलयं देह-पतनात् ऊर्ध्वम् (YS.4.32), अथवा इह एव प्रतिप्रसवः व्यावहारिक-शरीर-रूपत्वेन अवस्थानम् एव तद्-पारम-अर्थिक-सत्ता-आरोपेण विना (YS.1.4, 2.5 & 25–26) कैवल्यम् अभिधीयते, स्व-रूप-प्रतिष्ठा इह एव द्रष्टृ-स्व-रूप-अवस्थानं (YS.1.3) वा चिति-शक्तिः चैतन्य-स्व-रूपः एव इति कैवल्यम् अभिधीयते, इति योग-सूत्राणि समाप्तानि च॥ –
“The guṇas, which have become devoid of purpose for the puruṣa, no longer serve any function. The latent impressions of karma (karma-āśaya), which arise from these guṇas, also cease to influence oneself. Their reabsorption (pratiprasava) leads them back into the unmanifest (a-vyakta) after the fall of the body (YS.4.32)). Alternatively, even here in this life, their reabsorption occurs when the physical form continues to exist merely as a functional entity, without any imposition of ultimate reality upon it (YS.1.4, 2.5 & 25–26). This state is called kaivalya (freedom), where the seer (draṣṭṛ) abides in its true nature (YS.1.3). The power of pure consciousness (citi-śakti) itself is the essence of consciousness (caitanya-svarūpa), and this realization is what is known as kaivalya. Thus, the Yoga Sūtras conclude.”

Some take the expression, “the guṇas return to their origin,” to mean the guṇas return to prakṛti. This is impossible. Prakṛti is nothing but the three guṇas, whether in unmixed equilibrium called the unmanifest or in combination called the manifest universe. Prakṛti cannot be without the guṇas for them to return. The return here means they no longer, through the ignorant thoughts of this individual, throw their limited, separate identity upon the limitless real self, nor do they imagine the limitless real self to be this limited mind. Mutual misidentification goes way. Kaivalya, being free of the guṇas, is not some new condition, but is simply an assimilated understanding of the nature of the problem (ignorance, see Yoga Sūtra (YS.1.4 & 2.5) and the solution (see Yoga Sūtra YS.1.2–3).

For the person who no longer identifies with the modifications of the guṇas, the guṇas return to where they operate – as the phenomenal universe, not as oneself. That is, they factually remain where they are, instead of being erroneously imposed upon the nature of oneself. This is what is meant by the mind surrendering to this discriminating knowledge (YS.4.26). It is surrendering what is only transactionally real to the body of the Lord, to the phenomenal universe, by acknowledging the absolute reality as the one reality of oneself and the Lord. It is essentially the recognition of realities.

The guṇas operate as the relative reality of the universe, not as the timeless, space-less reality that is the domain of, is the basis in and through of, this universe, and that is the truth of oneself. Any puruṣārthas (purposeful goals) sought in pursuing limited objects of the universe before the dawn of this knowledge now become trifles. This is a negative view of what freedom is.

The positive view of freedom is that one remains as one’s very nature – as the pure power of consciousness, not in need of possessing any limited object to fulfill oneself, yet not afraid of any gain or loss, or of any situation (see comm. on YS.3.51). Nothing is actually gained. The puruṣa is no longer identified with the guṇas, the thoughts in the mind, and the puruṣa remains in its own limitless, perfect nature, which brings us back to the start of these sūtras.

Freedom is a loss of ignorance, and the loss of the countless problems that are associated with ignorance. Freedom is a loss of that which cannot stand up to inquiry (vicāra, YS.1.17) into reality and its resulting viveka-khyāti (discerning knowledge, YS.2.25–26). Ignorance and its products are not real, not as real as oneself. Therefore, their loss is only an understanding of their actual lack of reality. This is knowledge, and this knowledge is oneself. This is kaivalya. Kaivalya is the nature of oneself.

Thus (iti), you now know what this teaching can be. May you find a teacher who can guide you to this, your limitless birthright.

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)

🔗 ओं, पूर्ण॒म् अदः॒ पूर्ण॒म् इदं॒ पूर्णा॒त् पूर्ण॒म् उद॒च्यते।
पूर्ण॒स्य पूर्ण॒म् आदा॒य पूर्ण॒म् एवावशि॒ष्यते।
ओं शा॒न्तिः शा॒न्तिः शा॒न्तिः॥

Om; pūrṇa, adas, pūrṇa, idam, pūrna, pūrṇa, ud-√añc.
pūrṇa, pūrṇa, ādāya, pūrṇa, eva, ava-√śiṣ.
Om, śānti, śānti, śānti.

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)

Amṛta-nāda Upaniṣad

6 – YS.1.2

17 – YS.1.17

Āruṇeya Upaniṣad

1–3 – YS.2.31

3 – YS.1.21

Bhagavad Gītā

BhG.2.11 – YS.2.15

BhG.2.12 – YS.1.3

BhG.2.14 – YS.2.15

BhG.2.14 & 16 – YS.1.3

BhG.2.16 – YS.4.12

BhG.2.17 – YS.1.3

BhG.2.22 – YS.1.3

BhG.2.23 – YS.3.46

BhG.2.26–28 – YS.2.15

BhG.2.29 – YS.1.49

BhG.2.42 & 43 – YS.1.15

BhG.2.44 – YS.4.29

BhG.2.46 – YS.1.46

BhG.2.47 – YS.4.11

BhG.2.47–48 – YS.4.2

BhG.2.48 – YS.1.2

BhG.2.50 – YS.1.2, YS.4.3

BhG.2.51 – YS.4.11

BhG.2.52–53 – YS.4.11

BhG.2.53 – YS.4.29

BhG.2.59 – YS.2.15

BhG.2.62–63 – YS.1.15

BhG.2.64 – YS.2.54

BhG.2.64 –65 – YS.1.47

BhG.2.67 – YS.2.55

BhG.3.3 – YS.2.29

BhG.3.6 – YS.2.15

BhG.3.6–7 – YS.3.48

BhG.3.13 – YS.4.1

BhG.3.17 – YS.2.42

BhG.3.17–18 – YS.1.40, YS.3.49

BhG.3.28 – YS.4.34

BhG.3.30 – YS.4.11

BhG.3.32 – YS.1.46

BhG.3.42–43 – YS.3.48

BhG.4.1 – YS.1.26

BhG.4.10 – YS.1.23

BhG.4.24 – YS.4.29

BhG.4.30 – YS.4.1

BhG.4.35 – YS.3.46

BhG.4.38 – YS.1.7

BhG.5.2 – YS.2.29

BhG.5.8–9 – YS.4.42

BhG.5.10 – YS.4.34

BhG.5.12 – YS.1.22

BhG.5.19 – YS.3.53

BhG.5.21 – YS.4.11

BhG.5.27–28 – YS.2.46

BhG.6.9 – YS.3.53

BhG.6.11–14 – YS.2.46

BhG.6.14 – YS.1.29

BhG.6.16 – YS.1.10

BhG.6.17 – YS.4.1

BhG.6.20 – YS.1.51

BhG.6.21–23 – YS.1.1

BhG.6.23 – YS.1.2

BhG.6.26 – YS.3.1

BhG.6.29–31 – YS.3.53

BhG.6.34 – YS.1.2

BhG.6.35 – YS.1.12

BhG.6.37–38 & 40 – YS.3.55

BhG.6.40–44 – YS.3.38

BhG.7.6 – YS.3.55

BhG.7.7 – YS.3.46

BhG.7.10 – YS.3.55

BhG.7.14 – YS.1.45

BhG.7.16–18 – YS.1.29

BhG.7.20–22 – YS.4.16

BhG.8.12–13 – YS.3.32

BhG.9.4–5 – YS.1.26, YS.3.52

BhG.9.7 – YS.4.9

BhG.9.9 – YS.4.34

BhG.9.14 – YS.2.1

BhG.9.16 – YS.4.1

BhG.9.18 – YS.4.18

BhG.10.19 & 41 – YS.3.46

BhG.10.20 – YS.3.46

BhG.10.22 – YS.3.55

BhG.10.25 – YS.3.2

BhG.10.36 – YS.3.55

BhG.10.38 – YS.4.19

BhG.10.40 – YS.3.46

BhG.11.15–6 – YS.1.44

BhG.12.18–19 – YS.3.51

BhG.13.9 & 11 – YS.2.30

BhG.13.14 – YS.2.18

BhG.13.17 – YS.1.26, YS.1.36, YS.3.49

BhG.13.23 – YS.4.34

BhG.13.26 – YS.2.17

BhG.13.27–28 – YS.1.24

BhG.13.29 – YS.4.5

BhG.13.31 – YS.4.18, YS.4.2

BhG.13.34 – YS.4.5

BhG.14.6–8 – YS.3.35

BhG.14.10 – YS.2.15

BhG.14.19 – YS.3.35, YS.4.34

BhG.14.20 – YS.3.52

BhG.14.22–25 – YS.2.18

BhG.15.9 – YS.3.49

BhG.15.13–15 – YS.4.1

BhG.15.20 – YS.2.22

BhG.16.1–3 – YS.3.51

BhG.16.21 – YS.4.10

BhG.17.8 – YS.4.1

BhG.17.14–17 – YS.2.1

BhG.17.15 – YS.2.36

BhG.18.9 – YS.3.46

BhG.18.50–55 – YS.2.2

BhG.18.56 & 62 – YS.4.26

BhG.18.61 – YS.4.5

BhG.18.62 – YS.2.45

BhG.18.66 – YS.4.7

BhG.18.73 – YS.2.22

Brahma-bindu Upaniṣad

10 – YS.3.10

Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Upaniṣad

BrhU.1.4.1 & 7 – YS.3.52

BrhU.1.4.2 – YS.4.14

BrhU.1.4.6 – YS.3.41

BrhU.1.4.10 – YS.1.29

BrhU.2.1.2 – YS.3.32

BrhU.2.1.2 … 2.1.20 – YS.1.16

BrhU.2.3.6 – YS.1.48

BrhU.2.4.5 – YS.1.49

BrhU.2.4.14 – YS.1.3

BrhU.2.5.18 – YS.1.16

BrhU.2.5.19 – YS.1.9, YS.1.26

BrhU.3.4.2 – YS.1.3, YS.1.45

BrhU.3.8.4 – YS.1.26

BrhU.3.9.26…4.2.4, 4.4.22 & 4.5.15 – YS.1.48

BrhU.3.9.28.7 – YS.1.17

BrhU.4.1.4 (Bhāṣyam) – YS.1.7

BrhU.4.3.6 – YS.1.3

BrhU.4.3.9 – YS.1.38

BrhU.4.3.23 – YS.1.3

BrhU.4.3.32 – YS.1.3

BrhU.4.3.32–33 – YS.1.17

BrhU.4.4.14 – YS.2.15

BrhU.4.5.11 – YS.4.14

BrhU.4.5.6 – YS.1.49

BrhU.5.15.1 – YS.3.26

BrhU.6.2.15 – YS.3.26

BrhU.6.2.16 – YS.3.27

Chāndogya Upaniṣad

ChanU.2.23.1 – YS.2.1

ChanU.3.13.7 – YS.1.36

ChanU.4.17.1–2 – YS.1.7

ChanU.6.1.1–2 – YS.2.30

ChanU.6.1.4–5 – YS.1.9

ChanU.6.2.1 – YS.1.3

ChanU.6.2.1–2 – YS.4.12

ChanU.6.2.1 & 6.2.3–4 – YS.3.41

ChanU.6.3.2–3 – YS.3.41

ChanU.6.4.1 – YS.3.41

ChanU.6.8.7 – YS.1.29

ChanU.6.9.1–3 – YS.4.10

ChanU.6.14.1–3 – YS.2.25

ChanU.7.1.3 – YS.3.54

ChanU.7.19.1–20.1 – YS.1.20

ChanU.7.25.2 – YS.3.49

ChanU.7.26.1–2 – YS.3.8

ChanU.7.26.2 – YS.3.54

ChanU.8.1.1–3 – YS.4.14

ChanU.8.1.3 – YS.3.34

ChanU.8.1.5 – YS.1.36

ChanU.8.6.5–6 – YS.3.26, YS.3.32

ChanU.8.15.1 – YS.2.1

Dhyāna-bindū Upaniṣad

18 – YS.3.2

Gāyatrī Mantra, Ṛg Veda

3.62.10 – YS.3.26

Īśāvāsya Upaniṣad

IsU.4 – YS.1.49

IsU.6 – YS.3.46

Jābāla Upaniṣad

1.1 – YS.3.54

Kaivalya Upaniṣad

KaivU.1.3–4 – YS.1.7

KaivU.1.6 – YS.1.36

KaivU.1.11 – YS.1.12

KaivU.1.16 – YS.3.55

KaivU.1.17–18 – YS.1.3

KaivU.1.17–20 – YS.4.23

KaivU.1.19 – YS.1.3

KaivU.2.2 – YS.2.25, YS.4.34

Kaṭha Upaniṣad

KathU.1.1.26–27 – YS.3.51

KathU.1.2.2 – YS.1.2

KathU.1.2.4 – YS.1.8

KathU.1.2.7 – YS.1.49

KathU.1.2.8 – YS.1.38, YS.3.35

KathU.1.2.9 – YS.1.49

KathU.1.2.15 & 17 – YS.1.38

KathU.1.2.18 – YS.3.52

KathU.1.2.20 – YS.3.45

KathU.1.2.23 – YS.1.49

KathU.1.3.5–6 – YS.2.54

KathU.1.3.10–11 – YS.2.19

KathU.1.3.12 – YS.1.3

KathU.2.1.1 – YS.1.29

KathU.2.2.13 – YS.3.52

KathU.2.3.5 – YS.3.47

KathU.2.3.11 – YS.1.2

KathU.2.3.16 – YS.3.32

Kena Upaniṣad

KenU.1.3–5 – YS.1.49

KenU.2.4 – YS.4.20

Maitrāyaṇī Upaniṣad

1.9 – YS.1.4

Māṇḍūkya Upaniṣad

ManU.5 – YS.1.10

ManU.6 – YS.1.25

ManU.7 – YS.1.27

Māṇḍūkya Upaniṣad Kārikā

ManKa.1.28 – YS.1.27

ManKa.2.5–7 – YS.1.9

ManKa.2.12 – YS.1.9

ManKa.2.13–15 – YS.3.43

ManKa.2.19 – YS.1.9

ManKa.2.32 – YS.3.10

Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad

MunU.1.1.3 – YS.3.33

MunU.1.1.4 – YS.4.19

MunU.1.1.4–5 – YS.1.46

MunU.1.2.9 – YS.1.12

MunU.1.2.12 – YS.2.25, YS.3.35

MunU.2.2.2 – YS.3.45

MunU.3.1.3 – YS.3.55

MunU.3.1.7 – YS.1.45

MunU.3.1.8 – YS.1.49

MunU.3.2.3 – YS.1.49

MunU.3.2.5 – YS.1.37, YS.3.42

Pañca-Daśī

4.30 – YS.3.19

7.103–105 – YS.1.49

Pātañjala-Yoga-Sūtrāṇi-Bhoja-Sadāśiva-Vṛtti

3.3 – YS.3.35

Pātañjali Yoga Sūtrāṇi Vyāsa’s Bhāṣya

1.1 – YS.1.1

2.27 – YS.2.27

Praśna Upaniṣad

PrasU.2.1–4 – YS.1.3

PrasU.3.5 – YS.3.40

Puruṣa Sūkta, Ṛg Veda

10.90.2 – YS.1.26

Ṛg Veda

6.47.18 – YS.1.9

Śabda-Stoma-Mahānidhi (abridged version of Vācaspatyam dictionary)

YS.3.16

Sarva-sāra Upaniṣad

16 (or 7 & 8 by a different numbering) – YS.3.14

Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad

SvetU.1.3 – YS.3.49

SvetU.1.14 – YS.1.12

SvetU.2.9 – YS.1.34

SvetU.2.14 – YS.2.22

SvetU.3.8 – YS.1.51, YS.3.35

SvetU.3.12 – YS.4.18

SvetU.4.10 – YS.1.45

SvetU.4.11 – YS.3.49

SvetU.4.15 – YS.2.44

SvetU.5.3 – YS.1.7

SvetU.5.4–5 – YS.3.49

SvetU.5.5 & 7 – YS.1.16

SvetU.6.11 – YS.4.18

Taittirīya Upaniṣad

TaitU.1.11.1 – YS.1.3

TaitU.2.1.1 – YS.1.17, YS.1.29, YS.2.24, YS.3.41, YS.4.19

TaitU.2.6.1 – YS.1.3

TaitU.2.7.1 – YS.1.17, YS.4.14

TaitU.2.8.1.4 – YS.1.17

TaitU.2.9.1 – YS.1.17, YS.1.49

TaitU.3.6.1 – fn. 3.37

TaitU.3.10.4–6 – YS.3.44

Taittirīya Upaniṣad, Saṅkara’s Bhāṣya Introduction

YS.1.1

Vedānta-paribhāṣā

1.18 – YS.3.19

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)

The term citta (mind) is generally used in this text as we would use the word mind in English. But there are various aspects of the mind in this teaching tradition. To elaborate, the mind is better indicated by the term antaḥ-karaṇa (the internal subtle organ). It is a flow of thoughts, one after another, with inbuilt tendencies for certain types of thoughts that can be modified and channeled by life’s experiences and by how one reacts to them.

The inbuilt tendencies are the latent tendencies, called either saṃskāras or vāsanās. Although these two terms can generally be used as synonyms, they can also be distinguished in certain contexts. Saṃskāra is the more general term that covers all latent tendencies created in this life or even in prior lives, and retained between lives through a storehouse of karma (called the karmāśaya). They can influence any type of thought that occurs in the mind. Saṃskāra can also have a narrower meaning, limited to just tendencies that one wants – any positive tendency. Vāsanā likewise can have a narrower meaning, either limited to any saṃskāra that one does not want – any negative tendency, and/or limited to just those latent tendencies that pertain to liking or disliking something, and/or limited to those tendencies that recreate memories. In these senses, the vāsanās are just saṃskāras that have these limited functions during this current life. These distinctions are the result of terminologies employed over thousands of years by innumerable writers, with the added flexibility of the Sanskrit language that can have conventional usages and well as etymological usages, for example, saṃskāra etymologically means what is well formed, and vāsanā means what resides.

Neither of these two, saṃskāras or vāsanās, appear as thoughts in the mind (the flow of thoughts – both conscious and subliminal); they only effect or affect the thoughts that occur in this flow. They are assumed to exist only by their affects on thoughts to explain why an individual tends to think and behave in a certain way. They are the unconscious mind. The other aspect of this unconscious mind is the storehouse (the citta, literally, what is collected together) from which memories arise. In fact, the citta is technically the entire unconscious mind, and it is out of this that memories are recovered, not stored, some more easily than others.

A thought that occurred earlier in this life is said to be stored in the citta as a certain latent tendency (saṃskāra). When it is brought back out of that citta, it is then called a memory (smṛti). A smṛti is one of four types of thoughts that consciously appear in the mind (antaḥ-karaṇa).

The second of the four types of thought is ahaṅkāra. It is any thought that defines who the individual thinks he or she is. It is often translated as an I-notion or as ego.

The third type of thought is buddhi. It is any thought whose nature is one of firm conviction, usually translated as an intellection or knowledge.

The fourth type of thought is manas. It is the catch-all of every other kind of thought – from sensations and imaginations to emotions. Where an expressed emotion converges into a conviction, if it has a known logic, then it is a buddhi, otherwise it remains a manas.

The terms manas, citta, and, sometimes, buddhi are common terms also used for the entire antaḥ-karaṇa. And the term smṛti can be synonymous with citta – as simply the storehouse that includes the latent tendencies (saṃskāras) that arise as manifest memories.

Certain of these names are used for the collection of those four kinds of thoughts. For example, the memory is where memories reside, ego where ego thoughts reside, and intellect where intellections reside. Though convenient to use the collection terminology, to be exact these thoughts do not exist until they occur one after another. There is not a pile of them in the intellect, for example, to pick and choose. And the storehouse for memory is really the unconscious vāsanās that recreate the memory thought only when it is being recalled. Again there is not even a collection of these saṃskāras and vāsanās – they are just unmanifest potentialities. They are individually assumed to be there only when they effect or affect a manifest thought. It is hard for our manifest thoughts to conceptualize what a collection of unmanifest items could be. Still, it is easy to conceptualize why they might be assumed to be there, and few seem to doubt the existence of an unconscious, once it is suggested by a writer or a scientist.

The mind, being subtle, is different from the physical brain. A particular intellection is not a particular neuron in the brain. The brain exists because of the subtle nature of the mind. The mind does not exist because of the physical brain. That is why the mind, as a facet of the subtle body – consisting of the mind plus the functionality of the sensing and movement – can survive the death of the body and the brain, travel to heavens and hells, and take new births. When it does, an appropriate brain, nervous system, or similar apparatus is formed to assist the mind in actualizing thoughts into actions. A thought is not the equivalent of one or more neurons firing. In this life a thought may not occur without these neurons firing. But our experience of thought is not of an electrical firing happening; it appears to have a nature totally different. In another life, for example in heaven where there can only be a subtle body, like a dream body, there is no physical brain required; some other subtle apparatus may be required.

Also different from Western thinking is that the mind is not conscious (if by conscious one means self-conscious) in this tradition’s model. It is an unconscious object. Hence it can be misleading to call a thought ‘consciousness,’ like some Western translators do – trying to mimic Western psychology terminologies. This only confuses Western psychology with this very different model. Rather, thoughts are inert subtle material that appears to reflect the consciousness that is the ātman (self) simply by their subtle nature, like a light bulb manifests light illumining other objects when there is the presence of electricity in the bulb, whereas the wires and switches do not, though the same electricity is present in them as well.

In sense perceptions the mind is said to go out through the senses to their respective objects. In vision, the mind goes out through the sense of sight to a distant tree, for example. This accounts for the total sense cognition of not only the color and shape of the tree, but its distance too. This form of the thought that includes the distance to its visual object is called a vṛtti (thought form) and is lit up as knowledge by the ubiquitous presence of consciousness (see commentary on Yoga Sūtra 3.19). One of the other thoughts, an ego thought (ahaṅkāra), then thinks this is my perception in my mind – my experience different from other’s experiences.

Consciousness, or awareness, called cit, ātman, or puruṣa among other appellations, is the same as reality (sat), the is-ness that is everywhere present. Wherever the mind travels in the universe and between embodiments, it is within ubiquitous consciousness, and so the mind, the thought, appears to be conscious.

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)

Living a life of dharma, of yamas and niyamas

A life of the yamas and niyamas, a life of dharma, will bring an abiding peace and freedom of mind that can sit without conflict and without fears.

Sitting (āsana)

Structural alignment

Hold the body, head, and neck in-line and steady with a wide base.

The sitting is stable and comfortable (sthira-sukham), gained by relaxation (śaithilya) and contemplating beyond the confines of the body to the limitless (ananta-samāpatti), respectively.

See in the mind’s eye that the space this body occupies is not limited to here. It reaches to the bounds of the cosmos. This entire space of the cosmos is now within the space of my awareness, accommodating everyone and everything.

Take three deep breaths (filling the lungs to their very top, releasing each breath twice as slow as the inhalation), like I am filling the entire space of my universe.

To awaken the body and mind, and to mark the start of invoking a meditative mind.

Recollection of my intension (pratijñā) to sit in meditation.

See and appreciate the purpose and benefit of gaining a contemplative mind. This is my appointment with myself.

Witness the body

Visualize the parts of the body from the top of the head down to the toes, relaxing each part. As their observer, I am not identified with them. They are just objects, like anyone else’s body. Finish by observing this body sitting like a living, breathing statue in the limitless space of my awareness.

Witness the breath as a culmination of breath control (prāṇayāma)

Move attention from the gross body to the more subtle energy body in the form of the breath. This may begin with prāṇayāma, only as instructed by a proper teacher. Then I can move on to simply, objectively watching the breath. This later helps loosen my identification with the energy within the body, as its observer. This same energy fills this entire limitless space of my awareness. It is not my energy; it is the energy of the cosmos within and without this body.

Withdrawal (pratyāhāra)

By non-identification (vairāgya) with all objects including the fleeting mind, not identifying with and thus being sucked into its desire-driven currents. Witness the thoughts, like I witness the body and the breath, as its observer. I neither seek out any object or thought, nor ponder them when they occur. I let them pass by me as their mere witness.

Restraining (dhāraṇā) the pursuit of unwanted/hindering thoughts and retaining (dhyāna) the flow of wanted/helpful contemplative thoughts

Now bring in a helpful, contemplative thought through japa. It is a repetition (abhyāsa) by way of chanting (japa), quietly with the voice then mentally, a mantra that invokes the limitless Lord, the perfect puruṣa, for example, Om Īśāya namaḥ (Om, I surrender what is the Lord’s to the Lord).

First the attention is predominantly on the mantra itself, later the attention is directed predominantly to the silence in-between, as my awareful being that precedes and follows the mantra and is the silent witness of the mantra.

Bring in a contemplation. A contemplation should always be in the form of a statement of a known fact with a clear logic (expressed or not) – not of an action that needs to be done later. For example, prati-pakṣa-bhāvana (contemplating the contradiction), “I cannot be this body, because I am the witness of this body, like of any other body.”

Being myself (samādhi)

A profound, doubtless knowledge that I am this limitless freedom (ānanda), this limitless reality am I (asmitā).

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)

General Yoga Sūtras Long Course – 36 Sūtras

1st Chapter: Sūtras 1–5, 12, 17–18, 23–24, 27–34, 41, 48–51.
2nd Chapter: Sūtras 1–5, 17, 20–21.
3rd Chapter: Sūtras 53–55.
4th Chapter: Sūtra 25–26.

General Yoga Sūtras Short Course – 9 Sūtras

1st Chapter: Sūtras 1–4, 24.
2nd Chapter: Sūtras 1–2, 28–29.

Omkara Yoga Course – 13 Sūtras

1st Chapter: Sūtras 1–5, 12, 23–29.

Disciplines of Yoga Course – 47 Sūtras

1st Chapter: Sūtras 1–5, 12, 23–29.
2nd Chapter: Sūtras 1, 28–55.
3rd Chapter: Sūtras 1–3, 7, 8.

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)

For help on the pronunciation of Sanskrit words please see the Sanskrit Reading Tutor.

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)

Bangali Baba 1976. The Yogasutra of Patanjali: With the Commentary of Vyasa, translated by Bangali Baba. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.

Bhikshu Gaurisankara 1995. Sarva-Tantra-Siddhānta-Pada-Artha-Lakṣaṇa-Saṅgraha. Madras: Chinmaya Foundation of Education & Culture.

Christopher Chapple, C., Yogi Ananda Viraj 1990. The Yoga Sutras of Patanjali. Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications.

Deussen, P. 2004. Sixty Upanisads of the Veda, translated from German by V.M. Bedekar and G.B. Palsule. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.

Feuerstein, G. 1989. The Yoga-Sutra of Patanjali. Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions International.

Jacob, Colonel G.A. 1999. A Concordance to the Principal Upanisads and Bhagavadgita. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.

Joshi, K. L., Bimali, O. N., Bindiya Trivedi (Eds.) 2007. 112 Upanisads. Delhi: Parimal Publications.

Patanjali, Vyasa, Sankara 1952. Patanjala-Yogasutra-Bhasya Vivaranam of Sankara-Bhagavatpada. Madras: Government Oriental Manuscripts Library.

Sadashiva, B. undated, wirebound copy. Patanjala-Yoga-Sutrani: Boja-Sadashiva-Vritti.

Sankaracarya 1992. Isadi-Dasopanishad: Ten Principal Upanisads with Sankara-Bhasya. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.

Sri Jnananda Bharati Svaminah 2010. Panchadasi: With English Translation and Notes. Rajapalayam: Srimathi Lingammal Ramaraju Shastra Prathishta Trust.

Sri Rama Sharma Acarya 2005. 108 Upanisad: Hindi Bhavartha Sahita. Haridvar: Brahmavarcas.

Swami Gambhirananda 2003. Eight Upanisads: With the Commentary of Sankaracarya. Kolkata: Advaita Ashrama.

Swami Hariharananda Aranya 1983. Yoga Philosophy of Patanjali, With Vyasa's Commentary in Sanskrit and a Translation, with annotations by Swami Hariharananda Aranya, translated by P.N. Mukerji. Albany, NY: State University of New York.

Swami Madhavananda 2004. The Brhadaranyaka Upanisad: With the Commentary of Sankaracarya. Kolkata: Advaita Ashrama.

Swami Nikhilananda 1949. The Upanisads in four volumes. New York: Harper & Brothers Publishers.

Swami Prabhavananda, Isherwood, C. 1981. How to Know God: The Yoga Aphorisms of Patanjali. Hollywood: Vedanta Press.

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)

Topics indexed to sūtra occurences. Jump to -K-, to -S-.

A

abhiniveśa (fear of death)
as kleśa2.9
āgama (scripture) … 1.7
a-hiṃsā (non-violence)
as yama2.30, 2.35
ākāśa (the element space)
contemplations on … 3.41
a-liṅga (non-indicated, unmanifest prakṛti) … 2.19
allowance towards others … 1.33
ānanda (fullness) … 1.17
aṇiman-ādi (the most small, etcetera) … 3.45
a-nirvacanīya (neither absolutely real nor not-real) … 1.9, 3.16, 4.12, See mithyā.
anvaya-vyatireka (co-presence–co-absence) logic … 1.3
a-parigraha (renunciation)
as yama2.30, 2.39
approval towards others … 1.33
āsana (3rd limb–sitting practice) … 2.46
asmitā (I-notion) ‘I am’-ness contemplation … 1.17, 1.44, 3.47
as kleśa possessive I … 2.6
a-steya (non-usurping)
as yama2.30, 2.37
attainment of a body (kāyasaṃpat) … 3.45, 3.46
attitudes … 1.33
avasthā (period), kāla (time)
as factor in change … 3.12
a-vidyā (self-ignorance) … 2.24
as kleśa2.4
definition … 2.5
fundamental ignorance … 1.46

B

Bhagavad Gītā1.1
births
change … 4.2
knowledge of … 3.18
brahma-carya (pursuing the scripture)
as yama2.30, 2.38
brahman (limitless reality) … Intro, 1.27, 1.38, 1.44, 2.6
satyam, jñāna, an-antam2.24
brahma-varcasa (brilliance in scriptural knowledge) … 3.40
bronchial passage
contemplation on … 3.31

C

change (pariṇāma) … 3.9
regarding all objects … 3.13
sequence of comes to end … 4.32
three factors
avasthā (period), dharma (characteristic), lakṣaṇa (external symptom) … 3.09
kāla (time), vastu (object), deśa (place) … 3.13
within contemplation … 3.9
chariot example … 2.54
clarity and knowledge … 1.47
clarity of mind (prasāda) … 1.33 67–68, 1.41, 1.47
commonality (sa-ādhāraṇatva) … 2.22
compassion … 1.33
concealment of forms … 3.21
consciousness (caitanya) … 1.27
contemplation process … 3.1

D

desire
no beginning of … 4.10
devatā (deity, the Lord as any force or function in the universe) … 2.44
dhāraṇā (restraining unwanted thoughts in contemplation) … 3.1
dharma
characteristic
as factor in change … 3.10
definition … 4.29
universal order … 1.7
dharmin (object, domain of the characteristics) … 3.14, 4.14
the ultimate … 3.14, 4.12, 4.14
dhyāna (retaining wanted thoughts in contemplation) … 3.2
disembodiment
the great … 3.43
distinction (bheda)
of objects and thought … 4.15–17
of thought and self … 4.18–24
divine hearing3.41
draṣṭṛSee witness.
dream and sleep states … 1.26, 1.38, 2.19, 2.21, 3.44

E

ego (ahaṃ-kāra) … 1.3
eight limbs of yoga … 2.28–3.6
1. yamas (the avoidances) … 2.29, 2.30
2. niyamas (the observances) … 2.29, 2.32
3. āsana (sitting practice) … 2.29, 2.46
4. prāṇāyāma (sitting practice) … 2.29, 2.49
5. pratyāhāra (sitting practice) … 2.29, 2.54
6. dhāraṇā (restraining unwanted thoughts in contemplation) … 2.29, 3.1
7. dhyāna (retaining wanted thoughts in contemplation) … 2.29, 3.2
8. samādhi (contemplation resulting in assimilation) … 2.29, 3.3
dhāraṇā-dhyāna pair … 2.29, 3.1
yama-niyama pair … 2.29, 2.54
elements, the five … Intro, 2.18, 2.19, 3.41
air (vāyu) … 3.41
earth (pṛthivī) … 3.41
fire (agni) … 3.41
space (ākāśa) … 3.41
water (āpaḥ) … 3.41
enjoyment
as the seen (dṛśya) … 2.18
error (viparyaya) … 1.8, 1.9
evolution … 2.19

F

fear
as an affliction … 2.9
nature of … 2.9

G

glories (vibhūtis) … 3.46
goodwill towards others … 1.33, 3.23
gross and subtle (sthūla and sūkṣma) … 3.44
guṇas
as constituents of mind … 3.35
as constituents of nature … 1.16, 2.18, 2.19
complete their purpose … 4.32, 4.34
return to origin … 4.34

H

hṛd (heart, intellect) … 1.36, 2.55, 3.34
and head … 4.21
hunger and thirst
suppression of … 3.30

I

identification (sā-rūpya)
cause and removal … 2.24–27
of seer and seen … 2.17–27
with thought … 1.4
imagination (vikalpa) … 1.9
and contemplation … 1.42–43
inference (indirect knowledge) … 1.7
inquiry (vicāra) … 1.44
Īśvara-kṛṣṇa1.1, 1.32, 2.6
Īśvara-praṇidhāna (intelligently surrendering to the Lord) … 4.2
as kriyā-yoga2.1
as niyama2.32, 2.45

J

japa [or jāpa] (quiet or silent chant) … 3.1
jñāna (knowledge) … 2.24
jñapti-svarūpa (nature of the source of knowing) … 2.20, 2.24

K

kaivalya (freedom) … 1.1, 1.51, 2.25, 3.50, 3.54–55
as knowledge … 4.25–34
definition … 2.25, 4.34
karma4.2
cessation of … 4.30
choice and action … 4.3
free-will … 4.2
none for liberated … 4.7
requires an intellect … 2.12
requires willful, conscious power … 2.36
storage (karma-āśaya) … 2.12–14, 4.3, 4.6–9
three types of … 4.32
karma-yogaSee kriyā-yoga.
kleśas (self-ignorance and its afflictions) … 2.3–9
abhiniveśa (fear of death) … 2.9
asmitā (I-notion) … 2.6
a-vidyā (ignorance) … 2.4–5
cessation of … 4.30
dveṣa (aversion) … 2.8
giving them up … 2.10–11
minimizing by kriyā-yoga2.2
rāga (attachment) … 2.7
kliṣṭa, a-kliṣṭa (hinder, not hinder) … 1.5
knowledge
is reality, the self … 4.19
not created … 4.19
knowledge of everything … 3.33, 4.14, 4.31
nature of Lord … 1.25
kriyā-yoga (means in regard to activity) … 2.1–2
Īśvara-praṇidhāna (intelligently surrendering to the Lord) … 2.1
svādhyāya (one’s study of the scripture) … 2.1
tapas (prayerful discipline) … 2.1

L

lakṣaṇa (external symptom), deśa (place)
as factor in change … 3.11
latent impression (saṃskāra or vāsanā) … 1.18, 4.8–11
and memory … 4.9
causes of … 4.11
contemplation of … 3.18
counteracting … 1.50–51, 3.10
flow is beginningless … 4.10
teaching saṃskāra1.50, 3.10
life after death … 1.3
light of the self (jyotis) … 1.36
liṅga-mātra (merely indicated, manifest order, Hiraṇyagarbha) … 2.19
Lord (Īśvara) … 1.44, 2.6
all-knowing … 1.25
as guru1.26
as order of the universe … 2.9, 2.22
as reality of oneself … 1.29, 1.32
contemplation on … 1.23–29
Īśvara-praṇidhāna1.23, 2.1, 2.32, 2.45
material and efficient cause … 1.25
mind of … 4.5
nature of … 1.24–27
not limited by time … 1.26
remover of obstacles … 1.29, 1.32
Sāṅkhya view … 1.32

M

mahā-vrata (the great vow, sannyāsa) … 2.31
manana (understanding the teaching) … 1.17, 1.49
mantra (veda metrical or prose statement) … 3.1
memory … 1.11, 4.9
mīmāṃsā (scriptural analysis) … 1.7
mind (citta)
after death … 3.38
a-khaṇḍa-ākāra-vṛtti3.35
distractions … 1.30–32
removal of … 1.32–41
fashioned by notional-I … 4.4
gains freedom … 4.26
going out … 3.19 194, 3.25, 3.38
in object knowledge … 4.17
knowledge of other minds … 3.19
nature of … 4.24 315, Appendix
not self-revealing … 4.19–22
objectifies everything … 4.23
swiftness of … 3.48
the unconscious … 1.50, 3.10, 3.44, 4.8–9, 4.11, 4.18, 4.28
witnessed by self … 4.22
mithyā (apparently real) … 1.8, 2.22
defined … 2.22
understanding in nirodha … 3.10
mixing up word-object-idea … 1.42–44, 3.17
mokṣaSee kaivalya.
momentariness … 4.16
moon
contemplation on … 3.27

N

nāmadheya (only a name) … 1.9, 1.43, 2.19, 3.49
nāma-rūpa (name and form) … See nāmadheya.
navel plexus
contemplation on … 3.29
neti-neti (not this, not that) … 1.48, 2.24
as a prakriyā (methodology) … Intro
nididhāsana (contemplating the teaching) … 1.49
nir-bīja samādhi (contemplation free of seed) … 1.18, 1.51, 3.3, 3.8
nirodha3.9
as mastery … 1.2
definition … 1.2
in nir-bīja samādhi1.51
nir-vicāra (free of inquiry) … 1.44
nir-vitarka (free of reasoning) … 1.43
niyamas (2nd limb–the observances) … 2.32, 2.40–45
Īśvara-praṇidhāna (intelligently surrendering to the Lord) … 2.32, 2.45
santoṣa (contentment) … 2.32, 2.42
śauca (cleanliness) … 2.32, 2.40–41
svādhyāya (one’s study of the scripture) … 2.32, 2.44
tapas (prayerful discipline) … 2.32, 2.43
non-attachment (vairāgya) … 1.12, 1.15, 1.37

O

Ockham’s razor principle … 1.3
Om1.27–29, 1.38
oneness (ekatva) … 4.14

P

pāramārthika reality (absolute reality) … 2.22
para-vidyā (knowledge of the unlimited) … 1.46
pole star
contemplation of … 3.28
pot-space example … 2.23, 3.14
prajñā (assimilated knowledge) … 1.20, 1.48, 1.49
unique nature … 1.49
prakriyās (methodologies) … Intro
prakṛti (unmanifest nature) … 2.19, 2.21
pramāṇa (means of knowledge) … 1.7
definition of … 1.7
prāmāṇya (validity) … 1.7
prāṇāyāma (controlling the breath) … 1.34, 2.49–53
prātibhāsika reality (imaginary reality) … 2.22
prati-pakṣa-bhāvana (contemplating the contradiction) … 2.33–34, 2.40
pratyāhāra (withdrawing the senses) … 2.54–55
prayer … 4.3
Purāṇas & Itihāsas (legends & epics) … 1.1
puruṣa (Lord, self) … 1.2, 1.16, 1.24–29, 1.45

Q

quantum physics … 2.21

R

rāga and dveṣa (attachment and aversion)
as kleśas2.7–8
reality
24/7 … 1.3
criterion of … 1.3
levels of … 2.22, 3.44, See prātibhāsika, vyāvahārika, pāramārthika.
philosophies of
momentariness … 4.16
solipsism … 4.15
the ultimate … 1.27, 1.32, 3.14, 4.12, 4.14
repetition (abhyāsa) … 1.12–14

S

sa-bīja samāpattis (contemplations with seed) … 1.42–45, 1.46, 3.3
sa-guṇa-brahman (Lord, reality, in reference to the attributes of nature)
in meditation … 1.49
samādhi (contemplation resulting in assimilation) … 3.3
samādhi (contemplation)
as mass of support (meghadharma) … 4.29
by kriyā-yoga2.2
definition … 1.17, 4.29
deliberative (saṃprajñāta) … 1.17
nir-vicāra1.44
nir-vitarka1.42–43
sa-bīja (retains the seed) … 1.46
sa-vicāra1.44
sa-vitarka1.42
free from deliberation (a-saṃprajñāta) … 1.18
the seen dismissed as mithyā2.22
two forms of … 1.17–18
samāna (uniting energy) … 3.40
samāpatti (contemplation) … 1.42–46, See also samādhi.
saṃskāraSee latent impression.
saṃyama (contemplation) … 3.4–6
a listing of various … 3.16–53
in science … 4.14
on bronchial passage … 3.31
on cavity of throat … 3.30
on change … 3.16
on distinction of mind and self … 3.49–51
on external … 3.43
on forms … 3.21
on goodwill, etcetera … 3.23
on gross-subtle-essence … 3.44–46
on hearing and space … 3.41
on hṛdaya3.34
on I-notion and essence … 3.47–48
on intellect … 3.25
on intelligence … 3.33
on karma3.22
on light in head … 3.32
on moon … 3.27
on navel plexus … 3.29
on pole star … 3.28
on saṃskārasa3.18
on seen and seer … 3.17
on self … 3.35–36
on space, body and cotton … 3.42
on strengths … 3.24
on sun … 3.26
on thoughts … 3.19
on time and sequence … 3.52
on uniting energy … 3.40
on upward energy … 3.39
saṃyoga (mutual identification) … 2.23, 2.25, cv. viyoga (disassociation), See also identification (sā-rūpya).
sāṅkhya2.6, 2.25
vs. SāṅkhyaIntro
Sāṅkhya-kārika1.1
sannyāsa (renunciation) … 2.31
santoṣa (contentment)
as niyama2.32, 2.42
satya (truthfulness)
as yama2.30, 2.36
satyam (reality and truth) … 1.3, 2.24
śauca (cleanliness)
as niyama2.32
mental … 2.41
physical … 2.40
sa-vicāra (with inquiry) … 1.44
sa-vitarka (with reasoning) … 1.42
science
contemplation from … 4.14
scripture … 1.7, 2.6
other scriptures … 1.7
seen (dṛśya)
nature of … 2.18–19
relation to the seer … 2.21–23
seer (draṣṭṛ) … See witness.
self (ātman) … 1.3, 1.44, 1.49, 2.6, 3.44, See also puruṣa.
according to Patañjali1.3, 1.4
a-lupta-dṛk (unblinking witness) … 4.18
as master … 2.23, 4.18
B is A, A is not B … 3.52, 3.55
ignorance of … 2.5
immutable … 4.18
kaivalya (freedom) … 4.34
knowledge of … 3.35
nature of knower of all … 3.49
not the mind … 4.25
presiding over all beings … 3.49
same (tulya, sāmya) … 3.53, 3.55
sarva-ātma-bhāva (being the self of all) … 3.53
sat-cit-ānanda (existence-awareness-fullness) … 3.44
self-revealing (svataḥ prāmāṇya, sva-ābhāsa) … 1.48, 1.49, 4.19–20
shirt and fabric example … 3.52, 4.14
siddhas (accomplished beings)
contemplation on … 3.32
siddhis (accomplishments) … 3.1, 3.16
as impediments or side-effects … 3.37
as praise (stuti) … 3.16
as side-effects (gauṇa-phalas) … 3.16
cosmic perspective … 3.1 165, 3.16
effected by … 4.1
in the legends (Purāṇas) … 3.16
in the scriptures … 3.16
kaivalya3.1
skill of contemplation … 3.1
superpowers … 3.1
sleep … 1.10
snake and rope example … 1.3, 2.22
solipsism … 4.15
sorrow (duḥkha)
different from pain … 2.16
giving it up … 2.15–16
space-time … 4.14
śraddhā (trust) … 1.14, 1.20
śravaṇa (listening to the teaching) … 1.17, 1.49, 2.23
sub-ration … 2.21, 3.44
sun
as doorway to heaven … 3.26
source of world … 3.26
svādhyāya (one’s study of the scripture)
as kriyā-yoga2.1
as niyama2.32, 2.44

T

tapas (prayerful discipline)
as kriyā-yoga2.1
as niyama2.32, 2.43
teaching, the … 1.3
as the seen dṛśya2.18
tenacity … 1.20–22
thought (vṛtti)
categories of … 1.5–6
identity with … 1.4
nature of … 1.5–11
stopping of … 1.4
throat
contemplation on … 3.30
time
as factor in change … 3.12
contemplation of … 3.16, 3.52
nature of … 3.16, 3.52, 4.12–13
the timeless … 1.3, 1.26, 1.43, 2.5

U

udāna (upward energy) … 3.39
unmanifest, the (prakṛti, pradhāna, a-vyakta, a-liṅga) … 1.45
upādhi (limiting adjunct, adjective) … 1.26, 1.48, 4.12
as characteristics of an object … 3.14
Upaniṣads1.1
upāsana (meditation) … 1.45, 1.49, 3.16

V

vairāgya (non-attachment) … 1.15, 1.40, 1.48, 3.50
vāsanāSee latent impression.
VedāntaIntro.a, Intro.b
vicāra (inquiry) … 1.17
vitarka (reasoning) … 1.17
viveka-khyāti (discerning knowledge) … 2.26, 3.52, 3.54
viyoga (disassociation) … 1.2
vyāvahārika reality (transient, relative reality) … 2.21, 2.22

W

waking-dream-deep sleep states … 1.3
witness (draṣṭṛ) … 1.3, 2.17
nature of … 2.20
witness-being (sat-cit) … 2.23, See witness.

Y

yamas (1st limb–the avoidances) … 2.30–31, 2.35–39
a-hiṃsā (non-violence) … 2.35
a-parigraha (renunciation) … 2.39
a-steya (non-usurping) … 2.37, 3.46
a-steya–a-parigraha pair … 2.30
brahma-carya (pursuing the scripture) … 2.38
satya (truthfulness) … 2.36
yoga
definition … 1.2
goal of … 1.1, 1.2, 1.3
in activity … See kriyā-yoga.
Yoga as dualist tradition … Intro

 (A.K. Aruna, 2013) A.K. Aruna started his studies in Advaita Vedanta and the Sanskrit language in 1976 at an intensive three-year program in a traditional gurukulam, outside Bombay, India, under Shri Pujya Swami Dayananda Saraswati, the most renowned Sanskrit and Advaita Vedanta scholar of the past century. Stepping outside his academic background in Western philosophy, Aruna immersed himself in the deepest, oldest spiritual tradition in the world. This detailed study opened his eyes. In this ancient teaching, Aruna found a complete merging of the intellect and heart. From that point on, he dedicated his life to the inclusive vision of Vedanta.

Returning to his native United States, Aruna earned a master’s degree in South Asian languages and literature from the University of Washington. Aruna later studied computer languages, becoming a programmer and manager of information technology in San Diego, California. Retiring to India in 2000, Aruna dedicated himself to studies in Advaita Vedanta and the Sanskrit Language. He created a set of tools for those students interested in a thorough study of Sanskrit to better understand the Bhagavad Gita. These tools consist of a five-book set under the title, The Aruna Sanskrit Language Series. They are: The Aruna Sanskrit Grammar Reference; The Aruna Sanskrit Grammar Coursebook: 64 Lessons Based on the Bhagavad Gita; The Bhagavad Gita Dictionary; The Bhagavad Gita Reader: Sanskrit/English Parallel Text; and The Bhagavad Gita Sanskrit Key: Verse-by-Verse Grammar & Vocabulary. Additionally, there is now a reading and pronunciation guide, The Sanskrit Reading Tutor: Read It, Click It, Hear It!

Aruna has lived and studied in a traditional teaching gurukulam for over nine years in India and two years in the U.S. Wishing to help yoga students ground the traditional purpose of yoga in the revered scriptures of India, Aruna releases Patanjali Yoga Sutras: Translation and Commentary in the Light of Vedanta Scripture. This presents the yoga discipline as its practitioners in the ancient scriptures understood and practiced. This work is now in HTML format, available for download along with many Vedanta texts in Sanskrit that Aruna has edited into the HTML format. All of these are available via his www.UpasanaYoga.org website.

[Photo by Cassia Reis, GayatriYoga.eu]


॥इति योग-सूत्राणि समाप्तानि॥